TERUMO CEC System 1 Field Service Handbook

Advanced Perfusion System 1
Field Service Handbook

Printed in USA
©Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation 2006
d
Contents
Contents
TABLE OF CALIBRATE/INSTALL/REPLACE/REPAIR PROCEDURES .................................................... XI
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................................................1
SYSTEM 1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................................................1
SYSTEM 1 REVISION HISTORY....................................................................................................................................2
COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................................................................5
ABOUT THE SYSTEM 1 FIELD SERVICE HANDBOOK ...................................................................................................7
CONTACT INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................................8
CAUTIONS ..................................................................................................................................................................8
SERVICE POLICY .........................................................................................................................................................9
MAINTENANCE .........................................................................................................................................................10
SPECIALIZED TOOLS AND PARTS ..............................................................................................................................10
SUPPLEMENTARY TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT...............................................................................................................11
TOOL VENDOR CONTACT INFORMATION ..................................................................................................................12
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS INVENTORY ..............................................................................................................12
SYSTEM PART NUMBERS BY MODULE ......................................................................................................................15
PASSWORD MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................................................18
Managing Login Passwords ................................................................................................................................18
Managing Case Passwords..................................................................................................................................20
CHASSIS/BASE UNIT 100/120 V AND 220/240 V ................................................................................................23
OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................................................23
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................26
ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................30
INTERFACE ...............................................................................................................................................................31
System Messages..................................................................................................................................................34
Alarm Messages ..............................................................................................................................................34
Status Messages ...............................................................................................................................................34
THEORY OF OPERATION ...........................................................................................................................................35
BATTERY MANAGEMENT .........................................................................................................................................59
New Battery button ..............................................................................................................................................59
LINKS TO SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS ..............................................................................................61
MORE INFO SCREEN AND SOFTWARE UPGRADES .....................................................................................................62
DIAGNOSTIC THEORY ...............................................................................................................................................63
REPAIR PROCEDURES ...............................................................................................................................................64
Repairing the electronic gas system ....................................................................................................................64
Replacing the Base cooling system air filter........................................................................................................64
Installing new batteries........................................................................................................................................64
Replacing the power bucket assembly .................................................................................................................66
Replacing the Base fans.......................................................................................................................................68
Replacing the power manager module ................................................................................................................72
Replacing the NIC board .....................................................................................................................................75
Replacing the power supplies ..............................................................................................................................78
TROUBLESHOOTING–CHASSIS ..................................................................................................................................81
System 1 Power Troubleshooting Guide..............................................................................................................81
Troubleshooting Power Chart .............................................................................................................................82
Troubleshooting Table—Chassis.........................................................................................................................83
CENTRAL CONTROL MONITOR (CCM)...........................................................................................................89
Page i
Contents
OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................................................89
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................................90
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION ...........................................................................................................................................91
INTERFACE ...............................................................................................................................................................91
System Messages................................................................................................................................................103
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................103
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................105
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................109
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................111
THEORY OF OPERATION .........................................................................................................................................114
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ...................................................................................................................................114
Calibrating the CCM screen..............................................................................................................................114
SERVICE DATA AND SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CARDS/SERIAL PORTS...................................................................117
LINKS TO SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS ............................................................................................126
MORE INFO SCREEN AND SOFTWARE UPGRADES ...................................................................................................126
DIAGNOSTIC THEORY .............................................................................................................................................128
REPAIR PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................................................130
Calibrating the CCM .........................................................................................................................................130
Adjusting the CCM Power Supply Potentiometer..............................................................................................130
Replacing the CCM ...........................................................................................................................................132
Replacing the cooling air filter..........................................................................................................................134
Replacing the cooling fan assembly...................................................................................................................134
Replacing the back lights...................................................................................................................................137
Replacing the power cord assembly ..................................................................................................................141
TROUBLESHOOTING–CENTRAL CONTROL MONITOR ..............................................................................................144
Event and Response Matrix ...............................................................................................................................144
Troubleshooting Procedures–Central Control Monitor ....................................................................................146
Video Problems .............................................................................................................................................146
Communication Problems (Displays "?" Intermittently) ...............................................................................148
Troubleshooting Table–Central Control Monitor .............................................................................................151
ROLLER PUMP SYSTEM 4 IN (10 CM) AND 6 IN (15 CM)............................................................................157
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................158
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................................163
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION .........................................................................................................................................167
ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................................169
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................169
System Messages................................................................................................................................................175
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................176
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................176
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................179
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................182
Roller-to-roller adjustment................................................................................................................................190
Checking casting runout ....................................................................................................................................192
Replacing the pump air filter .............................................................................................................................195
Replacing the molded tab/pump mounting ........................................................................................................196
Page ii
Contents
Replacing the pump fans....................................................................................................................................197
Replacing the roller pump display assembly or the individual boards on both pumps .....................................199
Replacing the pulley and/or encoder on the guts of the large and small roller pumps .....................................204
Replacing the pump module...............................................................................................................................210
Replacing the pump drive belt ...........................................................................................................................213
Replacing the pump drive motor/encoder..........................................................................................................217
Removing and installing the roller pump guts...................................................................................................223
Replacing the occlusion adjustment knob bearing ............................................................................................226
Replacing the screw adjustment bearings..........................................................................................................229
Replacing the roller slide assembly ...................................................................................................................233
Replacing the casting/bearing assembly............................................................................................................241
Replacing the optical sensor..............................................................................................................................242
TROUBLESHOOTING–ROLLER PUMP SYSTEM .........................................................................................................245
Troubleshooting Table–Roller Pump System.....................................................................................................245
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SYSTEM........................................................................................................................253
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................253
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................260
System Messages................................................................................................................................................266
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................267
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................267
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................269
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................272
Repairing the drive motor..................................................................................................................................279
Replacing the centrifugal pump display assembly or the individual boards .....................................................279
Replacing the centrifugal control unit module ..................................................................................................282
TROUBLESHOOTING–CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SYSTEM ...............................................................................................285
Troubleshooting Table—Centrifugal Pump System...........................................................................................285
AIR BUBBLE DETECT MODULE ......................................................................................................................293
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................293
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................297
System Messages................................................................................................................................................300
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................300
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................300
Page iii
Contents
TROUBLESHOOTING–AIR BUBBLE DETECT MODULE .............................................................................................304
Troubleshooting Table–Air Bubble Detect Module ...........................................................................................304
LEVEL DETECT MODULE .................................................................................................................................307
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................307
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................311
System Messages................................................................................................................................................314
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................314
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................314
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................315
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................315
TROUBLESHOOTING–LEVEL DETECT MODULE.......................................................................................................320
Troubleshooting Table–Level Detect Module....................................................................................................320
FLOWMETER SYSTEM .......................................................................................................................................323
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................323
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................327
System Messages................................................................................................................................................330
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................330
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................330
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................330
TROUBLESHOOTING–FLOWMETER SYSTEM ............................................................................................................333
Troubleshooting Table–Flowmeter System........................................................................................................333
PRESSURE SENSOR SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................335
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................335
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................341
System Messages................................................................................................................................................343
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................343
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................343
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................344
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................344
Page iv
Contents
TROUBLESHOOTING–PRESSURE SENSOR SYSTEM ..................................................................................................347
Troubleshooting Table–Pressure Sensor System...............................................................................................347
TEMPERATURE SYSTEM...................................................................................................................................349
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................349
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................352
System Messages................................................................................................................................................353
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................353
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................354
TROUBLESHOOTING–TEMPERATURE SYSTEM ........................................................................................................357
Troubleshooting Table–Temperature System ....................................................................................................357
OCCLUDER SYSTEM ...........................................................................................................................................359
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................359
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................364
System Messages................................................................................................................................................366
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................366
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................367
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................367
User Calibration................................................................................................................................................371
TROUBLESHOOTING–OCCLUDER SYSTEM ..............................................................................................................373
Troubleshooting Table–Occluder System ..........................................................................................................373
CDI™ 100 SYSTEM AND CDI™ 101 SERIAL COMMUNICATION..............................................................377
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................377
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................380
System Messages................................................................................................................................................382
Page v
Contents
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................382
TROUBLESHOOTING–CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100..........................................................................................................386
Troubleshooting Table–CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100.................................................................................................386
CDI™ 500 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ...........................................................................................................387
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................387
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................390
System Messages................................................................................................................................................392
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................392
TROUBLESHOOTING–CDI™ 500 ............................................................................................................................396
Troubleshooting Table–CDI™ 500 ...................................................................................................................396
ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM..............................................................................................................................399
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................399
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................405
System Messages................................................................................................................................................407
Alarm Messages ............................................................................................................................................407
Alert Messages ..............................................................................................................................................408
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................................408
Status Messages .............................................................................................................................................409
User Calibration................................................................................................................................................415
Removing and replacing the electronic gas system ...........................................................................................417
Removing the electronic gas system permanently..............................................................................................418
Replacing the blender........................................................................................................................................421
Replacing the flow valve....................................................................................................................................425
Replacing the stepper motor with encoder ........................................................................................................428
Replacing the stepper motor behind the flow valve:......................................................................................428
Replacing the stepper motor behind the FiO2 knob: .....................................................................................433
Page vi
Contents
Replacing the flowmeter ....................................................................................................................................436
Replacing the O2 sensor....................................................................................................................................438
Replacing the air inlet filter component ............................................................................................................441
Replacing the module board set.........................................................................................................................442
Replacing the pressure transducer(s) ................................................................................................................444
TROUBLESHOOTING–ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM ....................................................................................................447
Diagnostics for Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................447
Error Code Table to Interpret Gas Log.............................................................................................................447
Troubleshooting Table–Electronic Gas System.................................................................................................457
DATA TRANSFER SYSTEM, INTERFACE MODULES RS-232 AND RS-485 .............................................469
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................469
INTERFACE .............................................................................................................................................................472
TROUBLESHOOTING–DATA TRANSFER SYSTEM .....................................................................................................476
Troubleshooting Table–Data Transfer System ..................................................................................................476
ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................................................................................479
ACCESSORIES KIT...................................................................................................................................................479
POLES, CROSS BAR, AND BRACKETS ......................................................................................................................481
CASTERS.................................................................................................................................................................482
ROLLER PUMP HAND CRANK .................................................................................................................................483
ROLLER PUMP HAND CRANK BRACKET .................................................................................................................483
SARNS™ MANUAL DRIVE ......................................................................................................................................484
LAMP ......................................................................................................................................................................484
Links to Lamp Illustrations................................................................................................................................484
TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS .........................................................................................................................485
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS – CHASSIS/BASE UNIT, 100/120 V AND 220/240 V ...493
CHASSIS/BASE UNIT - P/N 811409.........................................................................................................................493
PARTS - CHASSIS/BASE UNIT - P/N 811409 (R/D).................................................................................................495
POWER MANAGER (P/N 802095) BLOCK DIAGRAM, 1 OF 2...................................................................................497
POWER MANAGER (P/N 802095) BLOCK DIAGRAM, 2 OF 2...................................................................................499
POWER MANAGER - P/N 802095............................................................................................................................501
PARTS - POWER MANAGER - P/N 802095 (R/P).....................................................................................................503
NIC BOARD - P/N 801742 .....................................................................................................................................505
PARTS - NIC BOARD - P/N 801742 (R/P) ..............................................................................................................507
NIC PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD - P/N 801518 - 1 OF 2............................................................................................509
NIC PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD - P/N 801518 - 2 OF 2............................................................................................511
SYSTEM 1 WIRING DIAGRAM - 1 OF 4 - POWER BUCKET .......................................................................................513
SYSTEM 1 WIRING DIAGRAM - 2 OF 4 - POWER MANAGER ....................................................................................515
SYSTEM 1 WIRING DIAGRAM - 3 OF 4 - NIC BOARD AND MODULES .....................................................................517
SYSTEM 1 WIRING DIAGRAM - 4 OF 4 - CENTRIFUGAL PUMP, ROLLER PUMP, AND CCM .....................................519
Page vii
Contents
BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 1 OF 7 - EXTERIOR ......................................................................521
BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 2 OF 7 - POWER BUCKET.............................................................523
BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 3 OF 7 - CAGE, BATTERIES, POWER SUPPLIES ............................525
BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 4 OF 7 - POWER SUPPLY WIRING ................................................527
BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 5 OF 7 - END VIEW OF BASE .......................................................529
BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 6 OF 7 - FRONT PANEL AND PUMP TRAY ....................................531
BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 7 OF 7 - BASE TOP VIEW .............................................................533
PARTS - BASE PLATFORM 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 (R/AO) ............................................................................535
BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 1 OF 7 - EXTERIOR ......................................................................541
BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 2 OF 7 - POWER BUCKET.............................................................543
BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 3 OF 7 - CAGE, BATTERIES, POWER SUPPLIES ............................545
BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 4 OF 7 - POWER SUPPLY WIRING ................................................547
BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 5 OF 7 - END VIEW OF BASE .......................................................549
BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 6 OF 7 - FRONT PANEL AND PUMP TRAY ....................................551
BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 7 OF 7 - BASE TOP VIEW .............................................................553
PARTS - BASE PLATFORM 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 (R/AL).............................................................................555
CABLE ASSEMBLY POWER NIC LEFT - P/N 801464...............................................................................................561
CABLE ASSEMBLY POWER NIC RIGHT - P/N 801463 ............................................................................................563
CABLE ASSEMBLY CAN NIC LEFT - P/N 801427..................................................................................................565
CABLE ASSEMBLY CAN NIC RIGHT - P/N 801426 ...............................................................................................567
CABLE ASSEMBLY BATTERY 24 VDC - P/N 801467 .............................................................................................569
CABLE ASSEMBLY BATTERY ON-SWITCH - P/N 801430........................................................................................571
CABLE ASSEMBLY POWER PS1 - P/N 801466........................................................................................................573
CABLE ASSEMBLY POWER PS2 - P/N 801468........................................................................................................575
CABLE ASSEMBLY PS2 FAULT 12 IN - P/N 801404................................................................................................577
CABLE ASSEMBLY PS2 FAULT 18 IN - P/N 801473................................................................................................579
CABLE FAN ASSEMBLY 24 VDC - P/N 801428......................................................................................................581
CABLE ASSEMBLY CDI™ 100/CDI™ 500 – P/N 804981 .....................................................................................583
CABLE ASSEMBLY RS-232/RS-485 – P/N 804982.................................................................................................585
CHASSIS WIRING KIT - P/N 803898 .......................................................................................................................587
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS – CENTRAL CONTROL MONITOR............................589
CENTRAL CONTROL MONITOR - P/N 802100 .........................................................................................................589
PARTS - CENTRAL CONTROL MONITOR - P/N 802100 (R/AA) ..............................................................................591
DISPLAY MOUNTING ARM ASSEMBLY - P/N 801441 .............................................................................................593
PARTS - DISPLAY MOUNTING ARM ASSEMBLY - P/N 801441 (R/N) .....................................................................595
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS – ROLLER PUMP SYSTEM, 4 IN (10 CM) AND 6 IN
(15 CM).....................................................................................................................................................................597
LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 - 1 OF 7 - PUMP EXTERIOR ....................................................597
LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 - 2 OF 7 - PUMP CUT-AWAY ..................................................599
LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 - 3 OF 7 - PUMP INTERIOR, FRAME ........................................601
LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 - 4 OF 7 - PUMP MOTOR, GUTS, AND PULLEY .......................603
LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 - 5 OF 7 - PUMP TOP CASE ASSEMBLY ..................................605
LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 - 6 OF 7 - PUMP BOTTOM CASE ASSEMBLY ...........................607
LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 - 7 OF 7 - EXPLODED VIEW WITH COVER ..............................609
PARTS - LARGE ROLLER PUMP (6 IN) (15 CM) - P/N 801041 (R/AW) ...................................................................611
LARGE ROLLER PUMP GUTS - P/N 801798 - 1 OF 2 ...............................................................................................615
LARGE ROLLER PUMP GUTS - P/N 801798 - 2 OF 2 ...............................................................................................617
PARTS - LARGE ROLLER PUMP GUTS - P/N 801798 (R/AA) ..................................................................................619
SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 - 1 OF 7 - PUMP EXTERIOR ....................................................621
SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 - 2 OF 7 - PUMP CUT-AWAY ..................................................623
Page viii
Contents
SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 - 3 OF 7 - PUMP INTERIOR, FRAME ........................................625
SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 - 4 OF 7 - PUMP MOTOR, GUTS, AND PULLEY .......................627
SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 - 5 OF 7 - PUMP TOP CASE ASSEMBLY ..................................629
SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 - 6 OF 7 - PUMP BOTTOM CASE ASSEMBLY ...........................631
SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 - 7 OF 7 - EXPLODED VIEW WITH COVER ..............................633
PARTS - SMALL ROLLER PUMP (4 IN) (10 CM) - P/N 801040 (R/AU) ....................................................................635
SCHEMATIC LARGE AND SMALL ROLLER PUMP DISPLAY - P/N 801225 ................................................................639
SMALL ROLLER PUMP GUTS - P/N 801805 - 1 OF 2 ...............................................................................................641
SMALL ROLLER PUMP GUTS - P/N 801805 - 2 OF 2 ...............................................................................................643
PARTS - SMALL ROLLER PUMP GUTS - P/N 801805 (R/W)....................................................................................645
LARGE AND SMALL ROLLER PUMP DISPLAY - P/N 801225....................................................................................647
PARTS - LARGE/SMALL ROLLER PUMP DISPLAY - P/N 801225 (R/L) ....................................................................649
PUMP MOTOR/ENCODER ASSEMBLY - P/N 809051................................................................................................651
PARTS - PUMP MOTOR/ENCODER ASSEMBLY - P/N 809051 (R/A) ........................................................................653
CABLE ASSEMBLY KIT - P/N 803737 - 1 OF 5 - DIGITAL ENCODER .......................................................................655
CABLE ASSEMBLY KIT - P/N 803737 - 2 OF 5 - OPTICAL SWITCH .........................................................................657
CABLE ASSEMBLY KIT - P/N 803737 - 3 OF 5 - FAN ASSEMBLY ...........................................................................659
CABLE ASSEMBLY KIT - P/N 803737 - 4 OF 5 - PUMP CABLE ................................................................................661
CABLE ASSEMBLY KIT - P/N 803737 - 5 OF 5 - COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH .........................................................663
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS – CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SYSTEM ..............................665
TERUMO® CENTRIFUGAL CONTROL UNIT - P/N 801046 - 1 OF 2 ..........................................................................665
TERUMO® CENTRIFUGAL CONTROL UNIT - P/N 801046 - 2 OF 2 ..........................................................................667
PARTS - TERUMO® CENTRIFUGAL CONTROL UNIT - P/N 801046 (R/AC) .............................................................669
TERUMO® CENTRIFUGAL CONTROL DISPLAY - P/N 801225 .................................................................................671
PARTS - TERUMO® CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DISPLAY - P/N 801225 (R/L).................................................................673
SARNS™ DRIVE MOTOR - P/N 164267 - 1 OF 2 .....................................................................................................675
SARNS™ DRIVE MOTOR - P/N 164267 - 2 OF 2 .....................................................................................................677
PARTS - SARNS™ DRIVE MOTOR - P/N 164267 (R/E) ...........................................................................................679
SARNS™ MANUAL DRIVE - P/N 164268 - 1 OF 2 ...................................................................................................681
SARNS™ MANUAL DRIVE - P/N 164268 - 2 OF 2 ...................................................................................................683
PARTS - SARNS™ MANUAL DRIVE - P/N 164268 (R/E).........................................................................................685
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS – FLOWMETER SYSTEM .............................................689
CABLE ASSEMBLY - P/N 801587............................................................................................................................689
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS – OCCLUDER HEAD ......................................................691
OCCLUDER HEAD - P/N 806455 - 1 OF 2................................................................................................................691
OCCLUDER HEAD - P/N 806455 - 2 OF 2................................................................................................................693
PARTS - OCCLUDER HEAD - P/N 806455 (R/G) .....................................................................................................695
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS – ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM ....................................699
SCHEMATIC ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM PC BOARD - P/N 801050 - 1 OF 2 ............................................................699
SCHEMATIC ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM PC BOARD - P/N 801050 - 2 OF 2 ............................................................701
ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM - P/N 801188 - 1 OF 5 - EXTERIOR VIEW .....................................................................703
ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM - P/N 801188 - 2 OF 5 - EXPLODED VIEW ....................................................................705
ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM - P/N 801188 - 3 OF 5 - BLENDER, INSIDE FRAME, AND BOARD .................................707
ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM - P/N 801188 - 4 OF 5 - EXPLODED VIEW OF INSIDE FRAME, AND BOARD ..................709
ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM - P/N 801188 - 5 OF 5 - CABLE ROUTING TO BOARD ...................................................711
PARTS - ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM - P/N 801188 (R/AJ) ......................................................................................713
CABLE ASSEMBLY ELECTRONIC GAS SYSTEM TO NIC - P/N 802551 ....................................................................717
Page ix
Contents
SCHEMATICS, PARTS, AND ILLUSTRATIONS–ACCESSORIES ...............................................................719
LAMP ASSEMBLY SHORT - P/N 801558..................................................................................................................719
PARTS - LAMP ASSEMBLY SHORT - P/N 801558 (R/P)...........................................................................................721
LAMP ASSEMBLY LONG - P/N 801238 ...................................................................................................................723
PARTS - LAMP ASSEMBLY LONG - P/N 801238 (R/P) ............................................................................................725
INDEX ......................................................................................................................................................................727
Page x
Contents
Table of Calibrate/Install/Replace/Repair Procedures

Base/Chassis Procedures
• Calibrating the Battery, see page 59.
• Replacing the Base Cooling System Air Filter, see page 64.
• Installing New Batteries, see page 64.
• Replacing the Power Bucket Assembly, see page 66.
• Replacing the Base Fans, see page 68.
• Replacing the Power Manager Module, see page 72.
• Replacing the NIC Board, see page 75.
• Replacing the Power Supplies, see page 78.
CCM Procedures
• Calibrating the CCM screen, see page 114.
• Replacing the CCM, see page 132.
• Replacing the cooling air filter, see page 134.
• Replacing the cooling fan assembly, see page 134.
• Replacing the back lights, see page 137.
• Replacing the power cord assembly, see page 141.
Roller Pump Procedures

• Roller-to-roller adjustment, see page 190.
• Checking casting runout, see page 192.
• Replacing the pump air filter, see page 195.
• Replacing the molded tab/pump mounting, see page 196.
• Replacing the pump fans, see page 197.
• Replacing the roller pump display assembly or the individual boards on both pumps,
see page 199.
• Replacing the pulley and/or encoder on the guts of the large and small roller pumps,
see page 204.
• Replacing the pump module, see page 210.
• Replacing the pump drive belt, see page 213.
• Replacing the pump drive motor/encoder, see page 217.
• Removing and installing the roller pump guts, see page 223.
• Replacing the occlusion adjustment knob bearing, see page 226.
• Replacing the screw adjustment bearings, see page 229.
• Replacing the roller slide assembly, see page 233.
• Replacing the casting/bearing assembly, see page 241.
• Replacing the optical sensor, see page 242.
Page xi
Contents
Centrifugal Pump Procedures
• Repairing the drive motor, see page 279.
• Replacing the centrifugal pump display, see page 279.
• Replacing the centrifugal control unit module, see page 282.
Electronic Gas System Procedures

• Removing and replacing the electronic gas system assembly, see page 417.
• Removing the electronic gas system permanently, see page 418.
• Replacing the blender, see page 421.
• Replacing the flow valve, see page 425.
• Replacing the stepper motor with encoder, see page 428.
• Replacing the stepper motor behind the flow valve, see page 428.
• Replacing the stepper motor behind the FiO2 knob, see page 433.
• Replacing the flowmeter, see page 436.
• Replacing the O2 sensor, see page 438.
• Replacing the air inlet filter component, see page 441.
• Replacing the module board set, see page 442.
• Replacing the pressure transducer(s), see page 444
Page xii
Overview
Overview
System 1 Overview
The Terumo® Advanced Perfusion System 1 consists of a Base, Central Control
Monitor (CCM), Air Bubble Detect System, Level Sensor System, and optional,
integrated product systems. The integrated product systems may include:
• Roller Pump – 4 in (10 cm)
• Roller Pump – 6 in (15 cm)
• Centrifugal Pump System
• Pressure Sensor System
• Flow Sensor System
• Temperature Sensor System
• Occluder System
• Electronic Gas System
• CDI™ 100 Interface Module
• CDI™ 500 Interface Module
• Interface Modules: RS-232, RS-485
• Lamps, Poles
Component-specific software and the computer-area-network integrate functionality
within the System 1. Interface modules use peer-to-peer technology.
The Base, central control monitor, and each interface module within the product
systems have their own CAN serial number. The System 1 identifies and associates
components using their CAN serial number, and not their physical location on the
Base or their virtual location on the central control monitor. The physical
configuration may or may not match the virtual configuration. An interface module
can be moved to a different location on the Base without affecting the current
configuration that is recognized by the System 1.
When the System 1 is powered on, self-diagnostic routines test each interface
module and report their status on the central control monitor. Pump systems have
local control to display their status and any messages.
Interface modules also indicate their self-test status with the LED. The LED will
cycle green, yellow, red, then will remain solid yellow in Offline mode until the
system allows the interface module to connect to the computer-area-network. Once
connected and in Online mode, the LED will display constant green. The LED will
remain red if the self-test fails.
The Base houses dual, Vmot power supplies, two series-connected 12 V batteries
for backup power, and the Electronic Gas System (if this optional product system is
installed).
Page 1
Overview
System 1 Revision History

Date No. NFC No. Description Serial Numbers
09/6/05 13 814237 For the Japan market only:
Software enhancement to CCM.
Launch of CAPIOX® centrifugal
control module, drive motor, and
hand crank.
09/1/05 12 813720 Software enhancement revision to P/N 801763 (100/120 V)
CCM, roller pump, and power < 0340
manager software.
P/N 801764 (220/240 V)
< 0158
P/N 802095 (power manager)
(installed in above bases)
P/N 801040 (small roller pump)
< 1189
P/N 801040 (large roller pump)
< 1340
P/N 802100 (CCM)
< 0492
10/5/04 11 812265 Software enhancement: revision to P/N 801040 (small roller pump)
pulsatile software. < 0875
< 0976
6/26/04 9 811507 Install isolation block to isolate the P/N 801763 (100/120V base)
EC common in the flowmeter from 0000 through 0200
the gas system chassis ground;
replace the O2 sensor. P/N 801764 (220/240V base)
0000 through 0070
P/N 801188 (gas system)
< 0227
5/24/04 8 811485 Replace retaining screws in tube P/N 801040 (small roller pump)
clamp. < 0700
< 0720
Page 2
Overview
5/3/04 7 811473 Software enhancements: add P/N 801763 (100/120 V)
Chinese display fonts, revise ≤ 0170
cardioplegia functions, update data
transfer functions, allow wider range P/N 801764 (220/240 V)
of gas pressure operation, provide ≤ 0065
better error codes for EPGS failure,
P/N 802100 (central control
set wider EPGS calibration limits,
monitor)
modify battery charge status LED
display. ≤ 0255
P/N 801188 (electronic gas
system)
≤ 0203
P/N 802095 (power manager
module)
installed in above systems
3/10/04 6 811054 Replace magnetic detent (clicker) P/N 801040 (small roller pump)
assemblies and tube clamp ≤ 699
assemblies on all roller pumps.
≤ 699
1/30/04 5 811053 Software enhancement: revision to P/N 801763 (100/120 V)

flowmeter in gas module. 0093, 0104–0114
P/N 801764 (220/240 V)
0040-0044
801077 (flowmeter, 0 L/min to
10 L/min)
18119–18133)
8/12/03 4 809915 Verify wire connections on CCM P/N 802100 (CCM)
internal wire harness. ≤ 0109
Verify voltage setting of
potentiometer on power supply.
6/24/03 3 809899 Verify direction of airflow within P/N 801763 (100/120 V)

base. ≤ 0046
P/N 801764 (220/240 V)
≤ 0030
Page 3
Overview
5/23/03 2 809586 Replace oversize crescent washer P/N 801040 (small roller pump)
on some roller slide subassemblies. 33, 34, 36, 37, 41, 44-46, 48,
51, 53, 55-61, 63-69, 71-73,
75-80, 82-86, 88-104
35-37, 43, 47, 48, 54, 60, 61,
63, 64, 67, 72, 73, 75-80, 82-
86, 88-98
3/21/03 1 809289 Software enhancement: add P/N 801763 (100/120 V)
Japanese display fonts, allow ≤ 0024, and 0026
backup/reassignment functionality,
update for new PC card. P/N 801764 (220/240 V)
≤ 0026
P/N 802100 (central control
monitor)
≤ 0064
P/N 801188 (electronic gas
system)
≤ 0045, and 0047
P/N 801046 (centrifugal control
unit)
≤ 0051
Page 4
Overview
Components
Item Description P/N Item Description P/N
1 Central Control Monitor 802100 Occluder Module 803480
System Configuration Card 803739
Service Data Card 803740 17 Occluder Head 806455
Temperature Module 802114
2 Monitor Mounting Arm 801441 Temperature Sensor (YSI (Yellow Springs 24710008
Instruments) Series 700 temperature
probes, or equivalent)
3 Roller Pump, 6 in 801041 Pressure Module 802112
4 Roller Pump, 4 in 801040 Pressure Transducer Kit 16433301
5 Centrifugal Control Unit 801046 Pressure Transducer Cable 806747
6 Centrifugal Drive Motor 164267 Pressure Adapter Cable 806748
Manual Drive Unit 164268
Disposable Pump (8/ctn) 164275 18 Pressure Monitoring Kit 16066100
7 Telescoping Pole with solution rack 16431701 19 Flowmeter Module 802018

Mounting Pole 4 ft 16553401 Flow Sensor 6382
Short Pole 801407 Flowmeter Mounting Bracket 801550
Ultrasonic Sensor Gel 164278
8 Crossbar 16426 20 Electronic Gas System 801188
9 Pole Collar 801403 Oxygen Sensor 801074
10 Crossbar Fitting 145980 Gas Supply Hose Kit (US) 814475
Oxygen Hose-green; Air Hose-yellow
11 Bracket, Hanging Bags 146819 Gas Supply Hose Adapter Sets (US)
NCG Hose Adapter Set 144207
12 Lamp, Long 801238 DISS Hand Tight Hose Adapter Set 144215
Lamp, Short 801558 Ohio Diamond Hose Adapter Set 144223
13 Hand Crank Bracket 802089
(includes two hand cranks) 801016
14 Roller Pump Pole Mount 801093
15 Centrifugal Unit Pole Mount 804372 Gas Supply Hose Kit (Outside the US) 814474
Roller Pump Mntg. Ext. Large 802523
Oxygen Hose-white; Air Hose-white/black
Roller Pump Mntg. Ext. Small 802524
Hoses do not include adapters for hospital
gas outlets.
16 Modules in Retaining Rack 95-5 Supply Hose (%O2/%CO2) 164595
Air Bubble Detect Module 802110 Interface Module for CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 802558
Air Sensor 3/8 x 3/32 5773 Serial Cable 804981
Air Sensor 1/4 x 1/16 5785
Interface Module for CDI™ 500 803479
Air Sensor 1/4 x 3/32 5791
Serial Cable 804981
Cable Assembly 149892 Interface Module RS-232 802113
Sensor Holder 149876 Serial Cable 804982
Interface Module RS-485 803518
Serial Cable 810166
Level Sensor II Module 802111 Module Cover
Level Sensor II Alarm Transducer, Red 195274 Right Side 804405
Level Sensor II Alert Transducer, Yellow 195215 Left Side 804404
Level Sensor II Mounting Pads (60 pack) 195240
Level Sensor II Gel Pad 217390
Page 5
Overview
Page 6
Overview
About the System 1 Field Service Handbook

This handbook is the first revision of the System 1 Field Service Handbook.
This handbook provides technical information about the Terumo® Advanced

Perfusion System 1. It is intended for Certified Clinical Engineers, Biomedical
Electrical Technicians, and those trained to service Terumo Cardiovascular Systems
Corporation equipment. The information in this manual is specific to this device and
should not be used for any other equipment.
The Table of Calibrate/Install/Replace/Repair Procedures (page xi) follows the
Contents.
This handbook begins with an overview section containing information about system
revisions, system identification, contact information, technician’s spare parts
inventory, and information on managing technician and configuration passwords.
The following sections provide technical information about the components and
optional product systems that may be included on the System 1. Troubleshooting
information about components and optional product systems is included at the end
of each section.
The next section provides schematics, assembly drawings, and bills of material for
components and optional product systems.
The handbook includes a glossary and an index.
Within the text, system names for buttons, tabs, and subtabs are bolded, such as:
Press START/STOP.
Service technicians inspecting problems with the System 1 or its components
should first review the Operators Manual to rule out the possibility of operator error.
Technicians can then use the technical information and drawings relating to the
component as a basis for their analysis and diagnosis. Technicians should refer to
replacement and repair procedures for a specific component before proceeding.
Software versions for various components have been updated since the initial
System 1 release. Refer to the current software version table.
Drawings and bills of material have been updated and added/deleted to reflect the
current System 1 components and devices.
A System 1 Power Troubleshooting Guide has been added. It is recommended that
the initial six steps be performed when dealing with any power problem. See
page 81.
Software version 1.20 for the Base power manager has changed how technicians
handle calibrating/replacing/disconnecting batteries and checking the status of
power supplies.
The Troubleshooting section for the gas system has been expanded.
A new repair procedure for replacing the CCM has been added. There are also new
procedures for replacing the gas blender, stepper motor, flow valve, and flowmeter.
All procedures have been reviewed and updated where necessary.
Page 7
Overview
Contact Information
Please address any questions about this handbook or servicing the System 1 to an
authorized Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation service technician or to the
Service Department in Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Service Department
Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation
6200 Jackson Road
Ann Arbor MI 48103
1-800-441-3220
Cautions
FEDERAL (U.S.A.) LAW RESTRICTS THIS DEVICE TO SALE, DISTRIBUTION,
AND USE BY OR ON THE ORDER OF A PHYSICIAN.
Proper surgical procedures and techniques are the responsibility of the medical
professional.
It is the operator’s responsibility to use, check, and maintain this device according to
the labels on the product, accompanying instruction manuals and handbooks, and
any revisions of the labeling or instructions that may be subsequently issued.
Read the Warnings and Cautions in the Operators Manual before servicing this
equipment.
Page 8
Overview
Service Policy
Only Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation certified service technicians are
authorized to service or repair this device. Only Terumo Cardiovascular Systems
Corporation approved replacement parts may be used in this device. Terumo
Cardiovascular Systems Corporation approved parts are only available through
Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation certified service technicians. Any
service or repair by an unauthorized service technician or use of unapproved parts
will void your Terumo Cardiovascular System Product Warranty and may increase
the risk of a product failure.
Contact Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation Service, your local Terumo
company, or your authorized distributor for technical assistance and to arrange for
service.
If the device is to be returned, instructions will be given for returning the device and
a Returned Goods (RG) number will be issued. For contaminated devices, request
the appropriate Product Return Safety Pack. Returned devices must be packaged
with adequate protection against shipping damage. Include a note describing the
problem, stating the RG number, and giving the name, address, and telephone
number of a person to contact for additional information.
In the United States, contact Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation
Technical Support Department:
Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation
6200 Jackson Road
Ann Arbor, MI 48103 U.S.A.
Telephone: 800-441-3220
Facsimile: 734-741-6449
Outside the United States, please contact your local Terumo company, your
authorized distributor, or the Technical Support Department at Terumo
Cardiovascular Systems Corporation.
Telephone: 734-663-4145
Facsimile: 734-741-6449
Page 9
Overview
Maintenance
Conduct a periodic maintenance inspection on the System 1 unit, which consists of
a Base, Central Control Monitor (CCM), Air Bubble Detect System, Level Sensor
System, optional, integrated product systems, and accessories.
Use the current Inspection Procedure, P/N 812382, and Inspection Report, P/N
803343, for all periodic maintenance.
Specialized Tools and Parts

The following items are required to service the System 1.
Terumo P/N Specialized Tools Description
134771 All Purpose Grease
141241 Custom Tachometer Fixture
141268 Roller-to-Roller Mounting Bar
144371 Tach Drive Motor Fixture
147109 Modified External Snap Ring Pliers
147301 Pressure Simulator Fixture
147361 Flowmeter 1.0 to 10 L/min
147686 47° Test Probe
801377 Level Sensor Reservoir Simulator
801528 Bearing Insertion Tool
803739 System Configuration PC Card
803740 Service Data PC Card
803887 Pulley Alignment Gauge
803916 Opto Sensor Pump Assembly Fixture
803962 Motor Tension Spring Stop
804187 Bearing Press Fixture
804235 Casting Runout Fixture
804518 Spanner Wrench
Page 10
Overview
Supplementary Tools and Equipment

The following tools are not available from Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation. Some, but not all,
of these tools may be needed for analysis and diagnosis of certain situations.
Supplementary Tools and Equipment Buy From / Item No.
Description
Ground Leakage Box 115 V Dale / LT544D Lite-1520
Meter Digital Volt–Mfr FK8060A Fluke / 187 or 189
Torx Driver Kit Jensen Tool / 191-287
Digital Tachometer DT107 McMaster / 8714T11
Dial Indicator Kit new style MSI-Viking / 708ACZ
External Snap Ring Pliers unmodified mytoolstore / KD-3151
Small External Snap Ring Pliers mytoolstore / KD-446
Static Dissipative Kit Specialized Products Co. / 8505
Oxygen Sensor Tester Teledyne Analytical Instruments / AX300
Torque Wrench 0 to 60 In Lbs Tohnichi / 120SF-A
Torque screwdriver 2-26" Lbs and Bits Tohnichi / 26LTDA
Obtain these tools through local sources.
Snap Ring Pliers, External
Snap Ring Pliers, Internal, Large
Allen Wrench Set, Ball End Fractional, assortment
9/16 in Open-end Wrench
1/4 in Open- and Box-end Wrench
Machinist Scale 6 in
Oxygen Flowmeter
Oxygen Analyzer
Page 11
Overview
Tool Vendor Contact Information

Vendor Name Phone Number Web Address
Calder 800-632-2805 http://www.caldertrade.co.uk/
Dale 800-632-2805 http://www.daletech.com/
EAO 203-877-4577 http://www.eao.com/
Fluke 800-44-FLUKE http://www.fluke.com/
Grainger 734-662-1060 http://www.grainger.com/
J & L Industrial 800-521-9520 http://www.jlindustrial.com/
Jensen Tools 800-426-1194 http://www.jensentools.com/
Maverick Elec. 800-555-8027 http://www.maverick-electronics.ch/
McMaster (McMaster-Carr) 330-995-5500 http://www.mcmaster.com/
MSC 734-953-8864 http://www.mscdirect.com/
MSI-Viking 864-433-9771 http://www.msi-viking.com/
mytoolstore 800-347-5096 http://www.mytoolstore.com/
Newark 800-263-9275 http://www.newark.com/products/sales/
Specialized Products Co. 800-866-5353 http://www.specialized.net
Sterling 258-546-3200 http://www.ses-sterling.com/
Teledyne Analytical 800-874-2646 http://www.teledyne-
Instruments ai.com/medsalesreps.html
Tohnichi 847-272-8480 http://www.tohnichi.com/
Recommended Spare Parts Inventory

Part Number Recommended Spare Parts Description
110/120 Base Circuit Breakers
801604 AC/DC Rocker (same on 220 V Base)
801606 Resettable 15 A ETA (two on back of Base)
801608 Resettable 1.5 A ETA (accessory outlet)
220/240 Base Circuit Breakers

801604 AC/DC Rocker (same on 110 V Base)
801605 Resettable 7 A ETA (two on back of Base)
801607 Resettable 0.7 A ETA (accessory outlet)
134480 ABD Latch (Sensor)
149892 ABD Sensor Cable
802110 Air Bubble Detect Module
802094 Base Air Intake (Fan) Filter
Page 12
Overview
145955 Battery (requires two)
801781 Bowed External Snap Ring
806748 Cable Assembly Pressure Reusable
806747 Cable Assembly Pressure Transducer
804802 CCM Backlight Kit
804517 CCM Cooling Air Filter
808059 CCM Fan
801521 CCM LAN Board
804516 CCM to Base Cable Assembly (power cord assembly)
803729 Centrifugal Pump Module Assembly
802276 EMC Shield, Pump Graphics
803761 Encoder, Optical, High Resolution
132257 EPGS 0.1 Micron Air Filter Replacement
132935 EPGS Filter Air Inlet Assembly
801784 External Snap Ring
6382 Flow Sensor Time of Flight 3/8 in x 3/32 in (9,5 mm x 2,4 mm)
804511 Fuse Littelfuse 257015 Bussman ATC-15 Fact-acting, FH4-FH11
804512 Fuse Littelfuse 297010 Bussman ATM-10 Fast-acting, FH1-FH3
809909 Gib Roller Slide
801798 Large Roller Pump Guts
803741 Large Roller Pump Module Assembly (driver, safety with generic)
804509 Large Roller Pump Roller Slide Assembly
810325 Large Roller Pump Tube Clamp Assembly
802111 Level Module
195274 Level Sensor Alarm
195215 Level Sensor Alert
801742 NIC Board
147141 Occluder Cap Assembly
133217 Occluder Pivot Pin
Page 13
Overview
801074 Oxygen Sensor Cartridge (has expiration date)
802095 Power Manager
813119 Power Supply
802112 Pressure Module
16433301 Pressure Transducer
809051 Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly
802280 Roller Pump Air Intake (Fan) Filter, 4 in and 6 in
803737 Roller Pump Cable Harness Kit (includes 12 V DC fan, digital encoder, optical
switch, pump cable, and cover interlock switch)
801225 Roller Pump Display with Knob, 4 in and 6 in / Centrifugal Display with Knob
802203 Roller Pump Drive Belt, 4 in and 6 in
802199 Roller Pump Motor
801805 Small Roller Pump Guts
802209 Small Roller Pump Module Assembly (driver, safety with generic)
804510 Small Roller Pump Roller Slide Assembly
810739 Small Roller Pump Tube Clamp Assembly
801789 Spring, Compression, 0.120 Dia x 0.44 Free Lg, Closed Ends, SS
801786 Spring, Extension, 0.12 OD x 1.75 Free Lg, 0.08 Dia End Hooks, SS
802114 Temperature Module
Page 14
Overview
System Part Numbers by Module

Description Part #
CCM 802100
ASBY, CCM display mounting arm 801441
LAN Interface 801521
CCM to Base Cable Asby 804516
CCM Cooling Air Filter 804517
CCM Back Light Kit 804802
CCM Fan Asby 808059
Perfusion PCMCIA Card 803739
Service PCMCIA Card 803740
Power Manager Module 802095
Fuse Littelfuse 257015 Bussman ATC-15 Fast-acting 804511
Fuse Littelfuse 297010 Bussman ATM-10 Fast-acting 804512
Cable asby LED/Speaker 801429
Chassis Assembly Platform 801763 110 V
801764 220 V
Power supply asby 813119
Assembly, NIC PC-MODULE Mount Left/Right Side APS 801742
Caster, Swivel with Directional and total lock, 5.0 in dia 801559
Weldment, Caster Petal 801401
Cable asby, Chassis Fan 801428
Solid State Relay 801609
Line Filter, Multi Stage (110V) 803903
Media Air Filter, Intake 802094
Circuit Breaker, AC/DC Rocker (ON/OFF) (110 V & 220 V) 801604
Circuit Breaker, resettable 1.5 Amp (110V) 801608
Circuit Breaker, resettable 15 Amp (110V) 801606
Circuit Breaker, resettable .7 Amp (220V) 801607
Circuit Breaker, resettable 7 Amp (220V) 801605
EMI Line Filter (220V) 803903
PC ASBY Surge Protection APS (110 V) 804837
Current Limiter Inrush 16A (220V) 153154
Power Cord Molded 20 Amp 115 V 134818
Power Cord Molded 16 Amp 250 V 134359
Strain relief .250-.375 Dia Hubbell shc-1022-cr 132652
Page 15
Overview
Strn Rel Locknut 1/2" NPT 131852
Strn Rel Mtl Clad Searling 219635
Circuit Breaker Seal eta 133858
End Plate, Module Guide, APS 801751
Welded, Module Retainer Rail (Bail) 801752
Washer, .83 OD X .59 ID X .10 THK Acetal 803648
Bail Tension Bearing Shaft, NIC APS 803871
Spring, Torsion, S/S .375 Dia X 1.25 Left Wind 803877
Spring, Torsion, S/S .375 Dia X 1.25 Right Wind 803878
Spring Cover Module bail, Chassis, APS 803724
Battery 145955
Common to Roller Pumps and Centrifugal N/A
Cable Assby Power/Cent/Flow 801587
Asby Small Display w/ Knob 801225
Encoder Ring, Roller Pump, APS 802207
Motor, Kollmorgen BMHS-2107-A 802199
Drive Belt, 7.78 LG X .39 Wide, Polyflex 802203
Encoder, Optical High Resolution Wheel 803761
Die-Cut Filter Media, Air intake, Pumps, APS 802280
Encoder, Optical Speed 802085
Cable Assembly Kit, Roller Pump 803737
Roller Pump 6 inch 801041
Asby 6 inch Pump Module 803741
Machined, Pump Race, 6 inch APS 802212
Gut 6 inch Pump 801798
Guide roller 6 inch Gut 801772
Spring, Extension, .12 OD X 1.75 Free LG, 801786
Molded Lid Hinge, 6 inch pump APS 801293
Lid Asby 6 inch Roller Pump APS 803719
Tube Clamp Asby 6 inch 810325
Slide Asby 6" Gut 804509
Roller Pump 4 inch 801040
Asby 4 inch Pump Module 802209
Machined, Pump Race, 4 inch APS 802213
Gut 4 inch Pump 801805
Guide roller 4 inch Gut 801807
Spring, Extension, .12 OD X 1.12 Free LG, 802200
Page 16
Overview
Lid Asby 4 inch roller pump, APS 803720
Molded Lid Hinge, 4 inch pump APS 801294
Tube Clamp Asby 4 inch 810739
Slide Asby 4" Gut 804510
Parts Common to both 6 Inch & 4 Inch Guts N/A
Retaining Ring, E-Ring 801788
4-40 X 3/16 in. Lg set screw w/nylon tip 801791
Bearing, Cap Radial ball 1.18 OD X .275 Lg metric 801783
Retaining ring, internal 801782
Bearing, Radial ball, .750 ID X 1.00 OD X .156 801132
Spring, Compression 801789
Gib Roller Slide 809909
Retaining Ring, External Bowed 801781
Retaining Ring, External 801784
Screw, 6-32 X .250 LG., Fillister, slotted 801775
Screw, Cap, 8-32 X .375, FL, Hex 801773
Molded Tab, Pump mounting 802548
Centrifugal 801046
Centrifugal Pump Module 803729
Electronic Patient Gas System 801188
EPGS internal module 804097
Oxygen Sensor Cartridge 801074
Flowmeter, Electronic 0-10 LPM 811104
CUSTOM SECHRIST BLENDER EPGS 802098
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER, 1/8 MNPT 801079
Occluder Head 806455
Occluder Module 803480
Modules
ABD Module 802110
Flow Module 802018
Level Module 802111
Pressure Module 802112
Temperature Module 802114
CDI-100 Module 802558
CDI-500 Module 803479
Serial 232 Module 802113
Serial 485 Module 803518
Page 17
Overview
Password Management
Managing Login Passwords

1. From the main screen, press Service and log in. The Service and
Diagnostics screen will open.
2. On the Service and Diagnostics screen, press Password Admin. The

Password Administration screen will open.
3. On the Password Administration screen, to change either the General

Service (technician) password or the Configure Case (chief
perfusionist) password, press Modify. The Edit General Service
Password or Edit Configure Case Password screen will open.
Page 18
Overview
The existing password will be selected. You can delete the password
(use the Del key) or enter a new password. Press Enter.
Page 19
Overview
4. Press OK on the confirmation box.
Managing Case Passwords

An authorized technician can change the login password for a technician or chief
perfusionist. The chief perfusionist can create/change the password associated with
a specific, named case configuration.
On the Configuration screen, the Edit Config Password button will allow the
configuration password to be changed the same as in the Password Administration
screen accessed from the Service area.
On the Configuration screen, the Set Password button will open the screen to
create/change the password associated with the selected, named case
configuration.
• To add a case configuration password, select the case, press Set
Password, enter the password, and then press OK.
• To change a case configuration password, select the case, press Set
Password, enter the new password, and then press OK.
• To delete a configuration password, select the case, press Set Password,
make sure the password is highlighted and press Del, and then press
Enter.
Saved case configuration passwords are displayed on the Configuration screen.
If a case configuration has a password, enter the password to open (and use) the
case on the Perfusion screen. Do not change the customer assigned password for a
named case configuration.
Page 20
Overview
Page 21
Overview
This page intentionally left blank.
Page 22
Chassis/Base Unit 100/120 V and 220/240 V

P/N 801763 Terumo® Advanced Perfusion System 1 (100/120 V)
P/N 801764 Terumo® Advanced Perfusion System 1 (220/240 V)
P/N 802095 Power Manager Assembly
P/N 813119 Power Supply
P/N 802094 Base Air Filter
P/N 801428 Base Fan/Cable
P/N 803730 Chassis Accessories Kit
P/N 801742 NIC Board
P/N 145955 System 1 Battery (single; need two for replacement)
P/N 801429 Cable Assembly LED/Speaker
P/N 804511 15 A Fuse
P/N 804512 10 A Fuse
P/N 811450 Front Panel, Outer Access with Gas
P/N 811063 Front Panel, Cover, Without Gas
Overview
The Terumo® Advanced Perfusion System 1 is indicated for use in extracorporeal
circulation of blood for arterial perfusion, regional perfusion, and cardiopulmonary
bypass procedures only. It is used by a qualified medical professional experienced in
the operation of this or similar equipment.
The System 1 uses a software-based design and a user interface to provide a highly
configurable pumping system. Each system device and sensor module contains
software that allows it to transmit and receive messages via a Controller Area
Network (CAN). Users can customize the number and types of system components
that can then be configured, displayed, and controlled from a central monitor. The
design gives users flexibility to:
• Select the number and types of devices and appropriate sensor modules.
• Add devices and sensor modules as needs change.
• Connect modules to a connection point on the system Base.
• Enable communication links between sensors and devices.
• Allow users to select how they want pumps and the occluder to respond to
alert and alarm conditions.
Page 23
Without requiring specialized hardware changes, all pumps can be configured to
deliver advanced functions such as:
• Roller and Centrifugal Pumps
• Pulsatile flow
• Servo regulation to pressure or flow
• Roller Pumps only
• Master-Follower operation
• Cardioplegia volume tracking
• Automatic cardioplegia dose delivery
The System 1 uses a graphical interface to organize system information. The central
control monitor (CCM) serves as the central area for controlling pumps, the occluder,
and, if installed, the electronic gas system. Pumps and the electronic gas system
also have local controls and displays that can be used interchangeably with the CCM
controls. This feature expands the ability of the user to remotely mount pumps and
sensors, reduce tube lengths, and minimize the prime volume of the extracorporeal
circuit. The centralized monitoring allows users to view current perfusion parameters
without having to look at multiple displays.
Password protection controls access to the system configuration process and
individual Perfusion screens.
A fully loaded system is defined as:
• A combination of six blood pumps from the list below:
• Two roller pumps, speed set to 120 RPM while using 1/2 in (12,7 mm)
x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall tubing and/or speed set to 190 RPM while
using 3/8 in (9,5 mm) I.D. x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall tubing, properly
occluded, and fluid temperature of 25°C;
• two roller pumps, speed set to 100 RPM while using 1/4 in (6,4 mm)
I.D. x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall tubing, properly occluded and fluid
temperature of 25°C;
• One roller pump, speed set to 50 RPM while using 1/4 in (6,4 mm) I.D.
x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall tubing, properly occluded and fluid temperature
of 25°C;
• One roller pump, speed set to 30 RPM while using 8:1 dual tubing set,
properly occluded and fluid temperature of 5°C;
• One centrifugal pump, flow set to 5.0 L/min, a backpressure of
400 mmHg and fluid temperature of 25°C.
• Eighteen monitoring modules; any combination of flow, temperature,
pressure, level, occluder, air bubble detector, and serial interface modules;
all modules assigned and activated.
• One electronic gas system, activated and assigned.
• One lamp; connected and powered on.
• One central control monitor; connected and activated.
Page 24
Operating Parameters
Equipment Requirements
P/N 801763 801764

Voltage 100/120 V 220/240 V
Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Circuit Breaker Protection 15 A (2) 7 A (2)
Typical Power Consumption 11 A 6A

(fully loaded system)
This device requires a dedicated 20 A power source for the 100/120 V
model or a dedicated 10 A power source for the 220/240 V model.
Nominal Power Consumption
System
Configuration
(see note below) 100 VAC 115 VAC 120 VAC 220 VAC 240 VAC
4-Pump 9.5-11.5 A 8.5-10 A 8-10 A 4.5-5 A 4-5 A
5-Pump 10.5-13 A 9.5-11.5 A 9-11 A 5-6 A 4.5-5.5 A
6-Pump 11.5-14 A 10.5-12.5 A 10-12 A 5.5-6.5 A 5-6 A
7-Pump 13-15.5 A 11.5-14 A 11-13.5 A 6-7 A 5.5-6.5 A
8-Pump 14-17 A 12-15 A 12-15 A 6.5-8 A 6-7 A
Note: Each system configuration above is defined as:

• All large roller pumps, speed set to 250 RPM, while using 1/2 in (12,7 mm)
I.D. x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall tubing, properly occluded, and fluid
temperature of 25°C.
• All available module connections used with any combination of gas, flow,
temperature, pressure, level, occluder, air bubble detector, and serial
interface modules; all modules assigned and activated.
• One lamp connected and powered on.
• One central control monitor, connected and activated.
• Peripheral equipment connected to the auxiliary outlet and activated.
This device requires a dedicated 20 A power source for the 100/120 V model or a
dedicated 10 A power source for the 220/240 V model.
Page 25
Equipment Performance
Leakage Current
<100 microamperes for 100/120 V system
<200 microamperes for 220/240 V system
(for a fully loaded system under typical operating conditions)
Ground Resistance
0.2 ohms maximum for all Bases, measured from the ground lug on
the power cord to any exposed metal on the Base or devices with
exposed metal connected to it.
Battery Backup
Battery system (two, fully charged, 12 V sealed gel-acid batteries) will
power a fully loaded system under typical operating conditions for
60 minutes.
Equipment Environmental Conditions
Operation
10°C to 40°C, less than 75% relative humidity, non-condensing.

Storage
Ventilated area, -30°C to 54°C (-22°F to 129°F), less than 95% relative
humidity, non-condensing.
Transporting
Units may be transported up or down an incline of up to 15 degrees
without tipping.
Functional Description
System Base
The system Base is a moveable platform designed for the flexible mounting of
system components on poles and on a central rail. The Base houses the network
infrastructure that provides power and communications to all system modules. Each
component connects to the system network via points on the Base. There are six
dedicated pump connections, two connections for the CCM, eighteen connections
for modules, and two dedicated connections for a lamp. The Base also provides
one AC outlet to supply power to ancillary equipment.
System Power
The power system within the Base transforms AC power into the DC levels required
by the system components. Integrated batteries provide backup power in the event
of AC power loss during use and when power needed exceeds power available.
Page 26
System Network
The network design allows all the different types of system modules to be
connected to any connection point on the Base. It also allows multiple types of
modules to be connected to the system. The user can define how these modules
interact and can set alert and alarm responses and monitoring limits via the CCM.
Central Control Monitor
The central control monitor (CCM) combines an embedded computer, a touch
screen, and a graphical user interface to provide centralized display of system
information and on-screen control of all system devices.
The CCM is used to create Perfusion screens, including:
• selecting number and types of devices
• device names and colors
• assignment of screen representations to physical modules
• connecting devices to safety systems
• selecting alert and alarm limits and device responses
During use, the CCM monitors the system for alert, alarm, error, or status
messages and displays these in priority order in a dedicated message area. The
CCM also allows the user to initiate automatic control functionality such as pulsatile
flow, servo regulation to pressure or flow, and automatic cardioplegia time or
volume delivery.
Electronic Gas System
The electronic gas system is an optional module that integrates into the Base. It
accepts inputs of medical grade air, 95% oxygen/5% CO2 blend, and oxygen, and
allows the user to control and regulate the gas output to an oxygenator. The
electronic gas system can be controlled from either the CCM or from control knobs
on the module itself. A built-in oxygen analyzer measures the oxygen content of the
blended gas and provides the information to the system for display on the CCM.
Large Roller Pump
The large roller pump is a peristaltic pump with a 6 in (15 cm) raceway that can be
used with PVC, or other medical grade tubing, for arterial, cardioplegia, vent, and
suction pumping applications. The pump can be mounted on the Base or on a pole
with a mounting bracket. The pump can be plugged into one of the six dedicated
pump connections on the Base, or into any of the eighteen Base module
connections.
A variable, insert-less tube clamp mechanism accommodates a variety of tubing
sizes, including dual tube sets, without requiring different size inserts. The pump
raceway can be repositioned and locked in 15 degree increments for optimal
positioning of the tubing. The occlusion mechanism allows the user to adjust the
position of the rollers at any time, including when the pump is rotating. An occlusion
feedback mechanism provides a series of audible clicks whenever the occlusion is
being adjusted.
Page 27
The large roller pump has a local display for indicating tube size, direction of pump
rotation, pump speed, flow rate, and safety, status and error messages. The pump
can be controlled from either the CCM or from a control knob on the pump itself.
The CCM can be used to configure which safety sensors interact with the roller
pump, and how the pump responds to the alerts and alarms.
Small Roller Pump
The small roller pump is a peristaltic pump with a 4 in (10 cm) raceway that can be
used with PVC, or other medical grade tubing, for pediatric arterial, cardioplegia,
vent, and suction pumping applications. The pump can be mounted on the Base or
on a pole with a mounting bracket. The pump can be plugged into one of the six
dedicated pump connections on the Base, or into any of the eighteen Base module
connections.
A variable, insert-less tube clamp mechanism accommodates a variety of tubing
sizes, including dual tube sets, without requiring different size inserts. The pump
raceway can be repositioned and locked in 15 degree increments for optimal
positioning of the tubing. The occlusion mechanism allows the user to adjust the
position of the rollers at any time, including when the pump is rotating. An occlusion
feedback mechanism provides a series of audible clicks whenever the occlusion is
being adjusted.
The small roller pump has a local display for indicating tube size, direction of pump
rotation, pump speed, flow rate, and safety, status and error messages. The pump
can be controlled from either the CCM or from a control knob on the pump itself.
The CCM can be used to configure which safety sensors interact with the roller
pump, and how the pump responds to the alerts and alarms.
Centrifugal Control Unit
The centrifugal control unit provides the local display and control mechanism for the
centrifugal motor and serves as the interface between the centrifugal motor and the
rest of the system. The local display indicates the motor speed, flow rate, and
safety, status, and error messages. The pump can be controlled from either the
CCM or from a control knob on the control unit. The CCM can be used to configure
which safety sensors interact with the centrifugal system, and how the pump
responds to the sensor alerts and alarms.
Centrifugal Drive Motor
The centrifugal drive motor is the drive mechanism necessary to pump fluid through
a disposable centrifugal pump which is magnetically coupled to the motor. The drive
motor is pole-mountable and connects directly to a receptacle on the centrifugal
control unit.
Occluder Module
The occluder module serves as the interface between the occluder head and the
system. The occluder system is controlled from the CCM, and can be configured to
respond to primary pump events.
Page 28
Occluder Head
The occluder head provides a precision, computer-controlled, tube occlusion
mechanism. The occluder head is controlled via signals received from the occluder
module. The occluder head can be detached from the occluder module.
Air Bubble Detect Module
The air bubble detect (ABD) module is the interface between an air sensor and the
system. The ABD module monitors the air sensor and communicates any alarms to
the system.
Air Sensor
The air sensor is a non-invasive, ultrasonic sensor which can detect gross air
bubbles in the perfusion circuit.
Level Detect Module
The level detect module serves as the interface between a level sensor and the
system. The module monitors level sensors mounted on a blood reservoir and
communicates any alerts or alarms to the system.
Level Sensor
The level sensor is an ultrasonic transducer that is mounted on a blood reservoir
and detects the presence or absence of fluid. This sensor is detachable from the
level detect module and is only compatible with hard-shell reservoirs.
Pressure Module
The pressure module serves as the interface between up to two pressure sensors
and the system. This module monitors signals from the pressure sensors and
communicates pressure values, alerts, and alarms to the system. Pressure values
are displayed on the CCM, and on local pump displays in Servo mode.
Pressure Sensor
The pressure sensor is a transducer that senses pressure, and converts pressure
into electrical signals detected by the pressure module. The sensor is detachable
from the pressure module.
Temperature Module
The temperature module serves as the interface between a temperature sensor and
the rest of the system. This module measures signals from up to two temperature
sensors, and provides temperature values and temperature status information to
the system. The temperature module supports YSI 400 series temperature sensors.
Temperature information is displayed on the CCM.
Temperature Sensor
The temperature sensor senses temperatures and converts the temperature into
electrical signals detected by the temperature module. Temperature sensors are
detachable from the temperature module.
Page 29
Flowmeter Module
The flowmeter module provides the interface between the flow sensor and the
system. The module processes the signals necessary to compute fluid flow values.
Those flow values are then communicated to the rest of the system. Flowmeter
values are displayed on the CCM and, if assigned, on a local pump display.
Flow Sensor
The flow sensor is a non-invasive, ultrasonic transducer used to measure fluid
velocity. These signals are used by the flowmeter module to compute fluid flow. The
sensor is detachable from the flowmeter module.
Interface Module
The Interface Module provides a serial interface with the system. The module
supports protocols for Terumo® CDI™ 100, Terumo® CDI™ 101, Terumo® CDI™
500, and Terumo® data management software.
Electrical Description
The System 1 Base electronics accept mains voltage and convert it to 24 VDC of
regulated power for powering the various subsystem modules. The main circuit
breaker controls power to the entire system. All pumps and system components
receive power directly from the power and communications connections on the
Base.
There are two externally accessible, resettable in-line circuit breakers on the Base
(15 A for 100/120 V systems, and 7 A for 220/240 V systems) that protect the main
power system. Another resettable circuit breaker protects the auxiliary outlet (1.5 A
for 100/120 V systems and 0.7 A for 220/240 V systems).
In some countries, regulations require potential compensation; in this case, the
cable from the potential compensation network is connected to the ground
equalization stud.
Page 30
Fuses are located on the power manager board located within the Base. A thermally
resettable fuse on the Node Interface Controller (NIC) boards is located between the
side panels and the outside of the Base. The thermal fuse on the NIC protects the
lamp.
The fuses on the power manager board protect the batteries, the AC/DC power
supplies, and the 5 V power to the NIC. Refer to the power manager block diagram
on page 497.
three 10 A fuses
eight 15 A fuses
All communication signals between the CCM, Base, pumps, and system modules
are Control Area Network (CAN).
Two internal 12 VDC batteries provide backup battery power in case of AC power
loss. During power loss, the backup batteries will provide enough DC power to
power a fully loaded system for 60 minutes. During power loss, power to the external
isolated AC outlet will be lost. For a description of a fully loaded system, see page
24.
The System 1 has been designed to be in compliance with requirements of global
regulatory agencies including FDA, UL, and CSA.
Interface
LED
At startup, the power system conducts a self-test. When the system is plugged into
the AC source and the batteries are fully charged, the power status indicator LED
should be solid green. The panel LED will reflect the charge state of the batteries. If
the system is operating on battery power, then the power status indicator LED will
blink while showing the color corresponding to the capacity remaining in the
batteries.
Page 31
Battery Status Indicator
LED AC Power (solid light) Battery Power (blinking light)
Green ≥ 95% calculated capacity 24.5 VDC to 27.5 VDC

available (*>30 min available)
Yellow 25 % to <95% calculated 23.5 VDC to <24.5 VDC

capacity available (*11 min to <30 min available)
Red <25 % calculated capacity <23.0 VDC

available (*<10 min available)
*Calculated battery time available to power a fully loaded system is displayed

when in a Perfusion screen and the color of the battery icon changes to reflect
the status. See page 24 for a description of a fully loaded system.
Controls and Displays
The CCM combines an embedded computer, a touch screen, and a graphical user
interface to provide centralized display of system information and on-screen control
of all system devices. On-screen control slide bars are used to control the various
devices on the system, including pump speed, occluder position, gas flow rate and
FiO2, and activation of safety systems.
The CCM is used to create Perfusion screens, including selecting number and types
of devices, device names and colors, assignment of screen representations to
physical modules, connecting devices to safety systems, and selecting alert and
alarm limits and device responses.
During use, the CCM monitors the system for alert, alarm, error, and status
messages and displays them in priority order in a dedicated message area. The
flow, servo regulation to pressure or flow, and automatic cardioplegia time or volume
delivery.
In addition to the controls on the CCM, roller pumps and centrifugal control units
have local controls and displays. The electronic gas blender has local controls.
Interactive Devices.
One auxiliary device can be plugged into the isolated AC outlet. The device
amperage is limited to 1.5 A for a 100/120 V system and 0.7 A for a 220/240 V
system. Other than modules designed to work with the System 1, no additional
devices can be plugged into the system power and communications network.
Alarm, Alert, Error, and Status Conditions
An error message is generated for a situation related to an internal error or failure
condition generated by a device or module (e.g., Cannot Calibrate O2 Analyzer). A
status message is generated to inform the user about the condition of the system, a
device, or a module (e.g., Gas Flow: Off).
Page 32
Start-up messages are summarized below. If the power-on self-test fails, the results
are displayed continuously at the top of the main screen, as long as the main screen
is displayed or the conditions exists. The failure message is displayed in the format
<Module Type Name>: X Fail, where X is the number of modules of this type that
failed their power-on self-test.
A maximum of five failure messages can be displayed simultaneously using the
AUX message tab at the bottom of the Perfusion screens. More messages can be
brought up by scrolling down. The possible messages include:
• System Power • Temperature Sensors
• System Computer • Gas System
• System Network • CDI 100/101
• Air Detectors • CDI 500
• Level Detectors • Large Roller Pumps
• Occluder • Small Roller Pumps
• Pressure Sensors • Centrifugal Pumps
• Flow Sensors • Data Transfer
Hardware Interface
Electrical Interconnections
The power manager module supplies the system with power and reports
NIC faults to the system. The module consists of a power manager board
which contains the power management and battery switching circuitry and
a generic module board. In normal operation, 24 V (24.5 V) power from
two AC/DC power supplies mounted in the system Base is fed to the
power manager module. The power manager board has redundant DC/DC
converters that generate 5 V power used by the system. Power is supplied
to the rest of the system by cable connections to the NIC assemblies. Two
batteries wired in series are connected to the power manager board. In the
event of a power failure, the power manager module switches the system
to battery power. The power manager board contains a battery charger
and a gas gauge circuit to maintain the batteries and to keep track of their
state of charge. The power manager board monitors and reports power
consumption to the system. Fuses on the power manager board provide
safety protection.
The node interface controller (NIC) board provides nine module
connections, three pump connections, a gas mixer channel, one CCM
channel and a lamp connector on a single printed circuit board. Each of the
two NIC boards required by the system mount to the inside of the chassis
side panels. The NIC provides +5 V, VMOT, and CAN signals access to the
modules and pumps plugged into the system Base. It also provides 24
VDC power and CAN access to the CCM. There is one NIC channel for
each connection to the system.
Page 33
The NIC performs the following additional functions:
• Control network access and power distribution - prevent illegal
configurations.
• Prevent module malfunctions, connector failures, or spills from
disabling the entire QBUS network power system.
• Restrict network access to "licensed" devices.
• Provide indication of the general health of the NIC to the rest of
the system.
System Messages
Alarm Messages
Alarm Condition CCM Display Operator Response

Alarm Message
Battery is depleted and SYSTEM POWER Use manual backup
system is shutting down. SHUTDOWN equipment to finish case.
Fully recharge battery
before using the system
again.
Status Messages
Status Condition CCM Display Operator Response

Status Message
When a Perfusion screen Battery Cannot Be Finish the case, and then
is open, message indicates Charged, Full Back-up contact authorized Terumo
the battery charging May Not Be Available Cardiovascular Service
system is not fully Center.
operational and the battery
is not being recharged;
battery backup may be
< 60 minutes.
When a Perfusion screen Battery Needs Service, Finish the case, and then
is open, message indicates Full Back-up May Not Be contact authorized Terumo
the battery cannot hold the Available Cardiovascular Service
recommended maximum Center.
charge level and may need
to be replaced; battery
backup may be
< 60 minutes.
Page 34
Status Condition CCM Display Operator Response
Status Message
AC power to system is On Battery–Monitor Time Monitor remaining battery
lost–switch to battery time.
power.
Prepare to use manual
backup equipment if AC
power is not restored
within 60 minutes.
Power system detects Power System at 80% If possible, reduce power

power usage at 80%. Capacity consumption by turning off
lamp(s), and slowing or
stopping pumps.
Theory of Operation
Operation
The system Base accepts mains power via the power cord. Two internal AC/DC
power supplies convert the mains power to 24 V power (24.5 VDC) which is then fed
to the power manager module. The module has redundant DC/DC converters to
generate the 5 V power used by the system. Fuses reside on the power manager
board to provide safety protection. Power is supplied to the rest of the system via
external module connections on the Node Interface Controller (NIC) assemblies.
The power manager module monitors the power consumption of the system and
makes the information available on the system Bus. The power module reports NIC
faults to the system.
Two batteries connected in series are connected to the power manager module. In
the event of a power failure, the power manager module switches the system to
battery power. The power manager module contains a battery charger to maintain the
battery charge and a gas gauge circuit to keep track of the battery charge state.
The power manager module has a generic board and an application board.
Page 35
The generic board includes:
• System Bus interface software, electronics and mechanical designs
• Microcontroller and peripherals common to all modules
• Software application loader to enable upgrades via the system Bus
• Generic application framework
• Power interface
• Watchdog timer
• Visual indicators of operating status and network connectivity
• Code and data storage
• Analog port for A/D conversions of module voltages, currents, and
temperatures
• Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) port to facilitate motor control
• USART for driving an RS-232 or RS-485 serial port
• SPI port for serial communications
• Configurable digital control and status interface
• Initialization and test of common devices
• Measurements of supply voltages, current, and temperature
• ESD and hot plug-in protection
• EMI filtering
The application board provides the electronic hardware functionality to the module.
The NIC performs the following additional functions:
• Control network access and power distribution - prevent illegal
configurations.
• Prevent module malfunctions, connector failures, or spills from disabling the
entire QBUS network power system.
• Restrict network access to "licensed" devices.
• Provide indication of the general health of the NIC to the rest of the system.
The NIC provides +5 V, VMOT, and CAN signals access to the modules and pumps on
a Sysbus network. It also provides the access to CCM power and CAN signal for the
CCM on the Sysbus network. The system provides one NIC for each module and
CCM connection. The NIC attempts to address all possible fault conditions
concerning the connection of a module to the Sysbus. The NIC board provides nine
module connections, three pump connections, a gas mixer module connection, one
Sysbus/CCM channel, and a lamp connector on a single board. Each System 1 has
two NIC boards.
Page 36
Electrically, the module, pump, and gas mixer channels are equivalent. However, the
gas mixer connection faces into the chassis while the module, pump, and CCM
connections face out of the chassis. Also, a pump cable may plug into a module
connector, but the module is mechanically prevented from plugging into the pump
connector. The Sysbus and power connectors from each of the two NIC boards are
cabled to the power manager board.
Electronic/Hardware Interface
Generic to Application Specific Interconnection
The generic board to application board interconnection for the power
manager module differs from the typical case. Normally, a module connects
to the system via the NIC board and power flows from the generic board to
the application board. For the power manager module, there is no NIC. The
generic board receives power from the power manager board. The power
manager board implements a node-interface-controller-like interface circuit
for the generic board. The NIC-like interface with the generic board is
implemented to protect the rest of the system from an errant generic board.
The generic board can be isolated from the system Bus. Power to the
generic board can be interrupted. If the generic board circuitry on the power
manager board fails, the power manager will not fail. The visible symptom of
this failure is an X through the battery icon on a Perfusion screen. The
audible alert/alarm tones from safety connections will not sound. The power
manager will continue to provide power to the other modules but all
communications from the power manager board will fail. You can verify the
loss of communication on the Service and Diagnostic screen where the
power manager module will not be listed.
Two connectors of the generic module are used. A flexible cable assembly
attached to the power manager board connects to the generic board J5 15-
pin high-density D-subminiature connector via a small adapter PCB. A 44-
pin dual row header on the Power Manager Board, P11, mates with the P1
socket connector of the generic board.
Page 37
Application Specific Connections
The power manager module has several connectors as described below. P8
and P11 are used to attach the generic board to the power board. The
remaining connectors are used to connect the power module to the system.
Illustrations and pin-outs for each connector follow. All connector views are
from the component side of the power module. The power module connects
to the system via several connectors; see the block diagram on page 497 for
reference.
Connector Function
J1 (page 39) NIC 1 Power Cable Connector
P1 CAN Bus Termination Shunt Connector
P2 (page 40) NIC 1 Signal Cable Connector
P4 (page 41) Alarm and LED Indicator Connector
P6 (page 41) Switch / Breaker Pole Connector
P7 (page 42) Battery Charging Indicator or Supplementary Fan Connector
P8 (page 43) Generic Module Flexible Cable Connector
P9 (page 44) Power Supply 2 Signal Cable Connector
P10 (page 45) Power Supply 1 Power Connector
P11 (page 46) Generic Module Connector
P12 (page 47) Test Connector
P13 (page 48) QCU Power Daughter Board Output Connector
P14 (page 49) U9 Programming Connector
P15 (page 50) QCU Power Daughter Board Connector
P16 (page 44) Power Supply 1 Signal Cable Connector
P17 (page 45) Power Supply 2 Power Connector
P18 (page 51) Battery Connector
P19 (page 51) U23 Programming Connector
P20 (page 52) Fan Connector
P21 (page 52) Fan Connector
Page 38
J1–J3 NIC Power Cable Connectors
Power connectors providing 24 V and 5 V to the modules.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Signal Contact Contact Signal Signal Expected

Voltage
Level
-VQCUV3 (-QCU) 1 9 VQCURTN +5V 5.0
(GND)
VQCUV1 (+QCU) 2 10 VQCURTN GND 0.0
(GND)
VQCUV1 (+QCU) 3 11 VmotRTN Vmot 24
(GND)
VQCUV2 (QCU5V) 4 12 VmotRTN VmotRTN 0
(GND)
+5V (+5V) 5 13 VmotRTN VQCURTN 0
(GND)
GND (GND) 6 14 VmotRTN VQCUV1 0 (not used)
(GND)
Vmot (+VMOT) 7 15 Vmot VQCUV2 0 (not used)
(+VMOT)
Vmot (+VMOT) 8 16 Vmot -VQCUV3 0 (not used)
(+VMOT)
(Signals in parentheses are NIC schematic signal names)
Current Carrying Requirements for NIC Power Cable
Signal AMPS # of contact (15 A)
GND 90 6
Vmot 50 4
+5V 8 1
VqcuV1 20 2
VqcuV2 15 1
-VqcuV3 10 1
Vmot (+VMOT) 7 15
Vmot (+VMOT) 8 16
Page 39
P2, P3, and P5–NIC Signal Cable Connectors
These are signal connectors going to the modules.
Connector, Header, 8-position, Straight, Friction Lock, 0.100 in Ctrs,
Gold.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin # Signal Signal Expected Voltage Level

1 FAULTL# (/FAULT) CANH (BUSH) 0 or 5
2 GND (GND) CANL (BUSL) 0 or 5
3 CANH (BUSH) FAULTL# (/FAULT) 0 = Fault, 5= No Fault
4 CANL (BUSL) GND (GND) 0
5 GND (GND) NIC#CONNECTED 0=Connected

5=Unconnected
6 CANH (BUSH)
7 CANL (BUSL)
8 NIC#CONNECTED
(GND)
Note: The NIC#CONNECTED contact is grounded on the NIC.

Note: The CANH and CANL signals use redundant pins.
Page 40
P4–Alarm and LED Indicator Connector
Connector, Header, 5-position, Straight, Friction Lock, 0.100 in Center,
Gold.
1 2 3 4 5
Pin # Signal Signal Expected

Voltage Level
1 Alarm Speaker Contact 1 Alarm Speaker Contact 1 0 to 5
2 Alarm Speaker Contact 2 Alarm Speaker Contact 2 0 to 5
3 LED Red Anode LED Common Cathode 0
4 LED Green Anode LED Green Anode 1 to 4
5 LED Common Cathode LED Red Anode 1 to 4
P6–Switch/Breaker Pole Connector

Connector to On/Off switch.
Connector, Header, 4-position, straight, Friction Lock, 0.100 in center,
Gold.
1 2 3 4
Pin # Signal Signal Expected Voltage
Level
1 N/C Contact 3 19 to 24
2 N/C Contact 4 1 to 22
3 Contact 3
4 Contact 4
Note: A pole on the main power breaker is used to connect Contact 3

with Contact 4.
Page 41
P7–Battery Charging Indicator or Supplementary Fan Connector
Connector, Header, 4-position, Straight, Friction Lock, 0.100 in Center,
Gold.
1 2 3 4
Pin # Signal Signal Expected Voltage Level

1 +24V +24V 21 to 28
2 GND +35V 21 to 28 for Charger Off

34-36 for Charger On
3 N/C GND 0
4 +35V
Page 42
P8–Generic Module Flexible Cable Connector
The generic module cable is directly soldered to P8 and is an integral part
of the power manager.
P8 Cable J5 Generic Signal Signal Expected

Contact Module Voltage
1 4 NIC2 +5VGENMODULE 5
2 5 NIC1 CANH 0 or 5
3 10 NIC3 CANL 0 or 5
4 15 CANL GND 0
5 14 CANL NIC1 0 or 5
6 9 CANH NIC2 0 or 5
7 13 GND NIC3 0 or 5
8 8 N/C
9 12 N/C
10 7 GND
11 11 N/C
12 6 GND
13 1 +5VGENMODULE
14 2 N/C
15 3 CANH
16 NC GND
Note: Pin 13–Switched +5 V.

Note: Pin 16–Future use for shield.
Page 43
P9, P16–Power Supply Cable Connectors
Connector, Header, 16-pin Dual Row.
16 2
15 1
1 S+ AC FAIL 0 or 5
2 S- AC FAIL RTN 0
3 C.S. C.S. 0 - 24
4 V_ADJ Global Inhibit H 0 or 5
5 Inhibit H Global Inhibit L 0
6 Inhibit L GoodH 0 or 5
7 GoodH GoodL 0
8 GoodL Inhibit H 0
9 N/C Inhibit L 0
10 N/C S- 0
11 N/C S+ 24.5
12 N/C V_ADJ 0 - 24.5
13 AC FAIL
14 AC FAIL RTN
15 Global Inhibit H
16 Global Inhibit L
Page 44
P10, P17–Power Supply Power Connectors
Power connectors providing 24 V to the power module.
1 2 3
4 5 6

1 Vo+ Vo+ 24.5
2 Vo+ Vo- 0
3 Vo+
4 Vo-
5 Vo-
6 Vo-
Page 45
P11–Generic Module Connector

1 43
2 44
Notes Signal Pin Pin Signal Notes Signal Expected

Voltage Level
Not used 2 1 Not used AGND 0
Not used 4 3 Not used P2.0 0 or 5
Not used P3.11 6 5 P3.10 Digital Output P2.1 0 or 5
Not used RSTIN 8 7 P3.8 Not used P2.2 0 or 5
Not used P3.9 10 9 P3.13 Not used P2.3 0 or 5
Not used POL.4 12 11 Not used P2.4 0 or 5
Digital Output P7.3 14 13 P7.2 A. Attn. Clock P2.5 0 or 5
A. Attn. Data P7.1 16 15 P7.0 Audio Out P2.6 0 or 5
Digital Output P2.8 18 17 P2.9 Digital Output P2.7 0 or 5
DB6 P2.6 20 19 P2.7 DB7 P2.8 0 or 5
DB4 P2.4 22 21 P2.5 DB5 P2.9 0 or 5
DB2 P2.2 24 23 P2.3 DB3 P2.15 0 or 5
HDQ Serial P2.15 26 25 P2.1 DB1 P3.5 0 or 5
Digital Output P3.5 28 27 P2.0 DB0 P3.10 0 or 5
AGND 30 29 AGND P5.5 0 to 4.1
AGND 32 31 AGND P5.6 0 to 4.1
Analog Input P5.13 34 33 P5.12 Analog Input P5.7 0 to 4.1
Analog Input P5.7 42 41 AGND P5.11 0 to 4.1
AGND 44 43 Vref Not used P5.12 0 to 4.1
P5.13 0 to 4.1
P7.0 0 or 5
P7.1 0 or 5
P7.2 0 or 5
P7.3 0 or 5
Note: The shaded portion depicts the mating surface view of the header residing
on the power manager board.
Page 46
P12–Test Connector
Connector, Header, 2 x 5, 0.100 in Center
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9
10-Pin Dual Row Header
Signal Contact Contact Signal Signal Expected

Voltage Level
TESTD0 1 2 INHL1 GND 0
TESTD1 3 4 INHL2 INHL1 0 or 5
TESTD2 5 6 TESTPS5A INHL2 0 or 5
TESTD3 7 8 TESTS5B TESTD0 0 or 5
TESTD4 9 10 GND TESTD1 0 or 5
TESTD2 0 or 5
TESTD3 0 or 5
TESTD4 0 or 5
TESTPS5A 0
TESTS5B 0
Page 47
P13–Central Control and Display Power Daughter Board Output Connector
30-pin Dual Row Shrouded Header:
Signal Pin Pin Signal Signal Expected

Voltage Level
+VQCUV2 1 2 +VQCUV2 VQCURTN 0
+VQCUV2 3 4 +VQCUV2 +VQCUV1 0 (not used)
+VQCUV2 5 6 -VQCUV3 +VQCUV2 0 (not used)
-VQCUV3 7 8 -VQCUV3 -VQCUV3 0 (not used)
-VQCUV3 9 10 VQCURTN
VQCURTN 11 12 VQCURTN
VQCURTN 23 24 +VQCUV1
+VQCUV1 25 26 +VQCUV1
Page 48
P14–U9 Programming Connector

Connector, Header, 6 x 1, Straight, 0.100 in Center
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 GND ~RESET 0 or 5
2 ~RESET +5V 5
3 +5V GND 0
4 SCK MISO 0 or 5
5 MISO MOSI 0 or 5
6 MOSI SCK 0 or 5
Note: This connector is only used for production.
Page 49
P15–Central Control and Display Power Daughter Board Connector
30-pin Dual Row Shrouded Header:
Signal Pin Pin Signal Signal Expected

Voltage
Level
+5V 1 2 VFLTR24V +24V 24
GND 3 4 VFLTR24V +5V 5
GND 5 6 VFLTR24VRET AGND 0
GND 7 8 VFLTR24VRET DBID0 0 or 5
GND 9 10 +24V DBID1 0 or 5
GND 11 12 +24V DBID2 0 or 5
VQCUMUX 13 14 +24V GND 0
MUXAD0 15 16 +24V MUXAD0 0 or 5
MUXAD1 17 18 GND MUXAD1 0 or 5
MUXAD2 19 20 GND MUXAD2 0 or 5
AGND 21 22 GND SPARE1 0 or 5
AGND 23 24 GND SPARE2 0 or 5

VQCUANALOG 25 26 SPARE1 VFLTR24V 24
SPARE2 27 28 DBID0 VFLTR24VRET 0
DBID1 29 30 DBID2 VQCUANALOG 0 to 4.1

VQCUMUX 0 to 4.1
Page 50
P18–Battery Connector
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 BAT+ BAT+ 21 to 30
2 BAT+ BAT- 0
3 BAT+
4 BAT-
5 BAT-
6 BAT-
P19–U23 Programming Connector

Connector, Header, 6 x 1, Straight, 0.100 in Center
1 2 3 4 5 6

1 GND ~RESET 0 or 5
2 ~RESET +5VLR 5
3 +5VLR GND 0
4 SCK MISO 0 or 5
5 MISO MOSI 0 or 5
6 MOSI SCK 0 or 5
Note: This connector is only used for production.
Page 51
P20, P21–Fan Connectors
Connectors provide power to the external fans.
Connector, Header, 4-position, straight, Friction Lock, 0.100 in center, Gold.
1 2 3 4

1 24V 24V 24
2 24VRTN 24VRTN 0
3 N/C
4 N/C
NIC Connectors
Each NIC Board has eighteen connectors: thirteen NIC connectors, CCM
connector, power manager power connector, power manager SysBus and Fault
connector, lamp connector, and one internal CAN access connector. The
modules and pumps are connected to the NIC through the 15-pin hi-density D-
sub male on the Generic computer PCB and the 15-pin D-sub female on the NIC
board. The CCM channel of the NIC board utilizes a 44-pin hi-density D-sub
female connector and the lamp connector is a mini-DIN. Electrically, the module,
pump and gas mixer channels are equivalent. However the gas mixer connection
faces into the chassis while the module, pump and CCM connections face out of
the chassis. Note that a pump cable may plug into one of the eighteen module
connectors, but a module is mechanically prevented from plugging into the pump
connector. The QBUS and power connectors are cabled to the power manager
board.
Page 52
Module, Pump, or Gas Mixer Connector
15-pin Hi density D-sub, female
Pin No. Signal

1 +5V
4 NIC2
5 NIC1
2, 6, 7, 13 GND
3, 9 CANH
10 NIC3
8, 11, 12 +VMOT
14, 15 CANL
Power Manager Power Connector

Positronics 2 x 8 pin power connector
Pin No. Signal

1 -QCUV
2, 3 +QCUV
4 QCU 5V
5 +5V
6, 9 - 14 GND
7, 8, 15, 16 +VMOT
Power Manager QBUS and Fault Connector

8 pin 0.1 in straight line connector
Pin No. Signal

1 FAULT
2, 5, 8 GND
3, 6 CANH
4, 7 CANL
Internal CAN Access Connector

8 pin 0.1 in straight line connector
Page 53
Pin No. Signal

1 Pull up to +5V
2, 5, 8 GND
3, 6 CANH
4, 7 CANL
CCM Connector
44-pin hi-density D-sub, female
Pin No. Signal

1, 16, 17, 31 -QCU POWER
2-7 +QCU POWER
8 - 13 QCU 5V
14, 15 VMOT
18 – 23, 25 – 30, 32, 33, 42 - 44 GND
24 N.C.
34 NIC1
35 NIC2
36 NIC3
37, 38 CANL
39, 40 CANH
41 +5V
Lamp Connector
6 pin mini-DIN
Pin No. Signal

1, 2 GND
3, 4 VMOT
5, 6 N.C.
Page 54
Battery Charger
The battery charger consists of a 24 V to 35 V DC-DC converter followed by a
switch-mode lead-acid battery charger controlled by a Unitrode UC3909 battery
charger controller. The 24 V to 35 V boost converter switches at 150 kHz. The
battery charger circuit switches at 50 kHz. The U23 micro-controller controls
when the battery charger charges the batteries. When the batteries power the
system, the battery charger is off. If either AC/DC power supply fails, the battery
charger is turned off.
There are three stages specified for charging the system batteries: 1) "Bulk" -
this stage is defined as the high current stage and it is the first stage of the
charging cycle. In this stage, the charger will supply a maximum of 4 Amps of
current to the battery until the battery voltage rises up to the 29.5 volts
(overcharge stage); 2) "Overcharge" - this stage is defined as the constant
voltage stage and it represents the second stage of the charging cycle. In this
stage, the charger will regulate the voltage at the specified 29.5 volts for as long
as the battery charging current is greater than 500 mA; and 3) "Float" - this stage
is defined as the fully charged stage. In this stage, the charger will maintain a
trickle charge current across the battery to maintain it at the fully charged stage.
See charger stages representation in the figure below.
Overcharge
29.5V
Float
27.5V
Charger Voltage
25.0V Bulk
23.0V
21.0V
13 Hours Approximately
FIGURE 1
An additional function of the charger control IC, U11 (UC3909), includes

temperature compensation. The charger control IC with the use of Thermistor
RT1, will automatically adjust the charging voltage based on the internal ambient
temperature near the batteries. This feature provides added protection to the
batteries to prevent them from overheating.
Note: In the event of a power supply failure, the battery system will be
automatically enabled to assist the system in the event that the power
consumption exceeds that of the one power supply.
Note: In the event that the batteries should become fully discharged causing the
system to shut down, the main circuit breaker should be cycled OFF and ON to
reset the charging system when AC power is restored. Failure to do so will
prevent the batteries from charging.
Page 55
Gas Gauge
A gas gauge is used to maintain a record of the available charge in the system's
series-connected dual batteries. The U22 IC monitors the voltage drop across
the 0.001-Ohm sense resistor, R136, to determine charge and discharge activity.
A negative voltage occurs when the battery discharges and a positive voltage is
generated during battery charging.
Note: If the battery assembly is disconnected from the power manager, U22
loses power and the register contents are lost.
Upon reapplication of power, the gas gauge resets: the Nominal Available
Charge register is cleared to 0.00 Ah, and when you push the New Battery
button and the Confirm button, the Last Measured Discharge register is
initialized to the Programmed Full Count of 18 Ah. The indication of whether the
battery is charged is based on the charger being in the float state and the gas
gauge charge status bit being cleared for 2 minutes. Once these conditions are
met, a 2 hour timer is started. At this point, the Charge Status is at 0 and the
Charge Rate is at 0. After a minimum of 2 hours in that state, or 2 hours after the
batteries are fully charged, the total value of the NAC register is set to the LMD
of 18 Ah.
If the batteries are discharged, update of the Nominal Available Charge register
is not required because when the above conditions are met for 2 hours, the
system will automatically set the NAC register to 18 Ah.
ON/OFF Switch
The external ON/OFF switch is wired to the power manager board via P6. The
main breaker/switch is a two-pole unit. One of the poles is used to switch on the
AC input power. The second pole is used to enable the battery system.
24 Volt Current Sharing
Current sharing is the set point in which the power supplies can deliver close-to-
equal amounts of amperage to the load based on the calibrated output voltage
setting.
Current sharing for the system is accomplished with the two 24 V power
supplies. These power supplies do not share current with the battery system.
The system will always turn the battery power on in the event of a power supply
failure.
Page 56
Each of the lines is identified with IPS1 and IPS2. With no significant load to the
supplies, the current sharing can be as far as 8 A between them, and as close as
4 A between them when maximum permissible load is applied. Note that as the
load increases, the current differential between the supplies decreases. This
inverse proportion can only be obtained with power supplies capable of current
sharing, and calibrated with the same load. A low drift/stable 410 W load is
required to calibrate the power supplies.
The system uses two 750 W power supplies that have been de-rated down to
672 watts. The de-ration is a result of lowering the fan speed to reduce audible
noise.
The figure above illustrates the two power supplies in current sharing mode. The
two current sharing lines intersect each other at 410 W of power approximately.
This means the supplies will be sourcing 410 W each when the output currents
are identical. The Q point in the figure above represents the recommended
setting based on the large system configuration at clinical max (820W
approximately → Q = 820 DC / 2 = 410 W DC) for a mid-point setting. The large
system at clinical max was chosen because it presents a higher risk of going into
thermal shutdown over the large system at clinical normal, or a typical system at
clinical max.
Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Fuses
Fuses that protect the batteries, AC/DC power supplies, and 5 V power to the
NIC, are located on the power manager board. A thermally resettable fuse on the
NIC boards is located between the side panels and the outside of the Base and
protects the lamp.
All circuit breakers have been made accessible, and are located on the lower
bucket. If the system is connected to good AC power but will only run on battery,
check if a circuit breaker has been inadvertently tripped.
Page 57
Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Fuses for 100/120 VAC
Circuit Breakers Fuses

CB1 1.5 Amps F1 10 Amps
CB2 15 Amps F2 10 Amps
SW1 0.3 Amps F4 – F11 15 Amps
Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Fuses for 220/240 VAC
Circuit Breakers Fuses

CB1 0.7 Amps F1 10 Amps
SW1 0.3 Amps F4 – F11 15 Amps
Power Switching
A two-pole, single-throw circuit breaker/switch is closed to power up the perfusion
system. AC voltage (Line) is switched by one of the poles and routed to a wide
input voltage range Solid State Relay. The switched power is then routed through
a line filter directly to the primary of the Torroid Isolation Transformer for a
100/120 VAC system; and, for a 220/240 VAC system, the power from the line
filter is routed through a Current Limiter device to the Isolation Transformer. The
Torroid Isolation Transformer is configured with one primary winding, and two
secondary windings: secondary one (S1) powers two AC/DC supplies providing
24.5 VDC to the power manager board, and secondary two (S2), powers the
auxiliary AC outlet with the applied line voltage.
The second pole of the circuit breaker/switch is used to switch on power to the
circuit on the power manager board controlling the ON/OFF function for the
battery operation. The breaker/switch contacts are connected to the power
manager board via the three-pin connector P6. A switch closure connects battery
current to power a small 5 V linear regulator U19. The output of U19 (+5VLR) is
used to pull-up status inputs from the AC/DC supplies and to power U23. Diode
D7 is used to force the power manager's 24 VDC Bus to power U19 to relieve the
battery drain when AC/DC supplied 24.5 VDC power is present.
U23 is an 8-bit micro controller that is used to control switching of the batteries. It
also determines when battery charging occurs. Battery charging never occurs
when the battery is switched on. U23 has 1024 bytes of in-system re-
programmable flash memory. The part can be programmed prior to board
assembly or programmed in-system using the programming connector P19.
Page 58
The status of the power supplies is checked by U23 starting a few seconds after
the breaker/switch closure and if an AC/DC problem is detected, the batteries are
turned on to power the system. The batteries are disconnected from the system
load when the power supplies are again providing good power. When no AC is
present (including power-up), the power module operates from battery power.
Battery Management
New Battery button

The batteries need to be set after any of the following events:
• P18 has been disconnected long enough to reset TNAC (Total Nominal
Available Capacity).
• New batteries were installed.
• New power manager was installed.
1. Power on the System 1. Press Service and log in.
2. From the Service and Diagnostics screen, press Power Maintenance.
3. On the Power Maintenance screen, press New Battery.
Page 59
4. In the Set New Battery window, press Confirm.
Note: This will always set the LMD to 180/10 or 18 Ah as the "rated
battery capacity".
5. On the Power Maintenance screen, press Battery Status Registers.
Last Measured Discharge Register (LMD) will indicate 18.0 Ah.

Total Nominal Available Capacity will indicate 0, if P18 has been
disconnected long enough to exceed the system allotted timeout.
TNAC will indicate 0, if the battery is new or the power manager is
new.
System LED will display red until step 9 is complete.
6. Press Done to return to the Power Maintenance screen.
7. Press Exit to Service Menu to return to the Service and Diagnostics

screen.
8. Press Exit to Main to return to the main screen.
Page 60
9. When all the inspection and repair procedures are complete, leave the
system powered on. As long as the Charge Status and Charge Rate
remain at 0 for 2 hours, the system will reset the TNAC to 18 Ah and
the LED should turn green.
Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations

Chassis/Base Unit - P/N 811409, see page 493.
Parts Chassis/Base Unit - P/N 811409, see page 495.
Power Manager Block Diagram, see page 497.
Power Manager - P/N 802095, see page 501.
Parts Power Manager - P/N 802095, see page 503.
NIC Board - P/N 801742, see page 505.
Parts NIC Board - P/N 801742, see page 507.
NIC Printed Circuit Board - P/N 801518, see page 509.
System 1 Wiring Diagram, see page 513.
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764, see page 521.
Parts Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764, see page 535.
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763, see page 541.
Parts Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763, see page 555.
Cable Assembly Power NIC Left - P/N 801464, see page 561.
Cable Assembly Power NIC Right - P/N 801463, see page 563.
Cable Assembly CAN NIC Left - P/N 801427, see page 565.
Cable Assembly CAN NIC Right - P/N 801426, see page 567.
Cable Assembly Battery 24 VDC - P/N 801467, see page 569.
Cable Assembly Battery On-Switch - P/N 801430, see page 571.
Cable Assembly Power PS1 - P/N 801466, see page 573.
Cable Assembly Power PS2 - P/N 801468, see page 575.
Cable Assembly PS2 Fault 12 in - P/N 801404, see page 577.
Cable Assembly PS2 Fault 18 in - P/N 801473, see page 579.
Cable Fan Assembly 24 VDC - P/N 801428, see page 581.
Cable Assembly CDI 100/CDI 500 - P/N 804981, see page 583.
Cable Assembly RS-232/RS-485 - P/N 804982, see page 585.
Chassis Wiring Kit - P/N 803898, see page 587.
Page 61
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades
More Info Screen
To review stored information on Base components, log in to Service. From the
Service and Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, and press More
Info. The More Info screen displays information about Self Test Status, V5 Voltage,
V5 Current, Vmot Voltage, Vmot Current, and Temperature. The More Info screen
for the Power Manager also displays Accumulated System Time in minutes.
Note: NFC 813720 Power Manager software upgrade 1.20 resets the Accumulated
System Time to zero.
Software Upgrades to Modules

To install updated software, press Service and enter the password for software
upgrades.
Place the System Configuration Card containing the new software in the System
Configuration Card slot on the side of the CCM.
From the Service and Diagnostics screen, in the System Configuration list, select
the device name and press Upgrade.
From the displayed list of files on the System Configuration Card, select the correct
file and follow the detailed instructions that accompanied the software update.
Page 62
Diagnostic Theory
The System 1 is designed with multiple, internal, self-diagnostic processes. The
system provides a number of viewing areas useful to the troubleshooting process.
1. The power system reports its overall health and status using a three-
color-capable LED on the generic board. In addition, the LED on the
front of the Base indicates the battery status during use or charging
state when the Base is running on AC power.
2. The Perfusion screen may be used to assess if the system is using AC

power, running on battery, the time remaining for battery and/or
indicate if one of the power system components has failed.
3. The Service screen may be used to view the status of any module or
pump, the CCM, and the power board. Individual pumps and modules,
including the power board, run self-diagnostic routines and record
errors in an internal log. The Service screen may be used to view and
download the logs. The internal log may capture and log reset event(s)
and/or out of range error(s).
Page 63
Repair Procedures
Repairing the electronic gas system

Refer to the section covering the electronic gas system beginning on page 399 or
the electronic gas system repairs beginning on page 417.
Replacing the Base cooling system air filter

Note: The Base cooling system air filter is P/N 802094.
1. On the back panel, locate and remove two thumbscrews that secure
the grill.
2. Remove the grill and set aside.
3. Replace the filter.
Filter
4. Reinstall the grill and tighten the thumbscrews securely.
Installing new batteries

Note: Use two of P/N 145955.
Note: After installing new batteries, leave the system powered on for a
minimum of 2 hours.
1. Power off the System 1. Disconnect the power cord from the AC
source.
2. Remove the screws securing the front panel.
3. Tip the front panel away from the Base to free the lower lip, lift the
panel and set it aside.
Page 64
4. Disconnect the battery harness from P18 on the power manager
module.
P18
5. Remove the screw securing the battery assembly to the Base.
6. Carefully slide out the battery assembly being careful not to damage
the wiring. Note: The battery assembly is heavy.
7. Loosen the two hex-head screws and remove the battery top brace
and set aside.
8. Disconnect the wire harness from the battery terminals.
9. Remove the old batteries from the battery slide tray.
10. Install the new batteries on the battery slide tray.
11. Connect the battery harness to the new battery terminals.
12. Install the battery top brace and tighten the two hex-head screws.
Page 65
13. Slide the battery assembly back into the Base being careful of the wire
bundles.
14. Re-attach the battery harness to P18 on the power manager module.
15. Install and tighten the screw securing the assembly to the Base.
16. Re-attach the front panel.
17. Set to New Battery and Confirm.
Note: This procedure sets the LMD value to 18 Ah.

• Connect to the AC source and power on the System 1.
• Press Service and log on.
• On the Service and Diagnostics screen, press Power
Maintenance; in the Settings block, press New Battery.
• In the Set New Battery window, press Confirm.
• Press Done to return to the Power Maintenance screen.

• Press Exit to Service Menu to return to the Service and
Diagnostics screen.
• Press Exit to Main to return to the main screen.
18. Perform an operational check.
Replacing the power bucket assembly

source.
Page 66
2. Remove the two screws securing the bezel around the system
ON/OFF switch. Remove the bezel and set aside.
3. On the back of the Base, remove the four corner screws (two on each
side) from the power bucket assembly cover plate.
4. Slide the power bucket assembly partially out from the back of the
Base to reveal the wiring.
5. Disconnect the necessary wires, noting their connection locations.
6. Slide the power bucket assembly completely out from the back of the
Base.
7. Troubleshoot and repair as needed.
8. Slide the repaired power bucket assembly completely in.
9. Reinstall the four corner screws
10. Reinstall the two screws and bezel.
Page 67
Replacing the Base fans

Note: The Base fan/cable is P/N 801428.
source.
2. Remove the front panel, and for easier access, remove the battery
assembly and set aside. See procedure for Installing New Batteries
beginning on page 64.
3. Remove the two screws securing the battery tray. Remove the tray
and set aside.
Page 68
• If the electronic gas system is installed, it may be necessary to
remove the gas system to access the right-side screw:
• Disconnect the source gas supply hoses at the input fittings on the
back of the Base.
• Remove the retainer screw securing the gas system to the front of
the Base.
• Slide the gas system partially out and disconnect the power cable
to the NIC board at the gas system connection.
• Slide the gas system completely out and set it aside.
• Remove the right hand screw from the battery tray.
• Remove the battery tray and set aside.
4. Disconnect the two fan connectors from the power manager module,
noting their connection locations.
5. From the left side of the Base, remove the five Allen-head screws that
secure the exhaust fan housing.
6. Slide the fan assembly downward until it clears the Base and then pull
the assembly away from the Base.
7. Loosen the four screws that secure the fan/cable assembly to the
exhaust fan housing.
Page 69
8. Remove the fan/cable assembly.
Note the arrow on the housing.
9. Install the new fan/cable assembly and secure the four mounting
screws, making sure the arrow on the fan points out.
Note the orientation.

10. Reinstall the exhaust fan housing.
11. Reconnect both fan connectors to the power manager module.
12. Reinstall the battery tray.
13. Reinstall the electronic gas system, if necessary.
14. Reinstall the battery assembly.
15. Reinstall the front panel.
16. Set to New Battery and Confirm
Page 70
• Connect to the AC source and power on the System 1.
• On the Service and Diagnostics screen, press Power
Maintenance; in the Settings block, press New Battery.

Diagnostics screen.
Page 71
Replacing the power manager module
Note: The power manager module is P/N 802095.
source.
2. Remove the front panel, and for easier access, remove the battery
assembly and set aside.
• Remove the screw securing the battery assembly to the Base.

• Disconnect the battery harness at P18.
• Slide out the battery assembly and set aside. Note: The batteries
are heavy.
• Remove the two screws securing the battery tray to the Base.
Remove the tray and set aside.
• If the electronic gas system is installed, it may be necessary to
remove the gas system to access the right-side screw:
• Disconnect the source gas supply hoses at the input fittings on
the back of the Base.
• Remove the retainer screw securing the gas system to the
front of the Base.
• Slide the gas system partially out and disconnect the power
cable to the NIC board at the gas system connection.
• Slide the gas system completely out and set it aside.
• Remove the right hand screw from the battery tray.
• Remove the battery tray and set aside.
3. Disconnect the eleven cable assembly connectors from the power
manager module, noting their connection locations.
4. Remove the screw securing the module assembly to the Base.
Page 72
5. Slide the module assembly out.
6. Remove the speaker and LED bracket from the old power manager
module and attach them to the new power manager module.
7. Slide the new module assembly in part way.
8. Reconnect the cables at the back of the module assembly.
9. Slide the module assembly completely in.
10. Reconnect the remaining cables to the module assembly.
11. Install and tighten the screw securing the module assembly to the
Base.
12. Reinstall the battery assembly.
• Install the battery tray and tighten the two screws securing the tray
to the Base.
• Install the batteries, tighten the screw securing the batteries to the
Base.
• Re-attach the battery harness at P18.
13. Reinstall the electronic gas system, if necessary.
14. Reinstall the front cover.
15. Connect the system to the AC source and turn on the main power
switch.
16. Power on all pumps and dial up each pump to maximum speed.
17. Unplug the power cord from the AC power source.
18. Verify the pumps continue to operate.
The LED on the system front panel will begin flashing and an audible
tone will sound indicating the system is running on battery power. The
LED color indicates the available capacity of the batteries.
Page 73
19. Plug the power cord into the AC power source.
After a 10-second delay, the LED on the front panel becomes steady,
indicating the system is running on AC power. The LED color indicates
the charging state of the batteries.
20. Stop all pumps.
Note: While running the system on battery, available battery capacity

is displayed on the blinking power status indicator LED on the front
panel of the Base.
Note: A hardware circuit turns off the battery switch when the battery
voltage drops to 21 VDC or less to prevent deep discharging of the
batteries.
Available Battery Capacity
Blinking LED Capacity Description
Indicator
Green 24.5 VDC to 27.5 VDC Batteries are fully

charged, at maximum
capacity.
Yellow 23.0 VDC to <24.5 VDC Batteries are in the
mid-range of capacity.
Red <23.0 VDC Batteries are near

complete discharge.
Note: If the capacity is in the yellow or red range, recharge the system
to bring the capacity into the green range.
• Connect the System 1 to AC mains source and power on.

• On the Service and Diagnostics screen, press New Battery.
Page 74
Diagnostics screen.
remain at 0 for 2 hours, the system will reset the TNAC to 18 Ah.
Replacing the NIC board

Note: If a receptacle on the NIC board fails, any module that is inserted in that
receptacle will appear to have failed. Try inserting the module in another receptacle
before deciding if the NIC board or module needs replacement. The module can be
inserted in another, functioning receptacle, as an alternative to immediate NIC board
replacement.
Note: P/N 801742 is used for both the left-side and right-side NIC assembly.
source.
2. Remove the screws that secure the front panel.
3. Disconnect the battery harness at P18 on the power manager module.
4. Remove the splash shield and dress panels necessary to gain access
and set them aside.
5. Remove the modules connected to the NIC assembly, noting their

installed location, and set them aside.
6. Remove the filter grill and set it aside. On some units, it may also be
necessary to remove the bezel around the hose connections.
7. Remove the rear dress panel by removing the two screws in the grill
pocket and sliding it up and off.
8. Remove the four corner screws that secure the NIC assembly to the
Base.
9. Tip the NIC assembly away from the Base. This may require some
persuasion as it is a tight fit.
Page 75
10. Disconnect the wiring harnesses from the NIC assembly: two cables at
the back of the NIC assembly and the gas system power cord at the
front of the NIC assembly.
11. Remove the NIC assembly by tipping it forward, and then sliding it up
and out of the lower slots.
Caution: Use proper static precautions when working near or handling printed
circuit boards or integrated circuit chips.
12. Remove the NIC board from the mounting assembly.
13. Install the new NIC board on the mounting assembly.
14. Install the new NIC assembly.
15. Connect the wiring harnesses to the new NIC assembly.
16. Install and tighten the four corner screws securing the NIC assembly
to the Base.
17. Reinstall the rear dress panel.
18. Reinstall the filter grill and bezel if necessary.
19. Reinstall the modules on the NIC assembly in their original order.
20. Reinstall the splash shield and remaining dress panels.
21. Reconnect the battery harness at P18 on the power manager module.
Page 76
• Connect the System 1 to AC mains source and power on.
• On the Service and Diagnostics screen, press New Battery.

Diagnostics screen.
Page 77
Replacing the power supplies
Note: The power supply is P/N 813119.
Note: The status of the power supplies is displayed on the Power Maintenance
screen for CCM software revision 2.2.1 and above.
source.
2. Remove the front panel.
3. Disconnect the electronic gas system power cord at the gas system to
make room to slide the power supplies out.
4. Mark the alignment of the speaker panel on the power manager

board.
5. Loosen the two screws securing the speaker panel to the power
manager and slide the speaker panel away from the power manager
to make room to slide the power supplies out.
Page 78
6. Disconnect all connections including the 220 VAC power, 24 VDC
regulated power, and sense and status signal connections. If you are
removing both power supplies, make sure the wires to each power
supply stay together and are reconnected to the appropriate new
supply. If the status lines and the 24 V power lines are crossed, the
power supplies will be damaged.
7. Remove the single screw securing the power supply assembly to the
Base.
8. Pull the sliding mounting bracket toward you to remove the power
supply assembly.
9. Invert the power supply assembly on a bench.
10. Remove the three screws that secure the power supply to the sliding
mounting bracket, and remove the power supply.
11. Install the new power supply and tighten the three screws securing it
to the sliding mounting bracket.
12. Slide the power supply assembly back into the Base, aligning it with
the mounting rail slide.
Page 79
13. Install and tighten the screw securing the power supply assembly to
the Base.
14. Reinstall the connectors and screws for the AC power, 24 VDC
regulated power, and current sharing control connectors.
Note: Earlier versions of the power manager board have a five-wire

connector with status signal and sense lines that go to each power
supply. If you have to replace a power supply in an older system,
remove the jumper from the new power supply (bottom two pins) and
hook up the status signal and sense line to the new power supply the
same way it was connected to the old power supply. Currently, power
supplies have a two-pin sense line connector that is a jumper. Then, a
three-wire connector from the power manager board plugs into the
power supply next to the jumper.
15. Align the speaker panel to the previous marks on the power manger
board and tighten the two screws.
16. Reconnect the connector and the electronic gas system power cord.
Page 80
Troubleshooting–Chassis
Note: Before performing any troubleshooting, make sure all NFCs have been completed.
System 1 Power Troubleshooting Guide

With any power problem, perform the following steps, and compare your results to the
Troubleshooting Power Supplies Chart on page 82.
1. Check one power supply for 24.5 V with the black VOM lead on the
black wire and the red lead on the orange wire.
2. To check the status signal line, leave the black VOM lead on the black
wire and put the red VOM lead on the white wire, (second one down
on the small connector ON THE SAME POWER SUPPLY, ONLY.)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 on the other power supply.
4. Check the charge mode status displayed in the Battery Status

Registers in the Service area of the CCM.
5. Check the battery voltage with the system on battery, AC

disconnected, and some pumps running under a load (with tubing
installed).
6. Your findings for each step above should match a corresponding

column in the Troubleshooting Power Supplies Chart on the next
page. Each column on one line across the chart should match all your
readings, and the last column of that line under Comment will show
the outcome.
Page 81
Troubleshooting Power Chart

CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK Comment
Power Status Charge Battery
Supply Sense line Mode Voltage (V)
Voltage
(V) GOOD = 0 V Fast/Float
BAD = 5 V 1/0
24.5 Good Float (0) 24 or less Power Mgr – BAD
24.5 Good Fast (1) 24 or less Battery – BAD (stays in Fast Mode for > 13 hours)
24.5 Good Float (0) 26 – 27 Good System
24.5 Good Fast (1) 21 – 29.5 Good System
24.5 Bad Float (0) N/A Power Supply BAD
24.5 Bad Left in Fast N/A Power Supply BAD (Supply failed while in fast charge)
7.5 N/A N/A N/A Power Supply BAD – Check Power Manager Fuses
Are any Power Manager Board Fuses Blown?
1. Yes -> Replace power supply fuses on the power

manager board.
2. No -> power manager is OK. Replace power

supply.
0 N/A N/A N/A Power supply or power bucket has problem.

If 190 to 220 volts is measured coming into power
supply, then replace power supply. If low or no voltage
is measured into power supply, check power bucket
components for problem.
Column 1 refers to checking the power supply voltage on the orange and black wires.
Column 2 refers to checking the status signal line voltage on the black ground wire as in column 1 and
the white wire of the same power supply.
Column 3 refers to the readings on the Battery Status Registers in the Service area on the CCM.
Column 4 refers to the voltage readings of the two batteries in series, with AC disconnected, and the
system operating on battery with pumps running.
Column 5 will help you identify the faulty component/s based on the four previous columns.
Page 82
Troubleshooting Table—Chassis
Note: If the battery icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading and
you have verified the jumper is installed (see page 148), download the system, power
manager, and LAN I/F logs. If a device cannot be assigned and linked, also download the
device log. Submit the logs to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Service Department.
Chassis Problem Check Action

Keyword
Alert/Alarm No audible Alert or Speaker/LED assembly is
speaker and connection.
Alarm tone. located on the power
manager module. Slide the
module part way out from
the chassis. Replace
speaker/LED assembly if
necessary.
Replace power manager

module. See page 72.
AUX Outlet Equipment will not turn Reset circuit breaker.
resettable auxiliary circuit
on when connected to Remove batteries and
breaker.
auxiliary outlet. battery tray and check
output voltage from the
torroid transformer to the
auxiliary outlet.
Repair the power bucket
assembly. See page 66.
Page 83
Keyword
Battery icon Red X appears on the If no alert/alarm tone
if alert/alarm tone sounds
battery icon on a sounds, replace the power
for any safety connection.
Perfusion screen manager board. See page
indicating the generic 72.
board circuitry on the
power manager board
has failed.
Battery System message: Replace power supply if
Power Supply Status on
Battery Cannot Be necessary. See page 78.
Power Maintenance
Charged, Full Back-up
screen; 0 = Good
May Not Be Available
Battery System message:
LMD value on Battery
Battery Needs Service,
Status Registers screen:
Full Back-up May Not
Be Available If battery was Set to New Battery and
(LMD value is <180/10 disconnected or replaced, Confirm. See page 64.
or 18 Ah) LMD will be 150/10 or
15 Ah,
If power manager board Set to New Battery and
was replaced, LMD will be Confirm. See page 64.
150/10 or 15 Ah,
With a full discharge of Replace batteries since old
batteries and recharge, ones will no longer charge
LMD could be <180/10 or to 18 Ah. See page 64.
<18 Ah.
Battery With fully discharged Perform a controlled system
the Battery Status
batteries, after returning shutdown; power the
Registers, on the Power
to AC power, the system off and then on; and
Maintenance screen; they
charging circuitry will be recheck the Battery Status
will display Charge Rate
in an incorrect state. Registers which should be
at 0 and Charge State at
Charge Rate at 1 and
0.
Charge State at 1.
Page 84
Keyword
Battery System will not switch The four battery fuses are
battery fuses,
over to battery power. on the power manager
board next to P18. Replace
battery fuses if necessary.
battery charge, With AC removed, read the

voltage across the batteries
(24 V or greater). If the
reading is near 21 V,
recharge the batteries. If the
batteries will not hold a
charge, replace batteries.
See page 64.
With fully charged batteries,

charger voltage.
connect a voltmeter to the
battery leads. Power up the
system. The voltage should
rise to 29.5 V (fast charge
rate) and then drop back to
27.5 V (floating charge
rate). If not replace the
power manager module.
See page 72.
Battery Batteries will not run With AC removed, read the
battery charge,
system for specified voltage across the batteries
60 minutes. (24 V or greater). If the
reading is near 21 V,
recharge the batteries. If the
batteries will not hold a
charge, replace batteries.
See page 64.
charger voltage.
With fully charged batteries,
connect a voltmeter to the
battery leads. Power up the
system. The voltage should
rise to 29.5 V (fast charge
rate) and then drop back to
27.5 V (floating charge
rate). If not replace the
power manager module.
See page 72.
Page 85
Keyword
Battery Gas gauge or actual Install most current version
system software version.
voltage readings of system software to
indicate that the correct the problem.
batteries are fully
charged, but the power
manager LED shows Go to Service/Power
solid yellow indicating Manager screen and set the
that the batteries are battery to New. Refer to
not fully charged. installing new battery
instructions on page 64.
Replace the power manager

Fans Chassis fans are not Check fan connections at

fans and connections.
running. the power manager module
Replace fans if necessary.
See page 68.
LED No front panel Battery Slide the power manager
LED wiring and
Status LED. module part way out. Check
connection.
the LED/speaker
connection. Replace the
LED/speaker assembly if
necessary.

Page 86
Keyword
LED Red LED on power manager Reseat or replace
all connections to the
board is always red. connectors.
power manager board.
Verify both power supplies
are operational. See page
82.
board.
Modules CCM, pumps, lamp, Replace cable assemblies.
any cable involved with
EPGS, or any modules
the module,
will not turn on.
power-up in another NIC Replace NIC board. See

connector. page 75.
power-up in base's other Replace NIC board. See

NIC board. page 75.
Replace module.
Power System will not turn on. Reset circuit breakers. The
one or both resettable
four battery fuses are on the
system circuit breakers
power manager board next
and battery fuses,
to P18. Replace battery
fuses if necessary.
AC wall power and Connect system to another

battery fuses, outlet.
Locate DC supply fuses at

DC supply fuses. P10 and P17. Replace DC
supply fuses that protect the
power supplies if necessary.
See page 497.
The four battery fuses are
on the power manager
board next to P18. Replace
battery fuses if necessary.
Replace power supplies if
necessary. See page 78.
module if necessary. See
page 72.
Page 87
Keyword
Power System will only run on Connect system to another
AC wall power,
battery while connected outlet.
to AC.
both system resettable Reset circuit breakers.

circuit breakers,
ON/OFF switch and Replace ON/OFF switch

connection, assembly if necessary.
24 V power supplies, Check the 24 V output from

the power supplies with a
voltmeter. Replace 24 V
power supplies if necessary.
See page 78.
Replace torroid transformer

torroid transformer,
if necessary. See Item 39
on page 543 for 110/120 V
unit and page 523 for
220/240 V unit.
in-rush current limiters in Replace in-rush current

the power bucket, limiters if necessary. See
Item 22 on page 543 for
110/120 V unit and page
523 for 220/240 V unit.
Replace solid state relay if

solid state relay in the necessary. See Item 21 on
power bucket, page 543 for 110/120 V unit
and page 523 for 220/240 V
unit.
Replace line filter if

line filter in the power
necessary. See Item 15 on
bucket.
page 543 for 110/120 V unit
and page 523 for 220/240 V
unit.
Red bar A red bar appears at the Replace defective
each connected module.
top of the CCM and module(s).
system hangs up.
Page 88
Central Control Monitor (CCM)

P/N 802100 Central Control Monitor
P/N 801441 Central Control Monitor Mounting Arm
P/N 804516 CCM Cable to Base Assembly (power cord assembly)
P/N 803740 Service Data Card
P/N 803739 System Configuration Card
P/N 804517 Cooling Fan Filter
P/N 808059 Cooling Fan Assembly
P/N 804802 Backlight Kit
P/N 804958 LAN I/F Board, Programmed
P/N 801443 Counterbalance Link
Overview
Purpose of the Device
The central control monitor (CCM) for the Terumo® Advanced Perfusion System 1
provides centralized display of system information and on-screen control of all
system devices. The CCM is used to create Perfusion screens including:
• selecting the number and types of devices and sensors, device names,
and colors.
• assigning Perfusion screen representations to physical modules.
• connecting devices to safety systems.
• selecting alert and alarm limits and device responses.
During use, the CCM monitors the overall system for alert, alarm, error, or status
messages, and displays these in priority order in a dedicated message area. The
flow, servo regulation to pressure or flow, and automatic cardioplegia time or
volume delivery.
Page 89
Monitor Requirements
Voltage
Nominal Voltage +24 VDC
Nominal Current 3 A (maximum)
Voltage Input Range 19.8 VDC to 28 VDC
Power Consumption 75 W max @ 19.8 VDC to 28 VDC
Equipment Performance
Ground resistance of 0.2 ohms maximum from any exposed metal
surface to any grounding point on the chassis.
Equipment Environmental Conditions
Operation

Storage
The CCM has three functional areas: Perfusion, Configuration, and Service.
The Perfusion area allows the user to select a Perfusion screen and run a case.
During use, the Perfusion screen is used to control and monitor the system modules
and devices. Advanced functionality, such as pulsatile flow, servo regulation,
cardioplegia volume tracking, and automatic cardioplegia time or volume delivery is
initiated from a Perfusion screen.
The Configuration area of the CCM allows the user to define Perfusion screens
including number and names of modules and devices, assignment of screen icons
to physical devices, safety system connections, and selection of alert and alarm
limits.
The Service area is password protected and limited to authorized service personnel.
This area is used to view the system log, export the system log to a PC card for use
on an external computer, view module error event data, and calibrate the touch
screen. It is also used to manage security access control, view the system software
version control area, and upgrade system and module software.
Page 90
Physical Description
External Description
The CCM enclosure is a two-piece sheet metal structure, comprised of a front
enclosure and a back panel. All the electronic components are mounted in the front
enclosure. The strain relief for the power cable and the mounting bracket
attachment studs are on the back panel. The back panel is fastened to the front
enclosure with screws. The touch screen and its sealing gasket are mounted to the
front of the enclosure from the inside. A small, hinged door is on the left side to
provide access to PC cards. The PC card slots are labeled on the inside of the
access door. The front enclosure has ventilation holes on the bottom. An air filter is
visible through the ventilation holes from the outside. The filter is accessed by
removing the back panel of the enclosure. The CCM has appropriate labeling. Early
CCM units have a round, plastic hole plug at the upper right corner of the front
housing.
Internal Description
The following components are mounted in the front enclosure:
• Touch screen
• Flat panel display with its controller interface board
• Computer board piggy-backed with the LAN I/F board and Disk-on Chip
• DC/DC power supply
• Touch screen controller board
• Backlight power supply-controller board
• Two fans
• PCMCIA II interface board, mounted in a sheet metal door assembly
A dust filter channel is built into the lower area of the front housing. One fan pulls air
into the enclosure while the other blows air out. An EMI grounding gasket is
installed between the front enclosure and the back cover.
Interface
User Interface
The graphical user interface (GUI) is divided into three functional areas: Perfusion,
Configuration, and Service. The main screen provides access to these functional
areas and provides access to initiate a controlled system shutdown.
Page 91
The Configuration area is used to define Perfusion screens. A Perfusion screen is
organized around a patient graphic representation for easy identification of system
data. The graphic provides the means to make the on-screen representation
approximate the physical locations of the devices within the perfusion circuit. The
Configuration area is used to select the number and types of pumps, sensors, and
devices. Each device is named, assigned a color (if appropriate), and placed in a
valid screen location. Safety connections between pumps and sensors, pumps and
other devices, and between pumps are established. Users select pump responses
to alert and alarm events. Also, the Configuration area is used to assign the on-
screen configuration to physical devices connected to the system.
The Perfusion screen allows the user to select a Perfusion screen and run a case.
Each Perfusion screen may be password protected. In preparation to run a case,
patient information is entered, calibrations can be performed, and safety system
limits can be checked, modified if needed, and activated. During use, the CCM can
be used to control and monitor all system modules and devices. The CCM monitors
the system for any alert, alarm, error, or status messages and displays these priority
order in a dedicated message area. The user can also initiate advanced functionality
such as primary pump pulsatile flow, flow and pressure servo regulation,
cardioplegia volume tracking, and automatic cardioplegia time or volume delivery.
The Service area is password protected and allows an authorized user to:
• View system log.
• Export system log to an external computer via the Service Data Card.
• View module and pump error event data.
• Manage security access controls.
• View system software version control area.
• Upgrade CCM, module, and pump software.
• Calibrate the touch screen.
Message Area
All Perfusion screens display a message area at the top of the screen.
Alarm, alert, error, and status message appear here in priority order; in the
case of equal priority messages, the messages appear in the order they
occur.
Mute All
All Perfusion screens display a Mute All button to the left of the message
area. This control allows the user to silence all currently active audible
alerts and alarms.
Status Information
All Perfusion screens display time of day, showing the current time in 24-
hour clock format, and a battery icon to indicate power source and battery
status.
Page 92
Timers
All Perfusion screens display pump and clamp timers. The timer locations
vary depending on the patient direction and primary pump location
selected during configuration. Pump and clamp timers are count-up timers.
The Timer Control Box includes the timer name, a time display area, and a
Reset button. The time display indicates the elapsed time. Start a timer by
touching the time display area. The start time appears below the display
area. Stop a timer by touching the time display area again. The stop time
appears to the right of the start time and the Reset button is activated.
Reset a count-up timer to zero by touching the Reset button.
Control Slide Bars
Primary Pump
Every Perfusion screen has one control slide bar dedicated to the
primary pump. The primary pump control slide bar is always
displayed and is located on the same side of the screen as the
primary pump. The slide bar is never covered up by any of the tab
areas.
Other Pumps
Each pump in a Perfusion screen has a corresponding slide bar.
Slide bars for pumps other than the primary pump, share a slide
bar location on the opposite side of the screen from the primary
pump slide bar. The control slide bar is never covered up by any of
the tab areas. If the pump is off, the slide bar is activated by
pressing the Start button in the pump control box. If the pump is
on, the slide bar is activated when the pump speed/flow display
button is pressed.
Occluder/Gas Flow
The occluder slide bar and the two electronic gas system slide
bars share a location adjacent to the primary pump slide bar.
These slide bars are never covered up by any of the tab areas.
Roller Pump
Pump Control Box
Pump control boxes are displayed on the lower third of the screen
and can be used to start and stop pumps, and to monitor current
pump speed or flow values. All pump control boxes, except
master/follower, consist of three elements – a Start/Stop button, a
speed/flow display area, and pump icon button. The Start/Stop
button activates or deactivates the pump. Touch the speed/flow
display area on a primary pump to scroll through three possible
2
display selections: L/min, L/min/m , or mL/kg/min. The pump icon
button has a roller pump symbol. The rollers on the symbol rotate
in proportion to the pump speed when the pump is running.
Pressing the pump icon button opens the Pump subtab.
Page 93
Master/Follower
Two roller pumps configured in a master/follower relationship are
displayed in one pump control box.
The single Start/Stop button starts or stops both pumps. The
master pump slide bar can be accessed by pressing the Start
button, or, if the pump is running, by touching the pump speed/flow
display area.
The follower pump slide bar can be used to adjust the
master/follower ratio. The ratio is displayed as a percentage of the
master pump flow rate or speed. The master/follower ratio is
displayed on the follower pump below the speed/flow display. If
L/min was chosen as the display units, then the total flow rate for
both pumps will be displayed.
Centrifugal Pumps
Centrifugal Pump Control Box
Pump control boxes are displayed on the lower third of the screen
and can be used to start and stop pumps, and to monitor current
pump speed or flow values. All pump control boxes consist of
three elements – a Start/Stop button, a speed/flow display area,
and pump icon button. The Start/Stop button activates or
deactivates the pump. Touch the speed/flow display area on a
primary pump to scroll through three possible display selections:
2
L/min, L/min/m , or mL/kg/min. If a centrifugal pump is not
configured to display flow, the speed/flow display button will
display dashes. The pump icon button has a centrifugal pump
symbol. The impellors on the symbol rotate in proportion to the
pump speed when the pump is running. Pressing the pump icon
button opens the Pump tab.
Flow Sensor Display
If a flow sensor is associated with the centrifugal pump, the
measured flow data will be displayed in the speed/flow display
area.
Occluder
The occluder slide bar appears when the occluder icon is pressed. The
occluder slide bar appears adjacent to the primary pump slide bar and
shares its location with the gas system slide bars. The occluder requires
an initial calibration and then the slide bar can be used to open, close, or
adjust the occluder setting.
Page 94
The electronic gas system is represented by two icons, labeled Gas and
%O2. The gas system slide bars share one location with the occluder slide
bar, adjacent to the primary pump slide bar. The gas slide bars appear one
at a time when the appropriate icon is pressed. The FiO2 slide bar appears
when the %O2 icon is pressed. The total flow control slide bar appears
when the Gas icon is pressed. If 95/5 is selected, a third icon for FiCO2
will appear on the screen.
Air Bubble Detector
The air bubble detector (ABD) icon indicates the state of the ABD system:
green background indicates the system is enabled and not sensing air;
gray background indicates the system is disabled; a red, flashing icon
indicates the presence of air. Pressing the ABD icon opens the ABD
subtab.
Level Detector
The level detector icon indicates the state of the level sensing system:
green background indicates that the level system is enabled with no alert
or alarm condition; gray background indicates that the level system is
disabled; a yellow, flashing icon indicates detection of a level alert; a red,
flashing icon indicates detection of a level alarm. Pressing the level
detector icon opens the Level subtab.
Pressure Sensor
The pressure icon displays CAL until the pressure transducer has been
calibrated. When calibration is complete, the pressure sensor value is
displayed on the icon in mmHg. A yellow, flashing pressure icon indicates
detection of a pressure alert. A red, flashing pressure icon indicates
detection of a pressure alarm. Pressing the pressure icon opens the
Pressure subtab.
Temperature Sensor
The temperature icon displays temperature sensor value in the range of
0.0°C to 50.0ºC. For temperatures below range, and if a temperature
probe is disconnected, the icon displays --- ºC. For temperatures above
the range, and if a temperature probe is partially connected, the icon
displays 999 ºC. The icon is blank if the temperature system malfunctions.
A red, flashing temperature icon indicates detection of a temperature
alarm. Pressing the temperature icon opens the Temperature subtab.
Flowmeter
The flowmeter icon displays flow rate in L/min in the range of –9.99 to
+9.99. For flow outside the range, or if no data is received, the icon
displays --- L/min. A red flashing icon indicates detection of backflow or
minimum flow. Pressing the flowmeter icon opens the Flow subtab.
Page 95
CDI 100
The CDI 100 display appears in a fixed location on the screen. The icons
appear in a stacked formation and are labeled SAT % for O2 saturation,
HCT % for hematocrit, and HB for hemoglobin. The icon will display ---
when no data is received or the data is below range. The icon will display
999 when the data is above range. The position of the icon in the stack is
selected during configuration.
CDI 500
The CDI 500 display appears in fixed locations on the screen. Four
venous, four arterial and one other data values can be displayed on the
screen. The display icons appear in a stacked formation. The data values
are selected and the display icons are arranged during configuration.
If no data is received, or the data values are below range, the icon will
display - - -. For data values above the range, the icon will display 999.
Page 96
Perfusion Screen Tabs
Setup Tab
Patient Subtab View/change patient height and

weight.
Calculate body surface area and
blood volume.
Gas Subtab Select O2 blend
View/change Low FiO2 alarm limit.
Calibrate O2 analyzer.
Pump Subtab Select pump via pump select button.
View pump type.
View/change display units.
View/change roller pump tube size.
View/change centrifugal pump
minimum flow alarm.
View/change pump responses to
events.
Occluder Subtab View/change occluder response.
Timer Subtab Select timer via timer select button.
View timer type, count-up or count-
down.
Adjust initial value for count-down
timers.
Time/Date Subtab View/change time and date.
Page 97
Safety Tab
Mute Button A Mute button appears on all safety

subtabs. It is enabled when the
selected device (air, level, pressure,
temp, or flow) has an active alarm or
alert and will silence the audible tone
when pressed. If there is no currently
active alarm or alert, the Mute button
is unavailable.
Air Subtab Select air detector via select button.
Turn air detection on and off.
Reset to clear alarm condition.
Mute an alarm.
Level Subtab Select level detector via select button.
View/change level detection mode.
Turn level detection on and off.
Mute an alarm or alert.
Pressure Subtab Select pressure via select button.
Calibrate pressure transducer.
View/adjust alarm limit.
View/adjust alert limit.
Select display option.
Mute an alarm or alert.
Temperature Subtab Select temperature via select button.
View/adjust alarm limit.
Mute an alarm.
Flow Subtab Select flow via select button.
View current flow value.
Mute an alarm.
Page 98
CPG Tab
Delivery Subtab View current delivery volume of

cardioplegia.
View/adjust total delivery volume of
cardioplegia.
View time since last cardioplegia
delivery.
Select mode: Deliver or Recirculate.
Select dose delivery mode: Manual or
Auto Dose.
Select Auto Dose type: Induction,
Maintenance, or Other.
Reset Auto Dose.
Auto Dose Setup Subtab Select Auto Dose display mode for
Delivery Subtab: Hide or View.
View/change Induction Dose units:
time or mL.
View/change Induction Dose value:
seconds or mL.
View/change Maintenance Dose units:
time or mL.
View/change Maintenance Dose
value: seconds or mL.
View/change Other Dose units: time or
mL.
View/change Other Dose value:
seconds or mL.
Aux Tab
Timers Subtab View and control auxiliary timers.
Auxiliary timers are selected during
configuration.
Messages Subtab Access a list of time-stamped system
messages that occurred on case. The
messages are sorted in order of
occurrence, with the most recent
messages at the top of the list.
Page 99
System Tab
Settings Subtab View Perfusion screen name.
View/adjust the audio tone volume.
Power Subtab View power source: AC or battery.
View AC power capacity used: % if on
AC, - - - if on battery.
View estimated battery time
remaining.
View battery charge level.
Reassign Module Subtab Reassign a pump or module to a

different pump or module in the
current Perfusion screen for the
duration of the case only.
Page 100
Module Info Subtab Select module by type.
Select module by name.
View module information:
• Module ID
• Software revision
• Self-test result: Pass/Fail
• Operation result: Pass/Fail
• V5 Voltage (mV) and Pass/Fail
Status
• V5 Current (mA) and Pass/Fail
Status
• Vmot Voltage (mV) (if
applicable) and Pass/Fail
Status
• Vmot Current (mA) (if
applicable) and Pass/Fail
Status
• Temperature (°C) and
Pass/Fail Status
• Total volume (mL): for roller
pumps
Post Case Tab

End the case, return to the main screen.
Pump Tab
For roller and centrifugal pumps, the Pump tab appears when the pump icon button
is pressed. A primary Pump tab has three subtabs: Summary, Servo and Pulse. A
master/follower pump combination has three subtabs: Summary, Servo, Master
Status or Follower Status. All other Pump tabs have two subtabs: Summary and
Servo.
Page 101
Summary Subtab (view current pump settings)
Roller Pumps Pump name, RPM, direction of flow,

flow in L/min, tube size or flow
constant, and configured safety
connections.
Centrifugal Pumps Pump name, RPM, direction of flow,
flow in L/min (or - - - if no flowmeter),
minimum flow alarm value, and
configured safety connections.
Servo Subtab
Select a servo source.
Enable servo control.
Disable servo control.
Pulse Subtab (primary pump only)
View/change pulse width (roller only, centrifugal set at 50%).
View/change pulse base.
View/change pulse rate (roller only, centrifugal set at 60 BPM).
View square wave of pulsatile flow.
Enable pulse control.
Disable pulse control.
Master/Follower
View master pump name.
View follower pump name.
View master to follower ratio.
View connect status: Pass/Fail.
Reconnect master and follower if connection has been lost.
Page 102
System Messages
The following tables include the messages that can appear on the CCM and
corresponding operator responses.
Alarm Messages
Note: The table is sorted alphabetically by the message text.
Alarm Condition CCM Alarm Message Operator Response

Air detected. <ABD Name>: Correct air condition, reset air
AIR DETECTED sensor, restart pump if stopped.
Air detected. AIR DETECTED: Correct air condition, reset air

<Pump Name> sensor, restart pump if stopped.
>Pump Response>
Air sensor on, and <ABD Name> Reconnect air sensor, reset air
disconnected. AIR DETECTED sensor, restart pump if stopped.
Backflow has been <Flow Sensor Name>: Correct backflow condition.

detected. BACKFLOW Alarm clears automatically.
Restart pump if stopped.
Backflow has been BACKFLOW: Correct backflow condition.
detected. <Pump Name> Alarm clears automatically.
<Pump Response> Restart pump if stopped.
Primary pump low level <Primary Pump Name>: Try to restart motor. If message
motor faults cause the CHECK MOTOR reappears, either reassign pump
pump to stop. or use standby equipment.
Discontinue use of the pump
until it has been serviced by
Terumo Cardiovascular Systems
Service.
95/5 source pressure HIGH 95/5 SUPPLY Check 95/5 supply pressure and
>70 psi. PRESSURE switch source if necessary.
Air source pressure >70 psi. HIGH AIR SUPPLY Check air supply pressure and
PRESSURE switch source if necessary.
O2 source pressure >70 psi HIGH OXYGEN SUPPLY Check O2 supply pressure and
PRESSURE switch source if necessary.
95/5 source pressure LOW 95/5 SUPPLY Check 95/5 hose connections.
<30 psi or more than 18 psi PRESSURE Check 95/5 supply and switch
below the O2 pressure. source if necessary.
Air source pressure <30 psi LOW AIR SUPPLY Check air hose connections.
or more than 18 psi below PRESSURE Check air supply and switch
the O2 pressure. source if necessary.
Page 103
FiO2 has dropped below LOW FiO2 Increase FiO2 setting to above
minimum limit. the minimum limit to clear alarm.
Reservoir level below alarm LOW LEVEL: Fill reservoir to above alarm
level. <Pump Name> level. Alarm clears automatically.
Reservoir level below alarm <Level Detector Name>: Fill reservoir to above alarm
level. LOW LEVEL level. Alarm clears automatically.
O2 source pressure <30 psi LOW OXYGEN SUPPLY Check O2 hose connections.
or more than 18 psi below PRESSURE Check O2 supply and switch
the air pressure. source if necessary.
Flow for flow sensor placed <Pump Name>: Correct low flow condition. Alarm
on a centrifugal pump has MINIMUM FLOW clears automatically.
gone below minimum limit.
Flow for flow sensor placed MINIMUM FLOW Correct low flow condition. Alarm
on a centrifugal pump has <Pump Name> clears automatically. Restart
gone below minimum limit. <Pump Response> pump if stopped.
Pressure has risen above <Pressure Name>: Correct over pressure condition.
alarm limit. OVER PRESSURE Start pump if stopped.
Pressure has risen above OVER PRESSURE: Correct over pressure condition.
alarm limit. <Pump Name> Start pump if stopped.
<Pump Response>
Over temperature condition. <Temperature Name>: Correct over temperature
OVER TEMPERATURE condition. Alarm clears
automatically.
Primary pump internal error <Primary Pump Name>: Reassign pump, use standby
detected. SERVICE PUMP equipment or use hand crank.
Discontinue use of the pump
until it has been serviced by
Service.
Pump goes to 0 flow as a <Pump Name>: STOPPED Correct condition. Start pump if
result of a Reduce Speed stopped.
response to an alert or
alarm.
Pump goes to 0 flow as a <Pump Name>: STOPPED Correct the conditions that
result of receiving a Pause caused the Reduce
and a Reduce Speed Speed/Pause responses. Restart
response. the pump.
Page 104
Battery is depleted and SYSTEM POWER Use manual backup equipment
system is shutting down. SHUTDOWN to finish case. Fully recharge
battery before using the system
again.
Alert Messages
Alert Condition CCM Alert Message Operator Response

Roller pump has detected <Primary Pump Name>: Stop and start the pump. If the
belt slip condition. BELT SLIP message reappears, discontinue
use of the pump and contact
Service. Reassign pump, use
standby equipment, or use hand
crank.
Follower pump cannot <Follower Pump Name>: Check ratio. Adjust speed of
maintain M/F ratio. CANNOT MEET RATIO master pump. If message
reappears, discontinue use of
master/follower operation.
Level sensor alert sensor <Level Detector Name>: Fill reservoir above alert level.
detects low level. CHECK LEVEL Start pump if stopped. Alert
clears automatically.
Level sensor alert sensor CHECK LEVEL Fill reservoir above alert level.
detects low level. <Pump Name> Start pump if stopped. Alert
<Pump Response> clears automatically.
Level system is on, module <Level Detector Name>: Disconnect and reconnect
hardware malfunction. CHECK MODULE module to system Base. If
message does not clear, replace
and reassign module.
Pressure has risen above <Pressure Name>: Monitor pressure. Check for
alert limit, but below alarm CHECK PRESSURE condition that could lead to
limit. pressure alarm.
Pressure has risen above CHECK PRESSURE Monitor pressure. Check for
alert limit, but below alarm <Pump Name> condition that could lead to
limit. <Pump Response> pressure alarm.
Calibrated pressure probe <Pressure Name>: Reconnect and recalibrate
malfunction detected. CHECK PROBE pressure probe. If message does
not clear, replace and recalibrate
probe.
Page 105
Level sensor self-test <Level Detector Name>: Check alarm and alert sensor
failure. CHECK PROBE connections. If message does
not clear, replace alarm or alert
sensor.
Air sensor malfunction. <ABD Name>: Check connection to air sensor,
CHECK SENSOR reset air sensor, replace if
necessary.
Calibrated pressure probe <Pressure Name>: Reconnect and recalibrate

disconnected. CONNECT PROBE pressure probe.
Level system is on, level <Level Detector Name>: Check the level detector cable
sensor cable has become DISCONNECTED connections. If message does
disconnected from module. not clear, replace and reassign
module.
Pump servo range has <Roller Pump Name>: Check the operation and
exceeded maximum limit. MAXIMUM LIMIT placement of the servo source. If
source is operating properly, try
to initiate servo operation via the
CCM. If the message reappears,
discontinue use of servo
operation.
Roller/centrifugal pump loss <Pump Name>: Check operation and placement

of servo source. MONITOR FLOW of servo source If source is
operating properly, try to initiate
servo operation via the CCM. If
message reappears, discontinue
use of servo operation.
Roller/centrifugal cannot <Pump Name>: Check the operation and

maintain servo setpoint. MONITOR FLOW placement of the servo source. If
CCM. If message reappears,
operation.
Pump speed is out of servo <Pump Name>: Check the operation and
range limit. MONITOR FLOW placement of the servo source. If
CCM. If the message reappears,
operation.
Page 106
Loss of data for calibrated <Pressure Name>: Check probe connections.
pressure probe. NO PRESSURE DATA Disconnect, then reconnect and
recalibrate probe. If message
does not clear, replace and
recalibrate probe.
No data from Follower <Follower Pump Name>: Check the follower pump cable
pump. NO RESPONSE connections. Stop the master
pump, open the master pump
tab, Master Status subtab, and
press the Reconnect button.
Start the master pump. If the
follower pump cannot be
reconnected, do not use the
follower pump until it has been
serviced by Terumo
Cardiovascular Systems Service.
Reassign pump or use standby
equipment.
No data from Master pump. <Master Pump Name>: Check the master pump cable
NO RESPONSE connections. Stop the follower
pump, open the master pump
tab, Master Status subtab, and
press the Reconnect button.
Start the master pump. If the
master pump cannot be
reconnected, do not use the
pump until it has been serviced
by Terumo Cardiovascular
Systems Service, Reassign
pump or use standby equipment.
Level system is on, level <Level Detector Name>: Mount the level sensor to venous
sensor not mounted to NOT ATTACHED reservoir. Alert clears
venous reservoir. automatically.
Occluder head not moving <Occluder Name>: Try disconnecting/ reconnecting
or not responding. NOT RESPONDING occluder head. If message does
not clear, replace occluder head.
Primary roller/centrifugal <Primary Pump Name>: Try to restart the pump. If the
pump has detected OVERCURRENT message reappears, discontinue
overcurrent condition. use of the pump until it has been
serviced by Terumo
Reassign pump, use standby
equipment, or use hand crank.
Page 107
Primary roller pump has <Primary Pump Name>: Try to restart the pump. If the
detected overspeed OVERSPEED message reappears, discontinue
condition. use of the pump and contact
crank.
Primary roller pump has <Primary Pump Name>: Clear the pump race or back off
detected pump jam PUMP JAM the occlusion and try to restart
condition. the pump. If the message
reappears, discontinue use of the
pump until it has been serviced
Systems Service. Reassign
Internal malfunction SERVICE GAS SYSTEM If not on bypass, calibrate O2

detected. analyzer. If message does not
clear, or if on bypass, adjust the
FiO2 and gas flow using the
knobs on the front of the system.
If the knobs cannot be turned,
use standby electronic gas
system. Do not use electronic
gas system until it has been
serviced by Terumo
See the Aux tab, Messages
subtab for any additional error or
status messages.
Internal malfunction <Module Name>: Try disconnecting/ reconnecting

detected. SERVICE MODULE module. If message does not
clear, reassign module.
Centrifugal pump servo <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Check the operation and
range has exceeded SERVO LIMIT placement of the servo source.
maximum servo limit. Alert will clear when speed slows
to within operating range.
Centrifugal pump servo <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Check the operation and
range has gone below SERVO LIMIT placement of the servo source.
minimum servo limit. Alert will clear when speed
increases to within operating
range.
Page 108
Roller pump has detected <Primary Pump Name>: Stop and start the pump. If the
underspeed condition. UNDERSPEED message reappears, discontinue
use of the pump and contact
crank.
Centrifugal pump has <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Clamp the lines. Stop and start
detected underspeed UNDERSPEED the pump. If the message
condition. reappears, discontinue use of the
pump and contact Terumo
equipment, or manual drive unit.
Error Messages
Error Condition CCM Error Message Operator Response

Calibrated occluder loses Calibrate Recalibrate occluder.
calibration. <Occluder Name>
Pressure probe calibration <Pressure Name>: Try to recalibrate probe. If

failed. Calibrate Failed message does not clear, replace
probe.
O2 sensor and blender Calibrate O2 Analyzer Recalibrate O2 analyzer. If
readings not in agreement. calibration fails, contact Terumo
O2 analyzer cannot be Cannot Calibrate O2 Analyzer Use backup analyzer until unit
calibrated. can be serviced by Terumo
Level system is off, module <Level Detector Name>: Disconnect and reconnect
hardware malfunction. Check Module module to Base. If message
reassign module.
Centrifugal pump low level <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Try to restart motor. If message
motor faults cause the Check Motor reappears, either reassign pump,
pump to stop. use standby equipment or
manual drive unit. Discontinue
use of the pump until it has been
serviced by Terumo
Page 109
Temperature probe has <Temp Channel Name>: Reconnect temperature probe.
become disconnected. Check Probe Error message clears
automatically.
Temperature out of range. <Temp Channel Name>: Correct out of range condition.
Check Probe Message clears automatically.
Flow sensor malfunction <Flow Sensor Name>: Disconnect and reconnect flow
detected. Check Sensor sensor. If message does not
clear, replace flow sensor.
Flow sensor disconnected <Flow Sensor Name>: Reconnect flow sensor. If
from tubing. Check Sensor message does not clear, replace
flow sensor.
Centrifugal pump speed <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Verify forward flow. Check
reduced below 1550 RPM. Coasting connected devices Increase
pump speed when appropriate.
Centrifugal motor has <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Message should clear when the
become disconnected. Connect Motor motor is reconnected.
Occluder has become <Occluder name>: Reconnect and recalibrate

disconnected after Connect Occluder occluder head.
calibration.
Electronic gas system is Gas System: Adjust FiO2 and gas flow using
not meeting demand and Knob Adjust Only the knobs located on the front of
has disabled automatic the Base. Contact Terumo
control from the CCM. Cardiovascular Systems Service.
User has turned FiO2 or O2 Analyzer Calibration Restart O2 analyzer calibration.
gas flow knob during Failed
calibration.
Roller pump has detected <Pump Name>: Try to restart the pump. If the
overcurrent condition. Overcurrent message reappears, discontinue
serviced by Terumo
Centrifugal pump has <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Try to restart the pump. If the
detected overcurrent Overcurrent message reappears, discontinue
condition. use of the pump until it has been
serviced by Terumo
equipment, or use manual drive
unit.
Page 110
Roller pump has detected <Pump Name>: Try to restart the pump. If the
overspeed condition. Overspeed. message reappears, discontinue
serviced by Terumo
Centrifugal pump has <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Try to restart the pump. If the
detected overspeed Overspeed message reappears, discontinue
condition. use of the pump until it has been
serviced by Terumo
equipment, or use manual drive.
Roller pump has detected <Pump Name>: Clear the pump race or back off
pump jam condition. Pump Jam the occlusion and try to restart
the pump. If the message
reappears, discontinue use of
the pump until it can be serviced
Systems Service. Reassign
Roller pump power-on self- <Pump Name>: Discontinue use of the pump
test fails or other internal Service Pump until it has been serviced by
malfunction. Terumo Cardiovascular Systems
crank.
Centrifugal pump power-on <Pump Name>: Discontinue use of the pump

self-test fails or other Service Pump until it has been serviced by
internal malfunction. Terumo Cardiovascular Systems
standby equipment, or use
manual drive unit.
Status Messages
Status Condition CCM Status Message Operator Response

Pressure alarm set out of <Pressure Sensor Name>: Message will clear when
range. Alarm Disabled pressure alarm is set within
range, or message is replaced
by a higher priority message.
Page 111
When a Perfusion screen is Battery Cannot Be Charged, Finish the case, and then contact
open, message indicates Full Back-up May Not Be authorized Terumo
the battery charging system Available Cardiovascular Service Center.
is not fully operational and
the battery is not being
recharged; battery backup
may be < 60 minutes.
When a Perfusion screen is Battery Needs Service, Full Finish the case, and then contact
open, message indicates Back-up May Not Be authorized Terumo
the battery cannot hold the Available Cardiovascular Service Center.
recommended maximum
charge level and may need
to be replaced; battery
backup may be
< 60 minutes.
Uncalibrated occluder Calibrate <Occluder Name> Calibrate occluder.

detected.
Gas system warm-up Calibrate O2 Analyzer Perform O2 analyzer calibration.
complete.
O2 calibration in process. Calibrating O2 Analyzer Message clears when warm-up

is complete.
O2 Analyzer calibration Cannot Calibrate O2 Analyzer Check status code.

fails. XX (may only appear in Aux
tab) Retry calibration. If calibration
does not pass, use backup until
12 User pressed cancel unit can be serviced.
button
13 Flow or FiO2 knob turned
during calibration
16 O2 sensor is expired
17, 19 Blender mechanical
problem
18 Flow mechanical problem
20, 21, 22 Flowmeter fault
23 O2 sensor fault
Centrifugal pump speed <Centrifugal Pump Name>: Verify forward flow. Check
reduced below 1550 RPM. connected devices. Increase
Coasting pump speed when appropriate.
Occluder is disconnected. <Occluder Name>: Reconnect and calibrate
Connect Occluder occluder.
Page 112
Cover is open. <Pump Name>: Message should clear when
Cover Open cover is closed.
Flow sensor has become <Flow Sensor Name>: Reconnect flow sensor.
disconnected from the Disconnected Message clears automatically.
module.
Level system is off, level <Level Detector Name>: Reconnect level sensor.
sensor becomes Disconnected Message clears automatically.
disconnected from module.
Gas system flow is 0 L/min. Gas Flow: Off Turn gas flow to >0 L/min to
clear message.
Warm-up in progress. Gas System Warming Up Message clears when warm-up
is complete.
Level selection is changed <Level Detector Name>: Allow approximately 10 seconds

from Alert to Alert/Alarm in Initializing alarm probe for probe to initialize.
a Perfusion screen.
Exiting pulse mode. <Pump Name>: Message clears after

Leaving Pulse approximately 3 seconds.
CDI™ 100 disconnected or No CDI 100 Data Check CDI™ 100 settings and
not all data being detected. cable connections. If message
still appears, contact Terumo
CDI™ 500 disconnected or No CDI 500 Data Check CDI™ 500 settings and
not all data being detected. cable connections. If message
still appears, contact Terumo
Level system is off, level <Level Detector Name>: Mount the level sensor to
sensor not mounted to the Not Attached reservoir. Message clears
venous reservoir. automatically.
Level detection is turned <Level Detector Name>: Message will clear after
OFF during perfusion. Off approximately 3 seconds.
Occluder responds to an <Occluder Name>: Note occluder value, change if

event. is <open, closed, or %flow> desired.
O2 calibration finished. O2 Analyzer Calibration Message displays for

Complete 10 seconds.
AC power to system is lost– On Battery–Monitor Time Monitor remaining battery time.

switch to battery power.
Prepare to use manual backup
equipment if AC power is not
restored within 60 minutes.
Page 113
Power system detects Power System at 80% If possible, reduce power
power usage at 80%. Capacity consumption by turning off
lamp(s), and slowing or stopping
pumps.
Enabling pulse mode <Pump Name>: Pump enters pulse mode.
Pump Baseline xx%
Pump has been set to run <Pump Name>: Message should clear when
in reverse direction. Pumping in Reverse default direction is resumed.
Default direction is resumed
when the pump stops.
Pump is ramping to <Pump Name>: Ensure pump reaches desired
baseline setting. Ramp Baseline xx% baseline setting.
Reconnecting Master and Reconnecting <Master Pump Message will clear when
Follower Name> to <Follower Pump connection is completed.
Name>
O2 sensor exposure limit Service O2 Sensor Backup analyzer should be used
reached. until O2 sensor is replaced by
Service.
Theory of Operation
The central control monitor (CCM) combines an embedded computer, a touch
screen, and a graphical user interface to provide centralized display of system
information and on-screen control of system components. The CCM is used to
define perfusion screen configurations including number and types of components,
component labels and colors, assignment of screen representations to physical
components, connection of components and safety systems, and selection of alert
and alarm limits and component responses. During use, the CCM monitors the
system for any alert, alarm, error, or status messages and displays these in priority
order in a dedicated message area. The CCM also allows the user to initiate
automatic control functionality such as pulsatile flow, servo regulation to pressure or
flow and automatic cardioplegia time or volume delivery.
Calibration Procedures
Calibrating the CCM screen

If an area on the CCM is unresponsive when pressed, the image may have drifted.
Use Service/Screen Calibrate to adjust for image drift.
1. From the main screen, press Service and log in.
Page 114
2. On the Service and Diagnostics screen, press Screen Calibrate. A
message box prompts you to continue.
3. Press OK on the message box to open the calibration screen. Or you

can press Restore to return to the factory default calibration settings.
If you press Cancel, the box closes and you return to the Service and
Diagnostics screen.
4. Press Begin. If you press Exit, you will close the calibration screen
and return to the Service and Diagnostics screen.
Page 115
5. Note the cross icon in the corner of the screen. Do not touch the
screen except to press a cross icon, and only press each cross icon
once. Carefully press the corner by the cross icon to identify that
corner boundary.
The field, Current Position, in the lower, middle of the screen displays
the coordinates of the cross icon you just pressed. The first number is
the distance from the left of the screen. The second number is the
distance from the bottom of the screen. The cross icon must be within
a specific range of coordinates for proper calibration.
First Number Second Number
(left of colon) (right of colon)
upper left corner 400-600 3350-3550
lower left corner 400-600 550-750
upper right corner 3450-3650 3350-3550
lower right corner 3450-3650 550-750
center 1950-2150 1900-2100
Confirm the four corner boundaries by pressing the cross icon as it

appears one corner after another. Confirm the final calibration point by
pressing the cross icon in the middle of the screen. A message
window will ask you to confirm that you have completed the
calibration.
Page 116
6. Press OK, exit to exit the calibration process. If you press Don’t exit,
you will return to the initial calibration screen.
7. If calibration appears to be correct when you touch the screen, press

Save to save the new calibration settings. If calibration is worse than
when you started, press Abandon and then Reboot, and the
calibration settings remain as they were.
Service Data and System Configuration Cards/Serial Ports
System Configuration Card Slot (Left)
Page 117
A serial port and two PC Card drives are behind an access panel on the left side of
the CCM. Press the release button to open the access panel. The serial port is not
currently used. The PC Card drives are for the Service Data Card and the System
Configuration Card. The PC Cards are not interchangeable. The Service Data Card
is formatted using MS Windows. The System Configuration card is formatted to be
recognized by the CCM operating system. Inserting either of these PC Cards in the
wrong drive will generate an error message on the CCM until the PC Card is
removed.
System Configuration Card
The System Configuration Card holds back up copies of case configurations.
You can copy case configurations between the CCM and the System
Configuration Card.
The CCM can store a maximum of twelve case configurations. If you try to
move or copy a thirteenth case configuration to the CCM, you will see the
message: Too Many Configurations Exist on Destination. Delete One or More
Before Copying. Press OK to clear the message.
From the main screen, press Configuration, log in if necessary, and then
press PC Card Utilities. The Configure Case PC Card Utilities screen will
open.
Page 118
Copy or Move From the System Configuration Card to the CCM

To copy or move a case from the System Configuration Card to the CCM,
select the case name from the list on the left. The Move >> and Copy >>
buttons will darken indicating the direction of the file transfer.
To move a case from the System Configuration Card to the CCM, press
Move >>; the file will transfer to the CCM and no longer be on the System
Configuration Card.
You will see a progress bar and a system message, Building PC Card List,
and then the directory listing of the case names on the System
Configuration Card will display.
To copy a case from the System Configuration Card to the CCM, press
Copy >>; the file will transfer to the CCM and also be on the System
Configuration Card.
Page 119
Copy or Move From the CCM to the System Configuration Card
To copy or move a case from the CCM to the System Configuration Card,
select the case name from the list on the right. The << Move and << Copy
buttons will darken indicating the direction of the file transfer.
If you press << Move, the file will transfer to the System Configuration
Card and no longer be on the CCM.
If you press << Copy, the file will transfer to the System Configuration Card
and also be on the CCM.
Delete a Case From the System Configuration Card or the CCM
To delete a case, select the case and press Delete. In the confirmation
box, press Yes. If you press No or Cancel, the pending delete is cancelled
and the confirmation box closes.
If you delete a case from the CCM, you will immediately see the updated
directory listing. If you delete a case from the System Configuration Card,
you will see the message, Building PC Card List, and then you will see the
revised directory listing.
To Rename a Case From the System Configuration Card or the CCM
To rename a case, select the case and press Rename. In the Edit
Configuration Name box, type in the new filename and press OK. If you
rename a case on the CCM, you will immediately see the new case name
in the directory listing. If you rename a case on the System Configuration
Card, you will see a message, Building PC Card List, and then you will see
the new case name in the directory listing.
Page 120
Service Data Card
The Service Data Card holds files that are manually downloaded from the
system network and the individual device modules. There are five types of files
that may be downloaded: 24-hour system log, syscfg file, saved system log,
module event counter report, and module event log report.
To download any of these files, press Service from the main screen and enter
the password for software upgrades. Make sure the appropriate Service Data
Card is in the correct drive. You will see an error message if the Service Data
Card is in the wrong drive.
24-Hour System Log Download

Move or delete existing files on the Service Data Card to ensure the
correct file(s) will be used.
• Remove the Service Data Card from the CCM PC Card drive.
• Insert the PC Card in your laptop PC Card drive.
• Delete or move any existing files on the Service Data Card.
• Return the Service Data Card to the CCM PC Card drive.
You can also delete files from the PC Card using the Export button in the
Service Log screens on the CCM.
To download the system log, from the Service and Diagnostics screen,
press System Log. The System Log screen opens.
Press Export. You will see a message, Loading Files, and then the Select
Export Option box opens.
Page 121
Press New. Note the filename. The first 24-hour system log on the PC
Card is named log24h01, the second is log24h02, etc.
Press OK to begin the download.
The Confirm Export box opens; press Yes. If you press No, the box closes
and you return to the System Log screen.
The Export Status box opens with a message, Building System Log for
“filename” on Service Card, and a progress bar.
When the file transfer is complete, the Export Completed box opens; press
OK.
Press Export again. You will see a message, Loading Files, and then the
Select Export Option box opens. Verify that the file you just downloaded is
listed. Press Cancel and then Close.
In the System Log screen, press Close to return to the Service and
Diagnostics screen.
Saved System Log Download
If the system generates the message, "System Computer Needs Service",
a system log is automatically saved. This saved system log should be sent
to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation Service for analysis.
Page 122
Move or delete existing files on the Service Data Card to ensure the
correct file(s) will be used.
• Remove the Service Data Card from the CCM PC Card drive.
• Insert the PC Card in your laptop PC Card drive.
• Delete or move any existing files on the Service Data Card.
• Return the Service Data Card to the CCM PC Card drive.
You can also delete files from the PC Card using the Export button in the
Service Log screens on the CCM.
To download the saved system log, from the Service and Diagnostics
screen, press Saved System Log.
Press Export. You will see a message, Loading Files, and then the Select
Export Option box opens.
Press New. Note the filename. The first 24-hour system log on the PC
Card is named log24h01, the second is log24h02, etc. Since the saved
system log is an automatically saved 24 hour log, it will be named as the
next one in the numerical order.
The Confirm Export box opens; press Yes. If you press No, the box closes
and you return to the System Log screen.
The Export Status box opens with a message, Building System Log for
“filename” on Service Card, and a progress bar.
When the file transfer is complete, the Export Completed box opens; press
OK.
Press Export again. You will see a message, Loading Files, and then the
Select Export Option box opens. Verify that the file you just downloaded is
listed. Press Cancel and then Close.
In the Saved System Log screen, press Close to return to the Service and
Diagnostics screen.
SysCfg File Download
The System Configuration box is on the Service and Diagnostics screen
that opens when you press Service and log on. The System Configuration
box lists all the specific modules with electronic serial numbers and
software versions that are currently recognized by the system. This is the
syscfg file.
To download this file, on the Service and Diagnostics screen, press Export
and then New. (Even with a module selected, the Export button will
download this syscfg file.)
Follow the instructions on the screen and accept the default file name for
the file.
Page 123
Module and Pump Event Counter/Event Log Files Download
Note: If you select a module from the System Configuration box and press
Export, you are downloading the syscfg file, not the module log.
To download the event log for an individual module or pump that is
connected to the System 1 chassis, in the System Configuration box on the
Service and Diagnostics screen, select the module or pump and press
History. In the Select History View box, select either Event Counters or
Event Log and press OK. If you press Cancel, the Select History View box
closes. The Event Counters report lists totals for each event. The Event
Log report lists all occurrences of each event. Usually, you will want to
select Event Log.
You will see the message, Querying Hardware, and then the report
displays. If you press Close, you return to the Service and Diagnostics
screen.
Press Export at the bottom of this screen. You will see the message,
Loading Files, and the Select Export Option box opens.
Press New. Note the filename. Press OK to confirm the filename and
return to the Select Export Option box. The filename corresponds to the
selected module, such as ABD01.log for the air bubble detect module. As
an example, the first event log on the PC Card is named ABD01.log, the
second is ABD02.log, etc.
The Confirm Export box opens with the message, Exporting Device Event
Counters/Log to “filename”; press Yes. If you press No, the box closes and
you return to the Device Export Report screen.
The Export Status box opens with a message, Writing Device Event
Counters/Log to “filename”.
The Export Completed box opens with a message, Completed Export of
Device Event Counters/Log. Press OK.
Press Export again. You will see the message, Loading Files, and the
Select Export Option box opens. Verify the file you just downloaded is
listed. Press Cancel.
Press Close to return to the Service and Diagnostics screen.
Email logs to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems
Follow the below steps.
Pre-download Work
• Before you Export or Copy files, make sure your Service Data
PCMCIA Card (PC Card) is blank.
If there are files on the PC Card, copy them to a computer
in a known folder location.
Page 124
Verify all the files were copied from the PC Card to the
computer.
Delete all the files on the PC Card using your computer or
the System 1 CCM.
• Once the PC Card is blank, place it into the Service Data PC Card
slot.
• Verify the System 1 unit is powered ON. If not ON, turn ON
System 1 main power switch.
• Proceed to download the necessary logs.
Zip (compress) Files to a folder / Email Zipped folder / Copy files to
computer
• If you have the Windows XP operating system, perform the
following steps.
• Zip (compress) files using a computer.
Remove the PC Card from the CCM.
Insert the PC Card into the PC Card slot on your
computer.
Wait about 5 to 10 seconds. The computer will
automatically open a Windows Explorer window to show
the contents of the PC Card.
Choose the Edit menu. Choose Select All. Verify all of the
displayed files are now highlighted.
Choose the File menu. Choose Send To and
Compressed (zipped) Folder.
Wait about 5 to 10 seconds while the computer zips the
files into a folder.
The zipped folder has a folder icon with a zipper.
• Email the zipped folder to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems.
Highlight (left click on) the zipped folder.
Choose the File menu. Choose Sent To and Mail
Recipient. A new email message window should open.
The message should have the zipped folder attached.
Address the email message to
tech.support@terumomedical.com.
Enter the Ticket # or RG # in the email's subject line.
Enter the Hospital name, Customer ID number, and the
service visit date(s) in the body (text) of the email.
• To copy all the files on the PC Card to a computer in a known file
location, refer to the Pre-download Work section above.
Page 125
• If you do not have the Windows XP operating system, perform the
following steps.
Launch WinZip.
Choose the File menu. Choose New Archive.
Where it states Create in, choose Desktop.
Enter a folder filename, such as ServiceLog.zip, and click
OK.
Drag and drop the folder (ServiceLog.zip) into the white
space of the WinZip window.
When the Drag and Drop box appears, click Add.
Choose File then Close Archive to place the folder
(ServiceLog.zip) on your Desktop.
• Email the zipped folder to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems.
Highlight (left click on) the zipped folder.
Choose the File menu. Choose Send To and Mail
Recipient. A new email message window should open.
The message should have the zipped folder attached.
Address the email message to
tech.support@terumomedical.com.
Enter the Ticket # or RG # in the email's subject line.
Enter the Hospital name, Customer ID number, and the
service visit date(s) in the body (text) of the email.

Central Control Monitor - P/N 802100, see page 589.
Parts Central Control Monitor - P/N 802100, see page 591.
Display Mounting Arm Assembly - P/N 801441, see page 593.
Parts Display Mounting Arm Assembly - P/N 801441, see page 595.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on the CCM, log in to Service. From the Service and
Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, and press More Info. The
More Info screen displays information about Self Test Status, V5 Voltage, V5
Current, Vmot Voltage, Vmot Current, and Temperature.
Page 126
Software Upgrades to Modules
To install updated software, press Service and log in with the correct password for
software upgrades.
From the Service and Diagnostics screen, select the module to be upgraded and
press Upgrade at the bottom of the System Configuration box. (If the button is
grayed out, the wrong password was entered.)
Note: The LUI Translations button (Local User Interface) will be used in future
language enhancements for roller pumps to update screen language displays.
Page 127
Software Upgrades to the System
To install system update software, press Service and log in with the correct
password for software upgrades.
From the Service and Diagnostics screen, press System Upgrade at the right of the
screen. (If the button is grayed out, the wrong password was entered.)
The system will display the button, Upgrade CCM Apps. Press this button and
follow the detailed instructions that accompanied the software upgrade.
Verify Software Upgrades
You can verify the successful installation of the software upgrade by reviewing the
code in the Op Status column in the System Configuration box on the Service and
Diagnostics screen.
Op Status Code Description
00 OK, software successfully installed
08 AppCodeInvalid
0C NonVolatileWriteProblem + AppCodeInvalid
If the Op Status is 00, the software upgrade was successful.

If the Op Status is 08, reinstall the software upgrade.
If the Op Status is 0C, power the system off and on which should set the Op Status
to 08, and then reinstall the software.
If power manager software is corrupted or if a software upgrade fails, the system will
reboot and display the message, System Power Failed. Power the system off and
on. Reinstall the power manager software.
Diagnostic Theory
The System 1 is designed with multiple, internal, self-diagnostic processes.
1. The CCM displays internal start-up messages to allow verification of
the embedded computer while it is booting. Errors that can be
detected by the embedded computer will be displayed before the CCM
starts the System 1 graphical user interface. Some of these errors
could prohibit the graphical user interface software from loading.
Page 128
2. The system log may be used to understand how the CCM and overall
system were configured and functioning prior to a CCM failure. This
log should be downloaded and sent to the factory for analysis.
Individual module logs may also be useful for pinpointing the source of
a module error. Errors detected by the LAN I/F board after booting, for
example, may be viewed in the LAN I/F log. The module logs should
be downloaded and sent to the factory.
3. The System 1 graphical user interface software has software

watchdogs that monitor the various graphical user interface processes.
For conservative design reasons, some of these processes for a
Perfusion screen try to recover from a detected fault while the others
are allowed to stop. A message, System Computer Needs Service, on
the display is an intentional stop of the graphical user interface
process due to one of several possible fault types.
When facing a CCM problem, the first task is to restart the CCM if the system
is not currently being used in a patient case. Power cycle the system which will
reboot the CCM. As the display starts up, watch the messages from the
embedded computer system for error indications. If the System 1 graphical
user interface loads, verify that the CCM has the most current software
version. Verify the software version of all the connected devices. View and
download the system log. View and download any suspected module logs,
especially the LAN I/F log. If possible run the system using the same screen
and device configuration and try to replicate the problem.
Page 129
Repair Procedures
Note: For items not specifically covered in this section, return the CCM to an
authorized service center for repair.
Calibrating the CCM

See page 114 for more information.
Adjusting the CCM Power Supply Potentiometer
Potentiometer
1. From the main screen, press Shut Down. Power the system off and
disconnect the CCM power cable from the Base.
2. Remove the four cap nuts securing the CCM to the mounting plate of
the bracket, and remove the CCM from the bracket.
3. Place the CCM screen-side down on a large static mat.
4. Remove the screws and washers securing the back panel of the CCM.
Page 130
5. Carefully lift the back cover and rest it against the side of the CCM
without straining any wires or cables.
6. Locate the blue potentiometer on the power supply module.
7. Use a screwdriver to delicately pick the sealer out of the cross slots on
the top of the potentiometer.
8. Connect the CCM power cable to the Base and power the system on.
9. With a voltmeter, read the voltage across one of the red wires and one
of the black wires The wires are along one end of the power supply
module.
• Make a slight, counterclockwise adjustment to the potentiometer

to obtain a reading between 5.05 V and 5.1 V. A counterclockwise
adjustment increases the voltage. If the voltage is adjusted
incorrectly and drops below 4.75 V, the CCM may continuously
attempt to reset. Slowly adjust the potentiometer counterclockwise
to increase the voltage to within the correct range.
• Gently tap the top of the potentiometer and make sure the voltage
remains within the range. Readjust the voltage if necessary.
• Apply a small amount of torque seal to cover the cross slots on
the top of the potentiometer.
10. Remove the voltmeter.
11. Power the system off and disconnect the CCM power cable from the
Base.
12. Reassemble the CCM and re-mount it on the mounting bracket.
13. Reconnect the CCM power cable to the Base.
14. Power the system on.
15. Check for 5V supply voltage test failures.
• From the Service and Diagnostics screen, in the System

Configuration box, select LAN I/F; press History and then Event
Counter.
• Record the number (count) of 5V supply voltage test failures.
• Press OK.
Page 131
Replacing the CCM

Note: If the CCM is not functioning, you will not be able to copy files to the System
Configuration Card. Use the System Configuration Card as-is to copy files to the
replacement CCM. Make sure the hospital knows they must review configurations.
Note: See page 118 for more information about deleting and copying files to/from
the CCM and System Configuration Cards.
Note: When installing a new CCM or a loaner CCM, the power manager software
must be compatible with the CCM software; i.e., power manager version 1.20 is
compatible with CCM version 2.2.1. Upgrade software if necessary.
1. If the problem CCM will boot up, go to step 2. If not, go to step 4.
2. Power on the System 1, press Configuration, log in if necessary, and

then press PC Card Utilities. The Configure Case PC Card Utilities
screen will open.
3. Make sure the hospital's System Configuration Card is in the problem

CCM. Compare the configuration files on the problem CCM to the files
on the System Configuration Card. Copy files as necessary so that all
of the hospital's configuration files are on the System Configuration
Card.
If there are files on the System Configuration Card that are not on the
problem CCM, make a list of the files that must be copied to the
replacement CCM. The files on the replacement CCM should match
the files that were on the problem CCM.
4. Remove the System Configuration Card from the problem CCM to
install in the replacement CCM.
5. Power off the System 1 and disconnect the power cord from the AC
source.
6. Disconnect the CCM connector from the Base.
7. Free the CCM cable from any restraints.
Page 132
8. Remove the four locking nuts that secure the CCM to the mounting
arm assembly.
9. Attach the replacement CCM to the System 1 following steps 5 to 7 in

reverse order.
10. Install the System Configuration Card in the replacement CCM.
11. Power on the System 1, press Configuration, log in if necessary, and

then press PC Card Utilities. The Configure Case PC Card Utilities
screen will open.
12. Delete all the files stored on the replacement CCM (they were not
created for this system).
13. Copy the appropriate configuration files from the System Configuration
Card to the replacement CCM.
14. Press Close to return to the Configuration screen.
15. Press Return to Main.
16. From the main screen, press Perfusion.
Open each configuration screen and verify there are no problems and
no question marks, ?, on the virtual display.
17. When you are satisfied everything is working normally, power off the
System 1. Leave a note on the CCM for the perfusionist as follows:
Caution: The CCM has been replaced. Before using clinically, please
double-check the configurations to assure that all settings and safety
connections are correct for your use.
Page 133
Replacing the cooling air filter
1. Remove the two screws that secure the cooling air filter cover to the
CCM.
Note: The picture shows a CCM on a bench. This procedure can be

done with the CCM mounted on the system.
2. Remove the cooling air filter.
3. Install the new cooling air filter.
4. Install the cooling air filter cover.
5. Install and tighten the two screws that secure the cooling air filter
cover to the CCM.
Replacing the cooling fan assembly

source.
Page 134
arm assembly.
5. Lift the CCM and invert it on a large static mat on the bench.
6. Remove the screws that secure the back cover on the CCM.
7. Carefully lift the back cover on the CCM and rest it against the side of
the CCM without straining any wires or cables.
Page 135
8. Remove the two nuts and washers securing the LCD support bracket
within the CCM.
screw/
washer
LCD
support
bracket
9. Tip the LCD support bracket to clear the metal lip and remove the
bracket.
10. Remove the four screws and washers securing each cooling fan within
the CCM.
11. Disconnect the cooling fan assembly connector from the circuit board
connector.
12. Note the direction of the fan blades or any air flow arrows, then
remove the cooling fan assembly.
13. Install the new cooling fan assembly.
14. Connect the cooling fan assembly connector to the circuit board
connector.
15. Install and tighten the four screws and washers securing each cooling
fan assembly to the CCM.
16. Install the LCD support bracket.
17. Install and tighten the two nuts and washers securing the LCD support
bracket within the CCM.
18. Carefully place the back cover on the CCM.
19. Install and tighten the screws that secure the back cover on the CCM.
Page 136
20. Install the CCM on the mounting arm assembly.
21. Install and tighten the four locking nuts that secure the CCM to the
mounting arm assembly.
22. Route the CCM cable through the cable retainers.
23. Connect the CCM connector to the Base.
24. Power on the system and test each fan to verify correct flow direction.
Replacing the back lights

Note: The CCM can be sent to an authorized service center for back light
replacement since replacing the back lights in the field is challenging.
source.
arm assembly.
Page 137
8. Remove the three locking nuts securing the PC Card drive case to the
CCM.
two locking
nuts on right-
hand side of
case
locking nut
on left-hand
side of case
Page 138
9. Carefully remove the PC Card drive case.
10. Remove the four nuts and washers securing the LCD support brackets
within the CCM. Note the cut washer position for replacement
purposes.
screw/
washer
LCD
support
brackets
11. Tip the LCD support brackets to clear the metal lip and remove them.
12. Locate the back light wires and disconnect them from the inverter
board.
inverter
board
connections
small
screws
13. Remove the two small retainer screws located on the ends of the back
lights opposite the PC Card drive case.
Page 139
14. Disconnect the white wire connector from the flat panel interface,
cutting tie wraps as necessary.
flat panel
interface
connection
15. To help reinstall the LCD in the correct position against the clear touch
panel, use a fine-tip marker to mark the LCD alignment on the panel.
16. Carefully lift the LCD (separating it from the touch panel) at one end,
just enough to allow safe removal of the two back light tubes. Remove
the small screws holding the light tubes in their retainers. Slide the
light tubes out.
17. Install new back light tubes into the LCD and carefully lower the LCD
back into position, aligning the LCD with the marks you made earlier.
18. Install and tighten the two back light retainer screws.
19. Reinstall the LCD support brackets.
20. Position the cut washer as noted in Step 10, and install and tighten the
four nuts and washers securing the LCD support brackets within the
CCM. Do not over tighten the nuts.
21. Reconnect the white wire connector from the flat panel interface,
reinstalling tie wraps as necessary.
22. Reconnect the two back light power connectors at the inverter board.
23. Install the PC Card case.
24. Install and tighten the three locking nuts that secure the PC Card case
to the CCM.
Page 140
31. Power on the System 1 and perform a functional check.
Replacing the power cord assembly

Note: The power cord assembly is P/N 804516 (CCM cable to Base assembly).
source.
arm assembly.
Page 141
8. Remove the nut securing the two wires to the ground.
9. Loosen the terminal screw that secures the red and black wires.
10. Remove the two screws securing the cable connection to the LAN I/F
board and disconnect the cable.
11. Remove the four screws that secure the strain relief to the back panel.
12. Carefully remove the cable assembly through the opening.
13. Carefully insert the new cable assembly through the opening.
14. Install and tighten the four screws that secure the strain relief to the
back panel.
15. Reconnect the cable to the LAN I/F board.
16. Reinstall the red and black wires and tighten the screws to secure
them.
17. Install the two wires to the ground and install and tighten the nut that
secures them.
Page 142
24. Power on the System 1 and perform a functional check.
Page 143
Troubleshooting–Central Control Monitor
Event and Response Matrix

Module Events Occluder Response Roller Pump Centrifugal
Response Response
Air Air Detected Alarm Not Applicable No Response No Response
Stop Stop
Pause Pause
Message Only Message Only
Centrifugal Primary Centrifugal No Response No Response No Response
Pump Pump Stopped Full Open Stop Stop
Full Close Reduce Speed Coast
Go to Flow 0% to Message Only Message Only
100%
Primary Centrifugal No Response No Response No Response
Pump Started Full Open Stop Stop
100%

Pump Minimum Full Open Stop Stop
Flow Full Close Reduce Speed Coast
100%

Pump Coasting Full Open Stop
Full Close Message Only
Go to Flow 0% to
100%
Centrifugal Pump Not Applicable No Response No Response

Stopped Stop Stop
Reduce Speed Coast
Started Stop Stop
Reduce Speed Coast

Minimum Flow Stop Stop
Reduce Speed Coast
Page 144
Response Response
Coasting Stop
Message Only
Flowmeter Backflow Detected Not Applicable No Response No Response
Alarm Stop Message Only
Pause
Message Only
Level Low Level Alarm Not Applicable No Response No Response
Stop Stop
Pause Coast
Reduce Speed Message Only
Message Only
Low Level Alert Not Applicable No Response No Response

Pause Coast
Message Only
Pressure High Pressure Not Applicable No Response No Response
Alarm Stop Stop
Pause Coast
Message Only
High Pressure Alert Not Applicable No Response No Response

Pause Coast
Message Only
Roller Pump Primary Roller No Response No Response No Response
Pump Stopped Full Open Stop Stop
100%
Primary Roller No Response No Response No Response

Pump Started Full Open Stop Stop
100%
Primary Roller No Response No Response No Response

Pump Paused Full Open Stop
Full Close Message Only
Go to Flow 0% to
100%
Page 145
Response Response
Roller Pump Not Applicable No Response No Response
Stopped Stop Stop
Reduce Speed Coast
Started Stop Stop
Reduce Speed Coast
Paused Stop
Message Only
Troubleshooting Procedures–Central Control Monitor

Video Problems
Inspect black mesh-covered cable and reseat flat gold cable
Caution: Use proper static precautions when working near or handling printed circuit
boards or integrated circuit chips.
1. Power off the System 1 and disconnect the CCM connector from the
Base.
arm assembly.
Page 146
6. The horizontal sync signal to the LCD will be degraded by poor

connections at the ends of the large black mesh covered cable and
the flat gold cable.
Page 147
7. Reseat the flat gold ribbon cable from the board that is mounted on
the back of the LCD screen. There is a release tab on each side of
this ribbon cable.
8. Verify the connector on the exposed end of the cable bundle with the
black mesh cover is tight.
15. If reseating the three connectors did not solve the problem, return the
CCM to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems for service.
Communication Problems (Displays "?" Intermittently)

Check for missing jumper
Note: The jumper terminates the network on the LAN I/F board in the CCM. If you see
random network errors, troubleshoot the jumper.
1. Power off the System 1 and disconnect the CCM connector from the
Base.
Page 148
2. Remove the four locking nuts that secure the CCM to the mounting arm
assembly.
5. Carefully open the back cover on the CCM and support it on its housing
as shown.
Page 149
6. Check if the jumper is missing; replace if necessary.
jumper
Page 150
Troubleshooting Table–Central Control Monitor

Note: If module icons display ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading and
CCM Problem Check Action
Keyword
Communication ? Module icon Verify jumper is present. See
jumper.
displays ? page 148. (This jumper
intermittently. terminates the network.)
Communication ? Module icon shows ? Plug module into another NIC
module not
receptacle.
communicating.
Replace module or NIC board.

See page 75.
Return CCM to Terumo

Cardiovascular Systems
Corporation Service for repair.
Data Data lost when LAN I/F needs to be replaced.
card and LAN I/F
writing to PC Card. Return CCM to Terumo
board.
Data Data lost on case. LAN I/F or cable needs to be
cable (SBC to LAN I/F
replaced. Return CCM to
or boards),
LAN I/F board. Corporation Service for repair.
Display The display does not Ensure system is connected to a
wall AC supply,
boot up properly. dedicated AC line outlet source.
Cycle system power and reboot
CCM.
CCM cable and Replace power cord if

connections to necessary. See page 141.
system,
Plug CCM connector into the

CCM connection to other receptacle. Replace NIC
NIC. board if necessary. See page 75.
Display Contrast Loss of video Replace backlights. See
backlights.
contrast page 137.
Display Black Black screen with Return CCM to Terumo
red message. Cardiovascular Systems
Page 151
Keyword
Display Blank Blank display at Ensure system is connected to a
wall AC supply,
startup. dedicated AC line outlet source.
CCM.

system,

NIC, board if necessary. See page 75.
backlight. Replace backlight if necessary.

See page 137.
Display Blank Blank display during Ensure system is connected to a
wall AC supply,
use. dedicated AC line outlet source.
CCM.

system,
CCM connection to Plug CCM connector into the

NIC, other receptacle. Replace NIC
board if necessary. See page 75.
for overheating, Replace components as

necessary. For replacing fan,
fan, filter, and air flow see page 134. For replacing
into CCM. filter, see page 134.
Page 152
Keyword
Display Distorted Distorted display. Ensure system is connected to a
wall AC supply,
dedicated AC line outlet source.
CCM.

system,

Display Freezes Display freezes or Cycle system power and reboot
see message, CCM. Download the saved
System Computer system log and attach to an
Needs Service. email. See page 122. Return
CCM to Terumo Cardiovascular
Systems Corporation Service for
repair.
Display Shifted Display shifted. Reseat exposed connector. See
flat gold ribbon
page 146.
connectors,
black mesh covered Reseat exposed connector. See

cable. page 146.

Display has Vertical lines block Reseat into board on LCD
flat panel board
Vertical Lines display screen.
connector.
Noise Excessive noise. Replace fan if necessary. See
for interference with
page 134.
fan inside CCM,
filter. Replace filter if necessary. See

page 134.
PC Card PC Card cannot be Erase files or replace PC Card.
if PC Card is full.
written to.
Page 153
Keyword
PC Card PC Card cannot be
for debris or fluid in
read from or written
PC card slots,
to.
position/orientation of Verify Service and Configuration

PC Card in slot, cards are in the correct slots.
Try another PC Card.
PC Card interface
Cycle system power without
board.
cards in place.
Return the CCM to Terumo

Power The CCM does not Ensure system is connected to a
wall AC supply,
power on properly. dedicated AC line outlet source.
CCM.
Replace power cord if

CCM cable and
necessary. See page 141.
connections to
system,
Red Bar Red bar appears at Replace the shorted module.
each module, one at
the top of the CCM,
a time.
caused by shorted
module
Resets CCM continuously Return CCM to Terumo
resets–no video. Cardiovascular Systems
System Computer System Computer Download the saved system log
Needs Service Needs Service and attach to an email. See page
message 122. Return the CCM to Terumo
Temperature Power turns off with Clean filters. See page 134.
filters and fan
excessive heat.
connections.
Reseat connectors.
Replace fans. See page 134.
Page 154
Keyword
Touch Screen Touch screen not Cycle system power and
functional. reboot CCM,
cable connections to Reseat connectors.

screen.
Touch Screen Touch screen Check touch screen for physical
touch screen for
Pointer Alignment pointer out of damage.
physical damage,
alignment.
screen calibration. Perform screen calibration. See

page 114.
Page 155
Page 156
Roller Pump System 4 in (10 cm) and 6 in (15 cm)

P/N 801041 Large Roller Pump, 6 in (15 cm)
P/N 801040 Small Roller Pump, 4 in (10 cm)
P/N 801798 Large Roller Pump Guts
P/N 801805 Small Roller Pump Guts
P/N 810325 Large Roller Pump Tube Clamp Assembly
P/N 810739 Small Roller Pump Tube Clamp Assembly
P/N 801225 Roller Pump Display
P/N 803741 Large Roller Pump Module Assembly
P/N 802209 Small Roller Pump Module Assembly
P/N 803737 Cover Interlock Cable Assembly Kit (includes 12 V DC fan, digital encoder,
optical switch, pump cable, and cover interlock switch)
P/N 801016 Hand Crank
P/N 802280 Pump Air Filter
P/N 802548 Molded Tab/Pump Mounting
P/N 801221 Membrane Display Panel
P/N 802203 Pump Drive Belt
P/N 809051 Pump Drive Motor/Encoder
P/N 801783 Bearing in Occlusion Adjustment and Screw Adjustment (Upper Bearing)
P/N 801132 Screw Adjustment Lower Bearing
P/N 804510 Roller Slide Assembly 4 in
P/N 804509 Roller Slide Assembly 6 in
P/N 803761 Optical Sensor
P/N 801784 External Snap Ring
P/N 801781 Bowed External Snap Ring
P/N 801786 Extension Spring
P/N 801789 Compression Spring
P/N 809909 Gib Roller Slide
P/N 26-1008-4876-6 Krytox Grease
Page 157
Overview
Purpose of Device
The primary function of a roller pump is to move fluids in the cardiopulmonary
bypass circuit. The pumps are used for a number of applications including arterial,
cardioplegia, suction, and vent. The flow rates, safety systems, and automatic
functions used with a roller pump will vary according to the application.
Roller Pump Requirements
Pump Sizes
The System 1 supports two pump sizes: a large roller pump with a
6 in race (15 cm), and a small roller pump with a 4 in race
(10 cm).
Tubing
Use with flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tubing or other medical
grade tubing that is appropriately indicated by the manufacturer
for use in roller pumps.
For the large roller pump, select tubing with a maximum outer
diameter of 11/16 in (17,5 mm) and a wall thickness range of
1/16 in to 3/32 in (1,6 mm to 2,4 mm). A durometer range of 58 to
70 is recommended.
For the small roller pump, select tubing with a maximum outer
diameter of 9/16 in (14,3 mm) and a wall thickness range of
1/16 in to 3/32 in (1,6 mm to 2,4 mm). A durometer range of 58-68
is recommended.
I.D. (in) Wall Thickness (in) Metric I.D. (mm)

1/8 1/16 3,2
3/16 1/16 4,8
3/16 3/32 4,8
1/4 1/16 6,4
1/4 3/32 6,4
5/16 1/16 8,0
5/16 3/32 8,0
3/8 1/16 9,5
3/8 3/32 9,5
7/16 1/16 (large pump only) 11,2
Page 158
Dual Tube Sets
Both pumps accommodate standard dual tube sets for the
following combinations: 8:1, 4:1, 2:1, and 1:1.
Fluid Temperatures
5°C to 50°C for tubes of 1/4 in I.D. or smaller
15°C to 50°C for all others
Roller Pump Performance
Voltage
24 VDC Nominal
Power Consumption
6 A @ 24 VDC at 200 RPM
350 mA @ 5 VDC
RPM Display
Between 0 RPM to 250 RPM with accuracy of the greater of
± 2 RPM or 1% of actual RPM, display and resolution of 1 RPM.
LPM Display
Small Pump
Range
0 L/min to 4.0 L/min
Resolution
0.001 L/min at 0 L/min to 1 L/min
0.01 L/min at >1 L/min to 10 L/min
Accuracy
± 10% of actual flow from 0.001 L/min to 1 L/min
± 8% of actual flow from >1L/min to 4.00 L/min
Page 159
Large Pump
Range
0 L/min to 10.0 L/min
Resolution
0.001 L/min at 0 L/min to 1 L/min
0.01 L/min at >1 L/min to 10 L/min
Accuracy
± 10% of actual flow from 0.001 L/min to 1 L/min
± 8% of actual flow from >1 L/min to 10.00 L/min

Operating Modes
Continuous Mode
The pump operates at a constant speed set by the user.
Pulsatile Mode
The arterial pump speed alternates between a peak
speed and a baseline speed. Base, Rate, and Width can
be adjusted via the central control monitor (CCM).
Master/Follower Mode
Master/follower operation involves two roller pumps used
in Continuous Mode. The follower pump demand flow rate
or speed is a percentage of the master pump flow rate or
speed. The percentage can be adjusted via the CCM or
the follower pump speed control knob.
Servo Control Mode
Pump speed is regulated to maintain a specific pressure
or flow rate. The pressure and flow servo setpoints can be
changed or adjusted via the CCM or the pump speed
control knob.
Automatic Delivery Mode
The pump delivers a set fluid volume or delivers volume
for a set length of time and then stops.
Environmental Conditions
Operation
Page 160
Storage
Ventilated area, -30°C to 54°C (-22°F to 129°F), less than 95%

relative humidity, non-condensing.
Safety Aspects
Hand Crank
In the event of a failure that disables the pumping ability of the roller
pump, the user can hand-crank the pump.
Startup Time
After being plugged into an active system, roller pumps are available for
operation in less than 15 seconds and immediately indicate their ready
status on the pump display.
Lid Open
Roller pumps incorporate an interlock switch that stops the rotating roller
mechanism if the pump lid is opened.
Direction
The roller pump display and the pump slide bar indicate the default
forward direction of rotation using a circular arrow icon.
The roller pump can be temporarily set to pump in the reverse direction
using the pump menu. The direction arrow icon changes to reverse video
if reverse direction is confirmed. The message PUMPING:REVERSE is
displayed on the pump display. The pump will revert to the default forward
direction when the Stop button is pressed or when the pump is stopped in
response to alert or alarm messages or another pump event. The direction
arrow icon changes back to indicate the default forward direction and the
message clears.
Fault Tolerance
CCM Failure
In the event of a CCM failure with adequate power supply, roller pumps
provide a message indicating the failure, maintain the current speed or
flow rate, preserve servo operation, and continue providing access to
pump-based controls and displays.
Pump Failure
In the event of a failure that disables the ability of the roller pump to
deliver fluid, the user can manually rotate the pump using a hand crank.
Network Failure
In the event of a network failure with adequate power supply, roller pumps
provide a message indicating the failure, maintain the current speed or
flow rate, discontinue servo operation, and continue providing access to
pump-based controls and displays.
Page 161
Alerts/Alarms
The local pump interface will display the reason for a pump stop or pump
pause resulting from an alert or alarm from a connected safety device.
Pump Alerts
The pump will display an alert message on its local interface and report
the alert to the system for these conditions:
• Belt slip
• Underspeed
• Loss of data from master or follower pump
• Loss of servo source data
• Follower pump cannot maintain ratio
• Unable to maintain servo setting
Error Messages
An error message is generated for these conditions:
• Overspeed
• Overcurrent
• CCM missing
• Network communication failure
• Pump jam
• Loss of connected air, level, or pressure systems
• Connected pump missing
• Power supply error
• Pump board over temperature
• Motor error
• Self-test failure
Pump Connector
The pump to System 1 connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector. The
minimum durability is 1000 insertion cycles and the insertion force is less
than 1 Kg.
Drip Proof
The roller pump is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Corrosion Resistance
The roller pump is corrosion resistant.
Page 162
Requirements by Pump Function
Arterial–Adult
Flow Range
10 mL/min to 10 L/min
Temperature Range
15°C to 50°C
Tubing Sizes
1/4 in, 3/8 in, and 1/2 in PVC or other medical grade tubing with
wall thickness range of 1/16 in to 3/32 in (1,6 mm to 2,4 mm).
Arterial–Pediatric
Flow Range
120 ml/kg/min to 140 ml/kg/min for patients up to 10 kg
80 ml/kg/min to 120 ml/kg/min for patients from 10.1 kg to 25 kg
Temperature Range
15°C to 50°C
Tubing sizes
1/8 in (3,2 mm), 3/16 in (4,7 mm), 1/4 in (6,4 mm), and 3/8 in
(9,5 mm) PVC or other medical grade tubing with a wall thickness
range of 1/16 in to 3/32 in (1,6 mm to 2,4 mm).
Cardioplegia–Adult
Flow Range
Temperature Range
5°C to 50°C
Tubing sizes
8:1, 4:1, 2:1, and 1:1 through 3/8 in (9,5 mm) I.D., wall thickness
range 1/16 in to 3/32 in (1,6 mm to 2,4 mm).
Suction/Vent
Flow Range
Page 163
Temperature Range
15°C to 50°C
Tubing sizes
1/4 in to 3/8 in (6,4 mm to 9,5 mm) I.D., wall thickness range
1/16 in to 3/32 in (1,6 mm to 2,4 mm).
Parameters
Two Sizes
Large and small pumps have been designed for overall size reduction.
Number of Pumps
Eight pumps can be connected to the System 1 at one time. Only six
pumps can be controlled through the CCM at any given time.
Pump Mounting
Pumps can be pole or Base mounted.
Tube Position
Tubing can be positioned ± 90° from center.

Tubing Visibility
Tubing is visible in the raceway with the pump lid closed.
Tube Clamps
Tube clamps accommodate all necessary tube sizes, including tube sets,
without requiring different inserts.
Occlusion Mechanism
The occlusion mechanism is adjustable on-the-fly, with a tactile and
audible feedback mechanism for adjustments. The mechanism is
protected from fluid spills and is easy to clean.
Pump Controls
START/STOP Control
Pumps have one-touch stop and start control.
Speed Adjustments
Pumps have a control knob with fine/coarse adjustment capability.
Pumps also have remote control capability to enable pole
mounting.
Direction
The user can select the default direction of pump rotation and can
temporarily reverse the pump rotation direction.
Page 164
Operating Modes
Pulsatile Flow
Pumps have pulsatile flow capability. Pulse parameters are user
selectable.
Master/Follower Operation
Pumps have the capability of operating in master/follower mode,
where the speed or flow rate of the follower pump is a user-
adjustable percentage of the master pump speed or flow rate.
Servo Regulation
Pumps have the capability to be speed-regulated to maintain a
user-specified pressure or flow rate.
Time/Volume Delivery
Pumps can automatically deliver a user-specified amount of fluid
volume, or deliver fluid for a user-specified length of time.
Display
RPM/LPM
Pumps display speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and accept
a tube size to display a flow rate calculation. The range and
resolution correspond with the pump application.
Safety
Pump Lid
The pump lid stops the rotating roller mechanism when the lid is
opened and resumes operation when the lid is closed, ramping
back up to the speed the pump was going before the lid was
opened.
Hand Crank
A hand crank can turn the pump mechanism in one direction only.
The direction is user selectable.
Safety System Interaction
Pumps can respond to alerts and alarms from air detection, level
detection, and pressure monitoring systems.
Alert/Alarm Configuration and Responses
The user can select which safety systems interact with the pumps,
and how the pumps will respond to the corresponding alerts and
alarms. Roller pump responses are stop, pause, reduce speed,
message only, and no response.
Page 165
Local Alert/Alarm Displays
Pumps display the reason for any stop or pause.
System Function
Large Roller Pump
The large roller pump is a peristaltic pump with a 6 in (15 cm) raceway
that can be used with PVC or other medical grade tubing that is indicated
by the tubing manufacturer for use in roller pumps for arterial,
cardioplegia, vent, and suction pumping applications. The pump can be
mounted on the Base or on a pole with a mounting bracket. The pump can
be plugged into one of the six pump connections on the Base, or into any
of the eighteen Base module connections.
The tube clamp mechanism accommodates a variety of tubing sizes,
including dual tube sets, without requiring different size inserts. The pump
raceway can be repositioned and locked in 15 degree increments for
optimal positioning of the tubing. The occlusion mechanism allows the
user to adjust the position of the rollers at any time, including when the
pump is rotating. An occlusion feedback mechanism provides a series of
audible clicks whenever the occlusion is being adjusted.
Each roller pump has a local display indicating pump name, tube size,
direction of pump rotation, pump speed or flow rate, and safety, status and
error messages. The speed of the pump can be controlled from either the
CCM or from a control knob on the pump itself. The pump speed will
change in small or large increments or decrements depending on how fast
the knob is turned.
The roller pump can be operated independently or in conjunction with
another roller pump in Master/Follower operation. In this case, the follower
pump flow rate or speed will be a percentage of the master pump flow rate
or speed. If the roller pump is being used as the primary, or arterial pump,
it cannot be designated as a master or follower pump.
The system provides the capability to automatically regulate the roller pump
speed to maintain a user selected pressure or flow rate. The user assigns
the data source and initiates operation for these servo control functions via
the CCM. Once initiated, the user can adjust the servo setpoint by either
adjusting the pump control knob or the pump control slide bar on the CCM.
The CCM is used to configure which safety systems interact with the roller
pump (air detection, level detection, and pressure monitoring), and how
the pump responds to the sensor alerts and alarms. Valid responses for
the roller pump to alert and alarm conditions are stop, pause, reduce
speed, message only, and no response. The local display indicates the
reason for any alert or alarm that stops or pauses the pump.
Page 166
Small Roller Pump
The small roller pump is a peristaltic pump with a 4 in (10 cm) raceway
that can be used with PVC or other medical grade tubing that is indicated
by the tubing manufacturer for use in roller pumps for pediatric arterial,
cardioplegia, vent, and suction pumping applications. The pump can be
mounted on the Base or on a pole with a mounting bracket. The pump can
be plugged into one of the six pump connections on the Base, or into any
of the eighteen Base module connections.
The tube clamp mechanism accommodates a variety of tubing sizes,
including dual tube sets, without requiring different size inserts. The pump
raceway can be repositioned and locked in 15 degree increments for
optimal positioning of the tubing. The occlusion mechanism allows the
user to adjust the position of the rollers at any time, including when the
pump is rotating. An occlusion feedback mechanism provides a series of
audible clicks whenever the occlusion is being adjusted.
Each roller pump has a local display for indicating pump name, tube size,
direction of pump rotation, pump speed, flow rate, and safety, status and
error messages. The speed of the pump can be controlled from either the
CCM or from a control knob on the pump itself. The pump speed will
change in small or large increments or decrements depending on how fast
the knob is turned.
The roller pump can be operated independently or in conjunction with
another roller pump in Master/Follower operation. In this case, the follower
pump flow rate or speed will be a percentage of the master pump flow rate
or speed. If the roller pump is being used as the primary, or arterial pump,
it cannot be designated as a master or follower pump.
The system provides the capability to automatically regulate the roller pump
speed to maintain a user selected pressure or flow rate. The user assigns
the data source and initiates operation for these servo control functions via
the CCM. Once initiated, the user can adjust the servo set point by either
adjusting the pump control knob or the pump control slide bar on the CCM.
The CCM is used to configure which safety systems interact with the roller
pump (air detection, level detection, and pressure monitoring), and how
the pump responds to the sensor alerts and alarms. Valid responses for
the roller pump to alert and alarm conditions are stop, pause, reduce
speed, message only, and no response. The local display indicates the
reason for any alert or alarm that stops or pauses the pump.
The roller pump housing consists of an upper and lower housing made of molded
plastic, held together by screws.
Page 167
An occlusion adjustment knob is used to adjust the position of the rollers with
respect to the pump raceway. The occlusion knob can be adjusted while the roller
mechanism is rotating. Turning the occlusion adjustment knob in a
counterclockwise direction draws the roller assembly away from the pump raceway;
turning the occlusion adjustment knob clockwise pushes the roller mechanism out
toward the pump raceway.
A clear plastic lid protects the roller mechanism from fluid spills, and also protects
the user from potential hazards caused by open access to the rotating mechanism.
A lid interlock feature stops the pump when the lid is opened.
The tube clamp mechanism adjusts to all sizes of tubing supported by the pump
and does not require different size tubing inserts. A spring-loaded mechanism
allows the user to retract the tube clamp by turning a central dial clockwise or
counterclockwise. Releasing the dial releases the tube clamp and secures the tube
in place. The tube clamp mechanism can be easily removed to facilitate cleaning of
the mechanism and pump raceway.
The pump raceway can be positioned ± 90 degrees from center, in 15 degree

increments. A raceway locking mechanism ensures that the raceway position
remains fixed.
The local user interface is located on the front panel and includes a graphic display,
a speed adjustment knob, and three buttons: START/STOP, SELECT, and
MANUAL.
The housing encloses the display board assembly, generic board, pump control
board, pump motor, belt, and flywheel. The roller assembly and occlusion
mechanism are mounted externally through a bearing inserted in the casting. The
assembly is coupled to the motor via the belt and flywheel.
Mounting and Connection to the System
A mounting mechanism on the pump housing secures the pump to the
Base rail assembly or to a pole-mounted bracket. The mechanism can be
released for easy repositioning or swap out of the pump.
The roller pump cable connects the roller pump to the system Base. The
cable is detachable from the roller pump and Base. The roller pump
connector is a 15-pin circular connector. The system connector is a 15-pin
male D-sub connector and is secured to a Base receptacle with screws. It
plugs into one of the six pump connectors or any of the eighteen module
connectors on the Base.
Page 168
Nominal Dimensions (reference only)
Large Roller Pump
Height 12.5 in (31,8 cm)

Width 8.5 in (21,6 cm)
Depth 13.1 in (33,3 cm)
Weight 26 lbs (11,8 kg)
Small Roller Pump
Depth 11.6 in (29,5 cm)
Weight 23 lbs (10,4 kg)
Power Supply
The roller pump uses 350 mA @ 5 VDC and up to 6 A @ 24 VDC from the system
Bus.
Interface
General Description
The roller pump is controlled from the CCM or from the local user interface. The
CCM supports the configuration and control of the roller pump. The CCM user
interface has the following features. Each roller pump on a Perfusion screen is
represented by a pump control box, which includes a Start/Stop button, a
speed/flow display button and a pump icon button. The Start/Stop button is used to
turn the pump on or off. The current value of the pump speed or flow rate is
displayed on the speed/flow display button in the units selected during
Configuration. The pump icon identifies the pump type and the rollers spin to
indicate that the pump is running. Touch the pump icon to open the Pump tab, to
access pulse and servo features, and to view configured safety responses. The
slide bar associated with the pump controls the speed. The slide bar is always
displayed when the roller pump is the arterial pump. The slide bar shows the pump
name and the actual, measured speed at the top. The speed can be adjusted in
large increments using the scroll control or in small increments using the adjustment
arrows. The Stop button will always be available to stop the pump directly. The
Setup tab is used to view and change the response to connected pumps and safety
system events. The System tab contains the software version, displays system Bus
parameters, and is used to change out and replace a roller pump.
Page 169
The local user interface of the roller pump includes a yellow, active matrix graphic
display, a speed adjustment knob, and three buttons: Start/Stop, Select and
Manual. The graphics display shows RPM or flowrate, tube size or flow constant,
pump name, default forward direction, operating mode, and indicates the relative
position of the speed knob via a bar graph. It also has a one-line message area for
displaying operational status information. To provide redundancy if the CCM is lost,
the Select button can be used to reset an air bubble detect sensor after an alarm
event.
If the pump lid is opened, the pump roller mechanism will stop. The pump will ramp
back up to speed when the lid is closed.
The multi-color LED, viewable on modules, is not available to the user. Its behavior
is the same as the modules, but it can only be viewed by removing the lower pump
housing.
CCM Controls
START/STOP Button
The pump is turned on and off via a Start/Stop button in the pump
control box.
Speed Control
Pump speed may be controlled using a slide bar. A dedicated
slide bar is always available for the arterial pump. For other
pumps, pressing the Start button or, when the pump is running,
the pump speed/flow display area activates the slide bar shared
by up to five other pumps.
Pulse
When configured as the arterial pump, the Pulse subtab with
Auto and Manual buttons, is accessed via the pump icon. The
base, rate and width can be adjusted using up and down arrows.
Pressing the Auto button when the pump is on and its speed is
greater than 1 RPM will put the pump in Pulse mode. Pressing the
Manual button, while in pulse, will cause the pump to drop out of
pulse and hold the current average RPM.
Servo Control
The Servo subtab, with Auto and Manual buttons, is accessed
via the pump icon. When configured with a pressure sensor or a
flowmeter, the setup area can be used to select the servo data
source. The Auto button can be pressed when pressure or flow
data is within servo range. Pressing the Manual button, while in
Servo mode will cause the pump to drop out of servo and hold the
current RPM.
Page 170
Event Response Changes
When configured with another pump or a safety system, such as
air detector, pressure sensor, level detector, or flowmeter, event
responses can be edited for the current case via the Setup tab,
Pumps subtab. Responses to events are Stop, Pause, Reduce
Speed, Message Only or No Response.
CCM Displays
ON/OFF Status
ON/OFF status is displayed on the CCM in the pump control box.
RPM and Flow
Actual RPM or flow is displayed at the top of the slide bar and
within the pump box. The pump icon spins when the RPM is
greater than zero.
Connected/Error Status
Roller pump connection and error status is displayed on the CCM
via the pump icon. A pump icon marked with a question mark, ?,
indicates that the pump is not plugged in, or the roller pump is
plugged in, but not mapped, or the roller pump has failed and
could not be located when the Perfusion screen was selected. A
pump icon marked with an X indicates that the roller pump has
failed while Online.
Configuration Status
The event and response configuration with connected safety
systems and other pumps can be reviewed via the Pump tab,
accessed through the pump icon.
Operational Status
A summary of the pump’s power consumption and operation
status can be viewed through the System tab, Module Info
subtab.
Local Control
Speed Knob
If the roller pump is in Run State, the knob on the front panel
adjusts the pump speed. By rapidly turning the knob, the speed
will increase in larger increments, 2.5 knob revolutions until full
speed. Turning the knob slowly increases the speed in smaller
increments, 5 knob revolutions until full speed. The speed control
knob can be used to change the peak speed in Pulse mode, or the
servo setpoint in Servo mode. The knob does not have an
absolute zero RPM position.
Page 171
If the pump is in Stop State and the pump configuration menu is
not selected, turning the speed control knob has no effect.
Stop/Start Button
If the roller pump is in Stop State, pressing the Start/Stop button
will change the state to Run State. If the roller pump is in Run
State, pressing the Start/Stop button will change the state to Stop
State.
Select Button
Pressing the Select button will reset an active air detection alarm
from a connected air bubble detector. If no alarms are present,
pressing the Select button will access the pump configuration
menu.
Manual Button
The pump response to pressing the Manual button will depend on
the pump state as follows:
In Stop State, no response.
In Run State (Continuous mode), no response.
In Run State, with pulse or servo mode enabled, pump
returns to Continuous mode.
Pump Display
Primary Display Area
Pump speed in revolutions per minute in RPM mode or Servo
mode.
Pump flow in liters per minute in LPM mode or Servo mode.
Secondary Display Area
Servo source value while adjusting the setpoint, then the new
setpoint when adjustment is complete.
Flow setpoint in L/min with flow servo.
Pressure setpoint in mmHg with pressure servo.
Pump Direction
Arrow symbol indicates the default forward direction. While the
pump is operating in the temporary reverse direction, the reverse
arrow is displayed in reverse video.
Page 172
Message Area
Displays internal alert, alarm, status and error messages. Also
displays external alert and alarm messages related to connected
safety systems.
Indicates volume pumped, delivery time or total volume delivered
by a master/follower pump. These indications can be covered up
during internal and external alert, alarm, status, or error
messages.
Operation Mode
Displays symbol corresponding to current operating mode: Pulse,
Master, Follower, Servo.
Knob Position Bar Graph
The bar graph indicates the knob demand position relative to the
maximum speed or flow.
Tube Size
Displays tube size or flow constant selected to calculate pump
flow.
LED
A tricolor LED is viewable when the lower housing is removed.
The LED will display green, red, or yellow indications as follows:
Constant Green – Online mode
Blinking Green – Assignment mode
Constant Yellow – Offline mode
Blinking Yellow – Alert condition
Constant Red – Broken mode
Blinking Red – Alarm condition
Page 173
Status and Error Conditions
Status Conditions
• Cover open
• Paused
• Stopped
• Pumping in reverse
• Changed to Manual
• Changed to Continuous
• Volume delivery paused
• Volume or time delivery done
• Volume or time delivery cancelled
• Ramping Baseline
Internal Error Conditions
• Overspeed alert
• Pump jam
• Power supply error
• Pump board overtemperature
• Motor error
Alerts/Alarms
• Air detection alarm
• Level alarm
• Level alert
• Servo max range alert
• Belt slip alert
• Overpressure alarm
• Overpressure alert
Page 174
External Error Conditions
• Unable to maintain servo settings
• Loss of flowmeter data
• Loss of servo source data alert
• Loss of data from master pump
• Loss of data from follower pump
• Follower pump cannot maintain ratio
• Loss of communication from a connected pump
• CCM missing
System Messages
Roller pump messages are displayed in the message on the pump display. There
are five categories of pump messages.
Message Type Display

External Alarm Reverse video, blinking, <Response>: <Message>
A device or sensor that is
connected to the roller pump has Possible displays:
reported an alarm condition. • STOPPED: <Message>
• PAUSED: <Message>
• SLOWED: <Message>
• <Message> for Message Only
External Alert Reverse video, <Response>: <Message>
connected to the roller pump has Possible displays:
reported an alert condition. • STOPPED: <Message>
• PAUSED: <Message>
• SLOWED: <Message>
Internal Alert Reverse video, <Message>
An alert condition related to the
roller pump has been detected.
Internal Error Blinking <Message>
A roller pump error condition has
been detected.
Page 175
Internal Status <Message>
The status of a pump condition
has changed.
The following tables include the messages that can appear on the roller pump
display and corresponding operator responses.
Alarm Messages
Alarm Condition Pump Display Operator Response

Alarm Message
Air detected for connected <Response>: Correct air condition, clear
air bubble detector. alarm, restart pump if
AIR DETECTED stopped.
Low level detected for <Response>: Correct low level condition,
connected level detector. restart pump if stopped.
LOW LEVEL
Alarm overpressure <Response>: Correct overpressure

detected for connected condition, restart pump if
pressure sensor. OVERPRESSURE stopped.
Alert Messages
Alert Condition Pump Display Operator Response

Alert Message
Pump has reached AUTO: MAX RANGE Check servo source.
maximum speed trying to Check perfusion circuit.
attain setpoint. Alert will clear when speed
slows to within operating
range.
Connected flowmeter <Response>: Clamp the lines. Correct

backflow detected. backflow condition. Check
BACKFLOW for air; clear if present.
Page 176
Alert Message
Pump head speed <motor BELT SLIP Stop and start the pump. If
speed for more than the message reappears,
2 seconds. contact Terumo
Service. Reassign the
pump, use standby
equipment, or use hand
crank.
Follower pump unable to CANNOT MAINTAIN Reduce the follower ratio

maintain master ratio RATIO setting or adjust the
setting. master pump speed. Stop
then start master pump. If
message reappears,
discontinue master/
follower operation.
Low Level detected for <Response>: Correct low level condition,

connected alert level restart pump if stopped.
sensor. LOW LEVEL
Loss of servo source data. MANUAL: MONITOR Check the operation and
FLOW placement of servo
source. If source is
operating properly, try to
initiate servo operation via
the CCM. If message
reappears, discontinue
Cannot maintain servo MANUAL: MONITOR Check the operation and

setpoint. FLOW placement of servo
the CCM. If message
Connected centrifugal <Response>: Restart pump if stopped.

pump detects minimum
flow. MINIMUM FLOW
Alert overpressure <Response>: Correct overpressure

detected for connected condition, restart pump if
pressure sensor. OVERPRESSURE stopped.
pump has gone to coast
speed. PUMP COAST
Page 177
Alert Message
Connected roller pump has <Response>: Restart pump if stopped.
paused.
PUMP PAUSE
Connected pump has <Response>: Restart pump if stopped.
started.
PUMP START
Connected pump has <Response>: Restart connected pump,
stopped. restart pump if stopped.
PUMP STOP
Master stops due to loss of STOPPED: NO Check the follower pump

data from follower pump. FOLLOWER cable connections. Stop
and start the master pump.
If message reappears, do
not use the follower pump
until it has been serviced
Systems Service.
Follower pump stops due STOPPED: NO MASTER Check master pump cable
to loss of data from master connections, then stop and
pump. start master pump. If
message reappears,
reassign the master pump.
Do not use the master
pump until it has been
serviced by Terumo
Service.
Motor speed <demand UNDERSPEED Stop and start the pump. If

speed for more than the message reappears,
2 seconds. contact Terumo
Service. Reassign the
pump, use standby
equipment, or use hand
crank.
Page 178
Error Messages
Error Condition Pump Display Operator Response

Error Message
Loss of connected air CHECK AIR SENSOR Check for proper operation
bubble detect module. and connection of the
module, or try connecting
module to another Base
receptacle. If message
does not clear, be aware
that the pump may not
respond to messages from
the module. Replace the
module and reassign.
Loss of flowmeter module. CHECK FLOWMETER Check for proper operation

and connection of the
Loss of connected level CHECK LEVEL Check for proper operation

module. and connection of the
Loss of communication CHECK LINKED PUMP Check for proper operation

from connected roller or of the linked pump. If
centrifugal pump. message does not clear,
be aware that the pump
may not respond to
messages or operations
requiring information from
the connected pump.
Page 179
Error Message
Loss of connected CHECK PRESSURE Check for proper operation
pressure module. and connection of the
the module. Replace
Network communication NO COMMUNICATION Continue use of roller

failure. pump from front panel
controls and displays. Be
aware that the pump may
not respond to events from
connected devices. Do not
use the system again until
it has been serviced by
Terumo Cardiovascular
Systems Service.
CCM missing. NO SYSTEM COMPUTER Continue use of roller

pump from front panel
controls and displays. Do
not use the system again
until it has been serviced
Systems Service.
Pump application board SERVICE PUMP Discontinue use of the

temperature >80°C for pump until it has been
more than 2 seconds. serviced by Terumo
Service. Reassign pump,
use standby equipment, or
use hand crank.
Self-test failure. SERVICE PUMP Discontinue use of the

serviced by Terumo
use hand crank.
Page 180
Error Message
Pump stops because: STOP: OVERSPEED Try to restart the pump. If
the message reappears,
• pump head or motor discontinue use of the
speed is greater pump until it has been
than maximum serviced by Terumo
pump speed OR Cardiovascular Systems
• motor speed is Service. Reassign pump,
greater than use standby equipment, or
demand speed for use hand crank.
more than
2 seconds.
Overocclusion or STOP: PUMP JAM Clear the pump race or

obstruction in pump race back off the occlusion and
stops pump. try to restart the pump. If
the message reappears,
discontinue use of the
serviced by Terumo
use hand crank.
Motor current >8 A stops STOPPED: MOTOR Try to restart the pump. If
pump. Low level motor ERROR the message reappears,
fault. discontinue use of the
serviced by Terumo
use hand crank.
Vmot current >8A stops STOPPED: Try to restart the pump. If

pump. Overcurrent OVERCURRENT the message reappears,
condition detected. discontinue use of the
serviced by Terumo
use hand crank.
Page 181
Status Messages
Status Condition Pump Display Operator Response

Status Message
Volume auto dose delivery CANCELLED: Message clears when auto
has been cancelled. <current volume>mL dose delivery is resumed,
volume is reset to zero.
Time auto dose delivery CANCELLED Message clears when auto

has been cancelled. <current time remaining> dose delivery is resumed,
time resumes counting
down.
Volume auto dose delivery DONE: Message clears when auto

finished. <current volume>mL dose delivery is restarted.
Time auto dose delivery DONE: 00:00 Message clears when auto
finished. dose delivery is restarted.
Manual button is pressed MANUAL: MONITOR Message should clear
when the pump is in Pulse FLOW when speed is changed or
mode or Servo mode. pump is stopped.
Stop button is pressed in MANUAL: MONITOR Message clears when
Pulse mode or Servo FLOW pump is started.
mode.
Pump is paused during PAUSED: Message clears when

volume auto dose delivery. <current volume>mL pump resumes or stops.
Pump is paused during PAUSED: Message clears when

time auto dose delivery. <current time remaining> pump resumes or stops,
time continues to count
down.
Pump pauses because PAUSED: COVER OPEN Message should clear
cover has been opened. when cover is closed.
Master pump has paused PAUSED: FOLLOWER Message should clear

in response to follower when follower pump
pump event. resumes.
Follower pump has paused PAUSED: MASTER Message should clear

in response to master when master pump
pump event. resumes.
Pump direction has been PUMPING: REVERSE Message should clear
changed to reverse. when default direction is
resumed. Default direction
is resumed when the pump
stops.
Page 182
Status Message
Pulse mode has been RAMP BASELINE: XXX% Monitor the speed change.
activated; base is ramping The base is reduced by 5%
down to target value. every 2 seconds. Message
clears when the target
base setting is reached.
Time auto dose has been RESET TO: <new time Message clears when auto
reset to zero. value> dose delivery restarts.
Pump stops during volume STOPPED: Message clears when

auto dose delivery. <current volume>mL pump is restarted, volume
is reset to zero.
Pump stops during time STOPPED: Message clears when
auto dose delivery. <current time remaining> pump is restarted, time
resumes counting down.
Master pump has stopped STOPPED: FOLLOWER Message should clear
in response to follower when master pump is
pump event. restarted.
Follower pump has STOPPED: MASTER Message should clear

stopped in response to when master pump is
master pump event. restarted.
Hardware Interface
The roller pump receives a 5 VDC and 24 VDC supply from the system
Base via the pump/system cable.
Software Interface
The roller pump does not have a software interface to any non-system devices.
Interface with Other Products
The small and large roller pumps accommodate a variety of tubing sizes from
perfusion circuits. The roller pump does not interface with any other products or
devices. It is not intended that the roller pump be operated as a stand-alone
product.
Theory of Operation
Startup
During start-up, the pump receives power from the system Bus and starts its power-
on self-test. If successful, all the user interface control components are ready to be
used and the pump shows its run-time display. This display contains the following
information:
Page 183
• Ready message: READY:PRESS START, READY:CHECKDIRECTION,
DIRECTION CHANGED
• Display units: L/min or RPM
• Permanent address, or pump name: The permanent address is displayed
in the name area until a Perfusion screen selects the pump and puts it
Online. The pump will then display its assigned name.
• Direction symbol: If the pump wakes-up from power-off or reset and
cannot verify that its default forward direction is the same as the system
default, the pump will display the direction symbol for the pump’s default
direction, and display the ready message, READY: CHECK DIRECTION.
If the pump wakes-up from power-off or reset and its default forward
direction has been changed by the system, the pump will display the
direction symbol showing the new direction while blinking the message,
DIRECTION CHANGED.
• Tube size or flow constant: The tube size or flow constant displayed is the
one last selected for the pump. The default tube size is 1/2 in (12,7 mm)
for large roller pump, 1/4 in (6,4 mm) for the small roller pump.
Page 184
Configuration Data
Continuous Mode
Pump Flow Calculation
For the large pump, the software calculates the flow in L/min by
multiplying the measured RPM/1000 by the following flow
constants (FC), based on the tube size selected:
Tube Size ml/revolution FC Value

1/8 in 3.25 033
3/16 in 7.38 074
1/4 in 12.69 127
5/16 in 18.17 182
3/8 in 27.20 272
7/16 in 36.39 364
1/2 in 43.19 432
6 mm 11.70 117
8 mm 19.00 190
10 mm 27.90 279
12 mm 45.00 450
S1:1 25.38 254
S2:1 19.23 192
S4:1 15.75 158
S8:1 14.47 145
Page 185
For the small pump, the software calculates the flow in L/min by
multiplying the measured RPM/1000 by the following flow
constants (FC) based on the tube size selected:
Tube Size ml/revolution FC Value

1/8 in 2.21 022
3/16 in 4.68 047
1/4 in 8.03 080
5/16 in 11.41 114
3/8 in 15.97 160
6 mm 7.40 074
8 mm 12.10 121
10 mm 16.90 169
S1:1 16.00 160
S2:1 12.04 120
S4:1 10.11 101
S8:1 9.24 09
Both roller pumps support user defined flow constants in the range
from 1 to 650. The value used for calculation is the entered flow
constant/10.
Pulse Mode
Pulse Settings
• Pulse rate ranges from 26 BPM to 150 BMP in 1 BPM increments;
BPM is within ± 5%.
• Pulse width ranges from 0% to 100% in 5% increments.
• Pulse baseline ranges from 0% to 100% in 5% increments.
• The speed knob sets the peak speed.
Speed Control in Pulse Mode
During pulse operation in clinical normal ranges, the roller pump
will meet the same speed control criteria as in Continuous mode,
in terms of maximum acceleration rates, reaching target speed,
and target speed regulation.
Master/Follower in Pulse Mode
Pumps that have been designated as master pump will not
support pulse operation.
Page 186
Servo in Pulse Mode
External flow or pressure servos are not supported during pulse
operation.
Volume Tracking in Pulse Mode
Volume tracking and timed delivery and all their associated
triggers are not supported during pulse operation.
Volume Tracking
The roller pump can compute and track an accumulated volume. The
volume accumulator is built into the pump. The accumulated volume is
displayed on the CCM and on the pump local display. The pump can be
run manually, computing the volume until the user stops the pump, or it
can be used to deliver an auto-dose volume and automatically stop when
the volume is reached.
Master/Follower Configuration
A roller pump designated as the follower can use data from a master roller
pump to maintain a ratio or percentage relationship with that pump’s
speed or flow. In Ratio mode, the follower pump runs at a fixed percentage
of the master’s speed. In Percent Flow mode, the follower pump runs at a
fixed percentage of the master’s flow. The follower pump control slide bar
or the speed knob is used to adjust the follower pump ratio with the
master. The two pumps operate in tandem. If one pump starts, the other
starts. If one of the pumps stops or pauses then the other stops or pauses.
Note that when a pump is designated as a follower it runs only in
Continuous mode. A master pump cannot pulse and a follower pump
cannot servo to any other data source but the master pump’s RPM or flow
data. The CCM does not allow trigger linkages to be made with a follower
pump.
Servo Mode
The roller pump can be configured using the CCM to use external
pressure or flow data and adjust its speed to maintain a constant pressure
or flow setpoint. The pump listens to one servo data source at a time and
performs the servo while meeting its specified overall RPM accuracy and
torque delivery requirements. A single pump, starting in Continuous mode
and/or a pump assigned to be a master pump can run an external servo.
The follower pump cannot run as external servo as it is listening to the
master pump data, treating it as an external servo data source. The roller
pump servo setpoint can be changed during use by adjusting the pump
speed.
Page 187
Pressure Servo Data Range
The roller pump will initiate and remain in pressure servo while the
source data is within the following ranges:
Positive pressure servo data range: 10 mmHg to
400 mmHg
Negative pressure servo data range: -10 mmHg to
-200 mmHg
Flow Servo Data Range
The roller pump will initiate and remain in flow servo while the
source data is within the range of 1 L/min to +7 L/min.
Status Reporting
The application software reports the following status information on the system Bus:
• Pumping mode (Continuous, Master, Follower, Pulse, Servo)
• Operational state (stopped, run continuous, run servo, pause continuous,
pause servo)
• Speed (RPM)
• Flow (L/min)
• Tube size
• Flow constant
• Current pump direction
• Default pump direction
• Ratio value
• Motor board temperature
• Fault status (Overspeed, Underspeed, Overcurrent, Belt Slip)
• Language and pump label
• Trigger configuration and status information
Application Board
The roller pump application board consists of a motor control section, a pass-
through of control signals from the generic board to the graphics controller board,
an interface with the lid open switch, an interface with the motor tachometer and
pump guts tachometer, a board temperature monitor, and fan connectors.
Page 188
Local User Interface
The roller pump local user interface is made up of a membrane panel keypad with
three switches, the graphics controller board, the flat panel display, and one speed
control encoder. When assembled into the pump from the inside, the display sits
underneath the membrane panel, attached to the outside of the pump. The speed
control encoder is mounted to the membrane panel from the inside and plugs into
the graphics controller board.
Graphics Controller Board
The graphics controller board is designed to interface between the flat panel
display, membrane panel buttons, and the application board.
Module Self-test
The pump will cycle through a startup self-test. If the pump passes all start-up tests
but is Offline, the module ID, default direction graphic, and last tube size or flow
constant entered will be displayed.
The message, READY: CHECK DIRECTION, is displayed when the pump cannot
verify that its default forward direction matches the system default.
Once the start-up test is complete and the pump is Online, the message, READY:
PRESS START, is posted until the user activates a control from the pump control
panel or on the CCM.
If the power-on self-test fails, a message is displayed on the pump display and the
CCM.
Page 189
Roller-to-roller adjustment
1. Disconnect the power cable from the back of the pump and remove
the pump from the Base.
2. Remove the pump safety cover and the tube clamp assembly.
3. Mount the test-fixture mounting bar and dial indicator.
4. Adjust the dial indicator position so the needle deflects to mid-scale

when the stem makes contact with the highest point of one of the
rollers. Verify the stem is at a 45° angle when it contacts the roller
and the contact point is midway between the top and bottom of the
roller. Verify that the two rollers and the body of the gauge and stem
are in a straight line as shown.
5. Position each roller on the roller pump guts as shown, and rotate
each in turn, to check for out-of-round on each roller. If deflection on
either roller is greater than 0.0010 in, replace that roller. When both
rollers have less than 0.0010 in deflection, continue on to the next
step.
6. Choose one roller as a reference. Rotate the roller pump guts until
the maximum needle deflection is observed. Turn the dial’s scale so
the point of maximum deflection is set to zero.
7. Rotate the roller pump guts and observe the maximum needle
deflection caused by the non-reference roller.
Page 190
8. Turn the occlusion knob one revolution clockwise (CW), and then
back counterclockwise (CCW) to the same point. Verify the reference
roller is still zero. If not, set the point of maximum deflection to zero.
9. Again, rotate the roller pump guts and observe the maximum needle
deflection caused by the non-reference roller.
10. Record the measured difference between the two rollers.
• If the difference between deflections is less than or equal to

0.0015 in, the roller-to-roller measurement is within specification.
Record N/A in the adjusted Roller-to-Roller measurement.
• If the difference between deflections is more than 0.0015 in,
perform a roller-to-roller adjustment as follows.
11. Loosen the set screw on the bottom of the roller slide assembly with a
0.050 in Allen wrench.
12. Grasp the bottom hex head fastener under the roller slide (where you
loosened the set screw) with a 1/4 in open-end wrench and carefully
turn the roller post no more than 1/8 turn (45° rotation).
13. Recheck the roller-to-roller measurement and continue to adjust by

no more than 1/8 turn (45° rotation), rechecking the deflection from
the reference roller after each adjustment until the difference in
measurement is 0.0015 in or less.
14. When the measurement is within specification tighten the set screw.
Do not overtighten the set screw.
15. Record the adjusted Roller-to-Roller measurement.
16. Roll the gut in and out to verify repeatability.
17. Remove the dial indicator and mounting bar.
18. Inspect the rollers to be sure they spin freely.
19. Inspect each roller for nicks and scratches.
20. Replace the tube clamp assembly and pump cover.
Page 191
Checking casting runout
2. Remove the pump safety cover and tube clamp assembly.
3. Gently lift the top cap off the adjustment knob and set aside.
4. Remove the tube clamp assembly.
5. Assemble the dial indicator kit (P/N 133604) and casting runout
fixture (P/N 804235). Mount the casting runout fixture to the pump
shaft as shown below.
Casting Runout Fixture
Dial Indicator
Page 192
6. Adjust the dial indicator position so that the needle deflects to less
than full-scale when the stem makes contact with a point on the
casting that is half the height of the casting and where the casting
widens, as shown below.
Point B
needle
Point A
7. Rotate the roller assembly counterclockwise around the casting from

Point A to Point B (or vice versa). Monitor the dial's needle deflection
while doing so.
• If the needle deflects less than 0.0015 in from your initial reading,
remove the casting runout fixture. (Loosen the knurled knob, then
tap on the top of the fixture to release it.) Inspect the casting for
any nicks or scratches in the tubing path. As a guide, the casting
should be replaced if a nick or scratch is deep enough to catch a
fingernail.
• If the needle deflects more than 0.0015 in from your initial
reading, the casting needs to be replaced. Call the Terumo
Cardiovascular Systems Corporation Service Center for
instructions.
Page 193

Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041, see page 597.
Parts Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041, see page 611.
Large Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801798, see page 615.
Parts Large Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801798, see page 619.
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040, see page 621.
Parts Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040, see page 635.
Schematic Large and Small Roller Pump Display - P/N 801225, see page 639.
Small Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801805, see page 641.
Large and Small Roller Pump Display - P/N 801225, see page 647.
Parts Large and Small Roller Pump Display - P/N 801225, see page 649.
Parts Small Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801805, see page 645.
Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly - P/N 809051, see page 651.
Parts Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly - P/N 809051, see page 653.
Cable Assembly Kit - P/N 803737 (includes 12 V DC fan, digital encoder, optical
switch, pump cable, and cover interlock switch), see page 655.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on roller pumps, log in to Service. From the Service
and Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, note that the correct
pump is responding, and press More Info. The More Info screen displays
information about Self Test Status, V5 Voltage, V5 Current, Vmot Voltage, Vmot
Current, Temperature, and Pump Rotations.
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Page 194
Diagnostic Theory
System 1 is designed with multiple, internal, self-diagnostic processes. The system
provides four viewing areas useful to the troubleshooting process.
1. The roller pump reports its overall heath and status using a three-
color-capable LED on the generic board. Remove the lower housing to
watch the LED color sequence.
2. The Perfusion screen may be used to assess if the system can put a
roller pump online and whether or not the pump can be controlled via
the CCM. The Perfusion screen will report a failed pump if the failure
happens while the pump is online. The System tab on the Perfusion
screen shows more detailed information about the status of the pump.
3. The Configuration area can be used to check if a roller pump is linked

and mapped. A pump selected for a Perfusion screen will blink its
name display and show the name chosen by the user. When the lower
pump cover is removed, the LED on the generic board can be viewed.
It will remain yellow until the pump is selected to be used within a
Perfusion screen. The LED will blink green when it is selected from
within the Configuration area.
4. The Service area may be used to view the status of any module or
pump and/or the status of the CCM itself. Individual pumps and
modules run self-diagnostic routines and record errors in an internal
log. The Service area may be used to view and download these logs.
The internal log may capture and log reset event(s) and/or out of
range error(s).
Repair Procedures
Note: Lubricant should not come in contact with either the upper or lower side of the
pump housing. Clean accidental lubricant spills from the housing using isopropyl
alcohol on a clean cloth.
Replacing the pump air filter

Note: Refer to page 597 for the large roller pump, or page 621 for the small roller
pump, when performing the following procedures.
Note: The pump air filter is P/N 802280.
2. Place the pump on the bench.
Page 195
3. Remove the lid/hinge assembly by lifting the hinge (Items 47 and 48)
from the casting. Set the lid/hinge assembly aside.
4. Invert the pump and provide support to protect the speed control knob.
5. Remove the two screws and washers securing the filter cover (Item
32) to the lower housing.
6. Remove the filter cover.
7. Remove the filter.
8. Install the new filter.
9. Install the filter cover.
10. Install and tighten the two screws and washers securing the filter
cover to the lower housing.
11. Turn the pump upright and reinstall the lid/hinge assembly.
12. Install the pump on the Base and reconnect the power cable to the
pump.
Replacing the molded tab/pump mounting

Note: Refer to page 597 for the large roller pump, or page 621 for the small roller
pump, when performing the following procedures.
Note: The molded tab/pump mounting is P/N 802548.
1. Disconnect the power cable from the pump and remove the pump from
the Base.
Page 196
5. Remove the four screws securing the molded tab to the lower housing.
6. Remove the molded tab.
7. Install the new molded tab.
8. Install and tighten the four screws securing the molded tab to the lower
housing.
9. Turn the pump upright and install the lid/hinge assembly.
pump.
Replacing the pump fans

Note: Refer to the drawings on page 597 for large roller pumps and on page 621
for small roller pumps if necessary.
Note: The pump fans are included in the cable assembly kit, P/N 803737.
1. Disconnect the power cable from the pump and remove the pump
from the Base.
Page 197
5. Remove the screws securing the upper and lower pump housings.
Note the screw length and position for replacement purposes.
two screws near three screws
release latch along each
side
four screws securing

molded tab
On newer model pumps (serial numbers greater than 0255), you need
to remove the screws that secure the molded tab to separate the
housing; on earlier model pumps, these screws did not extend into the
pump frame.
The small roller pump housing has fewer screws.
6. Separate the housing sections as shown.
DB15 connector
Page 198
7. Carefully cut the tie wrap for the fan wires, disconnect the fan
connectors P2 and P3, cut the tie wrap for the pump cable above the
DB15 connector, and set the lower housing on the bench.
8. Remove the four screws and washers securing the fan assembly to
the lower housing.
9. Remove the fan.
10. Install the new fan in the correct orientation for air flow direction. The
arrow molded into the fan should point downward so that the air flows
out of the housing.
11. Install and tighten the four screws with lock washers securing the fan
assembly to the lower housing.
12. Reinstall the tie wrap for the pump cable.
13. Reconnect the fan connectors P2 and P3.
14. Reinstall the tie wrap for the fan wires.
15. Carefully place the lower housing on the upper housing. Ensure
cables are not pinched between housing and frame.
16. Install and tighten the screws securing the upper and lower housing.
17. Turn the pump upright and replace the lid/hinge assembly.
pump.
Replacing the roller pump display assembly or the individual boards on both pumps
(Includes: encoder (P/N 802085), graphics board (P/N 801520), small graphics
planar display board (P/N 801224), EMC shield (P/N 803711), and membrane panel
(P/N 801221))
Note: See page 647 for the Large and Small Roller Pump Display, P/N 801225.
Note: The roller pump display assembly is P/N 801225.
Page 199
from the Base.

side

molded tab
pump frame.
Page 200
DB15 connector
8. Disconnect the pump main power connector DB15 at the module by

removing the two Allen-head screws. Set the lower housing aside.
9. Gently disconnect the ribbon cable from the connector on the display
assembly.
10. Remove the pump module. (You may be able to remove the nuts on
the display board by moving the pump module from the side to the
front of the housing without disconnecting any electrical cable.
• Disconnect electrical cables as needed.

• Remove the two screws (including washers and standoffs)
connecting the pump module to the frame.
• If the pump module is not free, remove the third screw.
Page 201
third screw
two screws
• Cut tie wraps as needed to move the pump module out of the way
and allow access to the nuts on the display board.
• Move the pump module aside.
11. Remove the four 6-32 nuts (Item 149) securing the display assembly
to the upper housing.
12. A strong adhesive secures the membrane panel of the roller pump
display assembly to the upper housing. Gently and persistently pry the
membrane panel to separate it from the upper housing. If replacing
individual boards, go to the next step. Otherwise, install the new
display assembly (801225). Go the to step 20 when finished.
13. Set the upper assembly aside.
14. Disconnect the 5-pin encoder cable from the graphics board.
• Remove the graphics board subassembly by removing the four

mounting screws with the longer standoffs located near each
corner. Use care to avoid damaging the 6-pin connector that joins
the membrane panel and the graphics board subassembly.
• If you need to replace any of the boards in the graphics board
subassembly, remove the four mounting screws with the shorter
standoffs. Carefully align all pins and connectors when
reassembling the graphics board subassembly. The graphics
board subassembly is made up of the following, which must be
ordered separately:
Graphics board, P/N801520
EMC shield, P/N 803711
Small graphics planar display, P/N 801224
Page 202
15. If you need to replace the membrane panel (P/N 801221) or the
encoder (P/N 802085), remove the speed control knob and unscrew
the encoder. Using new or good parts, install the encoder on the
membrane panel, being careful to position the encoder as found.
16. If needed, carefully clean the plasma display glass panel before
reassembly.
17. Install the graphics board subassembly to the membrane panel, being
careful to align the 6-pin connector between them, and reinstall the
four mounting screws through the standoffs.
18. Reconnect the 5-pin encoder cable to the graphics board

subassembly.
19. Clean the upper housing to remove any adhesive residue.
20. Install the membrane panel.
• If installing the existing membrane panel, add a thin layer of

silicone sealant to the edge of the membrane panel, and slide the
display assembly into the opening in the upper housing. Be careful
not to tangle the ribbon connectors.
• If installing a new membrane panel, remove the paper covering to
reveal the adhesive, and slide the display assembly into the
opening in the upper housing. Be careful not to tangle the ribbon
connectors.
21. Reinstall the four nuts to secure the display assembly to the upper
housing.
22. Install the pump module.
• Move the pump module to its correct position.

• Install and tighten the screws (including washers and standoffs) to
secure the pump module to the frame.
• Reconnect tie wraps as necessary.
• Reconnect the electrical cables as necessary.
23. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the connector on the display assembly.
24. Reconnect the pump main power connector and tighten the two Allen-
head screws.
Page 203
28. Gently position the upper and lower housings together. Ensure cables
are not pinched between housing and frame.
29. Reinstall and tighten the screws securing the upper and lower pump
housings.
pump.
Replacing the pulley and/or encoder on the guts of the large and small roller pumps
(Includes: pulley (P/N 802151) and encoder (P/N 802207) for either pump.)
Note: See page 647 for the Large and Small Roller Pump Display P/N 801225.
Note: The roller pump display assembly is P/N 801225.
from the Base.
Page 204

side

molded tab
pump frame.
DB15 connector
8. Disconnect the pump main power connector DB15 at the module by

removing the two Allen-head screws. Set the lower housing aside.
9. Gently disconnect the ribbon cable from the connector on the display
assembly.
Page 205
10. Carefully loosen the 9/16 in nut (Item 163) (including washer-spring-
washer stack, Items 161, 23, 161).
11. Slide the motor/encoder toward the large pulley to loosen tension on
the belt.
12. Remove the snap rings from the four mounting posts.
13. Remove the washer stack from the four mounting posts. Note the
order of the washer stack for reassembly as some are thicker. A thin
nylon washer should be on each post under the motor mounting plate.
14. Carefully lift the motor/encoder with mounting plate assembly and set
aside.
15. Remove the belt.
16. Remove the 9/16 nut and two washers from the gut shaft.
optical sensor
17. Carefully remove the pulley and encoder through the back of the frame
so as not to damage the optical encoder sensor.
Page 206
18. Reinstall the parts together.
19. Carefully slide the assembled pulley/encoder through the back of the
frame, so that the edge of the encoder is in the center of the optical
sensor.
optical
sensor
Page 207
20. Reinstall the guts into the casting, with the shaft through the
pulley/encoder.
21. Turn the guts until the locking pin seats in the slot of the pulley.
22. Reinstall the washer, lock washer, and 9/16 nut. Tighten the nut
securely.
23. Install the belt and the motor/encoder with mounting plate assembly.
• Place the belt on the small pulley.

• Slide the belt on the large pulley.
• Reinstall the washer stack and snap rings on the four mounting
posts. See page 627 for more information. The correct order of the
stack from the bottom is:
Thicker plastic washer against the pump mounting plate
(Item 141)
Flat side of the flat washer facing the wave washer (Item
142)
Wave washer (Item 143)
Flat side of the flat washer facing the wave washer (Item
142)
Snap ring with the sharp edge up (away from the force)
(Item 145)
24. Set the belt tension.
• Place the tension gauge (P/N 803962) against the spring, between
the two washers (Items 161 23, 161).
• Continue to tighten the 9/16 in nut (Item 163) until the fixture is
held very snugly.
• Mark the positional orientation of the nut.
• Back-off the nut slightly and remove the tension gauge.
Page 208
• Retighten the nut to the marked position.

• To help seat the belt, rotate the motor shaft so that the belt moves
around the pulleys a few times.
• Recheck the tension with the tension gauge and verify the
adjustment is snug.
25. Install the pump module.
• Move the pump module to its correct location.

secure the pump module to the frame.
26. Reconnect the interlock connector to the pump module.
27. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the connector on the display assembly.
28. Reconnect the pump main power connector and tighten the two Allen-
head screws.
housings.
Page 209
pump.
Replacing the pump module

Note: The pump module for the large roller pump is P/N 803741. The pump module
for the small roller pump is P/N 802209.
1. Disconnect the pump cable from the pump and remove the pump from
the Base.
Page 210
side

molded tab
pump frame.
DB15 connector
8. Disconnect the pump main power connector DB15 at the pump

module by removing the two Allen-head screws. Set the lower housing
aside.
Page 211
9. Remove the pump module. (You may be able to remove the nuts on
the display board by moving the pump module from the side to the
front of the housing without disconnecting any electrical cable.)
• Disconnect electrical cables as needed.

• Remove the two screws (including washers and standoffs)
connecting the pump module to the frame.
• If the pump module is not free, remove the third screw.
third screw
two screws
• Cut tie wraps as needed to remove the pump module.

10. Install the new pump module.

secure the module to the frame.
• Reconnect the ribbon cable.
• Reconnect the electrical cables.
• Reinstall tie wrap as necessary.
11. Reconnect the pump main power connector DB15 and tighten the two
Allen-head screws.
are not pinched.
Page 212
housings.
18. Install the pump on the Base and reconnect the pump cable to the
pump.
Replacing the pump drive belt

Note: When snap rings are stamped (pressed) from sheet metal, the cutting
motion and pressure of the die creates a rounded edge on the top of the snap
ring. You can see and feel the difference between the rounded edge on the top
and the flat, sharp edge on the bottom of the snap ring. When reinstalling snap
rings, make sure to place the flat, sharp edge away from the force (pressure).
rounded edge
flat, sharp edge
Note: The pump drive belt is P/N 802203.

from the Base.
Page 213
side

molded tab
pump frame.
DB15 connector

module by loosening the two Allen-head screws. Set the lower
housing aside.
Page 214
9. Carefully loosen the 9/16 in nut (Item 163) to release the tension for
easy motor/encoder removal.
the belt.
11. Cut tie wraps and disconnect electrical connections as needed.
aside.
15. Remove the belt.
16. Replace the belt and install the motor/encoder.

• Lower the motor/encoder into position and slide the belt on the
large pulley.
posts. See page 627 (small roller pump) and page 603 (large
roller pump) for more information. The correct order of the stack
from the bottom is:
thicker plastic washer against the pump mounting plate
(Item 141)
flat side of the flat washer facing the wave washer (Item 142)
wave washer (Item 143)
snap ring with the sharp edge up (away from the force)
(Item 145)
17. Begin to tighten the 9/16 in nut (Item 163).
• Place the tension gauge (P/N 803962) against the spring,

between the two washers (Items 161, 23, 161).
held very snugly.
Page 215
• Visually note the positional orientation of the nut.
• Retighten the nut to the position noted prior to loosening the nut.
adjustment is snug.
• Repeat this check to verify the belt tension is correct.
19. Reconnect electrical connections and reinstall tie wrap as needed.
20. Connect the pump main power connector DB15 at the pump module
and tighten the two Allen-head screws.
housings.
27. Reinstall the pump power cable.
Page 216
Replacing the pump drive motor/encoder

motion and pressure of the die creates a rounded edge on the top of the snap
ring. You can see and feel the difference between the rounded edge on the top
and the flat, sharp edge on the bottom of the snap ring. When reinstalling snap
rings, make sure to place the flat, sharp edge away from the force (pressure).
rounded edge
flat, sharp edge
Note: The pump drive motor/encoder is P/N 809051.

from the Base.
Page 217
side

molded tab
pump frame.
DB15 connector

module by loosening the two Allen-head screws.
Page 218
the belt.
11. Cut tie wraps and disconnect electrical connections as needed.
aside.
15. Remove the four Allen-head bolts securing the motor/encoder to the
motor plate bracket (Item 138).
16. Attach the motor plate bracket to the new motor/encoder and install
and tighten the four Allen-head bolts with Loctite 242.
17. Remove the pulley from the old motor/encoder.
• Loosen the set-screw.

• Lift the pulley up and off.
18. Install the pulley on the new motor/encoder.
• Place the pulley on the new motor/encoder, align the shaft flat with
the set screw, and tighten the set-screw slightly.
• Make sure the thin plastic washers are on each post under the
motor mounting plate.
• Lower the motor/encoder into place, holding it securely.
Page 219
19. Install the belt and motor/encoder.
• Align the set-screw (Item 135) to be visible through the side

access slot on the side of the frame.
• Slide the belt on the large pulley.
posts. See page 627 (small roller pump) and page 603 (large
roller pump) for more information. The correct order of the stack
from the bottom is:
thicker plastic washer against the pump mounting plate
(Item 141)
wave washer (Item 143)
snap ring with the sharp edge up (away from the force)
(Item 145)
20. Check the alignment of the two pulleys.
Page 220
• Lay the pulley alignment fixture (P/N 803887) flat against the large
pulley.
• Slip the notched end of the fixture securely into the slot on the
small pulley closest to the set-screw on the small pulley.
• Visually assure that the fixture is both flat with the large pulley and
locked with the small pulley.
• Tighten the set-screw through the access slot on the frame.
21. Begin to tighten the 9/16 in nut (Item 163).
Page 221
• Place the tension gauge (P/N 803962) against the spring,

between the two washers (Items 161, 23, 161).
held very snugly.
adjustment is snug.
23. Reconnect electrical connections and reinstall tie wraps as needed.
24. Connect the pump main power connector DB15 at the module and
tighten the two Allen-head screws.
25. Connect the fan wiring at the module (P2 and P3).
housings.
Page 222
Removing and installing the roller pump guts

Note: Refer to the drawings on page 597 for large roller pumps and on page 621 for
small roller pumps if necessary.
Note: The roller pump guts for the large roller pump is P/N 801798. The roller pump
guts for the small roller pump is P/N 801805.
the Base.
4. Remove the tube clamp assembly (Item 200).
Page 223
side

molded tab
pump frame.
DB15 connector

module by loosening the two Allen-head screws.
Page 224
11. Slide the motor toward the large pulley to loosen tension on the belt.
12. Carefully pull the roller pump guts (Item 18) away from the casting.
13. Slide the new roller pump guts (Item 18) into the casting, making sure
the shaft goes through the encoder wheel and pulley. Align the roller
pump guts locking pin with the locking notch in the large pulley. You
will feel when the pin seats.
14. Begin to tighten the 9/16 in nut (item 163).
• Place the tension gauge (P/N 803962) against the spring, between
the two washers (Items 161, 23, 161).
held very snugly.
adjustment is snug.
16. Reconnect electrical connections and reinstall tie wrap as needed.
Page 225
17. Connect the pump main power connector DB15 at the pump module
and tighten the two Allen-head screws.
housings, including the screws in the molded tab if necessary.
24. Reinstall the tube clamp assembly (Item 200) making sure that the
white magnetic detent assembly is in place, that the black rubber
insert goes below the occluder ring, and that the tongue snaps into the
slot in the occluder shaft. Tighten the two slotted screws.
Replacing the occlusion adjustment knob bearing

Note: See page 615 for the large roller pump guts and page 641 for the small roller
pump guts when following this procedure.
Note: The occlusion adjustment knob bearing is P/N 801783.
motion and pressure of the die creates a rounded edge on the top of the snap ring.
You can see and feel the difference between the rounded edge on the top and the
flat, sharp edge on the bottom of the snap ring. When reinstalling snap rings, make
sure to place the flat, sharp edge away from the force (pressure).
rounded edge
flat, sharp edge
Note: Use new external snap rings for reassembly, P/N 801784 External Snap
Ring (Item 38), and P/N 801781 Bowed External Snap Ring (Item 37).
the Base.
Page 226
5. Gently lift the top cap off the adjustment knob (Item 27) and set aside.
6. Remove the small external snap ring (Item 38) from the top of the main
shaft (Item 15) and set aside.
7. Insert a spanner wrench by aligning the pin on the wrench with the
notch on the screw adjustment (Item 25).
Page 227
8. While holding the spanner wrench, turn the adjustment knob (Item 27)
counterclockwise to remove the knob. Note the dial number relative to
the notch on the screw adjustment at the point of release for re-
installment purposes.
9. Set the knob on a flat surface.
10. Remove the large internal snap ring (Item 26) from the adjustment
knob (Item 27).
11. Remove the bearing (Item 24) by inverting the knob and tapping
around the inner race to back out the bearing from the knob.
inner
race
12. Install the new bearing using the Bearing Press Fixture, P/N 804187,
by tapping or pressing the bearing until it is fully seated. Test this
bearing for smooth rotation.
Page 228
13. Reinstall the large internal snap ring (Item 26) on the adjustment knob
(Item 27) with the rounded edge side toward the bearing. (The flat,
sharp surface is away from the force.)
notch on the screw adjustment (Item 25) and hold firmly.
15. Align the correct dial indicator position (from step 8), and reinstall the
adjustment knob (Item 27) by turning the knob clockwise until the knob
stops.
16. Reinstall a new small external snap ring (Item 38) on the main shaft
17. Reinstall the top cap on the adjustment knob (Item 27).
white magnetic detent assembly is in place, that the black rubber insert
goes below the occluder ring, and that the tongue snaps into the slot in
the occluder shaft. Tighten the two slotted screws.
19. Reinstall the lid/hinge assembly.
20. Reinstall the pump on the Base and connect the cable to the pump.
Replacing the screw adjustment bearings

Note: See page 615 for the large roller pump guts and 641 for the small roller
pump guts when following this procedure.
Note: The upper screw adjustment bearing is P/N 801783. The lower screw
adjustment bearing is P/N 801132.
rounded edge
flat, sharp edge
Page 229
the Base.
6. Remove the small external snap ring (Item 38) from the top of the main
shaft (Item 15) and set aside.
Page 230
8. Note the dial number relative to the notch on the screw adjustment at
the point of release for re-installment purposes. While holding the
spanner wrench, turn the adjustment knob (Item 27) counterclockwise
to remove the knob.
9. Set the knob on a flat surface.
10. There are two small external snap rings, one above the other. Remove
both snap rings.
11. Lift the screw adjustment (Item 25) off the main shaft (Item 15).
screw adjustment
Page 231
12. Evaluate both bearings in the screw adjustment (Item 25) and replace
the worn or damaged bearing(s).
To replace the lower bearing (Item 28):

From the inside of the adjustment screw (Item 25), gently tap
around the lip of the bearing to walk the bearing out.
Install the new lower bearing using the Bearing Insertion Tool,
P/N 801528, by gently tapping or pressing the fixture until the
bearing is fully seated.
To replace the upper bearing (Item 24):
Remove the large internal snap ring.
Invert the adjustment screw (Item 25) and, from the inside of the
adjustment screw, gently tap around the inner race to back out the
bearing from the adjustment screw.
Install the new upper bearing using the Bearing Press Fixture,
P/N 804187, by tapping or pressing evenly on the fixture until the
bearing is fully seated.
Reinstall the large internal snap ring with the rounded edge side
toward the bearing. (The flat, sharp surface is away from the
force.)
13. Reinstall the screw adjustment (Item 25) on the main shaft (Item 15).
14. Reinstall a new lower small bowed external snap ring (Item 37) above
the screw adjustment with the rounded edge side toward the bearing.
(The flat, sharp surface is away from the force.)
15. Reinstall a new upper small bowed external snap ring (Item 37) on the
main shaft (Item 15) with the rounded edge side facing up. (This snap
ring seats against the bottom of the occlusion knob bearing.
notch on the screw adjustment (Item 25) and hold firmly.
17. Align the correct dial indicator position (from step 8) and reinstall the
adjustment knob (Item 27) by turning the knob clockwise until the knob
stops.
Page 232
white magnetic detent assembly is in place, that the black rubber insert
goes below the occluder ring, and that the tongue snaps into the slot in
the occluder shaft. Tighten the two slotted screws.
Replacing the roller slide assembly

Note: The roller slide assembly for the large roller pump is P/N 804509. The roller
slide assembly for the small roller pump is P/N 804510.
Note: Cut card stock (manila file folder weight) to fit inside the race as pictured.
Use to protect the race from scrapes.
Note: See page 615 for the large roller pump guts and page 641 for the small
roller pump guts when following this procedure.
Note: The recommended spare parts list includes the Gib and springs that are
removed and reinstalled in this procedure. We recommend that you have spare
Gibs and springs available as well as small external snap rings.
801786 Extension Spring
801789 Compression Spring
809909 Gib Roller Slide
801784 External Snap Ring
801781 Bowed External Snap Ring
Page 233
rounded edge
flat, sharp edge
from the Base.
6. Remove the small external snap ring (Item 38) from the main shaft
(Item 15) and set aside.
Page 234
8. Note the dial number relative to the notch on the screw adjustment at
the point of release for re-installment purposes. While holding the
spanner wrench, turn the adjustment knob (Item 27) counterclockwise
to remove the knob.
9. There are two small external snap rings, one above the other.
Remove both snap rings.
10. Lift the screw adjustment (Item 25) off the main shaft (Item 15).
screw adjustment
11. Remove the four screws (3/32 Allen) securing the cover (Item 32) to
the casting and set the cover aside.
Page 235
12. Carefully remove the two top-mounted Gibs/springs (Items 31/30) and
set aside.
13. Remove the joined roller slide assemblies:
• Insert a paper collar to protect the race. See first picture in this
section on page 233.
• Move the guide collar cam block (Item 17) to its lowest position by
pushing down; secure it by inserting a screwdriver in position A.
• Insert another screwdriver in position B and spread the two roller
slide assemblies apart.
position A
position B
• Walk the two roller slide assemblies upward until the pins (Item 8)
clear the guide collar cam block (Item 17), while holding the side-
mounted extension springs (Item 29) and Gibs/compression
springs (Items 31/30) in place.
14. Remove the side mounted extension springs (Item 29) and
Gibs/compression springs (Items 31/30), being careful not to damage
the springs.
15. Evaluate the two roller slide assemblies and determine which needs
replacement.
Page 236
16. Apply approved Mobil Grease (P/N 801803) around the two pins
(Items 8 and 7) on the replacement roller slide assembly and on the
guide collar cam block (Item 17) as needed.
two
pins
Page 237
17. To reinstall the roller slide assemblies:
• Attach the replacement roller slide assembly to the second roller

slide assembly by reinstalling the extension springs (Item 29) and
1
Gibs/compression springs (Items 31/30). Apply Krytox® or
equivalent grease to all springs and Gibs.
• Center the guide collar cam block.

• Hold the lower Gib/springs and the long springs between your
thumbs and middle fingers.
• Use your index fingers to separate the roller slides.

• With the guide collar (Item 17) at its highest position, spread apart
the joined roller slide assemblies by hand, and slide the joined
roller slide assemblies downward and over the guide collar cam
block as far as possible.
• Push the roller slide assemblies down over the cam block and into
place.
1
Krytox® is a registered trademark of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, DE, USA.
Page 238
18. Optionally, attach the replacement roller slide assembly to the second
roller slide assembly by reinstalling the extension springs (Item 29)
and Gibs/compression springs (Items 31/30). Apply Krytox® or
equivalent grease to all springs and Gibs.
• Insert the top of the joined roller arm assemblies into the fixture
(P/N 804617) until the side-mounted Gibs/compression springs
(Item 31/30) are held by the fixture.
• Center the guide collar cam block (Item 17).

• Slide the joined roller arm assemblies/fixture (P/N 804617) down
on the main shaft (Item 15) over the guide collar cam block (Item
17) until the Gibs/compression springs (Items 31/30) are held by
the side of the machined hub (Item 21). Remove the fixture (P/N
804617).
• With the guide collar (Item 17) at its highest position, spread apart
the joined roller slide assemblies by hand, and slide the joined
roller slide assemblies downward and over the guide collar cam
block as far as possible.
Page 239
19. Push down on the guide collar (Item 17) to verify there is proper
motion.
20. Reinstall the two top-mounted Gibs/compression springs (Items

31/30). Apply Krytox® to the Gibs/springs and to the top surface of the
roller slides.
21. Reinstall the cover (Item 32).
• Replace the cover and gently snug the screws.

• Reinstall the screw adjustment making sure both bearings are in
place.
screw
adjustment
• Grasp the threaded top of the screw adjustment, push it

downward until it bottoms out and then release it; repeat three
times. If the screw adjustment will not push down, loosen the
screws a little, and push down and release as above.
• Tighten a screw, push the screw adjustment down and release it,
making sure the roller slides move freely. Then, tighten each
screw in turn in a cross pattern (12, 6, 3, 9), pushing the screw
adjustment down and releasing after each tightening, making sure
the roller slides move freely.
• Repeat until the four screws are secure. If the roller slide
movement binds after a tightening, back the screw off and repeat
the check.
• After fully seating the screws, tighten to 19.8 in pounds.
Page 240
Note: The external snap rings in steps 22 and 23 are bowed. The snap ring
in step 26 is not bowed.
22. Reinstall a new lower small bowed external snap ring (Item 37) above
the screw adjustment with the rounded edge side toward the bearing.
(The flat, sharp surface is away from the force.)
23. Reinstall a new lower small bowed external snap ring (Item 37) on the
main shaft (Item 15) with the rounded edge side facing up. (The flat,
notch on the screw adjustment (Item 25) and hold firmly in place.
25. Align the correct dial indicator position and reinstall the adjustment
knob (Item 27) by turning the knob clockwise until the knob stops.
straight-cut surface is away from the force.)
28. Perform a roller-to-roller adjustment using the procedure on page 190.
white magnetic detent assembly is in place, that the black rubber
insert goes below the occluder ring, and that the tongue snaps into the
slot in the occluder shaft. Tighten the two slotted screws.
Replacing the casting/bearing assembly

The casting/bearing assembly can not be replaced in the field. Send the pump to
the Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Service Center in Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Page 241
Replacing the optical sensor
from the Base.
three screws
two screws along each side
near release
latch
four screws
securing
molded tab
pump frame.
Page 242
DB15
connector
8. Remove the screws and washers securing the DB15 connector and
remove the connector.
9. Disconnect the optical sensor connector from P11 on the module.
10. Remove the screw securing the optical sensor to the frame.
The two outer

screws can be
loosened to
adjust the
optical sensor
on the mounting
plate.
11. Remove the optical sensor and wiring.
12. Install the new optical sensor and wiring, and tighten the screw
securing the optical sensor to the frame. Ensure the sensor surface is
clean. Verify the P11 connector and wires are fully seated and intact.
Page 243
13. Verify the encoder wheel is centered between the two posts on the
optical sensor. If not, align the optical sensor.
• Loosen the two Allen-head screws securing the optical sensor on

its mounting plate.
• Reposition the optical sensor so that the encoder wheel is
centered between the two posts on the optical sensor.
• Tighten the two Allen-head screws securing the optical sensor on
its mounting plate.
14. Reconnect DB15.
15. Reinstall the two mounting screws and washers, reinstall tie wrap as
necessary, and reconnect the fan connectors P2 an P3.
housings.
Page 244
Troubleshooting–Roller Pump System
Troubleshooting Table–Roller Pump System

Note: If a roller pump icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading
and you have verified the jumper is installed (see page 148), download the system,
power manager, and LAN I/F logs. If a device cannot be assigned and linked, also
download the device log. Submit the logs to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Service
Department.
Roller Pump Problem Check Action

Keyword
ABD Cannot clear ABD Replace membrane panel
operation of the
alarm from pump and/or graphics board. See
membrane panel and
local display. page 199.
connections to graphics
board.
Belt Slip Error Excess grease from Clean all surfaces using
for serial number on 4 in
main bearing fouls isopropyl alcohol and a lint-
pumps below 0342, and
belt, encoder wheel, free cloth. Replace belt.
on 6 in pumps below
and pulleys.
0356.
Cardioplegia Delivery tracking Upgrade software.

if software is current
fails.
version.
Display Non-readable Replace graphics board.

graphics board
unreadable display. See page 199.
connections and 12 VDC
supply to display panel,
display connections. Replace display. See page

199.
Page 245
Keyword
Display, No No user assigned Reconfigure the roller pump
if roller pump is assigned
Name name; module ID via the Configuration area.
to Perfusion screen and/or
remains in label area
is offline,
on display.
pump system cable,

Replace cable.
Base connector, Plug into another connector

location. Replace NIC
board. See page 75.
LED sequence during Replace pump module. See

power on, 210 page .
Upgrade pump software to

software version a version recognized by the
compatibility. system.
Display, No No safety messages Replace roller pump display

pump display for missing
Safety on pump local assembly. See page 199.
pixels during power up,
Messages display.
Use Configuration area to

safety configuration change the response so
response settings on that a roller pump will
Perfusion screen, display a message.
Replace safety system

safety system and/or and/or sensor.
sensor cables and
connectors.
Page 246
Keyword
Display, No Text Bright yellow display, Replace pump module if
LED sequence,
no text. LED sequence stalls or
LED is red. See page 210.
Replace graphics board.

See page 199.
graphics board
Replace display. See page

display connections. 199.
Local Control There is no pump Reseat connector.

cable connection between
control from local
display board and driver
control knob.
board. See page 199 for
information on accessing
the boards in the display
assembly.
Local Display Local display is Reseat connector.
cable connection between
blank.
display board and driver
board. See page 199 for
information on accessing
the boards in the display
assembly.
Motor Motor will not spin. Replace motor. See page
internal motor for
217.
connections and continuity
of windings,
internal motor cable and Replace cable.

connection to pump
application board,
roller pump module

assembly. Replace pump module. See
page 210.
Page 247
Keyword
No Power Pump will not turn on. Plug into another connector
NIC connector,
board. See page 75.
Service screen for From the Service screen,

+12 VDC error condition select the pump module
on the internal log, and press History. Replace
pump module if you see the
+12 VDC error condition.
See page 210.
Service screen to If a pump is missing,

determine if all available, replace the pump module
connected pumps are shown for the pump with the blank
in the System Configuration display. If all pumps are
list, shown in the list, replace
the display assembly. See
page 199.
Replace display if it has

display connections. +12 VDC. See page 199.
Overcurrent Overcurrent Replace motor or internal

internal motor cable and
displayed on pump cable. See page 217.
connection to roller pump
local control and
module assembly,
CCM.
roller pump module

assembly. Replace pump module. See
page 210.
Overspeed Overspeed displayed Replace pump module. See

all connections to the
on pump local control page 210.
application board, motor
and CCM.
tach signal, and board
connection to motor cable.
Overspeed when After calibration Replace pump drive board;

pump drive board,
pumping in procedure, still have 90% of the time, this is the
Reverse Overspeed error in problem.
Reverse.
Replace CPU board; 10%
CPU board. of the time, this is the
problem.
Page 248
Keyword
Overtemperature Pump showing Reseat the boards.
connection to the roller
overtemperature
pump module assembly.
condition.
Replace pump module. See
page 210.
Pulse Cannot pulse. Replace membrane panel if

Manual button on
CCM allows servo but
membrane panel.
pump quickly drops out
right after the Servo button
is pressed. See page 199.
See Underspeed and

Overspeed.
Pulse or Servo Cannot exit pulse or Replace membrane panel

membrane panel and
servo from pump and/or graphics board. See
connection to graphics
local display. page 199.
board.
Pump Jam Pump stops Occlude properly.

for over occlusion,
optical sensor connection, Reseat connector.
for debris on sensor. Clean or replace sensor.
Pump Resets Pump resets. Replace pump module. See

that generic board is
page 210.
properly seated,
pump system cable.

Replace cable.
See Underspeed and
Overspeed.
Safety Triggers Pump does not Reselect and/or reconfigure

response settings in
respond to safety using Configuration area.
Perfusion screen,
triggers.
Replace safety module

linked safety module and and/or sensor.
sensor.
Safety Triggers False response to Replace safety module

linked safety module and
safety triggers. and/or sensor.
sensor.
Page 249
Keyword
Select or Assign Cannot select roller
pump is stopped,
pump to assign it to a
Perfusion screen
during Configuration. pump system cable, Replace cable.
NIC connector, Plug into another connector

board. See page 75.
Update software to correct
software version version.
compatibility,
Replace pump module. See

LED sequence. page 210.
Servo Cannot servo. Configure and select

servo data source,
correct data source.
Replace faulty sensor.
servo data is within servo Verify data is in servo

data range. range. Replace sensor or
sensor module.
See Underspeed and

Overspeed.
Speed Knob Speed knob will not Reseat cable or replace

encoder and cable
control speed. encoder. See page 242.
connections to graphics
board,
graphics board cable

connection to pump Replace cable and/or
module. boards. See page 199.
Speed Knob Speed knob controls Replace graphics board.

graphics board
speed backwards or See page 199.
connections.
in only one direction.
Page 250
Keyword
Speed Reset Speed is not zero Replace pump module. See
when START button roller pump module
page 210.
assembly connections,
is pressed.
speed knob encoder and

connections to graphic Replace speed encoder
board, assembly. See page 242.
graphics board Replace graphics board.

connections. See page 199.
Start or Stop Cannot start and/or Replace membrane panel

membrane panel
stop pump from and/or graphics board. See
operation and connections
pump local display. page 199.
to graphics board,
the speed control encoder, Replace the speed control

encoder.
cable connection between Replace the cable.
the speed control encoder
and board,
cable connection between Replace the cable.

the membrane panel and
graphics board.
Underspeed Underspeed Replace pump module or

roller pump module
displayed on pump pump motor cable or motor
assembly, motor tach
local control and tach assembly.
signal, and board
CCM.
connections to motor.
Page 251
Page 252
Centrifugal Pump System

Sarns™ Centrifugal Pump System
P/N 801046 Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit
P/N 164267 Sarns™ Drive Motor
P/N 164268 Sarns™ Manual Drive
P/N 164275 Sarns™ Centrifugal Pump Heads (8 PK)
P/N 801225 Pump Display Panel
P/N 803729 Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit Assembly
Overview
There is one centrifugal pump system that interface with the System 1, the Sarns™
Centrifugal Pump System.
The primary function of the centrifugal pump system is to move fluids through a
cardiopulmonary bypass circuit. Centrifugal pumps are used primarily for arterial
pumping applications, and to a lesser extent, as an augmented venous return pump.
A centrifugal pump system consists of a centrifugal control unit, centrifugal motor,
flow sensor, and disposable centrifugal pump head. A flow sensor is used to monitor
the pump flow rate. A manual drive unit can be used to replace the motor during a
failure.
Performance
Voltage
+5 VDC ± 5%
Vmot (24 VDC Nominal with a range of 21 VDC to 28 VDC)
Page 253
Maximum Power Consumption
Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit and Sarns™ Drive Motor

350 mA @ +5 V
6 A @ Vmot under load of 2500 RPM, 42 oz-in
Pump Rotation
Sarns™ disposable pump

Counterclockwise, viewed from the top
RPM Range
Sarns™ centrifugal system

Between 0 RPM and 3600 RPM
RPM Accuracy
Sarns™ centrifugal system

± 10% from 0 RPM to 1000 RPM
± 1% from 1000 RPM to 3600 RPM
RPM Resolution
10 RPM
LPM Display
Range
-9.99 L/min to +9.99 L/min
Resolution
Display increments of 0.01 L/min
Accuracy
± 10% of actual flow for ≥ -7.0 L/min to -1.0 L/min
± 0.10 L/min of actual flow for >-1.0 L/min to -0.3 L/min
± 0.10 L/min of actual flow for >0.3 L/min to 1.0 L/min
±10% of actual flow for >1.0 L/min to 7.0 L/min

Note: For displayed flow rates of >-0.3 L/min to <0.3 L/min,
actual flow is considered to be zero.
Operating Modes
Continuous Mode
The pump operates at a constant speed set by the user.
Page 254
Pulse Mode
The pump speed alternates between a peak speed and a
baseline speed at a given rate. This mode is initiated and
the baseline is adjusted using the central control monitor
(CCM). The peak speed can be changed by the user by
adjusting the pump speed via the CCM or by adjusting the
speed control knob on the centrifugal control unit.
Servo Control Mode
The pump speed is regulated to maintain a specific user
selected pressure or flow setpoint. This mode is initiated
using the CCM. The pressure or flow servo set point can
be changed by the user by adjusting the pump speed via
the CCM or by adjusting the speed control knob on the
centrifugal control unit.
Operation
Storage

Safety Aspects
Redundant Control
Speed control operation is available from a front panel knob without input
from the CCM or system Bus messages. In the event of a CCM failure, the
centrifugal pump will continue to respond to alerts and alarms in the same
manner.
Manual Drive Unit
If there is a power outage or equipment problem, a manual drive unit is
available for backup.
Startup Time
After being plugged into an active system, the centrifugal pump is available
for operation in less than 15 seconds and immediately indicates its ready
status on the control unit display.
Alert/Alarm
The user is able to set the centrifugal pump to respond to some alerts and
alarms reported to the system Bus. The response may be Stop, Coast,
Message Only, and No Response.
Page 255
Pump Alerts
The control unit displays an alert message on its local interface and reports
the alert to the system for the following conditions:
• Underspeed–Motor operating ≥10% below desired speed
• Loss of servo source data for >2 seconds
• Unable to maintain servo setpoint
Pump Alarms
• Minimum Flow–When linked to a flowmeter, and the flowmeter value is
less than or equal to minimum flow set by user; this alarm is enabled
only after the pump achieves the minimum flow threshold upon starting.
• Backflow–When linked to a flowmeter, and negative flow is less than
-90 mL.
Error Messages
Error messages will be generated for the following conditions:
• Sarns™ System Overspeed - motor running > 10% of desired
speed for > 5 sec, or pump-head speed > 4000 RPM
• Sarns™ System Underspeed - detect when the pump speed is
between COAST and 2700 RPM
• Control Unit Overcurrent – motor current > 6.5A
• Motor Overcurrent – motor current > 6A
• Display supply error - 12.5 < Display supply < 11.5V
• Application board over-temperature - temp > 80ºC for a 2 second
interval
• CCM missing
• Loss of connected pump, air, level, or pressure systems
• Self test failure
Power Monitoring
The centrifugal control unit monitors the voltage and current levels during
use. It takes appropriate actions and reports error and alarm conditions to
the system Bus and notifies the user via the control unit local display.
Motor Connection
The centrifugal control unit monitors the connection to the motor and
notifies the user if the motor is not connected.
Page 256
Fault Tolerance
Startup
The centrifugal control unit initiates a self-test.
Fail Safe
If a non-recoverable internal module error or external system Bus fault is
detected, the module logs the error and enters broken mode.
Modular Design
The centrifugal control unit can be replaced quickly.
CCM Failure
In the event of a CCM failure with adequate power supply, the centrifugal
control unit provides a message indicating the failure, maintains the current
speed or flow rate, preserves servo operation, and continues providing
access to control unit-based controls and displays.
Network Failure
In the event of a network failure with adequate power supply, the
centrifugal control unit provides a message indicating the failure, maintains
the current speed or flow rate, discontinues servo operation, and continues
providing access to control unit-based controls and displays.
Alerts/Alarms
The control unit local user interface will display the reason for a pump stop
or pump coast resulting from an alert or alarm from a connected safety
device.
Control Unit / System Connector
The control unit/System 1 connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector. The
than 1 Kg.
Cable to Control Unit Connector
The cable to control unit connector is a 15-pin, circular connector.
Motor Connector
The Sarns™ drive motor connector is a 10-pin circular connector.

Drip Proof
The centrifugal control unit is drip proof per IEC 60529.
The centrifugal control unit is corrosion resistant.
Page 257
The centrifugal pump system consists of a centrifugal control unit and a drive motor.
The motor couples magnetically to a disposable, impeller-type, centrifugal pump.
The centrifugal control unit can be mounted on a pole using a mounting bracket. The
control unit can be plugged into one of the six pump connectors on the Base, or into
any of the eighteen module connectors on the Base. The drive motor can be
mounted on a pole or on the oxygenator support bracket.
The centrifugal control unit has a local display for indicating pump speed, flow rate
from an associated flow sensor, and safety, status and error messages. The motor
speed can be controlled from a knob on the control unit or by using the CCM.
Pulsatile flow operation can be set up, enabled, and disabled from the CCM. The
average flow can be adjusted using the knob on the control unit or the control slide
bar on the CCM.
The system provides the capability to servo regulate the centrifugal pump speed to
maintain a user selected pressure or a flow rate. The user assigns the data source
and initiates operation for the servo control function via the CCM. Once initiated, the
user can adjust the servo setpoint by either adjusting the control knob on the control
unit, or the control slide bar on the CCM.
The CCM is used to configure which safety systems (air detection, level detection,
pressure monitoring) interact with the centrifugal control unit and how the control unit
responds to the alerts and alarms. Valid responses for the centrifugal control unit to
alert and alarm conditions are Stop, Coast, Message Only, and No Response.
Depending on the configuration, the CCM and the local display on the control unit
can indicate the reason for any alert or alarm.
External Description
The control unit enclosure consists of an upper housing made of molded plastic
fastened to a one piece, L-shaped, aluminum bottom pan. One side of the pan forms
the bottom and the other the backside of the enclosure. A tight seal between top
housing and the bottom pan resists liquid ingress and guarantees a long term EMC
grounding connection between the two. The housing matches the color and shape of
the top housing of the roller pump. The inside of the top housing has a metal EMC
coating. The metal pan is conductively coated. The membrane switch panel and
speed control knob are mounted to the outside of the top housing. The switch panel
has three buttons: Start/Stop, Select, and Manual. The centrifugal control unit and
the roller pump share the same membrane switch and graphic display assembly. The
bottom pan assembly has a bracket attachment socket and four molded plastic feet
on the bottom side; system Base and motor connectors are mounted to the back.
Page 258
The inside of the control unit contains the application board and generic computer
board, mounted as a sub-assembly to the bottom pan. The graphics board assembly
is mounted to the top housing. There are four internal cable assemblies. The control
unit cable and the motor connector cable plug into the application board. A ribbon
cable connects the application board and the graphics board assembly. A ribbon
cable connects the speed control knob to the graphics board assembly.
Mounting and Connection to the System
The control unit is pole mounted to any vertical pole using a bracket. The design of
the bracket allows the control unit to be positioned in-line with other pumps on the
Base. The mechanism can be released for easy repositioning or swap out of the
control unit.
The control unit cable connects the centrifugal control unit to the system Base. The
cable is detachable from the control unit and Base. The control unit connector is a
15-pin circular connector. The system connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector
and is secured to the Base with screws. It plugs into one of the six pump connectors
or any of the eighteen module connectors on the Base. The centrifugal control unit
uses the same connector cable as roller pumps and the flowmeter module.
Nominal Dimensions
These dimensions are for reference only. See prints for actual dimensions.
Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit

Depth 8.5 in (21,6 cm)
Weight 2.4 lb (1,1 kg)
Sarns™ Drive Motor

Depth 3.5 in (8,9 cm)
Weight 3.1 lb (1,4 kg)
The centrifugal control unit uses 350 mA @ +5 VDC and 6 A @ +24 VDC from the
system Bus. The power is distributed within the control unit in the following manner:
• Application Board: The application board provides 5 A @ +24 VDC to the
motor and graphics board, and +5 VDC to the motor hall sensors.
Page 259
• Graphics Board: The graphics board assembly uses 300 mA @ +24 VDC.
The graphics board assembly supplies 400 mA @ +12 VDC to the display.
Interface
User Interface
The Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit can be controlled from the CCM and from the
control unit front panel. The CCM supports the configuration and control of the
control unit. To support the functionality of the control unit, the CCM user interface
has the following features. Each control unit on a Perfusion screen is represented by
a pump control box, which includes a Start/Stop button, a speed/flow display button,
and a pump icon button. The Start/Stop button is used to turn the pump on or off;
the current value of the pump speed or flow rate is displayed on the speed/flow
display button in the units selected during Configuration; the pump icon identifies the
pump type as centrifugal and spins to indicate that the pump is running. Touching the
pump icon opens the Pump tab and accesses pulse, servo and response features.
The speed is controlled by a slide bar that is associated with the control unit. The
slide bar is always shown when the centrifugal pump is the arterial pump. The slide
bar shows the pump name and the actual, measured speed at the top. The speed
can be adjusted in larger increments using the scroll control or by smaller increments
using the adjustment arrows. After exceeding 1550 RPM while using the Sarns™
system, the Stop button in the pump control box is grayed out. The CCM user
interface requires the user to bring the speed below 1500 RPM while using the
Sarns™ system before the Stop button will be available to stop the pump directly.
The Setup tab is used to view and change the response to connected pumps and
safety system events. The System tab contains the software version, displays
system Bus parameters, and is used to change out and replace a control unit.
The local user interface on the control unit includes an yellow, active matrix, graphic
display, a speed adjustment knob, and three buttons: Start/Stop, Select, and
Manual. The graphics display will show RPM, flow, pump name, operating mode,
and indicate the relative position of the speed knob. It also has a one-line text
message area for displaying alarm, alert, status, and error information. To provide
redundancy if the CCM is lost, the Select button can be used to reset an ABD alarm
event.
The multi-color LED, viewable on the modules, is not available to the user. Its
behavior is the same as the modules but it can only be viewed by removing the lower
pump housing.
CCM Controls
Start/Stop Control
The centrifugal pump is turned on and off via a Start/Stop button in the
pump control box.
Page 260
Speed Control
Speed control is provided through the centrifugal pump slide bar. The
slide bar has a scroll control which can be touched and dragged to the
desired position. Adjustment arrows can be used to adjust motor speed
by 10 RPM. The slide bar also includes pump name, motor speed in
RPM, minimum value of 0 RPM, and maximum value of 3600 RPM for
the Terumo® Control Unit. A bold black line on the slide bar indicates
the coasting speed threshold of 1500 RPM for the Terumo® Control
Unit.
Pulse
When configured as the arterial pump, the pulse parameter button, the
Auto and Manual buttons are accessed via the pump icon. The
baseline can be adjusted using up and down arrows. The Auto button
can be pressed when the pump speed is greater than 1550 RPM for the
Terumo® Control Unit. Pressing the Manual button, while in pulse, will
cause the pump to drop out of pulse and hold the current average RPM.
Servo Control
The servo setup area and the Auto and Manual buttons are accessed
via the pump icon. When configured with a pressure sensor or a
flowmeter, the setup area can be used to select the servo data source.
The Auto button can be pressed when the pump speed is greater than
1550 RPM for the Terumo® Control Unit and while the pressure or flow
data is within servo range. Pressing the Manual button while in servo
mode will cause the pump to drop out of servo and hold the current
RPM.
Event Response Changes
When configured with another pump or a safety system (air detector,
pressure sensor, level detector, flowmeter) the event response can be
edited for the current case via the Setup tab, Pumps subtab.
Responses to events include: Stop, Coast, Message Only, No
Response.
Minimum Flow Alarm Value
When configured with a flowmeter module, the MinFlow alarm value
can be set through the Setup tab, Pumps subtab. The MinFlow alarm
is only active at speeds above 1550 RPM for the Terumo® Control
Unit. The MinFlow alarm is disabled during pulsatile flow due to wide
variations in flow.
CCM Displays
ON/OFF Status
ON/OFF status is displayed on the CCM in the pump control box.
Page 261
RPM and Flow
Actual RPM is displayed at the top of the slide bar. The pump icon
spins when the RPM is greater than zero. Flow is displayed on the
speed/flow display button when a flowmeter is in use and linked.
Dashes are displayed on the speed/flow display button when there is no
flowmeter linked.
Centrifugal control unit connection and error status is displayed on the
CCM via the pump icon. A pump icon marked with a question mark, ?,
indicates that the control unit is not plugged in, the control unit that is
plugged in is not mapped, or the control unit has failed and could not be
located when the Perfusion screen was selected. A pump icon marked
with an X indicates that the control unit has failed while Online.
Configuration Status
The event and response configuration with connected safety systems
and other pumps can be reviewed via the pump icon.
Operational Status
A summary of the control unit’s power consumption and system
connections status can be viewed through the System tab, Module
Info subtab.
Motor Connection Status
A motor connection status message will display on the CCM until the
motor is connected to the centrifugal control unit.
Local Control
Speed Knob
If the control unit is in Run State, the knob on the front panel adjusts the
centrifugal pump speed. By rapidly turning the knob, the speed will
increase in larger increments (two and one/half revolutions) until full
speed. Turning the knob slowly increases the speed in smaller
increments (five revolutions) until full speed. The speed control knob
can be used to change the peak speed in Pulse mode or the servo
setpoint in Servo mode. The knob does not have an absolute zero RPM
position.
If the pump is in Stop State, turning the speed control knob has no
effect.
Page 262
Start/Stop Button
If the control unit is in Stop State, pressing the Start/Stop button will
change the state to Run. If the control unit is in Run State and the
speed is above Coast speed, pressing the Start/Stop button will
generate a user message: Turn speed to zero. Pressing the Start/Stop
button again within 4 seconds changes the state to Stop. If the speed is
less than 1500 RPM, pressing the Start/Stop button will change the
state to Stop.
Select Button
Pressing the Select button will reset an active air detection alarm from
a connected air bubble detector. If no alarms are present, pressing the
Select button will have no effect.
Manual Button
The response to pressing the Manual button depends on the control
unit state:
• In Stop State, no response.
• In Run State (Continuous mode), no response
• In Run State, with Pulse or Servo mode enabled, pump
returns to Continuous mode.
Local Display
Primary Display Area
The primary display area displays L/min if a flowmeter module
connection has been configured. Otherwise, the primary display will
show -.--.
Secondary Display Area
The secondary display area displays servo source setpoint when in
Servo mode.
Message Area
The message area displays alert, alarm, status, and error messages.
Mode Symbol
The mode symbol appears to the left of the primary display to indicate
current operating mode: Pulse, Servo.
Pump Name
This area displays the user-entered name after the control unit has
been selected by a Perfusion screen and is Online. The control unit ID
is displayed during the power-on self-test and when the pump is Offline.
Page 263
Knob Position Bar Graph
The bar graph display indicates the speed demand position relative to
the maximum speed.
LED
A tricolor LED provides a local interface viewable when the lower housing is
removed.
The LED will display green, red, or yellow indications as follows:
• Constant Green – Online mode
• Blinking Green – Assignment mode
• Constant Yellow – Offline mode
• Blinking Yellow – Alert Condition
• Constant Red – Broken mode
• Blinking Red – Alarm condition
Interactive Devices
The centrifugal pump system will interface with a variety of disposable oxygenators
in a perfusion circuit as part of the System 1. It cannot be used as a stand-alone
device. The centrifugal pump system will not interface electronically with any other
devices.
Status Conditions
• Operating mode (Continuous, Pulse, Servo)
• Operational state (stopped, run continuous, run servo, run pulse)
• Speed (RPM, actual and demand)
• Flow (L/min, if flow sensor connected)
• Motor disconnected
• Manual button pressed in Pulse mode
• Manual button pressed in Servo mode
• Stop button pressed when Sarns™ system speed >1500 RPM
• Speed ramping down to Baseline in Pulse mode
• Max speed reached trying to attain servo setpoint
Page 264
• Application board over temperature
• Overspeed
• Underspeed
• Overcurrent
• Motor fault
• Motor connected
Alarms/Alerts
• Air detection alarm
• Level alarm
• Overpressure alarm
• Minimum flow alarm
• Backflow alarm
• Overpressure alert
• Level alert
• CCM missing
• Unable to maintain servo settings
• Loss of servo source data
• Loss of connected roller or centrifugal pump
Hardware Interface
The centrifugal pump receives a 5 VDC and Vmot supply from the Base via
the control unit/system cable and the system Bus. The centrifugal control
unit provides +12 V supply to the control unit display.
Page 265
Software Interface
The control unit can accept control commands, safety system alert/alarm
signals for connected devices, and flowmeter data via the system Bus. The
software reports speed and flow data, operational status, and error
conditions to the system. The centrifugal control unit does not have a
software interface with any non-system devices.
The centrifugal control unit does not interface with any other products or
devices.
System Messages
Response to Messages Table

External Alarm Reverse video, blinking, <Response>: <Message>
connected to the centrifugal Possible displays:
control unit has reported an alarm • STOPPED: <Message>
condition.
• COASTING: <Message>
External Alert Reverse video, <Response>: <Message>

connected to the centrifugal Possible <Response> displays:
control unit has reported an alert • STOPPED: <Message>
condition.
• COASTING: <Message>
Internal Alert Reverse video, <Message>

An alert condition related to the
centrifugal control unit has been
detected.
Internal Error Normal video, blinking <Message>
A centrifugal control unit error
condition has been detected.
Internal Status Normal video, <Message>

The status of a centrifugal control
unit has changed.
The following tables include the messages that can appear on the centrifugal control
unit display and corresponding operator responses.
Page 266
Alarm Messages
Alarm Condition Control Unit Display Operator Response

Alarm Message
Air detected for connected <Response>: Clamp lines when
air bubble detector. AIR DETECTED necessary. Correct air
condition, clear alarm,
restart pump if stopped.
Connected flowmeter <Response>: Clamp the lines. Correct
backflow detected. BACKFLOW backflow condition. Check
for air; clear if present.
Restart the pump if
stopped.
Low level detected for <Response>: Clamp lines when

connected alarm level LOW LEVEL necessary. Correct low
detector. level condition, restart
pump if stopped.
Connected flowmeter MINIMUM FLOW Correct minimum flow
minimum flow. condition. Message will
clear when the condition is
corrected.
Alarm overpressure <Response>: Clamp lines when

detected for connected OVERPRESSURE necessary. Correct
pressure sensor. overpressure condition,
restart pump if stopped.
Alert Messages
Alert Condition Control Unit Display Operator Response

Alert Message
Pump has reached AUTO: MAX RANGE Check servo source.
maximum speed trying to Check perfusion circuit.
decreases to within
operating range.
Pump has reached AUTO: MIN RANGE Check servo source.

minimum speed trying to Check perfusion circuit.
increases to within
operating range.
Page 267
Alert Condition Control Unit Display Operator Response
Alert Message
Low level detected for <Response>: Correct low level
connected alert level LOW LEVEL condition.
sensor.
Pump cannot maintain MANUAL: MONITOR Check that the servo
servo setpoint. FLOW source pressure or flow
value is stable. Try to
the CCM. If message
Loss of servo source data. MANUAL: MONITOR Check operation and

FLOW placement of servo
the CCM. If message

pump detects minimum MINIMUM FLOW
flow.
Overpressure alert <Response>: Correct overpressure

detected for connected OVERPRESSURE condition.
pressure sensor.
Connected pump has <Response>: Restart pump if stopped.
started. PUMP START
Connected pump has <Response>: Restart connected pump,

stopped. PUMP STOP restart pump if stopped.
Motor speed <demand UNDERSPEED Clamp the lines. Stop and

speed for more than start the pump. If the
2 seconds. message reappears,
contact Terumo
use manual drive unit.
Page 268
Error Messages
Error Condition Control Unit Display Operator Response

Error Message
Loss of connected air CHECK AIR SENSOR Check for proper
bubble detector module. operation of the module,
or try connecting the
the module. Replace
Loss of flowmeter module. CHECK FLOWMETER Check for proper

operation and connection
of the module, or try
connecting the module to
another Base receptacle.
If message does not clear,
may not respond to
messages from the
module. Replace module
and reassign.
Loss of connected level CHECK LEVEL Check for proper

module. operation and connection
may not respond to
messages from the
module. Replace the
Loss of communication CHECK LINKED PUMP Check for proper

from connected roller or operation of the connected
centrifugal pump. pump. If message does
not clear, be aware that
the pump may not
respond to message or
operations requiring
information from the
connected pump.
Page 269
Error Message
Loss of connected CHECK PRESSURE Check for proper
pressure module. operation and connection
may not respond to
messages from the
module. Replace the
Network communication NO COMMUNICATION Continue use of

failure. centrifugal control unit
from front panel controls
and displays. Be aware
respond to events from
connected devices. Do not
use the system again until
it is serviced by Terumo
Service.
CCM missing. NO SYSTEM COMPUTER Continue use of

centrifugal control unit
from front panel controls
and displays. Do not use
the system again until it is
serviced by Terumo
Service.
Pump application board SERVICE PUMP Discontinue use of the

temperature >80°C for pump until it has been
more than 2 seconds. serviced by Terumo
Service. Reassign pump
or use standby equipment.
Self-test failure. SERVICE PUMP Discontinue use of the

serviced by Terumo
Service.
Page 270
Error Message
Motor current >8 A stops STOPPED: MOTOR Clamp the lines. Try to
pump. Low level motor ERROR restart the pump. If the
fault. message reappears,
serviced by Terumo
or use standby equipment
to maintain perfusion.
Vmot current >8A stops STOPPED: Clamp the lines. Try to

pump. Overcurrent OVERCURRENT restart the pump. If the
condition detected. message reappears,
serviced by Terumo
Pump stops because: STOPPED: Clamp the lines. Try to

OVERSPEED restart the pump. If the
• Motor speed is greater message reappears,
than the maximum discontinue use of the
pump speed OR pump until it has been
• Motor speed is greater serviced by Terumo
than the demand Cardiovascular Systems
speed for more than Service. Reassign or use
2 seconds. standby equipment to
maintain perfusion.
Motor draws too much STOPPED: Clamp the lines. Try to

current. PUMP JAM restart the pump. If the
message reappears,
serviced by Terumo
Page 271
Status Messages
Status Condition Control Unit Display Operator Response

Status Message
Drive motor has become CONNECT MOTOR Message should clear
disconnected. when motor is
reconnected.
when the pump is in Pulse FLOW when speed is changed or
mode. pump is stopped.
when the pump is in Servo FLOW when speed is changed or
mode. pump is stopped.
Pulse mode has been RAMP BASELINE: XXX% Monitor the speed change.
activated; base is ramping The base is reduced by
down to target value. 5% every 2 seconds.
Message clears when the
target base setting is
reached.
Stop button is pressed in TURN SPEED TO ZERO Message clears in
Continuous mode with 4 seconds if no action is
speed >1500 RPM. taken. Press Stop button
again to stop the pump.
Stop button pressed in TURN SPEED TO ZERO Message clears in
Pulse mode with average 4 seconds if no action is
RPM >1500 RPM. taken. Press Stop button
Stop button is pressed in TURN SPEED TO ZERO Message clears in
Servo mode with average 4 seconds if no action is
RPM >1500 RPM. taken. Press Stop button
Page 272
Theory of Operation
Operational Modes
Continuous Mode
The default power-on state is Continuous mode with speed of 0, in
stopped state. In Continuous mode, the control unit regulates the drive
motor speed to within ± 20 RPM or ±1%, whichever is greater, of the
desired speed. The control unit responds to a change in desired speed,
reaching the target within 0.55 mS/RPM during acceleration. The control
unit response during deceleration depends on the load. The centrifugal
control unit meets this requirement with a 3 foot loop load during
acceleration. During deceleration, the time to change the speed is limited
by the physics of the pump and can be as much as 2.5 times longer.
Pulse Mode
Pulse Settings
Pulse Base ranges from 50% -100% in 5% increments.
Pulse Rate is fixed at 60 BPM.
Pulse Width is fixed at 50%.
Pulse Initiation
When initiating pulsatile flow, the centrifugal control unit ramps
into baseline speed in decrements of 5% every 2 seconds until the
base setting is reached.
Pulse Operation
During pulsatile operation, the control unit meets the same speed
control criteria as in Continuous mode.
Pulse Termination
Pulse operation can be terminated upon any of the following
conditions:
Any transition to Stop mode
Pressing Manual button
CCM command to go to Continuous mode
Any transition to Coast
Peak speed falls below Coast
After a transition from pulsatile to continuous flow, the actual
average speed will be the same as the previous actual average
speed, with an accuracy of ±10% of the displayed speed when
speed is greater than Coast.
Page 273
Servo Mode
Servo mode can be initiated through the centrifugal control unit if all of the
following conditions are met:
• Currently in Continuous mode
• Speed above Coast
• No stop or coasting conditions
• No triggers active
Servo Initiation
The control unit uses the average of the first 2 seconds of external
data as the servo setpoint upon initiation of servo. The servo
source is selected and initiated via the CCM. The servo source
must be within range to successfully initiate servo operation.
Servo Operation
The control unit accepts changes in demand RPM from the CCM
or the control unit control panel speed knob during Servo mode,
adjusts the RPM accordingly, and calculates a new servo setpoint
based on the first 3 seconds of data at the new RPM.
Servo Boundaries
The servo speed has a lower speed limit of Coast and an upper
speed limit not to exceed the greater of 125% of the demand
speed or 500 RPM. If the servo reaches either limit, the speed
remains at the limit until data input conditions change or the user
inputs a control command into the system.
Servo Termination
The control unit remains in Servo mode until one of the following
inputs is received:
Any transition to Stop state
Any transition to Coast mode
Pressing Manual button on local control panel
CCM command to disable servo
Servo source lost or out of range
User sets the speed below Coast
Excluding transitions to Stop or Coast, the pump continues to run
at the last known RPM.
Page 274
Pressure Servo
The operating range for centrifugal control unit pressure servo is:
10 mmHg to 400 mmHg for positive pressure servo
-10 mmHg to -200 mmHg for negative pressure servo
The centrifugal control unit will not initiate or continue Servo mode
if the average pressure is outside of this range.
The accuracy of the indicated pressure during pressure servo will
be ± 10 mmHg or ± 10% of the desired setpoint, whichever is
greater.
A centrifugal control unit in Pressure Servo mode will reach steady
state flow setpoint in less than 4 seconds with no more than 25%
overshoot or undershoot.
Flow Servo
The operating range for centrifugal control unit flow servo is
1 L/min to 7 L/min. The centrifugal control unit will not initiate or
continue Servo mode if the average flow is outside of this range.
The steady-state flow, when being delivered within a pump speed
of 1500 RPM to 3600 RPM for the Terumo® Control Unit, will not
vary more than ± 5% when averaged over 5 seconds.
A centrifugal control unit in Flow Servo mode will reach steady
state flow setpoint in less than 6 seconds with no more than 25%
undershoot or overshoot.
Status Reporting
The software reports the following status information on the system Bus at a 2 Hz
rate:
• Operating mode (Continuous, Pulse, Flow Servo, Pressure Servo)
• Operational state (stopped, run continuous, run servo)
• Speed (RPM, actual and demand)
• Flow (L/min, if flow sensor connected)
• Application board temperature
• Fault status (overspeed, underspeed, overcurrent, motor fault, motor
connected)
Page 275
Electronic Functions
Motor
The Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit supports connection to a drive

motor, P/N 164267. The core is a three phase motor in a Y-wound
configuration with the following characteristics:
• Kspd = 5.76v/1000 RPM
• Kt = 6.9 oz-in/Amp
• R = 0.36 ohms
Motor Stop
The centrifugal control unit supports the control of the motor speed via a
Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output from the generic board and the
ability to turn the drive motor on and off. The software simultaneously uses
the PWM and motor enable signals to stop the motor. The software
declares the speed as zero within 800 milliseconds of receiving the last
tachometer pulse.
The hardware generates a fault signal to indicate motor currents in excess

of 6 A.
Hall Type Motor Feedback Sensors
The control unit accepts 5 V digital inputs from three hall sensors with
60 degree spacing at a frequency up to 2400 Hz to provide motor speed
feedback to the generic module.
The centrifugal control unit motor control maximum current sense is set to
6 A using current sense resistors (R16).
Control Knob
The hardware provides 5 V @ 20 mA to the knob and accepts quadrature
input signals indicating pulse and direction for knob rotation.
Control Unit Display
The centrifugal control unit provides 12 V ± 2% @ 1 A and appropriate

display control signals to a flat panel display.
Motor Speed
The software uses a PWM output with a frequency of 20 kHz to 40 kHz to
control the motor speed.
Page 276
Module Self-test
The control unit will cycle through a power-on self-test. If the control unit passes all
start-up tests but is Offline, the module ID and the centrifugal icon will be displayed.
Once the start-up test is complete and the pump is Online, the message, READY:
PRESS START, is posted until the user activates a control on the control unit or on
the CCM.
If the power-on self-test fails, a message is displayed on the control unit display and
the CCM.
Calibration
The centrifugal control unit and the drive motor do not require field calibration.

Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit - P/N 801046, see page 665.
Sarns™ Drive Motor - P/N 164267, see page 675.
Sarns™ Manual Drive - P/N 164268, see page 681.

Centrifugal Control Display - P/N 801225, see page 671.
Parts Centrifugal Pump Display - P/N 801225, see page 673.
Parts Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit - P/N 801046, see page 669.
Parts Sarns™ Drive Motor - P/N 164267, see page 679.
Parts Sarns™ Manual Drive - P/N 164268, see page 685.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on pumps, log in to Service. From the Service and
Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, note that the correct pump is
responding, and press More Info. The More Info screen displays information about
Self Test Status, V5 Voltage, V5 Current, Vmot Voltage, Vmot Current, and
Temperature.
Page 277
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Diagnostic Theory
system provides four viewing areas useful to the troubleshooting process.
1. The centrifugal control unit reports its overall health and status using a
three-color-capable LED on the generic computer board. Remove the
lower housing and watch the LED color sequence.
centrifugal control unit online and whether or not it can be controlled
via the CCM. The Perfusion screen will report a failed control unit if
the failure happens while the unit is online. The System tab on the
Perfusion screen shows more detailed information about the status of
the control unit.
3. The Configuration area can be used to check if a control unit is linked

and mapped. A control unit selected for a Perfusion screen will display
the pump name, centrifugal icon, and the message, Ready: Press
Start, until the user activates controls from the control unit or the CCM.
pump or the CCM itself. Individual pumps and modules run self-
diagnostic routines and record errors in an internal log. The Service
screen may be used to view and download the contents of these logs.
The internal log may capture and log reset event(s) and/or out of
range error(s).
Repair Procedures
Note: Lubricant should not come in contact with either the upper or lower side of the
pump housing. Clean accidental lubricant spills from the housing using isopropyl
alcohol on a clean cloth.
Page 278
Repairing the drive motor
The drive motor must be returned to an authorized service center for repairs.
Replacing the centrifugal pump display assembly or the individual boards

(Includes: encoder (P/N 802085), graphics board (P/N 801520), small graphics planar
display board (P/N 801224), EMC shield (P/N 803711), and membrane panel (P/N
801221))
Note: See page 665 for the Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit, P/N 801046 and
page 671 for the Centrifugal Control Display, P/N 801225.
Note: The centrifugal pump display assembly is P/N 801225.
1. Disconnect the power cable and motor cable from the centrifugal
control unit.
2. Loosen the threaded knob and remove the unit from the pole-mount.
3. On the underside of the lower housing, remove the four corner screws
to separate the upper and lower housings.
4. With the unit right-side up, separate the upper housing from the lower
housing, being careful not to damage the ribbon cable.
Page 279
5. Gently disconnect the ribbon cable from the connector on the
centrifugal pump display assembly.
Note: To assist in reconnection, mark the side of the ribbon cable

connector and board that is closest to the red edge of the cable.
(Some earlier units allowed the cable to connect in either orientation
which damaged boards.)
Set the lower housing assembly aside.
6. Invert the upper housing. From the inside wall of the housing, remove
the four nuts securing the centrifugal pump display assembly to the
housing.
7. A strong adhesive secures the membrane panel of the centrifugal

pump display assembly to the upper housing. Gently and persistently
pry the membrane panel to separate it from the upper housing. If
replacing individual boards, go to the next step. Otherwise, install the
new display assembly (801225). Go to step 15 when finished.
8. Set the upper housing aside.
Page 280
9. Disconnect the 5-pin encoder cable from the graphics board
(P/N 801520).
Remove the graphics board subassembly by removing the four

mounting screws with the longer standoffs located near each corner.
Use care to avoid damaging the 6-pin connector that joins the
membrane panel and the graphics board subassembly.
If you need to replace any of the boards in the graphics board
subassembly, remove the four mounting screws with the shorter
standoffs. Carefully align all pins and connectors when reassembling
the graphics board subassembly. The graphics board subassembly is
made up of the following, which must be ordered separately:
graphics board, P/N 801520
EMC shield, P/N 803711
small graphics planar display board, P/N 801224
10. If you need to remove the membrane panel or the encoder, remove
the speed control knob and unscrew the encoder. Install the new
part(s) and reassemble, being careful to position the encoder as
found.
11. If needed, carefully clean the plasma display glass panel before
reassembly.
12. Install the graphics board subassembly to the membrane panel being
careful to align the 6-pin connector between them, and reinstall the
four mounting screws through the longer standoffs.
13. Reconnect the 5-pin encoder cable to the graphics board

subassembly.
14. After cleaning the upper housing to remove any adhesive residue,
remove the paper covering from the new membrane panel to reveal
the adhesive, and slide the display assembly into the opening in the
upper housing. Be careful not to tangle the ribbon connectors.
15. Reinstall the four nuts to secure the display assembly to the upper
housing.
16. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the connector on the display assembly,
and gently position the upper and lower housings together.
17. Reinstall the four screws to secure the upper and lower housings
together.
Page 281
18. Reinstall the centrifugal control unit on the pole-mount.
19. Reconnect the power cable and motor cable to the centrifugal control
unit.
Replacing the centrifugal control unit module

(Mounted to the lower housing of the centrifugal control unit)
Note: See page 665 for the Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit, P/N 801046 and
page 671 for the Centrifugal Control Display, P/N 801225.
Note: The Terumo® centrifugal control unit module is P/N 803729.
1. Disconnect the power cable and motor cable from the centrifugal
control unit.
2. Loosen the threaded knob and remove the unit from the pole-mount.
3. On the underside of the lower housing, remove the four screws located
near the corners to separate the upper and lower housings.
Page 282
4. With the unit upright, separate the upper housing from the lower
housing, being careful not to damage the ribbon cable.
5. Gently disconnect the ribbon cable from the connector on the

centrifugal pump display assembly.
Note: To assist in reconnection, mark the side of the ribbon cable

connector and board that is closest to the red edge of the cable. (Some
earlier units allowed the cable to connect in either orientation which
damaged boards.)
Set the lower housing assembly aside.
6. Remove the screws fastening the module to the lower housing.
• On the underside of the lower housing, remove the single screw.

• On the top of the Module, remove the screws that go through the
standoffs.
7. Disconnect the power-in cable at the application board.
8. Disconnect the drive motor cable from the two connectors on the pump
module.
9. Remove and replace the pump module.
10. Reconnect the motor cable to the two connectors on the application
board.
Page 283
11. Reconnect the power receptacle cable to the pump module.
12. Loosely fasten the mounting screws that go through the standoffs.
13. Install and tighten the mounting screw on the underside of the lower
housing.
14. Tighten the loose screws.
15. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the connector on the pump module.
16. Carefully join the upper housing to the lower housing and install the
four corner screws.
17. Reinstall the centrifugal control unit on the pole-mount.
18. Reconnect the power cable and motor cable to the centrifugal control
unit.
Page 284
Troubleshooting–Centrifugal Pump System
Troubleshooting Table—Centrifugal Pump System

Note: If a centrifugal pump icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is
loading and you have verified the jumper is installed (see page 148), download the
system, power manager, and LAN I/F logs. If a device cannot be assigned and linked,
also download the device log. Submit the logs to Terumo Cardiovascular Systems
Service Department.
Centrifugal Problem Check Action

Pump System
Keyword
Alarm/ABD Cannot clear ABD Replace membrane panel
membrane panel and
alarm from and/or graphics board. See
centrifugal display page 279.
board.
area.
Display Blank display. Replace cable.

system to control unit
cable connection,
Base connector,
Replace NIC board. See page
75.
LED sequence, Replace centrifugal control unit

Replace graphics board if it is

ribbon cable connections not supplying +12 VDC to the
between application board display. See page 279.
and graphics board
assembly,
Replace graphics board. See
internal log for +12 VDC page 279.
error condition,
Replace display if it has
graphics board and +12 +12 VDC. See page 279.
VDC supply to display,
display connections.
Page 285
Pump System
Keyword
Display Non-readable Replace graphics board. See
graphics board
display. page 279.
ribbon cable connections

between application board
and graphics board
assembly,
display connections. Replace display. See page

279.
Display Bright yellow Replace centrifugal control unit

LED sequence,
display, no text. module if LED sequence stalls
or LED is red. See page 282.
Replace graphics board. See

graphics board page 279.
Replace display. See page

display connections. 279.
Page 286
Pump System
Keyword
Display, No No user assigned Reconfigure the control unit
if control unit is assigned
Pump Name name; module ID with the Configuration Area.
to Perfusion screen and/or
remains in label
is off line,
area on display.

cable connection, Replace cable
Base connector,
Plug into another connector
location. Replace NIC board.
See page 75.
LED sequence during Replace centrifugal control unit

power on, module. See page 282.
Upgrade pump software to a

software version version recognized by the
compatibility. system.
Display/Flow Flow display Configure and select correct

flowmeter module
shows dashes. flowmeter.
configuration,
flowmeter and module Replace flow module and/or

connection. flowmeter.
Display/Flow Flow display is Reconfigure using

flowmeter module
blank. Configuration area of CCM.
configuration,
flowmeter and module

connection. Replace flowmeter and/or
module.
Motor Motor Replace motor and cable. See

motor and cable
disconnected page 282.
connection.
message.
Page 287
Pump System
Keyword
Motor Motor will not Replace motor. See page 282.
motor windings for
spin.
resistance and external
cable connection,
internal motor cable and Replace cable. See page 282.

connection to pump
application board,
centrifugal pump module

assembly connection. Replace centrifugal control unit
Overcurrent Overcurrent Replace drive motor.

drive motor and external
displayed on
cable connection,
centrifugal display
area and CCM.
internal motor cable and Replace internal cable. See
connection to pump page 282.
application board,
Replace centrifugal control unit
centrifugal pump module module. See page 282.
assembly connection.
Overspeed Overspeed Replace drive motor.

drive motor and cable
displayed on
connection,
centrifugal display
area and CCM.
assembly, motor tach Replace centrifugal control unit
signal and board module. See page 282.
connections from motor
cable.
Overtemperature Control unit Replace centrifugal control unit

compare actual internal
showing module if wrong temperature is
temperature to control unit
overtemperature reported to system. See page
temperature reported to
condition. 282.
system and/or in the
control unit log,
centrifugal pump module Replace centrifugal control unit

assembly connection. module. See page 282.
Page 288
Pump System
Keyword
Pulse Cannot pulse. Reconfigure control unit to be
control unit is configured
primary pump.
as primary pump,
Run pump at speed greater

speed is above coast, than coast.
Replace membrane switch

manual key on membrane panel if CCM allows servo but
panel. pump quickly drops out right
after the Servo button is
pressed. See page 279.
See Underspeed and

Overspeed.
Pulse/Servo Cannot exit Pulse Replace membrane panel

membrane panel and
or Servo from and/or graphics board. See
centrifugal display page 279.
board.
area.
Reset Pump resets.

cable connection,
centrifugal control unit Replace centrifugal control unit

module connections. module. See page 282.
See Underspeed and

Overspeed.
Safety Pump does not Reselect and/or reconfigure

response settings in
respond to safety using Configuration Area.
Perfusion screen,
triggers.
linked module(s) and Replace module(s) and/or

sensor(s) by plugging into sensor(s).
another NIC connector.
Safety False response to Replace module(s) and/or

linked module(s) and
safety triggers. sensor(s).
sensor(s) by plugging into
Page 289
Pump System
Keyword
Safety Message No safety Replace centrifugal pump
display for missing pixels
messages on display assembly. See page
during power up,
centrifugal display 279.
area.
safety configuration Use configuration area to

response settings on change the response so that a
Perfusion screen, control unit will display a
message.
safety system and/or Replace safety system and/or

sensor by plugging into sensor.
Select/Assign Cannot select

pump must be stopped,
control unit to
assign it to a
Perfusion screen system to control unit
cable connection, Replace cable.
during
Configuration.
Base connector Plug into another connector

connection, location. Replace NIC board.
See page 75.
software version
Update software to correct
compatibility,
version.
LED sequence.
Replace centrifugal control unit
Page 290
Pump System
Keyword
Servo Cannot servo. Configure and select correct
servo data source,
data source. Replace faulty
sensor.
Run pump at speed greater

speed is above coast and than coast. Verify data is in
servo data is within servo servo range. Replace sensor
data range. or sensor module.
See Underspeed and

Overspeed.
Speed Speed knob will Reseat cable or replace

encoder and cable
not control speed. encoder. Encoder is Item 10
on page 671.
board,
graphics board cable Replace cable and/or boards.

connection to application See page 279.
board.
Speed Speed knob Replace graphics board. See

graphics board
controls speed page 279.
backwards or in connection.
only one
direction.
Speed Speed is not zero Replace centrifugal control unit

when START module. See page 282.
assembly connection,
button is pressed.
speed knob encoder and Replace speed encoder

connector, assembly. Encoder is Item 10
on page 671.
graphics board assembly Replace graphics board

connection. assembly. See page 279.
Start/Stop Cannot start Replace membrane panel

membrane panel and
and/or stop pump and/or graphics board. See
from centrifugal page 279.
board.
display area.
Page 291
Pump System
Keyword
Underspeed Underspeed Replace drive motor.
drive motor and cable
displayed on the
connection,
centrifugal display
area.
assembly, motor tach Replace centrifugal control unit
signal and application module or motor cable or
board connections from motor tach assembly.
motor cable.
Page 292

P/N 802110 Air Bubble Detect Module
P/N 149892 Air Bubble Detect Cable Assembly
P/N 149876 Air Bubble Sensor Holder
P/N 5791 Ultrasonic Air Sensor 1/4 in x 3/32 in (6,4 mm x 2,4 mm)
Overview
Purpose of Device
The Air Bubble Detect (ABD) module is used with an air sensor to detect gross air
bubbles in the perfusion circuit. When the ABD module is enabled by the central
control monitor (CCM), the presence of an air bubble in the tube to which the sensor
is connected will cause the ABD software to alarm. The air alarm is not self-
clearing. It can be cleared by a system Bus message from the CCM or from the
roller pump. When the ABD module is not enabled by the CCM, the module
software will perform an air sensor self-test at 1 second intervals. It will also monitor
the 8 V supply at 0.5 second intervals in both enabled and disabled modes. An out-
of-range 8 V supply reading will cause the ABD module to alert. The ABD module
software will provide safety data (alarm status) to the CCM ten times a second. It
will provide low rate data (sensor self-test result, 8 V supply reading, etc.) to the
CCM twice a second.
Up to four ABD modules may be connected to the system at the same time. The air
sensor connects to the module with the air sensor cable. The air sensor can be
mounted directly on the tubing or on a bracket.
ABD Requirements
Tubing Type/Size
The ABD detects gas bubbles within clear, flexible medical grade
PVC tubing in sizes: 3/8 in (9,5 mm) x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) I.D., 1/4 in
(6,4 mm) x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) I.D., and 1/4 in (6,4 mm) x 1/16 in
(1,6 mm) I.D.
Page 293
Fluid Types
The ABD detects gas bubbles within clear priming solutions or
blood with a hematocrit range of 15% to 40%.
ABD Performance
Air Sensors
The following ABD sensors are supported for use with the ABD
module. Their electronic interfaces are identical. They differ only in
respect to the tubing size they accommodate.
P/N 5773–3/8 in (9,5 mm) x 3/32 in (2,4 mm)
P/N 5791–1/4 in (6,4 mm) x 3/32 in (2,4 mm)
P/N 5785–1/4 in (6,4 mm) x 1/16 in (1,6 mm)
Cable
All ABD sensors interface with the ABD module using cable
P/N 149892.
Bubble Size
1/4 in (6,4 mm) sensor detects gas bubbles of 0.3 cc or larger at
flow rates up to 3 L/min.
3/8 in (9,5 mm) sensor detects gas bubbles of 0.5 cc or larger at
flow rates up to 6 L/min.
Air Detection Mode
The ABD is always checking for air when it is powered on and
enabled on the system.
Operation
Storage

Fault Tolerance
Startup
The ABD module initiates the air sensor self-test only when the device is
NOT enabled and looking for air.
Fail Safe
Page 294
Alarm
The ABD module, when it is enabled and connected to a sensor, reports
an alarm condition to the system when the ABD sensor has failed and/or
the presence of the sensor can no longer be detected after 1 second.
Module Connector
The ABD module/System 1 connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector.
The minimum durability is 500 insertion cycles and the insertion force is
less than 1 Kg.
Modular Design
The ABD module can be replaced quickly.
Module Retention
The ABD module, after it is plugged into the system Base, is captured and
retained by a mechanical rail.
Air Sensor
The ABD module accepts a high performance, 6-pin LEMO®∗ connector.

Drip Proof
The ABD module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
The ABD module is corrosion resistant.
Tubing Compatibility
The air sensor is compatible with clear, flexible, medical grade PVC tubing, 3/8 in
(9,5 mm) x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) I.D., 1/4 in (6,4 mm) x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) I.D., and 1/4 in
(6,4 mm) x 1/16 in (1,6 mm) I.D.
Bubble Detection
The air sensor detects gas bubbles of 0.3 cc or larger at flow rates up to 3 L/min for
1/4 in tubing and gas bubbles of 0.5 cc or larger at flow rates up to 6 L/min for 3/8 in
tubing.
Number of Sensors
The system supports up to four air sensors.
∗
Lemo USA Inc., Rohnert Park, CA, USA.
Page 295
ABD Module
The ABD module serves as the interface between one air sensor and the System 1.
The system will accept up to four air bubble detect modules. The ABD system can
be turned on and off via the central control monitor (CCM).
Air Sensor
The ABD sensor provides electrical signals to indicate the presence or absence of
air in a section of PVC tubing.
Alerts/Alarms
When the air sensor detects air, the ABD module software reports an alarm to the
system Bus. The ABD system can be reset through the CCM or by touching the
SELECT button on the pump control panel. The alarm can be muted through the
CCM. There is no alert state for the ABD module.
CCM Interface
The ABD system can be controlled via the CCM. The ABD system can be turned on
or off. During an alarm, the audible can be muted and/or the ABD can be reset.
Pump Interface
The ABD system can be controlled via the local interface on the pumps. During an
alarm, the Select button is used to reset the ABD module. This can be used with or
without the CCM active on the system.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the ABD module provides status indications to the user.
The ABD module is comprised of a left and right housing made of molded plastic,
sealed together using three self-tapping screws. The inside of the housing has an
EMC coating. The edges of the housings are designed to provide a tight fit so that
electronic noise does not leak out of the seams after assembly.
The housing encloses a generic, microprocessor board coupled to an ABD
application specific board. For a robust module, the housing is designed to capture
and maintain the circuit boards and the external connectors.
The module has two connectors. The first is a 15-pin male D-sub connector. This is
used to plug the module into any of the eighteen system Base connectors. The
second, a 6-pin LEMO® connector, accepts the Air Sensor cable. This connector
header passes through a metal bulkhead that provides good grounding to keep
electronic noise emissions low. The metal bulkhead is captured along with its EMC
gasket, during assembly, by a slotted mechanism designed into the housing. When
plugged into the Base, the 6-pin LEMO® connector points up. The ABD cable can
be routed to optimize to the minimum exposed cable length. Any excess cable can
be arranged and stored in the covered area of the Base.
Page 296
The module is held in place by a crossbar mounted on each the side of the Base to
prevent accidental disconnection. The module can be released from the Base by
pushing the crossbar down, grasping the module, and pulling it from the Base
connector. The module housing is designed to fit under the side covers to provide
protection for the module and cable from fluid spills. During use, the ABD icon and
the multicolor LED, located on the side opposite the Base connector, can be viewed
through the Base cover window.
Module Dimensions
Height 3.5 in (90 mm)
Depth 3.0 in (76 mm)
Width 1.0 in (25 mm)
Weight 4.6 oz (131 g)
Air Sensor Cable Dimensions

Length 10 ft (3 m)
Diameter 0.222 in (5,7 mm)
The module circuitry consists of a generic board and an ABD application board. The
generic board receives 5 VDC and Vmot (24 VDC) from the system Bus. It is limited
to using no more than 2 W @ 5 VDC and 1.5 W @ Vmot. The ABD application board
supplies +8 V ± 0.5 V @ 100 mA maximum to the air sensor and provides a +8 V
sense signal back to the generic board for software measurement used to monitor
the connection.
Power Consumption
ABD Application ABD Application ABD ABD

Board Current Board Power Module Module
Current Power
+5 V 1 mA 5 mW 250 mA 1.3 W
Vmot 55 mA 1.2 W 55 mA 1.2 W
Interface
Patient Interface
The air sensor has no direct connection to the patient. The air sensor connects to the
exterior of tubing used in the perfusion circuit.
Page 297
User Interface
The ABD module has one tricolor LED for displaying operational status information.
The CCM is used for control and monitoring of the ABD system. The product label on
the ABD module matches the icon on the CCM. To provide redundancy if the CCM is
lost, the pumps provide a button used to reset the ABD after the detection of air and
a simple text message display.
CCM Controls
The ABD module has no local controls. Pressing the corresponding buttons
on the CCM will turn the system on and off, and pressing RESET will clear
an alarm. Pressing the MUTE button stops the audible tone.
CCM Displays
ON/OFF Status
The ABD module ON/OFF status is displayed on the CCM via an
ABD icon. A gray background indicates the system is off, a green
background indicates the system is on.
ABD module connection and error status are displayed on the CCM
via the ABD icon. A gray background with a question mark, ?,
indicates the module is not plugged in or the module that is plugged
in is not mapped to the icon. A gray background with an X indicates
the module has failed while Online.
ABD Alarm
The system sounds a dual-tone audible alarm, and displays the
ABD icon flashing red. A message is displayed in the CCM
message area.
Pump Local Display
The pump user interface will display a message if air is detected and if an
ABD module to which it is linked is not connected.
Pump Local Control
The Select button on a pump user interface can be used to clear an air
detected alarm and reset a linked ABD module. This button can be used
with or without the CCM working on the system.
Page 298
Local Display
A tricolor LED provides a status indication. The LED will display green, red,
or yellow as follows:
Interactive Devices
The ABD system will only interface and interact with System 1 pumps and the CCM.
Air Bubble Detection Messages
The ABD module provides the following indications to the system via the system Bus.
Status Messages
Air Alarm Enabled/Disabled
Air Detection Alarm/No Alarm
Error Messages
+8 V Supply Value Out of Range Alert
Self-Test Error
Hardware Interface
The ABD module receives 5 VDC and 24 VDC from the Base. The air
sensor receives +8 VDC and an excitation voltage from the ABD module.
Software Interface
The ABD module software provides air detection status to the system via
the system Bus. It accepts ON, OFF, RESET, and Mute commands from
the system. The ABD module does not have a software interface with any
additional devices.
Interface with other products
The ABD module is not intended to interface with any additional products.
Page 299
System Messages
Alarm Messages

Air detected. <ABD name>: Correct air condition, reset air
AIR DETECTED sensor, restart pump if stopped.
Air detected. AIR DETECTED: Correct air condition, reset air

>Pump Name> sensor, restart pump if stopped.
<Pump Response>
Air sensor on and <ABD name>: Reconnect air sensor, reset air
disconnected. AIR DETECTED sensor, restart pump if stopped.
Alert Messages

Air sensor <ABD name>: Check air sensor cable
malfunction. CHECK SENSOR connections. Reset air sensor. If
message does not clear, replace
air sensor.
Theory of Operation
The ABD module serves as the interface between one air sensor and the System 1.
The ABD module receives Vmot (24 VDC) and a 5 V supply via the system Bus.
The ABD electronics interface and comply with the specifications of the air sensors.
The air sensor is excited by a pulse drive signal from the ABD board The pulse
signal has the following characteristics:
Pulse drive signal +8 V ± 0.5 V (hi), 0 V +2.5/-0 V
Pulse width 55 µs ± 10 µs
Pulse period 1400 µs ± 150 µs
The ABD module utilizes a general purpose digital I/O port to provide status
information to the generic board. The ABD module provides a +8 V sense signal
back to the generic module for software measurement. If the air sensor is
disconnected, the ABD board will indicate the presence of air.
The ABD module draws no more than 2 W @ 5 VDC and no more than 1.5 W @
Vmot.
Software
Air bubble detection functionality is defined in terms of Air Alarm Enable status
(ENABLED or DISABLED) and Air Alarm status (ALARMING or NOT ALARMING).
Page 300
Power-Up
After power-up, the software continuously outputs a periodic pulse to the
air sensor hardware.
Enabling Air Detection
When in Online mode, the ABD software can accept system Bus
messages to change the state of the Air Alarm Enable status and the Air
Alarm status. The initial state upon entry to Online mode for the Air Alarm
Enable is DISABLED. The initial Air Alarm state upon entry to Online
mode is NOT ALARMING. When the Air Alarm Enable state is set to
ENABLED, the software monitors the input from the air sensor hardware
for an indication of detected air.
Air Detection
A high signal on the microcontroller input port represents a positive
detection of air from the sensor. If air is detected in Online mode, the
software changes the Air Alarm state to ALARMING, generates an Air
Detected alarm message on the system Bus, and activates an alarm
indication on the module.
Clearing Air Alarm
If the Air Alarm state is ALARMING, the only way to clear the alarm and go
back to NOT ALARMING is via a system Bus message. The user can
accomplish this by ensuring that air is no longer present in the sensor, and
pressing the RESET button on the Safety/Air screen on the CCM.
Alternatively, changing the Air Alarm Enable state to DISABLED will clear
an ALARMING air condition. This can be accomplished by pressing the off
button on the Safety/Air screen on the CCM for the corresponding ABD.
Status Reporting
The ABD module software continuously monitors its operational status and
generates an Air Alarm Status message to the system Bus at a minimum rate of
10 Hz.
Diagnostics
The following diagnostics and self-tests are performed or monitored by the ABD
board to mitigate potential hazards:
• Air Alarm Enable State (Enabled/Disabled)
• Air Alarm State (Alarming/Not Alarming) at a rate of 10 Hz
• +8 V Supply Error at 0.5 second intervals
• Self-Test Error at 2 second intervals when Air Alarm Enable state is
DISABLED
Safety
The ABD board software places the Air Alarm Status message onto the system Bus
within 10 milliseconds of receiving an air detected signal.
Page 301
Module Self-test
The module LED will cycle green, yellow, red, then will remain solid yellow in Offline
mode until the system allows the module to connect to the network. Once
connected and in Online mode, the LED will display constant green. If the power-on
self-test fails, a message is displayed at the top of the CCM.
Calibration
The ABD module does not require calibration.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on ABD modules, log in to Service. From the Service
module is responding, and press More Info. The More Info screen displays
Current, and Temperature.
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
file, and follow the detailed instructions that accompanied the software update.
Page 302
Diagnostic Theory
1. The ABD module reports its overall health and status using a three-
color-capable LED on the module. Watching the LED color sequence
will reveal the health and status of the module.
2. The Perfusion screen may be used to assess if the system can put an
ABD module online and whether or not it can be controlled via the
CCM. The Perfusion screen will report a failed ABD module if the
failure happens while the module is online.
3. The Configuration screen can be used to check if a module is linked

and mapped. The LED on the module will remain yellow until it is
used in a Perfusion screen. The LED on the module will blink green
when it is selected from the Configuration screen.
pump and the CCM itself. Individual modules run self-diagnostic
routines and record errors in an internal log. The Service screen may
be used to view and download these logs. Modules that capture and
log reset event(s) or out of range error(s) should be replaced.
Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs to the air bubble detect system.
Page 303
Troubleshooting–Air Bubble Detect Module
Troubleshooting Table–Air Bubble Detect Module

Note: If a air bubble detector icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is
Service Department.
Air Bubble Problem Check Action

Detect
Keyword
Alarm Air alarm sounds with Disconnect/reconnect air
sensor/module
fluid in the tubing. sensor cable from
connection,
module.
air sensor cable, Replace air sensor cable.
air sensor connection, Replace air sensor.
module by plugging into

a different NIC Replace ABD module.
connector.
Alarm Missed Air alarm. Re-install tubing in air

tubing properly installed
sensor.
in air sensor,
air sensor/module Disconnect/reconnect air

connection, sensor cable from
module.
air sensor cable, Replace air sensor cable.
air sensor connection, Replace air sensor.
module connection. Replace ABD module.
LED Red LED remains red after Replace ABD module.

module connection.
power-on self-test.
Page 304
Air Bubble Problem Check Action
Detect
Keyword
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Check system monitoring
after power-on self-test system configuration, area on the Perfusion
and Perfusion screen screen and/or the Service
indicates missing screen. Replace ABD
module. module if it is not
recognized by the system.
Use the Configuration

area on the CCM to verify
module/system Perfusion
that the module is/can be
screen mapping,
mapped to a Perfusion
screen. Replace module if
it can not be mapped.
Disconnect/reconnect
module. Replace ABD
module if LED power-on
self-test sequence is
module LED sequence, wrong.
Disconnect/reconnect
module in a different Base
connector. Replace ABD
module/system Base module if there is no
connection. improvement.
Page 305
Page 306
Level Detect Module
Level Detect Module

P/N 802111 Level Detect Module
P/N 195215 Ultrasonic Level II Sensor Yellow
P/N 195274 Ultrasonic Level II Sensor Red
P/N 195240 Level Sensor II Pads 60 PK
Overview
The Level Detect Module serves as the interface between alert and alarm level
sensors and the rest of the system. This module is responsible for determining if the
blood level has fallen below a specified point in the venous reservoir and for
communicating that status to the system.
The level sensor attaches to a rigid reservoir with a disposable adhesive pad.
Ultrasonic signals are used to detect the presence or absence of fluid at the sensor
position for a range of venous reservoir thicknesses.
Performance
Sensor Inputs
Alarm Level Sensor
Alert Level Sensor
Detection Position
Changes in level condition are detectable within ± 0.2 in of the

center of the sensor.
Fluid Compatibility
The level sensor functions normally with water, priming solutions,
and blood with a hematocrit range of 0% to 40%.
Foam/Film
Level sensors are insensitive to foam or internal blood film; both
are detected as air.
Page 307
Level Detect Module
Flow Rates
Flow fluctuations up to a ± 7 L/min rate.

Pumping Mode
The level sensor is not influenced by roller or centrifugal pumping
systems, either in Continuous or Pulsatile mode, including flow
variations, mechanical vibrations, and electronic interference
caused by pumps in the perfusion circuit.
Temperatures
The level sensors are insensitive to fluid temperature changes in
the range of 20°C to 40°C.
Duration of Use
Level sensors and their mounting pads will function reliably
without change in calibration or mounting for at least 6 hours.
External Structures
The level sensor is not influenced by any external structures or
components as long as they are at least 2 cm away.
Internal Structures
Internal configuration of the oxygenator or reservoir or positioning
of the oxygenator will not affect sensor function as long as any
internal structures are more than 1 cm away.
Operation
Storage

Safety Aspects
The level detect module is unaffected by electromagnetic interference generated in
the operating room, and conforms to IEC 60601-1-2 standard.
Fault Tolerance
Startup
The module initiates a self-test and tests the sensors.
Fail Safe
If a non-recoverable system Bus fault is detected, the module logs the
error and enters broken mode.
Page 308
Level Detect Module
Alerts/Alarms
The level detect module provides independent selection of the monitoring
mode: alert only with one sensor or alert/alarm mode using two sensors.
An alert is generated when an active sensor becomes disconnected from
the level detect module or the reservoir.
Error Messages
An error message is generated when a level sensor becomes
disconnected from the reservoir or from the level detect module.
Module Connector
The module/System 1 connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector. The
than 1 Kg.
Level Sensor Connectors
The level sensor connects to the level detect module with a 3-pin high
2
performance, LEMO® connector.
Modular Design
The module can be replaced quickly.
Module Retention
The module, after it is plugged into the system Base, is captured and
Drip Proof
The level detect module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
The level detect module is corrosion resistant.
Level Detect Module
The level detect module serves as the interface between up to two level sensors
and the system. The system can accept one level detect module. The level detect
system can be turned on and off via the central control monitor (CCM).
2
Lemo USA Inc., Rohnert, CA, USA.
Page 309
Level Detect Module
Level Sensor
The level sensor is an ultrasonic transducer that is used to detect the presence or
absence of fluid in a hard shell reservoir. The sensor is mounted on the reservoir
with a disposable adhesive pad which holds the sensor in place during use. The
sensor itself is detachable from the level detect module.
Mode Selection
The user can select one of two modes of operation: Alert Only or Alert/Alarm.
Alert
When the alert sensor detects air, the level detect module software reports an alert
to the system Bus. The audible alert tone can be muted by pressing the Mute All
button on the CCM or through the Mute button on the Safety tab, Level subtab.
The alert clears automatically when the alert level sensor no longer detects air.
If a sensor is disconnected when the level detection is enabled, the module reports
an alert condition to the system.
Alarm
When the alarm sensor detects air, the level detect module software reports an
alarm to the system Bus. The audible alarm tone can be muted by pressing the
Mute All button on the CCM or through the Mute button on the Safety tab, Level
subtab. The alarm clears automatically when the alarm level sensor no longer
detects air.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the level detect module provides status indications to the user.
Housing
The level detect module is comprised of a left and right housing made of molded
plastic, sealed together with self-tapping screws. The inside of the housing has an
EMC coating. The edges of the housings are designed to provide a tight fit so that
electronic noise does not leak out of the seams after assembly.
The housing encloses a generic, microprocessor board coupled to the level detect
application board. The housing is designed to capture and maintain the circuit
boards and the external connectors. This connector header passes through a metal
bulkhead that provides good grounding to keep electronic noise emissions low. The
bulkhead and the EMC gasket are captured during assembly by a slotted feature
designed into the housing.
Page 310
Level Detect Module
Connector Description
The module has two types of connectors. The first type is a 15-pin D-sub connector
plug, used to plug the module into any of the eighteen Base connectors. The second
type are two 3-pin LEMO® connectors that accept level sensors. The alert sensor
connector is marked with a yellow ring, and the alarm sensor connector is marked
with a red ring. These colors correspond to the color-coding on the transducers
themselves. When plugged into the Base, the sensor connectors point up. The level
sensor cable(s) can be routed to minimize any exposed cable length. Any excess
cable can be arranged and stored in the covered area of the Base.
Level Sensor
The level sensor consists of three machined parts: cap, housing, and delay rod. The
housing and cap are machined from stainless steel and the delay rod is machined
from ABS plastic. The delay rod contains one piezoelectric ceramic element for
transmitting and receiving ultrasonic signals.
Nominal Dimensions and Weight
Width 1.04 in (26,4 mm)
The level detect module receives +5 VDC, Vmot (24 VDC), and the CAN message
Bus from the system Bus. The module draws no more than 250 mA for the +5 VDC
power and no more than 100 mA for Vmot.
The module circuitry consists of a generic board common to all modules and a level
detection application board.
Interface
The level module has one tricolor LED for displaying operational status information.
CCM Controls
The level module has no local controls. The user can turn the system on
and off through the Safety tab, Level subtab on the CCM.
Page 311
Level Detect Module
CCM Displays
ON/OFF Status
The level detect module ON/OFF status is displayed on the CCM
via a level detect icon. A gray background indicates that the system
is disabled, a green background indicates that the system is
enabled.
Level Alert
When the alert level sensor detects air, a single-tone audible alert
sounds, the level icon flashes yellow, a message is displayed in the
CCM message area and on the local display of any pump with a
level safety connection. Press the Mute All button on the CCM or
the Mute button in the Safety tab, Level subtab to mute the audible
tone.
Level Alarm
When the alarm level sensor detects air, a dual-tone audible alarm
sounds, the level icon flashes red, a message is displayed in the
CCM message area and on the local display of any pump with a
level safety connection. Press the Mute All button on the CCM or
the Mute button in the Safety tab, Level subtab to mute the audible
tone.
Connection and error status are displayed on the CCM via the level
icon. A gray background with a question mark indicates the module
is not plugged in or the module that is plugged in is not mapped to
the icon. A gray background with an X indicates that the module
has failed while online.
Pump Local Display
A message will display on the local display of any pump with a level
safety connection when an alert or alarm is detected. Messages will
also be displayed on the local display indicating module and sensor
status.
Local Display
A tricolor LED provides a local interface on the module. The LED
will display green, red, or yellow indications as follows:
Constant Green – Online mode
Blinking Green – Assignment mode
Constant Yellow – Offline mode
Blinking Yellow – Alert Condition
Constant Red – Broken mode
Blinking Red – Alarm condition
Page 312
Level Detect Module
Interactive Devices
The level detect module will only interface and interact with the System 1.
Status Conditions
Level sensor connected/disconnected from the module
Level sensor connected/disconnected from the reservoir
Level system enabled/disabled
Level sensor air detected (yes/no)
Alert Only mode or Alert/Alarm mode is selected
Results of hardware power-up self-test
Results of level sensor self-test
Alarms/Alerts
Level Alarm
Level Alert
Level Sensor not mounted Alert
Level Sensor disconnected Alert
Level sensor self-test failure Alert
Error Conditions
Vref out of range Alert
Vmot out of range Alert
15 V supply out of range Alert
Software Interface
The level detect module does not have a software interface with any additional
devices. The level detect software provides level sensor status to the system via the
system Bus. It can be enabled and disabled via the system Bus and reports any
level alerts or alarms to the system.
The level detect system is used with a wide variety of hard-shell reservoirs
structurally compatible with the sensor. The module will not interface electronically
with any additional products.
Page 313
Level Detect Module
System Messages
Alarm Messages
Alarm Condition Pump Display Operator Response

Alarm Message
Reservoir level below <Level detector name>: Fill reservoir to above
alarm level. LOW LEVEL alarm level. Alarm clears
automatically. Restart
pump if stopped.
Reservoir level below LOW LEVEL: Fill reservoir to above
alarm level. <Pump Name> alarm level. Alarm clears
<Pump Response> automatically. Restart
pump if stopped.
Pump goes to 0 flow as a <Pump name>: STOPPED Fill reservoir above alert
result of a Reduce Speed level. Restart pump.
response to a level
alert/alarm.
Alert Messages

Alert Message
Reservoir level below alert <Level detector name>: Fill reservoir above alert
level. CHECK LEVEL level. Start pump if
stopped. Alert clears
automatically.
Level sensor alert sensor CHECK LEVEL: Fill reservoir above alert
detects low level. <Pump Name> level. Start pump if
<Pump Response> stopped. Alert clears
automatically.
Level system is on, level <Level detector name>: Remove and reconnect
hardware malfunction. CHECK MODULE module to system Base. If
message does not clear,
replace and reassign
module.
Level sensor self-test <Level detector name>: Check alarm and alert
failure. CHECK PROBE sensor connections. If
replace alarm or alert
sensor.
Page 314
Level Detect Module
Alert Message
Level system is on, level <Level name>: Check level detector cable
sensor cable has become DISCONNECTED connections. If message
disconnected from module. does not clear, replace and
reassign module.
Level system is on, level <Level detector name>: Mount the level sensor to
sensor is not mounted to NOT ATTACHED venous reservoir. Alert
venous reservoir. clears automatically.
Error Messages

Error Message
Level system is off, module <Level detector name>: Disconnect and reconnect
hardware malfunction. Check Module module to Base. If
replace and reassign
module.
Status Messages

Status Message
Level system is off, level <Level detector name>: Reconnect level sensor.
sensor becomes Disconnected Message clears
disconnected from module. automatically.
Level system is off, level <Level detector name>: Mount level sensor to
sensor is not mounted to Not Attached reservoir. Message clears
the venous reservoir. automatically.
Level selection is changed <Level Detector Name>: Allow approximately

from Alert to Alert/Alarm in Initializing alarm probe 10 seconds for probe to
a Perfusion screen. initialize.
Level detection is turned <Level Detector Name>: Message will clear after
off during perfusion. Off approximately 3 seconds.
Theory of Operation
The level sensor is designed to detect the presence or absence of fluid in rigid
polycarbonate reservoirs using an ultrasonic fluid sensor. The sensor does not
contact the fluid within the reservoir. The level detect module serves as the interface
between up to two level sensors and the System 1. The level detect module
receives power and QBUS communication via the system Bus. Level sensors
connect to the module via 3-pin LEMO® connectors.
Page 315
Level Detect Module
The level software alternates between checking the alert and alarm sensors. The
module sends a transmit pulse to the sensor and receives the reflected signal. The
presence of air or fluid is determined by the amplitude of a reflected signal from the
inside wall of the reservoir. The status of the sensor is reported via QBUS
messages to the System 1. From an electrical point of view, both sensor channels
are equivalent.
Voltage Regulation
The level detection application board uses the Vmot supply as input to +15 V and
+7.5 V regulators, which are utilized by local circuitry.
Software Overview
The main purpose of the level detection software is to obtain and process readings
from two fluid-level sensors. One of the sensors is referred to as the alert sensor,
presumably mounted higher on the side of the reservoir, to detect when the
reservoir fluid level is getting low. The other sensor is referred to as the alarm
sensor, mounted lower on the reservoir. The level application software can operate
either in the Alert Only or in the Alert And Alarm mode. When the level module is
placed into the Alert Only mode through the CCM, the alarm sensor checks and
alarm sensor self-tests are not performed.
When alarming and alerting are enabled through the CCM, the detection of air by
the alert sensor will cause the low level alert to be issued. The detection of air by
the alarm sensor will cause the low level alarm to be issued. In addition to level
detection, the level application software is capable of detecting when a sensor
becomes disconnected from the module or uncoupled from the reservoir. The level
application software will provide safety data (alarm and alert status) to the CCM ten
times a second. It will provide the following low data rate information to the CCM
twice a second: sensor connection statuses, Vmot current status, sensor self-test
results.
Startup
The level detection software performs a sensor self-test at power up to determine
the operational health of the module and of the sensors plugged in and selected for
use. The self-test(s) for each selected sensor must pass prior to allowing the level
detection system to be enabled. Note that the alarm sensor self-test is not
performed when the module is in the Alert Only operation mode.
Self-test
The software tests sensors being used every 10 seconds and reports the results in
a status message. A sensor and/or system failure while level detection is enabled
will cause the software to report an alert condition to the system after five
consecutive error returns.
Page 316
Level Detect Module
Mode Selection
The level detection software accepts system Bus messages to change the
operational mode between Alert and Alarm and Alert Only. A mode must be
selected before level detection can be enabled. In Alert and Alarm mode, the level
detection software monitors, reports, and logs all required conditions, status, alerts,
and alarms associated with the alert sensor and alarm sensor. In Alert Only mode,
the functions described above are performed for the alert sensor only.
Enabling Level Detection
When the module is online, the level detection software accepts system Bus
messages to enable and disable the level detection. The default state is disabled.
When level detection is enabled, the software monitors the input from the level
sensors for a low-level alert or low-level alarm indication.
Level Alert
If the alert sensor detects air while online, the software generates a Level Alert
Detected message on the system Bus, and activates an alert indication on the
module.
Level Alarm
If the alarm sensor detects air while online, the software generates a Level Alarm
Detected message on the system Bus, and activates an alarm indication on the
module.
Clearing Alert/Alarm
The level detection software will automatically clear an alert or alarm when the
sensor senses fluid again. An alert or alarm can also be cleared by disabling the
level sensing system through the CCM.
Status Reporting
The level detection software monitors and reports the status of the following at a
minimum rate of 2 Hz:
• Sensor Connected/Disconnected
• Sensor Coupled/Uncoupled
• Level Detection Enabled/Disabled
• Alert Only or Alert/Alarm mode
The level detection software monitors and reports the results of the self-test every
10 seconds.
Page 317
Level Detect Module
Diagnostics
The following diagnostics and self-tests are performed or monitored by the level
detect board to mitigate potential hazards:
• Self-test error at 10 second intervals
• Level sensor air/fluid detection state
• Level sensor connection status
• Vmot overcurrent status
• Hardware fault status
• 15 V supply status
• Vref supply status
Safety
The level detection board software places a Low Level Alarm message onto the
system Bus within 100 ms of receiving a level alarm detected signal.
Calibration
The level detect module comes factory calibrated and does not need any further
calibration to function properly.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on level modules, log in to Service. From the Service
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Page 318
Level Detect Module
Diagnostic Theory
1. The level detect module reports its health and status using a three-
level detect module online and whether or not it can be controlled via
the CCM. The Perfusion screen will report a failed module if the failure
happens while the module is online.
3. The Configuration area can be used to check if a module is linked and

mapped. The LED on the module will remain yellow, until it is used
within a Perfusion screen. The LED on the module will blink green
when it is selected from within the Configuration area.
pump and the CCM itself. Individual modules continuously run self-
diagnostic routines and record errors in an internal log. The Service
screen may be used to view and download these logs. Modules that
capture and log reset event(s) or out of range error(s) should be
replaced.
Repair Procedures
There are no field service repairs to the level system.
Page 319
Level Detect Module
Troubleshooting–Level Detect Module
Troubleshooting Table–Level Detect Module

Note: If the level detector icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is
Service Department.
Level Detect Problem Check Action

Keyword
Alert/Alarm Missed alert or alarm. Replace module.
module by
plugging it into
another NIC
connector.
Alert/Alarm Alert/Alarm sounds Disconnect/reconnect level sensor

level
with fluid above from module.
sensor/module
measured level.
connection,
level sensor,
Replace level sensor.
module by
plugging it into
another NIC Replace module.
connector.
Page 320
Level Detect Module
Level Detect Problem Check Action
Keyword
Alert/Alarm Missed Alert/Alarm. Remount level sensor.
sensor properly
mounted on
reservoir,
level Disconnect/reconnect level sensor

sensor/module from module.
connection,
level sensor, Replace level sensor.
module by Replace module.

plugging it into
another NIC
connector.
LED Red LED remains red Replace module.

module by
after power-on self-
plugging it into
test.
another NIC
connector.
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Check system monitoring area on the
system
after power-on self- Perfusion screen and/or the Service
configuration,
test and Perfusion screen. Replace module if it is not
screen indicates recognized by the system.
missing module.
module/system Use the Configuration area to verify

Perfusion screen that the module is/can be mapped to a
mapping, Perfusion screen. Replace module if it
can not be mapped.
Disconnect/reconnect module.
module LED Replace module if LED power-on self-
sequence, test sequence is wrong.
module/system Disconnect/reconnect module in a

Base connection. different Base connector. Replace
module if there is no improvement.
Page 321
Level Detect Module
Page 322
Flowmeter System
Flowmeter System
P/N 802018 Flowmeter Module
P/N 6382 Flow Sensor 3/8 in x 3/32 in (9,5 mm x 2,4 mm)
P/N 164278 Flow Sensor Gel
P/N 801550 Flowmeter Module Mounting Bracket
P/N 801587 Cable Assembly
Overview
The flowmeter module provides the interface between the flow sensor and the rest
of the system. The module performs the signal processing necessary to compute
fluid flow values. Those flow values are then made available to the rest of the
system. The flow sensor is intended to measure flow rates in a perfusion circuit.
Tubing
The flowmeter system is compatible with medical grade tubing 3/8 in
(9,5 mm) I.D. x 3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall thickness.
Voltage
Vmot (24 VDC nominal)
5 VDC (± 5%)
Power Consumption
200 mA @ Vmot
500 mA @ 5 V
Display Range
-9.90 L/min to +9.90 L/min
Page 323
Flowmeter System
Display Accuracy
± 10% of actual flow for -7.0 L/min to -1.0 L/min
± 0.10 L/min of actual flow for -1.0 L/min to -0.3 L/min
± 0.10 L/min of actual flow for 0.3 L/min to 1.0 L/min
±10% of actual flow for 1.0 L/min to 7.0 L/min
Note: For displayed flow rates of >-0.3 L/min and <0.3 L/min, actual flow is
considered to be zero.
Display Resolution
0.10 L/min from -1.50 L/min to -9.90 L/min and +1.50 L/min to +9.90 L/min
0.05 L/min from -0.10 L/min to -1.50 L/min and +0.10 L/min to +1.50 L/min
Between -0.09 L/min and +0.09 L/min, display shows 0 L/min.
Pulsatile Flow
Flow reading fluctuations are limited to less than ± 0.50 L/min.

Out of Range Data
For flow outside of range, the flow icon on the CCM and flow display
location on the pump will display - - - L/min.
No Data
If no data is received, the flow icon on the CCM and flow display location
on the pump will display - - - L/min.
Operation
Storage
Safety Aspects
Backflow Message
When the flow reading is negative for at least 0.5 seconds, a backflow
message is placed on the system Bus within 100 milliseconds.
Connection Status
The flowmeter module reports the connection status of the flow sensor via
the system Bus.
Page 324
Flowmeter System
Power Supply Monitoring
The flowmeter module monitors system power and generates an alert for
the following conditions:
• Vmot overcurrent
• +5 V supply out of range
• +7.5 V supply out of range
Fault Tolerance
Startup
The flowmeter module initiates a self-test and tests the attached sensor.
Fail Safe
Drip Proof
The flowmeter module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Corrosion
The flowmeter system is corrosion resistant.
Flowmeter Alarm
The flowmeter system reports an alarm condition to the system when a
backflow condition is detected.
Modular Design
The flowmeter module can be replaced quickly.
Error Messages
An error message is generated when a flow sensor becomes
disconnected.
System Function
Flowmeter Module
The flowmeter module serves as the interface between the flow sensor
and the system. It functions by measuring the transit time of an ultrasonic
wave in the blood line and performing the calculations to determine the
blood flow. The result is communicated to the system Bus for display on
the CCM and a connected pump.
Page 325
Flowmeter System
Flow Sensor
The flow sensor is a non-invasive ultrasonic sensor that clips on to a
section of tubing in a perfusion circuit. The flowmeter module generates
and receives signals via the sensor for calculating blood flow rates.
Alarms
An alarm condition is generated when backflow is detected. The CCM will
display the alarm condition within 4 seconds after detection of negative
flow.
Sensor Disconnect
If the flow sensor becomes disconnected, the Flow Sensor Connection
status changes to Disconnected, and the status is reported to the system
Bus.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the flowmeter module provides status indications to
the user.
The flowmeter module housing is a two-piece aluminum enclosure. Mounted to the
enclosure are the status LED, the flow sensor connector, the system Bus connector,
and the bracket mounting adaptor. The module plugs into any of the eighteen
system Base connectors using a cable. A flowmeter icon, the multicolor LED, the
flow sensor connector, and the system connector are located on the enclosure.
The flowmeter module contains the generic computer board and a flowmeter
application board. The two boards are connected with a stacking type connector
and mounted to the housing. An internal cable assembly connects the circular
system Bus connector header, mounted on the housing, to the generic computer
board D-type connector. Another internal cable assembly connects the application
board to the sensor connector header. A two wire LED cable assembly connects to
the flowmeter application board.
The flowmeter module is mounted on a flowmeter module bracket. The bracket is
pole mounted and is designed to mount up to two flowmeter modules. The
flowmeter module has two connectors, a 15-pin circular connector for connection to
the system, and a 15-pin D-sub receptacle connector for a flow sensor. The flow
sensor cable and the system cable can be routed to optimize the cable length and
any excess cable can be arranged and stored in the rear covered area of the Base.
Page 326
Flowmeter System
Dimensions and Weight
Flowmeter Module
Flow Sensor
Power Supply
The flowmeter module receives Vmot (24 VDC) and 5 VDC power supplies from the
system.
On-Board Power Supply
7.5 VDC is generated by the flowmeter board and supplied to the flow sensor.
Circuit Protection
The flowmeter module circuitry monitors Vmot and will disable it if Vmot exceeds
0.5 A.
Interface
CCM Controls
The flowmeter module has no controls. The backflow alarm tone can be
muted using the Mute All button on the CCM. When configured and linked
to a centrifugal pump, the CCM is used to set and enable a MinFlow alarm
limit.
Page 327
Flowmeter System
CCM Displays
L/min
L/min is displayed on the CCM as part of the perfusion circuit or
displayed in the centrifugal or roller pump speed/flow display area.
When the flowmeter is associated with a pump, the flowmeter data
will also be displayed on the local pump interface. Both displays
will show dashes when the flow sensor is not plugged into the
module or flow data is not available.
Backflow Alarm
A dual-tone alarm sounds, the flowmeter icon flashes red, the
module LED flashes red, and a message with the sensor name
appears in the CCM message area and on the local display of any
pump with a flow safety connection.
Connection and error status are displayed on the CCM via the flow
icon. A gray background with a question mark indicates that the
module is not plugged in or the module that is plugged in is not
mapped to the icon. A gray background with an X indicates that
the module has failed while Online.
Pump Local Display
The local display of any pump with a flow safety connection will display a
message when a backflow alarm is detected or if flow data is lost.
Local Display
A tricolor LED provides a local interface on the module. The LED displays
green, red, or yellow as follows:
• Blinking Yellow – Alert condition
The LED is steady yellow after the power-on self-test is successfully
completed. Once connected and in Online mode, the LED is steady green.
Interactive Devices
The flow sensor is compatible with medical grade PVC tubing 3/8 in (9,5 mm) I.D. x
3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall thickness. The flowmeter module does not interface
electronically with any other devices.
Page 328
Flowmeter System
Status Conditions
• Sensor Disconnected
• Initialization Failure
• Invalid Flow Data
• Results of hardware power-on-self-test
• Results of flow sensor self-test
• Flow range
• Backflow event
• +7.5 V supply out of range
• Signal quality out of range
• A/D communication error
Vmot current >0.55 A
• 5 V on flow board >4.75 or <5.25
• 7.5 V on flow board >7.125 or <7.875
Hardware Interface
The flowmeter module receives 5 VDC and Vmot (24 VDC) from the Base. The
flow sensor +7.5 VDC is generated on the flowmeter application board.
Software Interface
The flowmeter application software provides the interface between the flowmeter
application board and the system. The processor in the flowmeter module reads the
EEPROM in the flow sensor and then uses that data to configure devices on the
flowmeter application board. The processor then reads the analog flow signal from
the application board and sends the measured flow data and status information to
the system via the system Bus.
Page 329
Flowmeter System
System Messages
Alarm Messages

Backflow has been <Flow sensor name>: Correct backflow condition.
detected. BACKFLOW Alarm clears automatically.
Backflow has been BACKFLOW: Correct backflow condition.
detected. <Pump Name> Alarm clears automatically.
Flow for flow sensor <Pump name>: Correct low flow condition.
connected to a centrifugal MINIMUM FLOW Alarm clears automatically.
pump has gone below
minimum limit.
Flow for flow sensor MINIMUM FLOW Correct low flow condition.
connected to a centrifugal <Pump Name> Alarm clears automatically.
pump has gone below <Pump Response> Restart pump if stopped.
minimum limit.
Error Messages

Flow sensor malfunction <Flow sensor name>: Disconnect and reconnect
detected. Check Sensor flow sensor. If message
does not clear, replace
flow sensor.
Flow sensor disconnected <Flow sensor name>: Reconnect flow sensor. If
from tubing. Check Sensor message does not clear,
replace flow sensor.
Status Messages

Flow sensor has become <Flow sensor name>: Reconnect flow sensor.
disconnected from the Disconnected Message clears
module. automatically.
Page 330
Flowmeter System
Theory of Operation
System to Module
The flowmeter module contains two circuit boards: a generic board
common to all modules, and the application specific board. The module
receives +5 VDC and 24 VDC (Vmot) power supplies from the system
Base.
Module To System
A general purpose digital I/O port provides status information from the
application board to the generic board.
Module to Sensor
The application board provides +7.5 V (± 5%) to the flow sensor. The
application board generates the ultrasonic signals used to measure the
transit time of an ultrasonic wave in the blood line.
Sensor to Module
The flow sensor consists of four ultrasonic transducers necessary to initiate
and receive an ultrasonic pulse. The pulse information is converted to an
analog flow signal by the flowmeter board and is received by the
microcontroller analog data port. The transmit time is measure in both the
upstream and downstream directions. The difference between these two
measurements determines the blood flow rate within the blood line.
Power
The flowmeter module draws a maximum of 0.5 A @ Vmot, average.
Calibration
The flowmeter module does not require calibration.

Cable Assembly - P/N 801587, see page 689.
Page 331
Flowmeter System
More Info Screen
To review stored information on flowmeter modules, log in to Service. From the
Service and Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, note that the
correct module is responding, and press More Info. The More Info screen displays
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Diagnostic Theory
1. The flowmeter module reports its overall health and status using a
three-color-capable LED on the module. The LED color sequence
reveals the health and status of the module.
2. A Perfusion screen may be used to assess if the system can put a

flowmeter module online and whether or not it can be controlled via
the CCM.

mapped. The LED on the module will remain yellow, until it is used in
a Perfusion screen. The LED on the module will blink green when it is
selected from within the Configuration area.
Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs for the flowmeter system.
Page 332
Flowmeter System
Troubleshooting–Flowmeter System
Troubleshooting Table–Flowmeter System

Note: If a flowmeter icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading
Department.
Flowmeter Problem Check Action

Keyword
Flow Sensor Flow sensor Replace module.
module by plugging it
doesn’t work.
into another NIC
connector,
Check for adequate application of gel.
flow sensor. Reposition sensor on tubing.

Replace flow sensor.
RED Module LED Replace module.

remains red after
into another NIC
self-test.
connector.
Yellow LED remains Check the Perfusion screen or the

system Configuration,
yellow after Service screen. Replace module if it is
power-on self-test not recognized by the system.
and Perfusion
screen indicates
module/system Use the Configuration area to verify
missing module.
Perfusion screen that the module is/can be mapped to a
mapping, Perfusion screen. Replace module if it
can not be mapped.
Disconnect/reconnect module. Replace

module LED module if LED power-on self-test
sequence, sequence is wrong.
Disconnect/reconnect module in a
module/system Base different Base connector. Replace
connection. module if there is no improvement.
Page 333
Flowmeter System
Page 334
Pressure Sensor System

P/N 802112 Pressure Module
P/N 16433301 Pressure Transducer
P/N 22300030 Pressure Transducer Holder
P/N 806747 Cable Assembly Pressure Transducer
P/N 806748 Cable Assembly Pressure Reusable
Overview
The Pressure Module serves as the interface between a pressure sensor and the
System 1. This module is responsible for measuring signals from one or two
pressure sensors, converting those signals into pressure values, filtering the
pressure values, and making pressure values and pressure status available to the
system.
The pressure sensor senses pressures and converts the pressure into an electrical
signal that is sensed and measured by the pressure module. This sensor is
detachable from the pressure module.
Pressure Requirements
The pressure module is compatible with Terumo® transducers and any

other transducer that meets AAMI standards for physiologic pressure
transducers. Other transducers may require an adapter cable from Fogg
Systems Co., Aurora, Colorado.
Pressure Performance
Monitors
Pressures between -250 mmHg to +900 mmHg, with ± 1 mmHg
resolution.
Page 335
Displays
• Static Conditions
Accurate to ± 10 mmHg for the range -250 mmHg to
+500 mmHg
Accurate to ± 30 mmHg for the range 501 mmHg to
900 mmHg
• Dynamic Conditions
Accurate to ± 20 mmHg, with maximum step change of
150 mmHg.
• CAL, if uncalibrated.
• ---, at <-250 mmHg or no probe.
• 999, at >900 mmHg.
• Blank, if a channel or pressure module malfunctions.
Alert/Alarm Limit Set Points
Alert Range
-240 mmHg to +890 mmHg in 10 mmHg increments.
Alarm Range
-250 mmHg to +900 mmHg in 10 mmHg increments.
Displays 999 if disabled.
Default Alert Thresholds
Positive 300 mmHg
Negative -40 mmHg
Default Alarm Thresholds
Positive 360 mmHg

Negative -100 mmHg
Data Storage
Alert and alarm set points are configured within each Perfusion screen
and retained when power is turned off. Disabled alarm settings are not
saved.
Page 336
Operation
Storage
Fault Tolerance
Startup
The pressure module initiates a self-test.
Fail Safe
If a non-recoverable system Bus fault is detected, the module logs the error
and enters broken mode.
Sensor Connection
The module provides an indication to the user if the pressure sensor is not
connected.
Error Messages
An error message will be generated when:
• a pressure probe becomes disconnected
• pressure value is out of range
Module Connector
The module/System 1 connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector. The
than 1 Kg.
Modular Design
Module Retention
After the module is plugged into the Base, it is retained by a mechanical
rail.
Sensor Connector
The module uses a high performance, 5-pin LEMO® connector.
Drip Proof
The pressure module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Page 337
The pressure module is corrosion resistant.
System Function
Pressure Module
The pressure module serves as the interface between up to two pressure
sensors and the system. The module monitors signals from the pressure
sensors, and communicates pressure values, alerts, and alarms to the
system. Alert and alarm thresholds may be set in positive or negative
measurement ranges. While is Servo Control mode, the pressure set point
is displayed on the pump icon on the CCM and on local pump displays.
Pressure Sensor
The pressure sensor is a transducer that senses pressure, and converts
pressure into electrical signals detected by the pressure module. The
sensor is detachable from the pressure module.
Calibration
A zero-offset calibration is required before using each pressure sensor.
Pressure Alerts
Pressure alert limits are set independently for each channel via the CCM.
Negative Pressure Alert
If the current pressure is greater than the channel’s negative pressure
alarm limit, but less than or equal to that channel’s negative pressure
alert limit, a negative pressure alert condition is reported by the
pressure module to the system and any previous pressure alert/alarm
for that channel is cleared.
Positive Pressure Alert
If the current pressure is greater than or equal to that channel’s positive
pressure alert limit, but less than that channel’s positive pressure alarm
limit, a positive pressure alert condition is reported by the pressure
module to the system and any previous pressure alert/alarm for that
channel is cleared.
Disable the Alert
Pressure alerts can be disabled only indirectly by setting the alert threshold
out of the clinical measurement range.
Page 338
Pressure Alarms
Pressure alarm limits are set independently for each channel via the CCM.
Positive Pressure Alarm
If the current pressure is greater than or equal to that channel’s positive
pressure alarm limit, a positive pressure alarm condition is reported by
the pressure module to the system and any other previous pressure
alarm/alert for that channel is cleared.
Negative Pressure Alarm
If current pressure is less than or equal to that channel’s negative
pressure alarm limit, a negative pressure alarm condition is reported by
the pressure module to the system and any other previous pressure
alarm/alert for that channel is cleared.
Disable the Alarm
Pressure alarms can be disabled by setting the limit greater than +990
mmHg for positive pressure alarms, and -990 mmHg for negative pressure
alarms.
Alert/Alarm Relationship
The system maintains a minimum difference of 10 mmHg between the
Pressure Alert and Pressure Alarm limits (10 mmHg greater for negative
pressure alarms, and 10 mmHg lower for positive pressure alarms).
Loss of Sensor
If the pressure sensor is lost during an alert or alarm condition, due to an
internal error or external disconnect, an alarm condition will be reported to
the system by the pressure module.
CCM Interface
The pressure module is configured and controlled via the CCM. Safety
connections are assigned during system configuration. Each pressure
channel may be calibrated and then its alert and alarm thresholds may be
set before and/or during use.
Pump Interface
Overpressure messages and connection status messages will appear on a
pump with a pressure safety connection.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the pressure module provides status indications to the
user.
Page 339
The pressure module is comprised of a left and right housing made of molded
plastic, sealed together using three self-tapping screws. The inside of the housing
has an EMC coating. The edges of the housing are designed to provide a tight
grounding fit so that electronic noise does not leak out of the seams after assembly.
The housing encloses a generic microprocessor board coupled to a pressure
and maintain the circuit boards and external connectors.
The module has two connectors. The first is a 15-pin male D-sub connector that is
used to plug the module into any of the eighteen system Base connectors. There
are two 5-pin LEMO® connector headers that accept a pressure sensor cable
connector. The connector headers are color coded to match the user interface on
the CCM. Both of these connector headers pass through a metal bulkhead that
provides good chassis grounding to keep electronic noise emissions low. The metal
bulkhead is captured, along with its EMC gasket, during assembly by a slot
designed into the housing. When plugged into the Base, the 5-pin LEMO®
connectors point up so each sensor cable can be routed to optimize to the minimum
exposed cable length. Any excess cable can be arranged and stored in the covered
area of the Base. The module is held in place by a crossbar mounted on each side
of the Base to prevent accidental disconnection The module can be released by
protection for the module and cable from fluid spills. During use, the pressure icon
label and the multicolor LED, located on the side opposite the Base connector, can
be viewed through the Base cover window.
Module Dimensions
Power Supply
The pressure module receives its power from the system Bus and is operational for
the voltage range from 5 VDC to 5.25 VDC. Vmot is not used by the pressure
board.
The module circuitry consists of a generic circuit board and a pressure application
board.
Page 340
Interface
CCM Controls
The pressure module has no controls. The CCM is used to calibrate and
set alert and alarm limit thresholds.
CCM Displays
The pressure module provides data to the system for display on the CCM.
Pressure Data
Each channel is displayed individually on the CCM. In Pressure Servo
mode, the actual pressure is also displayed on the local display of the
pump using the pressure data as a servo source.
Pressure Alerts
The system highlights the display in yellow, sounds a single-tone
audible alert, and flashes the pressure display. A message with the
sensor name appears in the CCM message area and on the local
displays of any pumps with pressure sensor safety connections.
Pressure Alarms
The system highlights the display in red, sounds a dual-tone audible
alert, and flashes the pressure display. A message with the sensor
name appears in the CCM message area and on the local displays of
any pumps with pressure sensor safety connections.
Alarm Disabled
The Pressure Alarm Limit display will indicate *** if the pressure alarm
is disabled.
Pump Local Display
The module provides data to the system for display on the pump local
display.
Safety Connections
The pump user interface will display an overpressure, alert, or alarm
message for any pressure safety connection.
Pressure Servo Mode
The pressure set point is displayed on the local display of the pump
that is using the pressure data as a servo source.
Page 341
Local Display
A tricolor LED provides status indications. The LED will display green, red,
Interactive Devices
The pressure module is compatible with Terumo® transducers and any other
transducer that meets AAMI standards for physiologic pressure transducers. Other
transducers may require an adapter cable from Fogg System Co., Aurora,
Colorado. The module will not interface electronically with any other devices.
Hardware Interface
The pressure system will only interface and interact with System 1 pumps and the
CCM.
Status Messages
• Sensor calibrated or not
• Sensor attached or not
• Servo data source or not
• Alarm disabled or not
• Overpressure Alarm
• Overpressure Alert
• Pressure sensor disconnected Alert
Error Messages
• Calibration failure
• Malfunctioning Pressure Sensor Alert
• Loss of pressure data Alert
• Pressure value out of range
• Self-test Error
Page 342
System Messages
Alarm Messages

Pressure has risen above <Pressure name>: Correct overpressure
alarm limit. condition. Start pump if
OVERPRESSURE stopped.
Pressure has risen above OVERPRESSURE: Correct overpressure
alarm limit. <Pump Name> condition. Start pump if
<Pump Response> stopped.
Pump goes to 0 flow as a <Pressure name>: Correct high pressure

result of a Reduce Speed STOPPED condition. Restart pump.
response to a pressure
alert.
Alert Messages

Pressure has risen above <Pressure name>: Monitor pressure. Check
alert limit, but below alarm CHECK PRESSURE for condition that could
limit. lead to pressure alarm.
Pressure has risen above CHECK PRESSURE Monitor pressure. Check

alert limit, but below alarm <Pump Name> for condition that could
limit. <Pump Response> lead to pressure alarm.
Calibrated pressure probe <Pressure name>: Reconnect and recalibrate
malfunction detected. CHECK PROBE probe. If message does
not clear, replace and
calibrate new probe.
Calibrated pressure probe <Pressure name>: Reconnect and recalibrate
has become disconnected. CONNECT PROBE pressure probe.
Loss of data for calibrated <Pressure name>: Check probe connections.

pressure probe. NO PRESSURE DATA Disconnect/reconnect and
recalibrate probe. If
replace and calibrate new
probe.
Page 343
Error Messages

Pressure probe calibration <Pressure name>: Retry pressure probe
failed. Calibrate Failed calibration. If message
calibrate new probe.
Status Messages

Pressure alarm set out of <Pressure Sensor Name>: Message will clear when
range. Alarm Disabled pressure alarm is set
within range, or message
is replaced by a higher
priority message.
Theory of Operation
The pressure module is used with the System 1 to measure perfusion circuit and
patient pressures in the ranges from -250 mmHg to +900 mmHg. Up to four
pressure modules can be connected to the system, each with two pressure
channels. Each module receives power and communications signals from the
system Bus.
Pressure sensor cables connect the module to the pressure connection site on the
device being measured. The pressure module monitors the sensor function and
sensor connection status for each channel and provides this data to the system.
The module calculates a maximum, minimum, and average pressure based on a
sampling over a 2 second period at a rate of 100 Hz. The module then outputs the
average pressure data to the system Bus at a maximum 100 Hz rate, and the
maximum and minimum pressure data at a maximum 2 Hz rate.
When the pressure data is used as a source for Servo regulation, the pressure
module samples data over 50 milliseconds, and outputs the average of the last
sixteen pressure readings to the system Bus at a rate of 100 Hz.
The pressure module outputs the following status information at a rate of 2 Hz:
• In-range, Underrange, Overrange
• Probe Connected/Disconnected
• A/D Communication Error
• A/D Zero Reference Error
• Isolated Supply Error
• Channel Zeroed/Unzeroed
Page 344
The module sets the pressure value status as invalid if any of the following occurs:
• The pressure value is underrange or overrange.
• The probe is disconnected.
• The channel is not pressure zeroed.
• A/D Communication Error is detected.
• A/D Zero Reference Error is detected.
• Isolated Supply Error is detected.
Self-Diagnostics
The following diagnostics and self-test are performed or monitored by the module to
mitigate potential hazards.
• Module software checks for probe connection status and reports out-of-
range status.
• Module software performs range checking of pressure inputs and reports
out-of-range status.
• Module software performs A to D zero and non-zero reference and range
checking and reports errors.
• Module software performs internal monitoring of power and data signals.
Calibration
The pressure module performs an Autocal function at startup to ensure operating
accuracy, and, except in the case of a failure that would make the unit non-
operational, it does not need any further calibration to function properly.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on pressure modules, log in to Service. From the
Page 345
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Diagnostic Theory
1. The pressure module reports its overall health and status using a
three-color-capable LED on the module. Watching the LED color
sequence will reveal the health and status of the module.
pressure module online and whether or not it can be controlled via the
CCM. The Perfusion screen will report a failed module if the failure

and mapped. The LED on the module will remain yellow until it is used
by a Perfusion screen. The LED on the module will blink green when it
is selected from within the Configuration screen.
Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs for the pressure module.
Page 346
Troubleshooting–Pressure Sensor System
Troubleshooting Table–Pressure Sensor System

Note: If a pressure icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading and
Pressure Problem Check Action

Keyword
Alert/Alarm Missed alert or Replace pressure module.
Alert and Alarm
Missing alarm.
threshold settings,
module by plugging
it into another NIC Replace pressure module.
connector.
Blank Pressure display Disconnect/reconnect sensor

sensor/module
Display blanks after normal connection to module.
connection,
startup or on case.
pressure sensor,
Replace pressure sensor.
module by plugging Replace pressure module.

it into another NIC
connector.
Failure to Failure to calibrate. Replace sensor.

pressure sensor by
Calibrate
trying another
sensor,
module by plugging
it into another NIC Replace pressure module.
connector.
LED Red LED remains red Replace pressure module.

module by plugging
it into another NIC
test.
connector.
Page 347
Pressure Problem Check Action
Keyword
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Check system monitoring area on the
system
after power-on self- Perfusion screen and/or the Service
configuration,
test and Perfusion screen. Replace module if it is not
screen indicates recognized by the system.
missing module.
Use the Configuration area on the

module/system CCM to verify that the module is/can
Perfusion screen be mapped to a Perfusion screen.
mapping, Replace module if it can not be
mapped.
module LED Replace module if LED power-on self-
sequence, test sequence is wrong.
module/system Disconnect/reconnect module in a

Readings Inaccurate pressure Secure sensor connection at

sensor/pressure site
Inaccurate readings. measurement site.
connection,
sensor/module Disconnect/reconnect sensor

connection, connection to module.
pressure sensor by
trying another Replace pressure sensor.
sensor,
module by plugging
it into another NIC
connector. Replace pressure module.
Page 348
Temperature System
Temperature System
P/N 802114 Temperature Module
P/N 24710008 Temperature Sensor
Overview
The temperature module serves as the interface between up to two YSI (Yellow
Springs Instruments) 400 temperature sensors and the rest of the system. This
module measures and converts signals from each sensor into temperature values. It
also filters the temperature values before making temperature values and
temperature status available to the rest of the system.
The temperature sensor is detachable from the temperature module.
Temperature Requirements
YSI 400 series insulated temperature sensors or equivalent. YSI model
416 probes cannot be used with this temperature system.
Monitors
Between 0°C and 50°C with ± 0.3°C display accuracy and 0.1°C
resolution.
Displays
- - -, when <0ºC or no probe.
999, when >49.9ºC or a partially connected probe.
Blank, if a channel, sensor or temperature module malfunctions.
Data Storage
Alarm set points are configured for each channel within each
Perfusion screen and retained when the power is turned off.
Disabled alarm settings are not saved.
Operation
Page 349
Temperature System
Storage

Safety Aspects
Fault Tolerance
Startup
The temperature module initiates a self-test.
Fail Safe
If a non-recoverable system Bus fault is detected, the module logs the
error and enters broken mode.
Sensor Connection
The module provides an indication to the user if the temperature
sensor is not connected.
Sensor Fault
The module provides protection against fault current.
Error Messages
Error message will be generated when:
Temperature probe becomes disconnected.
Temperature value is out of range.
Module Connector
The module/System 1 connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector.
The minimum durability is 1000 insertion cycles and the insertion force
is less than 1 Kg.
Modular Design
The module can be quickly replaced.
Module Retention
When plugged into the Base, the module is captured and retained by a
mechanical rail.
Sensor Connector
The module uses a phone plug connector.
Drip Proof
The temperature module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Page 350
Temperature System
The temperature module is corrosion resistant.
System Function
Temperature Module
Each module measures signals from up to two temperature sensors and
provides temperature values and temperature status information to the
system. The system will accept up to four temperature modules.
Temperature information is displayed on the central control monitor
(CCM).
Temperature Probe
The temperature probe is a YSI 400 temperature sensor.
Temperature Alarms
Each channel’s high temperature alarm threshold can be set and disabled
via the CCM. If the measured temperature is greater than or equal to that
channel’s high temperature alarm threshold, a high temperature alarm
condition is activated for that channel. The high temperature alarm will
become inactive if the sensor is disconnected.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the temperature module provides status indications to
the user.
Housing
The temperature module is comprised of a left and right housing and a connector
adaptor piece. All of the housing components are made of molded plastic. The left
and right housings are sealed together using three self-tapping screws while
trapping the connector adaptor in a bulk head slot. The inside of the housing has
EMC coating. The edges of the housings are designed to provide a tight grounding
fit so that electronic noise does not leak out of the seams after assembly. The
housing encloses a generic microprocessor board coupled to a temperature
and maintain the circuit boards and external connectors.
Page 351
Temperature System
The module has three connectors. The first is a 15-pin plug D-sub connector used to
plug the module into any of the eighteen system Base connectors. Two 1/4 in
(6,4 mm) phone plug connectors accept temperature sensors. When the
temperature module is plugged into the Base, the phone connectors point up. Each
sensor cable can be routed to optimize the minimum exposed cable length. Any
excess cable can be arranged and stored in the covered area of the Base.
Base Connection
The temperature module is held in place by a crossbar mounted on each side of the
Base to prevent accidental disconnection. The module can be released by pushing
the crossbar down, grasping the module, and pulling it from the Base connector.
The module housing is designed to fit under the side covers to provide protection for
the module and cable from fluid spills. During use, the temperature icon and the
multicolor LED, located on the side opposite the Base connector, can be viewed
through the Base cover window.
Power Supply
The temperature module receives 58 mA of +5 VDC power from the system Bus
and is operational for the voltage range from +5 VDC to +5.25 VDC. The +24 VDC,
Vmot, is not required by the module.
The module circuitry consists of a generic computer board common to all modules,
and a temperature board.
Interface
CCM Controls
The CCM can be used to set a high temperature alarm limit for each
temperature channel. The default alarm threshold is set in the
Configuration screen. The system default alarm threshold is 42°C.
Page 352
Temperature System
CCM Displays
The temperature module provides temperature data, high temperature
alarm events, and module status and error messages to the system for
display on the CCM.
Local Controls
None.
Local Display
A tricolor LED provides a local interface on the module itself. The LED will
display green, red, or yellow as follows:
Interactive Devices
The temperature module can interface with YSI 400 or equivalent sensor with a
1/4 in (6,4 mm) phone plug. The module will not interface electronically with any
other devices.
Alarms
Overtemperature; one for each sensor.
Error Conditions
Temperature probe becomes disconnected.
Temperature value is out of range.
System Messages
Alarm Messages

Temperature has risen <Temperature name>: Correct overtemperature
above alarm limit. OVER TEMPERATURE condition. Alarm clears
automatically.
Page 353
Temperature System
Error Messages

Temperature probe has <Temperature channel Reconnect temperature
become disconnected. name>: probe. Error message
Check Probe clears automatically.
Temperature out of range. <Temperature channel Correct out of range
name>: condition. Error message
Check Probe clears automatically.
Theory of Operation
The temperature module will measure temperature using YSI 400 or equivalent
temperature sensors, with a range of 0°C to 50°C. Each channel produces a
measurement accuracy, including the sensor, of better than ± 0.3°C. Up to four
temperature modules, two temperature channels each, can be connected to the
system and used with a Perfusion screen. The temperature system is used to
measure perfusion circuit and patient temperatures. The name of the probe and the
location of the temperature display on the Perfusion screen can be selected using
the Configuration screen. The CCM is also used to select a high temperature alarm
for each channel. When an alarm condition is detected, the module provides an
alarm message to the system. In response, the system emits an audible alarm tone,
the temperature display blinks red, and an alarm message is posted in the message
area of the CCM. The temperature alarm for any channel becomes inactive if the
sensor is disconnected.
The temperature application reads data from two temperature channels and passes
that information to the CCM. The major functions of the temperature software are:
• Monitor for alarms. The temperature software accepts alarm thresholds
from the CCM, and then monitors for temperatures that exceed them. The
alarm status is placed on the system Bus at a frequency of ten times per
second for each temperature channel.
• Provide temperature data to the CCM. The temperature software provides
an average temperature value to the CCM twice a second for each
channel.
• Monitor hardware health. There are two additional channels on the A/D: a
hardware zero reference and an isolated supply – these values are
monitored, and the zero reference is used as an offset for the temperature
readings.
Page 354
Temperature System
Status Reporting
The temperature module outputs the following status information at a rate of 2 Hz:
• In-range, Underrange, Overrange
• Probe Connected/Disconnected
• AD/Communication Error
• A/D Zero Reference Error
• Isolated Supply Error
Self-Diagnostics
The module sets the temperature value status as invalid if any of the following
occurs:
• The temperature value is underrange or overrange.
• The probe is disconnected.
• A/D Communication Error is detected.
• A/D Zero Reference Error is detected.
• Isolated Supply Error is detected.
Module Self-test
mode until the system allows the module to connect to the network. Once connected
and in Online mode, the LED will display constant green. If the power-on self-test
fails, a message is displayed at the top of the CCM.
Calibration
The temperature module does not need calibration to function properly.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on temperature modules, log in to Service. From the
Page 355
Temperature System
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
From the Service and Diagnostics screen, in the System Configuration list, select the
device name and press Upgrade.
Diagnostic Theory
1. The temperature module reports its overall health and status using a
temperature module online and whether or not it can be controlled via

Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs for the temperature system.
Page 356
Temperature System
Troubleshooting–Temperature System
Troubleshooting Table–Temperature System

Note: If a temperature icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading
Department.
Temperature Problem Check Action

Keyword
Display Blank Temp display Disconnect/reconnect sensor
sensor/module
blanks after normal connection to module.
connection,
startup or on case.
temperature sensor, Replace temperature sensor.
module by plugging it Replace temperature module.

into another NIC
connector.
LED Red LED remains red Replace temperature module.

into another NIC
test.
connector.
Page 357
Temperature System
Temperature Problem Check Action
Keyword
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Disconnect/reconnect module.
module LED sequence,
after power-on self- Replace the module if LED power-
test and/or on self-test sequence is wrong.
Perfusion screen
indicates missing Disconnect/reconnect module in a
module/system Base
module. different Base connector. Replace
connection,
temperature module if there is no
improvement.
system Configuration,
Check system monitoring area on
the Perfusion screen and/or the
Service screen. Replace
temperature module if it is not
recognized by the system.
module/system Use the Configuration area on the

Perfusion screen CCM to verify that the module
mapping. is/can be mapped to a Perfusion
screen. Replace module if it can
not be mapped.
Missed Alarm Missed alarm. Reconfigure alarm set point and/or

alarm set point on CCM,
enable alarm.
sensor/temperature site Secure sensor connection at

connection, measurement site.
module by plugging it Replace temperature module.

into another NIC
connector.
Temperature Inaccurate Secure sensor connection at

sensor/temperature site
Inaccurate temperature measurement site.
connection,
readings.
sensor/module Disconnect/reconnect sensor to

connection, module.
Replace temperature sensor.

temperature sensor,
Replace temperature module.

into another NIC
connector.
Page 358
Occluder System
Occluder System
P/N 803480 Occluder Module
P/N 806455 Occluder Head
Overview
The Occluder System provides a precision, computer-controlled, tube clamping
mechanism used to regulate venous return flow in the perfusion circuit. The
occluder system consists of an occluder module and occluder head.
The occluder head serves as the tube clamping mechanism. A section of tubing is
positioned between the plunger and the occluder cap. The tubing occlusion can be
adjusted by controlling the occluder head, using the central control monitor (CCM)
controls to move the plunger toward or away from the occluder cap.
The occluder module serves as the interface between the occluder head and the
system. The occluder head receives its power and control signals from the occluder
module. The occluder head can be unplugged from the occluder module.
The user controls the occluder system from the CCM and can configure it to
respond to the arterial pump, either roller or centrifugal types. The responses can
be set to open, close, or go to a particular %Flow.
Occluder Requirements
Tube Size
The occluder supports tubing sizes in the range 1/4 in (6,4 mm)
I.D. x 1/16 in (1,6 mm) wall thickness to 1/2 in (12,7 mm) I.D. x
3/32 in (2,4 mm) wall thickness.
Fluid Temperatures
20°C to 40°C
Occluder Performance
Voltage
24 VDC nominal
12 VDC ± 5%
Page 359
Occluder System
Power Consumption
3 A @ 24 VDC
80 mA @ +12 VDC
400 mA @ 5 VDC
44 W @ 24 VDC
Display
Occluder information is displayed on the CCM.
% Flow from 0% to 100% in 1% increments.
CAL–if uncalibrated.
Operation
Storage

Safety Aspects
Trigger Response Time
The occluder module initiates a response to a trigger within
100 milliseconds of receipt of the trigger message.
Calibration Status
The occluder module reports the calibration status of the occluder head
via the system Bus.
Connection Status
The occluder module reports the connection status of the occluder head
via the system Bus.
Power Supply Monitoring
Upon detection of a Vmot current error, the occluder module transmits an
alert message via the system Bus.
Linear Position Monitoring
Upon detection of a linear position range error, the occluder module
reports an alert message via the system Bus.
Page 360
Occluder System
Fault Tolerance
Startup
The occluder module initiates a self-test.
CCM Failure
In the event of a CCM failure with the system network and power intact,
the occluder system maintains current occlusion setting and monitors
currently configured triggers.
Network Failure
In the event of a network failure with adequate power supply, the occluder
system maintains current occlusion setting and disables responding to any
triggers.
Fail Safe
If a nonrecoverable system Bus fault is detected, the module logs the error
and enters broken mode.
Module Connector
The occluder module/System 1 connector is a 15-pin male D-sub
connector. The minimum durability is 1000 insertion cycles and the
insertion force is less than 1 Kg.
Occluder Head
The occluder head connector is a 15-pin male D-sub connector secured
with two screws.
Modular Design
Module Retention
The module, after it is plugged into the system Base, is captured and
Drip Proof
The occluder module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Corrosion
The occluder system is corrosion resistant.
Occluder Alerts
The module will report an alert condition to the system for the following
conditions:
• Linear position range error
• Vmot current error
Page 361
Occluder System
Error Messages
Error messages are generated for the following conditions:
• Reception of a GOTO FLOW command via the system Bus when
the occluder module is not calibrated
• Head disconnected
• Unexpected stall
System Function
Occluder Module
The occluder module serves as the interface between an occluder head
and the system. This module monitors signals from the occluder head and
communicates the following to the system: connection status, calibration
status, operational health, plunger position, external trigger status,
unexpected stall status, and reason for automatic operations in response
to triggers. The % Flow value is displayed on the CCM only.
Occluder Head
The occluder head includes the motor and plunger that are controlled to
change the occlusion of the tubing. Power and control signals are received
from the occluder module.
Calibration
The occluder requires a user-initiated calibration to establish the 0% flow
reference point. The zero point is established by stepping the plunger
closed onto the tube until the motor stalls out. The occluder uses a
calculation to estimate the percentage of full flow capable of flowing
through the occluded tubing.
Alerts
The occluder module reports an alert condition to the system in case of a
linear position range error or Vmot current error.
Alarms
The occluder system does not generate alarm conditions.
Loss of Data
If the occluder head data is lost during use due to an internal error or
external disconnect, the occluder module calibration status will change to
uncalibrated, the status is reported to the system, and the occluder display
on the CCM indicates CAL.
Page 362
Occluder System
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the occluder module provides status indications to the
user.
Housing
The occluder module is comprised of a left and right housing made of molded
plastic sealed together using self-tapping screws. The inside of the housing has
EMC coating. The edges of the housings are designed to provide a tight fit.
The housing encloses a generic microprocessor board coupled to an occluder
application board. The housing is designed to capture and maintain the position of
the circuit boards and the external connectors.
The module has two connectors. The first is a 15-pin D-sub connector plug that is
used to plug the module into any of the eighteen system Base connectors. The
second is a 15-pin D-sub connector socket that accepts the cable from the occluder
head. This connector header passes through a metal bulkhead that provides good
grounding with the housing to keep electronic noise emissions low. The metal
bulkhead is captured, along with an EMC gasket, by a slotted mechanism designed
into the housing. When plugged into the Base, the occluder head connector points
up. The occluder head cable can be routed to optimize a minimum exposed cable
length. Any excess cable can be arranged and stored in the covered area of the
Base.
Base Connection
The occluder module is held in place by a mechanical rail to prevent accidental
disconnection. The module can be released from the Base by pushing the rail down,
grasping the module, and pulling it from the Base connector. The module housing is
designed to fit under the side covers to provide protection for the module and cable
from fluid spills. During use, the occluder icon and the multicolor LED, located on
the side opposite the Base connector, can be viewed through the Base cover
window.
Nominal Dimensions and Weight
Page 363
Occluder System
Occluder Motor Unit
The occluder head has an upper and lower housing made of cast aluminum; the
housing is held together by screws and the edges are sealed with a conductive
putty. The housing encloses the stepper motor and motor control board. A clear,
hinged, plastic cap on the upper part of the occluder head secures the tubing
between the plunger and the cap. A locking hinge secures the cap and maintains it
closed against the tubing during use. A mounting plate on the housing allows the
occluder head to be pole mounted. The mounting bracket provides an adjustment
range using a ball and socket mechanism.
System Power
The occluder module receives 24 VDC and 5 VDC power from the system.
Power Consumption
The occluder module application board requires a nominal 10 mA of +5 VDC and
75 mA of 24 VDC. The occluder head requires up to 2 A of 24 VDC power during
operation.
Interface
CCM Controls
Loading the Tubing
Before calibration, the plunger can be moved to the optimum tube
loading position by pressing the OPEN button on the occluder slide
bar.
Calibration
The occluder can be calibrated by pressing the CAL button on the
occluder slide bar.
%Flow
After calibration, the user can open or close the occluder by using the
occluder OPEN and CLOSE buttons on the occluder slide bar. The
user can also select a % Flow by adjusting the occluder slide bar. UP
and DOWN arrows on the slide bar increment or decrement the %Flow
setting by 1%.
Page 364
Occluder System
CCM Displays
Calibration Status Indications
Calibration status is displayed on the CCM on the occluder icon and
the occluder slide bar. Both will indicate CAL when the occluder state
is uncalibrated. Until the system is calibrated, the slide bar will only
display the OPEN button, used to load the tubing, and the CAL button.
% Flow
The % Flow is displayed on the occluder icon and at the top of the
slide bar after the occluder has been successfully calibrated.
Connection and error status are displayed on the CCM via the
occluder icon. A gray background with a question mark indicates that
the module is not plugged in or the module that is plugged in is not
mapped to the icon. A gray background with an X indicates that the
module has failed while online.
Occluder Alerts
The system highlights the display in yellow, sounds a single-tone
audible alert, and flashes the occluder display. A message with the
occluder name appears in the CCM message area.
Local Display
• Blinking Yellow – Alert condition
Interactive Devices
The occluder system will not interface electronically with any other devices.
Status Conditions
• Current % Flow (if calibrated)
• Occlusion Value
• Calibration Status
• Linear Position Potentiometer Value
Page 365
Occluder System
• Occluder Head disconnected
• Calibration lost
• Unexpected Stall
• Linear Position Range alert
• Vmot out of range alert
• None
Hardware Interface
The occluder module receives 5 VDC and 24 VDC from the Base. The
occluder head receives +12 VDC and 24 VDC from the occluder module.
Software Interface
The software provides the signals necessary to control the occluder head.
The software moves the occluder by enabling its drive circuitry, then
provides quadrature outputs which step the motor to open or close the
occluder head. The current position of the occluder's plunger is indicated
by an analog voltage from a position pot in the occluder head. The
occluder software addresses four state conditions: 1) no occluder head
connected; 2) occluder head connected and uncalibrated; 3) occluder
head connected and calibrated; 4) position pot out of range.
The occluder accommodates tubing from a variety of disposable perfusion
circuits. The occluder does not interface with any other products or
devices.
System Messages
Alert Messages

Occluder head not moving <Occluder Name>: Try disconnecting/
or not responding. NOT RESPONDING reconnecting occluder
head. If message does not
clear, replace occluder
head.
Internal malfunction <Occluder Name>: Try disconnecting/

detected. SERVICE MODULE reconnecting occluder
head. If message does not
clear, reassign module.
Page 366
Occluder System
Error Messages

Occluder becomes <Occluder Name>: Reconnect and recalibrate
disconnected after Connect Occluder occluder head.
calibration.
Calibrated occluder loses Calibrate <Occluder Recalibrate occluder.
calibration. Name>
Status Messages

Uncalibrated occluder Calibrate <Occluder Calibrate occluder.
detected. Name>
Occluder is disconnected. <Occluder Name>: Reconnect and calibrate

Connect Occluder occluder.
Occluder responds to an <Occluder Name>: is Note occluder value,

event. <open, closed, or %flow> change if desired.
Theory of Operation
System to Module
The occluder module contains two circuit boards: a generic board common
to all modules and the occluder application board. The occluder module
receives +5 VDC and 24 VDC (Vmot) power from the system Base.
Module to System
occluder board to the generic board.
Module to Head
The occluder board provides +12 V (± 5%) at a maximum of 80 mA and

Vmot @ 2 A to the occluder head. The occluder board accepts two 0 V to
5 V signals from the generic board for quadrature control of the occluder
head. An active low motor enable signal and two active low pulse
quadrature signals are provided to the occluder head. The minimum
quadrature pulse rate is 550 Hz.
Head to Module
The occluder board receives an occluder head present sense signal and a
linear position sensor signal of 0 V to 4.1 V from the occluder head.
Page 367
Occluder System
Power
The occluder module draws a maximum of 400 mA @ 5 VDC and, with the
motor running, no more than 44 W @ Vmot average.
Software Functions
The occluder board software detects the presence or absence of an occluder head
and enables Vmot to the occluder head only when the occluder head present sense
signal is active. In Offline mode, the software disables the occluder motor.
Software Application Overview
The occluder application controls fluid flow through a tube by occluding the tube.
The flow may vary from 0% to 100% of the total flow under CCM control. The
occluder position and safety data are reported periodically. The occluder is an
external trigger receiver and reacts to triggers by changing the occlusion percent.
The major functions of the occluder software are:
• Monitor head connection status sampled at 10 Hz.
• Monitor head position while moving to detect motor stalls.
• Report the current position and status to the CCM periodically.
• Monitor for alerts. The Vmot overcurrent sampled at 50 Hz for eight filtered
samples and position error sampled at 10 Hz.
• Monitor head 12 V input sampled at 10 Hz.
• Provide occluder position and status data to the CCM.
• Move the occluder position based on CCM input and external trigger input.
Electronic/Hardware Interface
Power Cable Interconnect Design
Generic to Application Specific Interconnections.
The generic module connects to the occluder application board via
P1, a 44-pin stacking interface connector, and P2, an 8-pin power
connector.
Application Specific Connection
The occluder application board connects the occluder interface cable via a
15-contact female D-subminiature connector designated J1.
Operation
The occluder software allows the occluder to be controlled by messages received
from the CCM over the system Bus. The software accepts OPEN, CLOSE, MOVE,
and GOTO FLOW commands in the range of 0% to 100% in 1% increments at a
rate up to 10 Hz.
Page 368
Occluder System
Occluder Positions
The software provides the ability to open and close the occluder. The range of
motion of the occluder plunger is about 0.8 in over 2500 motor steps. The occluder
operates in five distinct occluder positions. Attempts to move the plunger outside
the normal range will result in motor stalls.
Position 1
This is the fully closed, 0% flow, calibration point. All step positions are
relative to this position, which is assigned a step value of zero. This
position is dependent on the tube thickness and is determined by
calibration. Prior to calibration, an ideal Position 1 is used based on the
analog position sensor.
Position 2
This is fully open, 100 % flow point relative to Position 1. Normal occluder
operation will move the occluder between positions 1 and 2.
Position 3
This is the load point and is a fixed distance from the occluder head. At
Position 3 the plunger is retracted enough to facilitate loading of the
tubing.
Positions 4 and 5
These positions allow the uncalibrated occluder to open wider than
normal.
Operation of Calibrated Occluder
The actual occluder system behavior depends upon whether or not the user has
calibrated the occluder. Calibration involves closing the occluder as far as possible
onto a tube and uses that closed position as a zero reference point.
OPEN
An OPEN command at a % Flow <100% causes the software to open the
occluder to the 100% flow position in 2 seconds or less.
If the occluder is calibrated and positioned at % Flow ≥ 100%, then an

OPEN command causes the software to open to Position 3. If the occluder
is already at or above Position 3, no movement will occur.
CLOSE
A CLOSE operation causes the software to step the occluder closed until
the feedback from the position pot indicates that the occluder head has not
closed further over the last 300 steps. This is done in 3 seconds or less.
The occluder notes the zero reference calibration point.
Page 369
Occluder System
GO TO % FLOW
A GO TO % FLOW operation causes the software to position the occluder
directly at the desired % Flow position as referenced from the calibration
point. If the % Flow is already at the desired flow when a GO TO % FLOW
command is received, no action is taken. Note that GOTO FLOW of 0%
results in a re-calibration.
Operation of Uncalibrated Occluder
OPEN
An OPEN command causes the software to open the occluder to the next
defined position. If the occluder is already at the last position (Position 5),
no movement will occur.
CLOSE
A CLOSE command causes the software to close the occluder until the
feedback from the position pot indicates that the occluder head has not
closed further over the last 300 steps. This is done in 6 seconds or less.
The occluder then notes the zero reference calibration point and changes
the occluder status to calibrated.
GO TO % FLOW
The software does not move an uncalibrated occluder in response to a GO
TO % FLOW command.
Status Reporting
The software places the following occluder status information on the system Bus at
a rate of 2 Hz:
• Occluder head connection status
• Calibration
• % Flow
• Occlusion value
• Linear position pot value
• Position valid
• Fully open/closed
• Stalled status
Occluder Self-test
When the user connects to AC power and powers on the system, the occluder
module LED will cycle green, yellow, red, then will remain solid yellow in Offline
Page 370
Occluder System
User Calibration
The user calibrates the occluder in the Perfusion screen by pressing the icon to
activate the occluder slider, then pressing the Open button to back off the plunger in
the occluder head, unlatching and opening the occluder cover, inserting tubing in
the channel, closing the cover and latch, and pressing the Close button on the
Perfusion screen. Then the user presses the CAL button on the Perfusion screen.
When calibrated, the occluder icon displays 0% Q, and the control slider changes to
the run slider.

Occluder Head - P/N 806455, see page 691.
Parts Occluder Head - P/N 806455, see page 695.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on the occluder, log in to Service. From the Service
and Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, and press More Info.
The More Info screen displays information about Self Test Status, V5 Voltage, V5
Current, Vmot Voltage, Vmot Current, and Temperature.
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Page 371
Occluder System
Diagnostic Theory
1. The occluder module reports its overall health and status using a
three-color-capable LED on the module.
2. The Perfusion screen may be used to assess if the system can put an
occluder module online and whether or not it can be controlled via the
CCM. The Perfusion screen will report a failed occluder module if the

mapped. The LED on the module will remain yellow, until it is used
within a Perfusion screen. The LED on the module will blink green
when it is selected from within the Configuration area.
Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs for the occluder system.
Page 372
Occluder System
Troubleshooting–Occluder System
Troubleshooting Table–Occluder System

Note: If the occluder icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading
Department.
Occluder Problem Check Action

Keyword
Can not Can not calibrate. Replace occluder head if it is very hot
occluder head for
calibrate and/or if plunger does not move out
overheating and/or no
to full closed position.
plunger movement,
Replace module if LED does not stay

module LED. green during and/or after calibration.
Can not map Cannot select and Replace occluder module if LED
occluder module by
map occluder remains and/or cycles back to yellow.
plugging it into
module from
another NIC
Configuration
connector,
area.
software safety Occluder can only be linked to

linkage. primary pump.
LED Red LED remains red Replace occluder module.

after power-on
into another NIC
self-test.
connector.
Page 373
Occluder System
Keyword
LED Yellow LED remains Disconnect/reconnect module.
module LED
yellow after power- Replace occluder module if LED
sequence,
on self-test and power-on self-test sequence is
Perfusion screen wrong.
indicates missing
module. Disconnect/reconnect module in a
module/system Base
different Base connector. Replace
connection
system configuration, Check system monitoring area on the

Perfusion screen and/or the Service
screen. Replace occluder module if it
is not recognized by the system.
module/system Use the Configuration area on the

Perfusion screen CCM to verify that the module is/can
mapping. be mapped to a Perfusion screen.
Replace module if it can not be
mapped.
No response Occluder does not Only calibrated occluder will respond

calibration status,
respond to trigger. to a trigger.
Perfusion screen for Replace module if linkage, mapping,

correct response and response are configured
configuration, correctly.
Configuration area for

linkage and correct
mapping.
Page 374
Occluder System
Keyword
Returns to Returns to Replace occluder head if plunger
occluder head
uncalibrated uncalibrated state. does not move out to full closed
operation,
position.
occluder head cable Replace occluder head and/or

connector and module.
module,
occluder module by Replace occluder module if LED

plugging it into cycles back to yellow.
another NIC
connector.
Service Service Occluder Replace occluder head.

occluder head to
Occluder message
module connection.
displayed on CCM.
Replace module.
Page 375
Occluder System
Page 376
CDI™ 100 System and CDI™ 101 Serial Communication

P/N 802558 Interface Module for CDI™ 100 and CDI™ 101
P/N 804981 Cable Module to CDI™ 100 and also for the CDI™ 101 (included with purchase of
P/N 802558)
Male to Male DB-9 adaptor (for CDI™ 101 RS-232 serial port)
P/N 7202 CDI™ 101 Flash Card
Overview
The CDI™ 100 interface module interfaces with the CDI™ 101 Hematocrit/Oxygen
Saturation Monitoring system and the older CDI™ Extracorporeal
Hematocrit/Oxygen Saturation Monitoring System 100 for the Terumo® Advanced
Perfusion System 1.
The CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 is a blood gas monitor which outputs hematocrit,
hemoglobin, and oxygen saturation values. The CDI™ 100 module collects data
continuously from the CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 monitor and displays it on the central
control monitor (CCM).
Performance
Voltage
5 VDC (± 5%)
Power consumption
1.5 W @ Vmot
2W@5V
Page 377
Operation
Storage
Safety Aspects
Electrical Isolation
The CDI™ 100 module provides a minimum of 1500 V of electrical
isolation between the System 1 and the CDI™ 100.
Bandwidth
Each module is designed to use less than 1% of the total system Bus
bandwidth.
Fault Tolerance
Startup
The module initiates a self-test.
Fail Safe
Module Retention
mechanical rail.
Modular Design
Drip Proof
The CDI™ 100 module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Corrosion
The CDI™ 100 module is corrosion resistant.
Page 378
System Function
Module
The CDI™ 100 module serves as the interface between external devices
and the system. It contains device specific software which enables the
transfer of data per the device protocol.
Module Cable
The CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 connects to the CDI™ 100 module via a serial
cable (P/N 804981) with appropriate connectors and wiring configurations
to enable proper data transfer.
Alerts/Alarms
The CDI™ 100 module does not generate Alert or Alarm conditions.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the CDI™ 100 module provides status indications to
the user.
External
The CDI™ 100 module housing is comprised of a left and right housing made of
molded plastic and sealed together with screws. The inside of the housing has EMC
coating. The housing edges provide a tight fit to prevent the leaking of electronic
noise. An appropriate icon and the multicolor LED are located on the side opposite
the Base connector. The CDI™ 100 module has a single serial connection point that
supports both EIA-232 and EIA-485 signals.
Internal
The housing encloses a generic microprocessor board coupled to a data transfer
The module has two connectors. The first is a 15-pin D-sub connector plug used to
plug the module into the Base. The second is a 9-pin D-sub connector socket that
accepts the cable from the connected serial device. This connector header passes
through a metal bulkhead that provides good grounding with the housing to keep
electronic noise emissions low. The metal bulkhead is captured along with an EMC
gasket by a slotted mechanism designed into the housing.
Page 379
Connection to System
The module plugs into any of the eighteen Base connectors with a 15-pin male D-
sub connector. The DB-9 connector accepts the serial cable connector from the
connected device. This cable , P/N 804981, can be routed to optimize the cable
length and any excess cable can be arranged and secured in the cable
management tray. Module covers and a cable cover provide protection for the
modules and cables from fluid spills.
protection for the module and cable from fluid spills. During use, the module label
and the multicolor LED, located on the side opposite the Base connector, can be
viewed through the Base cover window.
Height 0.5 in (12,7 mm)
Width 4.5 in (114,3 mm)
Depth 2.6 in (66,0 mm)
Weight 4.6 oz (130,4 g)
Power Supply
The CDI™ 100 module receives Vmot (24 VDC) and 5 VDC power from the system.
12 VDC is generated by the CDI™ 100 module board for communications.
Circuit Protection
The CDI™ 100 module software measures the Vmot current during operation.
Currents in excess of 0.5 A cause the module to report the status and disable the
Vmot supply via the Node Interface Controller (NIC).
Interface
The CDI™ 100 module has one tricolor LED for displaying status information.
Controls
The CDI™ 100 module has no controls.
Page 380
System Displays
Data for the CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 monitor can be configured to be

displayed on the CCM. The data values are:
Parameter Range
Hematocrit 15% to 45%
Hemoglobin 5 g/dl to 15 g/dl
Oxygen Saturation 60% to 99%
Local Display
Interactive Devices
Aside from the CDI™ 101 and the CDI™ 100, the CDI™ 100 module does not
interface electronically with any other device.
Hardware Interface
The CDI™ 100 module receives 5 VDC and Vmot (24 VDC) from the
system Base. The CDI™ 100 module board outputs a 12 V supply for the
communications electronics.
Software Interface
The CDI™ 100 module supports EIA-232 signals and EIA-485 signals.
Status Conditions
• Data Missing
Page 381
System Messages
Status Messages

CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 No CDI™ 100/101 Data Check CDI™ 101 or CDI™
disconnected or not all 100 settings and cable
data is being detected. connections. See next
page. If message still
appears, contact Terumo
Service.
Theory of Operation
System to Module
The CDI™ 100 module contains two circuit boards: a generic board,
common to all modules, and the CDI™ 100 application board. The CDI™
100 module receives +5 VDC and 24 VDC (Vmot) power from the system
Base via a 15-pin D-sub connector. The connector is rated for a minimum
of 1000 insertions.
Module to System
CDI™ 100 application board to the generic board.
Module to Device
The CDI™ 100 application board generates 12 V (± 10%) to power the

communications electronics. A DB-9 connector accepts a serial cable. The
opposite end connector is determined by the device type.
Software Functions
12 V Supply Monitoring
The CDI™ 100 module software monitors the +12 V supply from the
CDI™ 100 application board to check for overrange or underrange
conditions. A 12 V out of range condition is reported via the system Bus.
Page 382
Vmot Monitoring
The CDI™ 100 module software measures the Vmot current during
operation. Currents in excess of 0.5 A cause the module to report the
status, and disable the Vmot supply via the Node Interface Controller
(NIC).
Data Protocol for CDI™ 100

EIA-232 channel with fixed parameters:
• 4800 baud
• no parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 start bit
• 1 stop bit
Data Capture for CDI™ 100

Available intervals include 0, 30, 60, and 120 seconds and at user request.
The output interval cannot be set to 0. If set to 0, the CCM will not display
the CDI™ 100 data (no communication).
Data Values
The following parameters are captured from the CDI™ 100 data packet:
• Hematocrit 15 % to 45%
• Hemoglobin 5 g/dL to 15g/dL
• O2 Saturation 60% to 99%
No Data
The message, No status, is reported to the CCM after not receiving a data
packet for 180 seconds.
Page 383
CDI™ 101 Settings for Serial Communication
Note: The CDI™ 101 needs the flash card (P/N 7202) to operate.
Use tab #6 in the setup screen on the CDI™ 101 to input/verify settings.
Output Type S100
Data Bits 8 data bits / 1 stop bit
Parity none
Baud Rate 4800
Output Interval 10 seconds
Data Capture for the CDI™ 101

The output interval can not be 0, 200, or 500.
Module Self-test
mode until the system allows the module to connect to the network. Once connected
and in Online mode, the LED will display constant green. If the power-on self-test
fails, a message is displayed at the top of the CCM.
Calibration
The CDI™ 100 module does not require calibration, zeroing, adjustment or resistor
trimming for proper operation. No Field Service calibration or configuration is
required.

Cable Assembly CDI™ 100/CDI™ 500 - P/N 804981, see page 583.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on the CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100, log in to Service. From
the Service and Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, note that
the correct module is responding, and press More Info. The More Info screen
displays information about Self Test Status, V5 Voltage, V5 Current, Vmot Voltage,
Vmot Current, and Temperature.
Page 384
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Diagnostic Theory
1. The CDI™ 100 module reports its overall health and status using a
CDI™ 100 module online and whether or not it can be controlled via

Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs for the CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100.
Page 385
Troubleshooting–CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100
Troubleshooting Table–CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100

Note: If a CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is
Service Department.
CDI™ 100 Problem Check Action

Keyword
LED Red Module LED remains Disconnect/reconnect module from
module by plugging
red after self-test. device.
it into another NIC
connector. Replace module.
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Check system monitoring area on

System
after power-on self- the Perfusion screen and/or the
test and Perfusion configuration, Service screen. Replace module if
screen indicates it is not recognized by the system.
missing module.
module LED Replace module if LED power-on
sequence, self-test sequence is wrong.
module/system Disconnect/connect module in a

No Data No data on CCM. Use CDI™ 100 module to transfer

module type is for
data between the device and
CDI™ 100 and not
System 1.
for CDI™ 500,
cable and connector Replace damaged cable and/or

to connected device correct cable.
and that it has the
proper EIA-232 pin-
out,
data output interval Wait out the interval for data to

selection on CDI™ appear.
device.
Page 386
CDI™ 500 Serial Communication

P/N 803479 Interface Module for CDI™ 500 (includes P/N 804981 Cable Module to CDI™ 500)
Overview
The CDI™ 500 interface module interfaces with the CDI™ Blood Parameter
Monitoring System 500 for the Terumo® Advanced Perfusion System 1.
The CDI™ 500 interface module has the following functions:
• Communicate arterial pump flow data to the CDI™ 500.
• Receive blood parameter data from the CDI™ 500.
• Send/receive messages to/from the Central Control Monitor (CCM) via the
system Bus.
• Set the CDI™ 500 Time of Day
• Set the CDI™ 500 Language
Performance
Voltage
5 VDC (± 5%)
Power consumption
1.5 W @ Vmot
2W@5V
Page 387
Operation
Storage
Safety Aspects
The CDI™ 500 module provides a minimum of 1500 V of electrical
isolation between the System 1 and the CDI™ 500.
Fault Tolerance
Startup
Fail Safe
Module Retention
mechanical rail.
Modular Design
Drip Proof
The CDI™ 500 module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Corrosion
The CDI™ 500 module is corrosion resistant.
System Function
Module
The CDI™ 500 module serves as the interface between external devices
Page 388
Module Cable
The CDI™ 500 connects to the CDI™ 500 module via a serial cable with
appropriate connectors and wiring configurations to enable proper data
transfer.
Alerts/Alarms
The CDI™ 500 module does not generate Alert or Alarm conditions.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the CDI™ 500 module provides status indications to
the user.
External
The CDI™ 500 module housing is comprised of a left and right housing made of
molded plastic and sealed together with screws. The inside of the housing has EMC
noise. An appropriate icon label and the multicolor LED are located on the side
opposite the Base connector. The CDI™ 500 module has a single serial connection
point that supports both EIA-232 and EIA-485 signals.
Internal
The housing encloses a generic microprocessor board coupled to a data transfer
Page 389
The module plugs into any of the eighteen Base connectors with a 15-pin male D-
sub connector. The DB-9 connector accepts the serial cable connector from the
connected device. This cable can be routed to optimize the cable length and any
excess cable can be arranged and secured in the cable management tray. Module
covers and a cable cover provide protection for the modules and cables from fluid
spills.
Width 4.5 in (114,3 mm)
Weight 4.6 oz (130,4 g)
Power Supply
The CDI™ 500 module receives Vmot (24 VDC) and 5 VDC power from the system.
12 VDC is generated by the CDI™ 500 module board for communications.
Circuit Protection
The CDI™ 500 module software measures the Vmot current during operation.
Interface
The CDI™ 500 module has one tricolor LED for displaying status information.
Controls
The CDI™ 500 module has no controls.
Page 390
System Displays
Data for the CDI™ 500 monitor can be configured to be displayed on the
CCM. CDI™ 500 parameters are:
Parameter Range
Arterial and Venous PO2 10 mmHg to 500 mmHg
Arterial and Venous PCO2 10 mmHg to 80 mmHg
Arterial and Venous pH 6.8 to 8.0
Arterial and Venous Temperature 10°C to 45°C
Arterial and Venous Oxygen 60% to 100%

Saturation (SO2)
Potassium Concentration (K+) 1.0 to 8.0 mmol/l
Arterial Bicarbonate (HCO3) 0 to 50 meq/l
Arterial Base Excess (BE) -25 to 25 meq/l

Venous Hemoglobin (Hb) 5 to 15 g/dl
Venous Hematocrit (Hct) 15% to 45%
O2 Consumption (VO2) 10 ml/min to 400 ml/min
Local Display
Interactive Devices
Aside from the CDI™ Blood Parameter Monitoring System 500, the CDI™ 500
module does not interface electronically with any other device.
Hardware Interface
The CDI™ 500 module receives 5 VDC and Vmot (24 VDC) from the
system Base. The CDI™ 500 module board outputs a 12 V supply for the
communications electronics.
Page 391
Software Interface
The CDI™ 500 module supports EIA-232 signals and EIA-485 signals.
Status Conditions
• Data Missing
System Messages
Status Messages

CDI™ 500 disconnected No CDI™ 500 Data Check CDI™ 500
or not all data is being software. The CDI™ 500
detected. needs version 1.65 for it
to communicate with the
System 1.
CDI™ 500 disconnected No CDI™ 500 Data Check CDI™ 500
or not all data is being settings and cable
detected. connections. On setup
screen, #5 Calculations,
for QSource, select
PUMP, and for Pump
Type, select CDI Pump
Interface. If message still
appears, contact Terumo
Service.
Theory of Operation
System to Module
The CDI™ 500 module contains two circuit boards: a generic board,
common to all modules, and the CDI™ 500 application board. The CDI™
500 module receives +5 VDC and 24 VDC (Vmot) power from the system
Base via a 15-pin D-sub connector. The connector is rated for a minimum
of 1000 insertions.
Page 392
Module to System
CDI™ 500 module board to the generic board.
Module to Device
The CDI™ 500 application board generates 12 V (± 10%) to power the

communications electronics. A DB-9 connector accepts a serial cable.
The opposite end connector is determined by the device type.
Software Functions
The CDI™ 500 module software monitors the +12 V supply from the
CDI™ 500 application board to check for overrange or underrange
Vmot Monitoring
The CDI™ 500 module software measures the Vmot current during
(NIC).
Device Application
The CDI™ 500 module has the application-specific software to interface
with the CDI™ 500.
CDI™ 500 Version
Software version 1.65 or later.
Data Protocol
EIA-232 channel with fixed parameters:
• 19200 baud
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
• no parity
Flow Source
Module accepts a CCM message listing a source for flow information.
Flow Reporting
When a flow source is identified, the CDI™ 500 module provides the
absolute value for the flow value to the CDI™ 500.
Page 393
Data Capture
All valid blood gas data from the CDI™ 500 are captured and
communicated to the CCM including:
• Arterial and Venous PO2
• Arterial and Venous PCO2
• Arterial and Venous pH
• Arterial and Venous Temperature
• Arterial and Venous Oxygen Saturation (SO2)
• Potassium Concentration (K+)
• Arterial and Venous Bicarbonate (HCO3)
• Arterial and Venous Base Excess (BE)
• Hemoglobin (Hb)
• Hematocrit (Hct)
• O2 Consumption (VO2) when flow information is available
Status Reporting
The message, Communication disabled, is reported if the CDI™ 500
monitor stops transmitting data.
Analyte Date
The module sends information with the analyte data indicating whether it
is for actual temperature or normalized to 37°C.
Module Self-test
Calibration
The CDI™ 500 module does not require calibration for proper operation. No Field
Service calibration or configuration is required.
Page 394
Cable Assembly CDI™ 100/CDI™ 500 - P/N 804981, see page 583.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on the CDI™ 500, log in to Service. From the Service
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Diagnostic Theory
1. The CDI™ 500 module reports its overall health and status using a
CDI™ 500 module online and whether or not it can be controlled via
the CCM. The Perfusion screen will report a failed module if the

and mapped. The LED on the module will remain yellow until it is
used by a Perfusion screen. The LED on the module will blink green
when it is selected from within the Configuration screen.
Page 395
Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs for the CDI™ 500.
Troubleshooting–CDI™ 500
Troubleshooting Table–CDI™ 500

Note: CDI™ 500 software needs to be version 1.65 or greater.
Note: On CDI™ 500 Setup screen: under #5 Calculations, for QSource, select PUMP,
and for Pump Type, select CDI Pump Interface.
Note: If a CDI™ 500 icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading
Department.

Keyword
LED Red Module LED remains
red after self-test. Replace module.
into another NIC
connector.
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Check system monitoring area

system configuration,
after power-on self- on the Perfusion screen and/or
test and Perfusion the Service screen. Replace
screen indicates module if it is not recognized by
missing module. the system.
module LED
Replace module if LED power-
sequence,
on self-test sequence is wrong.
Disconnect/connect module in
module/system Base a different Base connector.
connection. Replace module if there is no
improvement.
Page 396
Keyword
No Data No data on CCM.
CDI™ 500 has not
been changed from
Operate Mode,
module type is for Use CDI™ 500 module to

CDI™ 500 and not for transfer data between the
CDI™ 100, CDI™ 500 monitor and
System 1.
cable and connector to

connected device,
Replace damaged cable and/or
correct cable.
connection to the
correct CDI™ 500
port, Chose pump interface port for
CDI™ 500.
data output interval

selection on CDI™ Wait out the interval for data to
device, appear.
that CDI™ 500 is not

showing trending
Turn CDI™ 500 monitor off and
graphs.
back on again.
No Flow Data No flow data showing See Red and Yellow LED
LED on module,
on CDI™ 500 monitor troubleshooting cases.
display.
cable, connector and See No Data on the CCM

connection to CDI™ troubleshooting case.
500 monitor.
Page 397
Page 398

P/N 801188 Electronic Gas System
P/N 804097 Gas System Module Assembly (PC and generic boards)
P/N 801074 Electronic Gas System Oxygen Sensor Cartridge (protect from freezing)
P/N 132935 Electronic Gas System Air Inlet Filter Assembly
P/N 132257 Air Inlet Filter Component
P/N 811567 Water Trap Retaining Spring
P/N 801079 Pressure Sensor
P/N 802098 Sechrist Blender
P/N 811104 Gas Flowmeter, Mass
P/N 811450 Front Access Panel
P/N 811063 Front Panel Cover Plate
P/N 802487 Back Panel Cover Plate
Overview
The electronic gas system for the Terumo® Advanced Perfusion System 1 provides
control and monitoring of the flow rate and oxygen content of the gas input to the
oxygenator in the perfusion circuit.
Electronic Gas System Requirements
Gas Supplies, Inlet medical grade gases
Compressed air
95/5 (%oxygen / %CO2)
100% oxygen
Inlet Pressure
30 psi to 70 psi (with a maximum differential pressure of 18 psi)
Bursting Limits
150 psi on the pressurized side of the system
Bleed rate of 10 cc/min or less at pressures up to 70 psi maximum
Page 399
Electronic Gas System Performance
FiO2 Range (Air)
0.21 (+0.01/-0) to 1.00 (+0/-0.03)
FiO2 Range (95/5)
0.95 (+0.01/-0) to 1.00 (+0/-0.01)
FiCO2 Range (95/5)
0.000 to 0.050
Total Flow Range
0 L/min to 15 L/min with inlet pressures of 30 psi to 70 psi
0 L/min to 10 L/min total display range
Flow Display Resolution
0.01 L/min between 0.2 L/min and 10.0 L/min
Flow Rate Accuracy Measured at 100% O2 with Zero Back Pressure
± 0.1 L/min for 0.2 L/min to 2.0 L/min
Flow Change Response
90% of the target value within 5 seconds
Display Change Response
90% of target value displayed in 5 seconds after a change to the
flow setting
%O2 Range
21% to 100%
%O2 Accuracy
± 3% of O2 at calibration flow and pressure
Pressure effect on accuracy: The O2 sensor input is directly
proportional to pressure. The outlet pressure of the electronic gas
system varies with atmospheric pressure, flow rate, and circuit
restriction. For example, if the outlet pressure is 2% higher than
the outlet pressure at calibration, then the measured O2
concentration will be 2% higher than actual.
Page 400
%O2 Displayed Value vs Displayed Setpoint
± 7% at calibration flow and pressure

The above accuracy tolerance is a combination of O2 sensor
accuracy, blender linearity, and blender position control accuracy.
O2 Change Response
The oxygen analyzer measured value achieves >90% of a new
FiO2 value in <30 seconds.
FiO2 Change Response
Target FiO2 value displays immediately after FiO2 step change.
Operation
Storage
Ventilated area, -30°C to 54°C (-22°F to 129°F ), less than 95%

Fault Tolerance
Startup
The gas module initiates a self-test.
Fail Safe
Fail Usable
In case of an electronic gas system electronic failure, the FiO2 and gas
flow settings will remain as set and will be manually controllable.
Low Pressure Alarm
An alarm message is reported to the system Bus if the pressure of either
source gas is less than 30 psi or if the lower gas pressure is more than
18 psi below the higher pressure gas.
High Pressure Alarm
An alarm message is reported to the system Bus if the pressure of either
source gas is more than 70 psi.
Low FiO2 Alarm
An alarm message is reported to the system Bus if the FiO2 of the
blended gas output is below the user-set alarm set point and the alarm is
enabled.
Page 401
External Flowmeter
A rotometer flowmeter connected externally to the electronic gas module
in the output gas flow stream measures the flow in the absence of the
CCM.
Drip Proof
The electronic gas system is drip proof per IEC 60529.
The electronic gas system is corrosion resistant.
System Function
Base Mounting
The electronic gas system integrates into the system Base and connects
to the system Bus via an internal Base connector.
Gas Connections
Unique gas inlet connections, labeled O2 and AIR, accept Air and O2
source gases. An outlet connection labeled GAS provides mixed gas for
use with the oxygenator in the perfusion circuit. The FiO2 and total flow
are displayed on the CCM.
O2 Analyzer
An integrated O2 analyzer measures the oxygen content of the blended
gas. To ensure specified performance, the O2 analyzer requires
calibration before use.
Page 402
Controls
The module can be controlled using the CCM. FiO2 and total flow control
knobs located on the Base front panel can be used to control the module
manually.
Displays
FiO2, %02, and Total Flow are displayed on the CCM.
Alarms
The module reports an alarm condition to the system Bus in the event of:
• Low FiO2 (user selected)
• Low/High O2 pressure
• Low/High Air or 95/5 pressure
Local Controls
Two knobs on the system Base front panel allow the user to control the
Total Flow and FiO2.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the module provides status indications to the user.
Housing and External Description
The external packaging for the module consists of a left and right housing. The left
housing is the module cover. It is made of alodined aluminum for EMC design. The
right housing is made of zinc-plated steel. This sheet metal component is bent to
provide structure for the front dress panel, right side, and the back of the module.
The user controls and one tri-colored LED are mounted to the front. Flow and
blending dial indicator labels are on the dress panel. By design, the dress panel
shows through an opening in the Base front panel. Gas connection labels are on
the backside panel. The gas inlets and outlets are labeled for international use. The
back of the gas module is designed to match up with the rear panel of the Base,
while gas connections, oxygen bleed port, and the inlet gas filter connector extend
through the panel. A gasket seals the module against the Base. Three oblong holes
ventilate the system to outside air to prevent oxygen buildup in the module.
Page 403
Two areas divided by an aluminum casting make up the inside of the module. The
back area contains the flowmeter, blender unit, oxygen sensor, and tubing to route
the gases. Gas supply connector bulkheads and the flowmeter are mounted to the
sheet metal back plate. The front area contains the mechanical controls, stepper
motors, gearing, and the application board and generic board assembly, all
mounted to the casting. Cables for the flowmeter, oxygen analyzer, and pressure
sensors pass between the areas through a small opening. Drive shafts pass
through the casting and connect to the flow valve and the blender. The casting
provides a rigid structure to maintain alignment of the controls, motor, and the drive
shafts with the flow valve and the blending valve.
Base Connection and Interface
The gas module slides into a dedicated location on the Base. The gas supply
connections and O2 safety vent pass through the back of the Base. One fastener
secures the module to the Base on the front side. The system Bus cable connects
to the module and the backside of the NIC board. The local controls and the LED
on the front of the module pass through an opening in the front of the Base. The
water trap connects to the gas supply inlet on the back of the module.
Connection Description
The module to System 1 connection is inside the Base. The module cable assembly
is a shielded cable with a 15-pin D-sub connector plug on each end. Both
connectors have metal housings over the connectors to control electronic noise.
One end of the cable connects to the module, the other end to the NIC board
connection. One thumbscrew fastener on each end retains the cable.
Width 3.9 in (99,1 mm)
Width with mounting tab 4.9 in (124,5 mm)
Depth with fixtures 19.1 in (485,1 mm)
Depth without fixtures 14.5 in (368,3 mm)
Weight 15 lbs (6,8 Kg)
The module circuitry consists of a generic board common to all modules, and the
gas module application board. The generic board receives 5 VDC and Vmot
(24 VDC) from the system Bus drawing no more than 500 mA @ 5 VDC and 2 A
@ Vmot. The application board provides outputs to drive two bipolar stepper
motors using Vmot at up to 1.0 A. These motors enable the remote adjustment of
FiO2 and Total Flow. The application board also accepts input from two encoders,
one connected to the blender, and the other connected to the flow valve.
Page 404
Interface
General Description
The FiO2 knob has a reference mark, and tic marks on the front panel indicate
0.1 increments in FiO2 ± 10% when using air as the blending gas.
The Total Flow knob has an eyebrow graphic on the front panel indicating the
direction to turn the knob to increase or decrease flow. Gradations provide the user
with an indication of approximate flow.
A multicolor LED on the module provides status indications to the user.
Controls
The two knobs located on the front panel enable manual control of FiO2 and
Total Flow. These can also be controlled by using the corresponding slide
bars on the CCM.
System Displays
The FiO2 value is displayed on the FiO2 slide bar. The %O2 value is
displayed on the FiO2 slide bar, as well as on the %O2 icon on the CCM.
The Total Flow value is displayed on the Total Flow slide bar, as well as on
the Total Flow icon on the CCM.
In case of a Low FiO2 Alarm, the system sounds a dual-tone audible alarm,
the %O2 icon flashes red, the module LED flashes red, and a message is
displayed in the CCM message area.
Local Display
A tricolor LED provides a local interface on the module, visible on the Base
front panel, gas control area. The LED will display green, red, or yellow
indications as follows:
Interactive Devices
The module supplies mixed gas to any oxygenator that can be used during
cardiopulmonary bypass in a perfusion circuit. The module will not interface
electronically with any other devices.
Page 405
Status Messages
• O2 pressure
• Blending gas pressure
• Flow
• FiO2
• FiCO2
• Flow set point
• Gas mixture set point
• Flow sensor calibration status
• O2 sensor calibration status
• O2 sensor accumulated %O2 hours
• FiO2 alarm set point
• FiO2 alarm enabled or not
Error Messages
• 12 V source out of range
• O2 Pressure out of range
• Blending gas pressure out of range
• Flow sensor out of range at calibration
• O2 sensor out of range at calibration
• Flow control fault
• Blender control fault
• Flow mechanical fault
• Blender mechanical fault
Hardware Interface
The module receives +5 VDC and +24 VDC (Vmot) from the Base. Circuitry on
the gas application board converts Vmot to +12 VDC used for the pressure
sensors and a flow transducer.
Mechanical Interface
Air or 95/5 blending gas, O2 and gas output connectors are located on the rear
of the Base. The blending gas supply line incorporates an externally mounted
water trap/filter assembly.
Page 406
Software Interface
The gas module software accepts calibration and setting adjustment commands
from the system via the system Bus. The software provides total gas flow, FiO2
setpoint, measured %O2, and status information to the system via the system
Bus. The module does not have a software interface with any additional devices.
The electronic gas system is intended to supply blended gas to an oxygenator in
a perfusion circuit. It has no other interfaces.
System Messages
Alarm Messages

95/5 source pressure HIGH 95/5 SUPPLY Check 95/5 supply
>70 psi. PRESSURE pressure. Switch source if
necessary.
Air source pressure HIGH AIR SUPPLY Check air supply pressure.
>70 psi. PRESSURE Switch source if necessary.
O2 source pressure HIGH OXYGEN SUPPLY Check O2 supply pressure.

>70 psi. PRESSURE Switch source if necessary.
95/5 source pressure LOW 95/5 SUPPLY Check 95/5 hose

<30 psi or more than 18 psi PRESSURE connections. Check 95/5
below the O2 pressure. supply. Switch source if
necessary.
Air source pressure LOW AIR SUPPLY Check air hose

<30 psi or more than 18 psi PRESSURE connections. Check air
below the O2 pressure. supply. Switch source if
necessary.
FiO2 has dropped below LOW FiO2 Increase FiO2 setting to

minimum limit. above minimum limit to
clear alarm.
O2 source pressure LOW OXYGEN SUPPLY Check O2 hose
<30 psi or more than 18 psi PRESSURE connections. Check O2
below the air pressure. supply. Switch source if
necessary.
Page 407
Alert Messages

Internal malfunction SERVICE GAS SYSTEM If not on bypass, calibrate
detected. O2 analyzer, then cycle
power to reset gas system.
or if on bypass, use standby
electronic gas system. Do
not use gas system until it
has been serviced by
Terumo Cardiovascular
Systems Service.
Error Messages

User has turned FiO2 or O2 Analyzer Calibration Restart O2 analyzer
gas flow knob during Failed calibration.
calibration.
Electronic gas system is Gas System: Knob Adjust If not on bypass, calibrate
not meeting demand and Only O2 analyzer. If message
has disabled control from does not clear, or if on
the CCM. bypass, adjust the FiO2 and
gas flow using the knobs
located on the front of the
system. If the knobs cannot
be turned, use a standby
gas blender. Do not use
gas system until it has been
serviced by Terumo
Service. See the Aux tab,
Messages subtab for any
additional error or status
messages.
Page 408
Status Messages

System just powered up Calibrate O2 Analyzer Calibrate O2 analyzer or
and is expecting a use backup analyzer until
calibration, or the %O2 the O2 analyzer can be
and the FiO2 readings do calibrated.
not agree.
O2 analyzer calibration in Calibrating O2 Analyzer Message clears when

progress. calibration is complete.
O2 analyzer calibration Cannot Calibrate O2 Check status code.
failed. Analyzer XX (may only
appear in Aux tab) Retry calibration. If
calibration does not pass,
12 User pressed cancel use backup until unit can be
button. serviced.
13 Flow or FiO2 knob
turned during
calibration
16 O2 sensor is expired.
17, 19 Blender mechanical
problem
18 Flow mechanical
problem
20, 21, 22 Flowmeter fault
23 O2 sensor fault
Gas flow is 0 L/min. Gas Flow: Off Turn gas flow to >0 L/min to
clear message.
Warm up in progress. Gas System Warming Up Message clears when

warm-up is complete.
O2 analyzer calibration O2 Analyzer Calibration Message displays for

finished. Complete 10 seconds.
O2 sensor exposure limit Service O2 Sensor Backup analyzer should be

reached. used until O2 sensor is
replaced by Terumo
Service.
Page 409
Theory of Operation
Gas Flow Diagram
Adjust FiO2/Flow
The FiO2 blend and total flow can be adjusted using either the corresponding
adjustment sliders on the CCM or by manually turning the front panel knobs.
Low FiO2
If the FiO2 falls below the user selected alarm level, the module reports a low FiO2
alarm to the system. The system sounds an audible dual-tone alarm, the FiO2 icon
flashes red, the module LED flashes red and a message appears in the CCM
message area.
Loss of Input Gas
If either the Air or O2 gas source is lost, the module reports an alarm condition to
the system. The system sounds an audible dual-tone alarm, the corresponding gas
icon flashes red, the module LED flashes red and a message appears on the CCM
message area.
Reset
Alarms, both low FiO2 and high/low pressures, automatically clear once the
condition is no longer present.
Page 410
Electronics
The electronic gas system provides blended gas to an oxygenator in a perfusion
circuit. The module installs in the system Base and connects to the system Bus via
an internal 15-pin D-sub connector. The module receives Vmot (24 VDC) and a 5 V
supply via the system Bus. An on-board 12 V supply provides power to the module
electronics.
The application board provides outputs to drive two bipolar stepper motors using
Vmot at up to 1.0 A while accepting input from two corresponding quadrature output
incremental encoders. The stepper motor/encoders are connected to the flow valve
and gas blender.
The application board accepts an analog input from two amplified pressure
transducers for the O2 and blended gas sources. The pressure transducers measure
over the range of 0 psi to 100 psi with an accuracy of 1%. The total system pressure
error is less than 3%.
The application board accepts an analog input from a flow sensor, which measures
over the range of 0 L/min to 10 L/min with an accuracy of 1%. The total system flow
error is less than 3%, with zero back pressure and 100% O2.
Mechanical
The electronic gas system is an accessory design to be installed in the chassis of the
System 1. It can be factory installed during the initial build of the perfusion system or
field installed at a later date.
The user can operate the module via the CCM or manually using the control knobs
on the front panel of the chassis. These knobs allow the module to be fully functional
in case of loss of the CCM.
Knob functionality is accomplished using small motors with shafts that run through
the motors. A knob is attached to one end of the shaft, with the other end of the
motor shaft coupled to the blender or the flow valve. Coupling is achieved using three
separate pieces. A hub with pins is attached to the motor shaft and also to the
blender and flow valve. A slide with machined grooves then couples the hubs using
the corresponding pins. These couplers are designed to allow for a small amount of
misalignment and for the axial travel the blender and flowmeter shafts produce.
The hub that is attached to the blender has a small pin on the backside that
corresponds with two small pins built into the blender. The combination of these three
small pins limit the blender knob travel to 270 degrees.
The hub on the motor shaft that drives the flow valve has a pin on the backside. This
pin is used in conjunction with a Geneva gear (the white snowflake shaped gear). As
the flow knob turns, so does the hub attached to that motor. This rotation causes the
hub pin to drive the Geneva gear as it drops into one of the seven slots on the
Geneva gear. The eighth position on the Geneva gear intentionally has no slot, and
acts as a mechanical stop. Once the gear rotates to where the pin hits the eighth
position, the knob is no longer able to rotate. Limiting the rotation of the knob is
essential as the flow valve is a needle valve that could be damaged or become stuck
if the knob were allowed to turn too far.
Page 411
Software
The electronic gas system is a module within the system that controls the mixture
and flow rate of oxygen and a blending gas. The user can make adjustments locally
using the knobs on the electronic gas system or remotely using the slide bars on the
CCM. The electronic gas system provides feedback control to maintain a gas flow set
point under varying input and output pressures.
Application-Specific Startup
The blender position is determined from the current position of the blender encoder.
Since this is an incremental encoder, the software will drive the motor to both ends of
travel to establish a reference between the encoder value and the blender position.
The O2 sensor has a warm-up time of 15 minutes before its output is stable. A timer
is used to keep track of the warm-up time to prevent calibration of the O2 sensor
before it is stable.
Diagnostic Task
Pressure Out of Range
The blender requires the gas pressures to be between 30 psi and 70 psi
with a maximum differential pressure of 18 psi for the blender to work
correctly. If either gas is out of the specified pressure range, an alarm is set
and auto adjustment of flow is disabled. Once both pressures are within
operating range, the alarm is cleared and auto flow adjustment is enabled.
FiO2 Alarm
If the measured O2 is less than the user specified alarm limit, an alarm is
activated. When the measured FiO2 is greater than the limit, the alarm is
cleared.
Electrical Power
If the current on Vmot current or the 12 V supply is greater than its specified
limit, the processor disables Vmot power via NIC communication. The
module will continue with Vmot disconnected until the system is shut off and
turned on again.
Mechanical and Control Faults
If a mechanical fault is detected in the motor output routine or a motor
control fault is determined in a motor adjustment routine, automatic control
is disabled and reported in QBUS status messages.
O2 Sensor and Blender Disagree
If the difference between the FiO2 set point and the measured O2
concentration is more than 10%, then a QBUS status message is set to
indicate this fault. Because of the slow response of the O2 sensor, the fault
condition must be valid for 1 minute before it is reported. This fault may
indicate that the O2 sensor should to be recalibrated or some other problem
with the blended gas output.
Page 412
O2 Sensor Expired
If the accumulated O2% hours have exceeded the specified maximum, a
service required alert is issued. The service required alert is cleared when
the O2 sensor is replaced and a command is sent to reset the O2 sensor
hours.
Data Ranges
Flow
The set point range for flow is 0 L/min to 10 L/min formatted as 0 to 1000.
Flow less than 0.2 L/min is reported as 0. Flow is not adjusted when the set
point and actual flow are both below 0.2 L/min.
FiO2, FiCO2
Using Air as the blending gas:
The FiO2 set point range is 0.210 to 1.000 formatted as 210 to 1000.
The measured O2 range is 0 to 100.0 formatted as 0 to 1000.
FiCO2 is set to zero and the invalid data bit is set.
Using 95/5 O2/CO2 as the blending gas:
The FiO2 set point range is 0.950 to 1.000 formatted as 950 to 1000.
The measured O2 range is 0 to 100.0 formatted as 0 to 1000.
The FiCO2 measured value range is 0 to 0.050 formatted as 0 to 50.
Pressure
The pressure transducers read 0 psi to 100 psi from 0.5 V to 4.5 V. The
ADC only reads up to 4.1 V so the readable pressure range is 0 to 90
formatted as 0 to 900.
Page 413
Status Reporting
The gas module reports the following status information on the QBUS at a rate of
2 Hz:
• O2 pressure
• Blending gas pressure
• Flow
• FiO2
• FiCO2 if 95/5 (%O2 / %CO2) is used as the blending gas
• Status of flow and O2 sensor calibration
• O2 sensor accumulated hours
• FiO2 alarm set point
• FiO2 alarm enabled or not
The electronic gas system reports the following status information on the QBUS at a
rate of 10 Hz:
• Flow set point
• Gas mixture set point
• Faults
Diagnostics
The following diagnostics and self-tests are performed or monitored by the electronic
gas module:
• O2 pressure in the range between 30 psi to 70 psi
• Blending gas pressure in the range between 30 psi to 70 psi
• Overcurrent if Vmot is greater than 3 A for 10 seconds
• 12 V supply within range of 12 ± 10%
• Current on 12 V no greater than 250 mA
• Total Flow control fault if the difference between the set point and the
measured flow is >0.5 L/min for >10 seconds
• FiO2 control fault if the difference between the FiO2 set point and the actual
FiO2 position is >5% of the set point range for >10 seconds
• Flow Mechanical Fault if the flow valve requires repeated adjustment in the
same direction for >60 seconds
• Motor Mechanical Fault if auto adjustments are unsuccessful after twenty
consecutive attempts
Page 414
Safety
System Response to Alarm Conditions
% O2 Icon Gas Module Message Audible Tone

Flashes red LED flashes red Message in the CCM Dual-tone alarm
message area
System Response to Alert Conditions

Gas Icon Gas Module Message Audible Tone
Flashes LED flashes yellow Message in the CCM Single-tone alert
yellow message area
Module Self-test
The LED on the gas system is visible with the cover installed. This LED will cycle
green, yellow, red, and then remain solid yellow until the system allows the module
to connect to the network. After the power-on self-test completes, the LED on the
front panel of the Base displays constant yellow, the stepper motors go through an
initialization procedure and return FiO2 and Total Flow knobs to their original
positions within 10 seconds of coming online, and the current total flow rate and
%O2 displays appear on the CCM.
User Calibration
After a 15-minute warm-up period, the electronic gas system calibration can be
initiated from the CCM. The module will then automatically perform a flow meter and
O2 sensor calibration. A pass or fail message will appear on the CCM indicating the
calibration status for each. This message may appear only briefly if a message of
higher priority exists; press the Aux tab to view a brief history.

Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188, see page 703.
Parts Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188, see page 713.
Cable Assembly Electronic Gas System to NIC - P/N 802551, see page 717.
Schematic Electronic Gas System PC Board - P/N 801050, see page 699.
Page 415
More Info Screen
To review stored information about the electronic gas system, log in to Service.
From the Service and Diagnostics screen, select the component from the list, and
press More Info. The More Info screen displays information about Self Test Status,
V5 Voltage, V5 Current, Vmot Voltage, Vmot Current, Temperature, and O2 sensor
hours.
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Diagnostic Theory
1. The gas system reports its overall health and status using a three-
2. The Perfusion screen may be used to assess if the system can put the
gas system module online and whether or not it can be controlled via
3. Use the Service screen to view the status of any module or pump and
the CCM itself. Individual modules run self-diagnostic routines and
record errors in an internal log. The Service screen may be used to
view and download these logs. Modules that capture and log reset
event(s) or out of range error(s) should be replaced.
To carry out diagnostic checks, the electronic gas system requires adequate power
supply and source gases within specified pressure and gas content ranges.
Page 416
Repair Procedures
Removing and replacing the electronic gas system

Front and back panels are designed for systems with and without the electronic gas
system. Older System 1 models had a separate bezel (P/N 801504) on the back
panel. Current System 1 models have a molded bezel. The following parts may be
required to install or remove the electronic gas system.
809261 Back panel
802487 Back panel hole cover plate to cover hole when no gas system is
installed
805080 Split washers for attaching cover plate (802487) (Qty 4)
801946 6/32 screws for attaching cover plate (802487) (Qty 4)
811450 Front panel
811063 Front panel hole cover plate to cover hole when no gas system is
installed
811101 Standoffs used to extend the threaded posts to extend
through the hole cover (811063) (Qty 2)
1. Power the system off and disconnect the power cord from the AC
source.
2. Turn off the source gas supplies.
3. Disconnect the source gas supply hoses at the electronic gas system
input fittings.
4. Remove the Base front panel.
• Remove the screws at the corners; older units have four screws,
newer units have two screws. Pull off the older style panel, or pull
the top of the new style panel out and lift to clear the bottom lip.
• Set the front panel aside.
Page 417
5. Remove one retainer screw from the electronic gas system.
6. Reposition or remove the filter/water trap as needed, and then slide

the electronic gas system partially out of the Base making sure the
water trap clears the housing, and disconnect the
power/communication cable.
7. Continue sliding the unit completely out of the Base.
8. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the electronic gas system.
9. Reinstall the electronic gas system on the Base, attach the gas hoses,
calibrate the gas system, and perform an operational check.
Removing the electronic gas system permanently

1. If you permanently remove an electronic gas system on an existing
System 1 in the field, modify the front and back panels to cover the
holes in the housing:
• Back Panel
The first picture shows the back panel and the hole cover
plate in place, covering the hole where the gas system fittings
would come through the Base housing.
Page 418
To attach this cover, it has to be held in place on the inside of
the housing by a magnet pulling the cover tight to the inside of
the housing, while the screws are threaded through the
housing and into the cover.
If you don't have a magnet, make a noose with a string or
small wire and put it around the hole cover plate at the two
notches and pull it tight to the housing while you thread the
screws in.
The picture also shows the center screw on each side of the
cover partially threaded into the housing. These screws are
the ones that had to be taken out of the bezel to finish
removing the back panel, and will be used to re-attach the
back panel to the housing after the hole cover plate in
installed. They are just shown in the housing for the picture.
• Front Panel
The bezel on the front panel that goes around the gas system
knobs is held in place with two 4-40 KEPS nuts.
To use the hole cover plate, remove the KEPS nuts and install
the standoffs instead.
Put the hole cover plate in place and attach with the KEPS
nuts that were removed from the bezel.
The second picture shows the front panel with the KEPS nuts
removed and the standoffs and nuts ready to be attached.
The third picture shows the front panel with the KEPS nuts
removed and the standoffs attached to the threaded studs,
ready to have the hole cover plate installed and attached with
the KEPS nuts.
Page 419
Page 420
Replacing the blender

Note: Use proper static precautions when working near or handling printed circuit
Note: The gas system needs to be replaced or reconditioned every 2 years (24
months). During reconditioning the blender, flowmeter, O2 sensor, and air inlet filter
are replaced or reconditioned. This reconditioning can be performed in the field or at
a service depot.
Note: The blender is P/N 802098.
source.
input fittings.
Page 421

8. Set the electronic gas system on the bench with the cover (Item 50)
facing up. See page 703.
9. Remove the screws that secure this cover. Remove the cover and set
aside.
10. Rotate both knobs clockwise until they stop. Mark a line through both
metal wheels and the plastic cylinder on the flow and FiO2 couplings
as shown.
Page 422
11. Remove the two knobs. Loosen the Allen set screw in the metal knob.
Pry the top of the cap off the gray knob to expose a nut; loosen the nut
to remove the knob.
12. Remove the panel under the knobs by removing four Allen screws.
13. Pull some extra wire to the LED so that the panel will move out of the
way of the screw access holes between the stepper motors. (See
picture under step 15.)
14. Remove the two large Allen screws that go through the back of the
sheet metal gas module case into the blender body.
large Allen screws
15. Work through the access holes to remove two small Allen screws that
screw into the blender body.
access holes
Page 423
16. Mark tubing for proper replacement.
Remove the tube from the single fitting above the bottom of the
blender case. The other end of the tube goes to the total flow valve.
Push the round green sleeve into the body of the fitting and pull the
tube out. When reassembling, push the tube into the fitting until it
bottoms out.
disconnect
tubing
Disconnect the other tubes from their connections to the blender

leaving the other ends of the tubes attached to the gas system.
17. Disconnect the cables that go from the two pressure sensors mounted
on the side of the blender to the large board.
18. Remove the blender.
• Carefully slide the blender away from the casting where the board
is mounted.
• Note a large wheel that has to go through the large hole in the
casting.
• Raise the blender slightly to allow the three large Allen plugs to
clear the case as you move the blender away from the casting.
• Lift the flowmeter to allow the blender to continue to slide out.
• Lift the lower black tube that goes from the oxygen analyzer to the
flowmeter, allowing the fitting on the side of the blender to go
under the tube as you move the blender toward the bottom on the
module and out.
19. Unscrew the pressure transducers from the fittings on the blender,
and unscrew the fittings from the blender.
Page 424
20. Using Teflon®∗ tape, re-attach the fittings to the new blender, and re-
attach the pressure transducers to the fittings.
21. Carefully slide the blender back into place following step 17 in reverse
order, making sure the white connection cylinder is positioned properly
between the blender FiO2 adjustment and the stepper motor
mechanism as previously marked. Reassemble the gas system,
following steps 1 through 16 in the reverse order of disassembly,
making sure the black tubes are properly inserted and the wires are
channeled through the cutout in the housing when re-attaching the
cover.
22. Reinstall the electronic gas system on the Base, attach the gas hoses,
calibrate the gas system, and perform an operational check.
Replacing the flow valve

Note: The flow valve is P/N 132871.
source.
input fittings.
∗
Teflon® is a registered trademark of E.I. du Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, DE, USA.
Page 425

9. Remove the screws that secure the cover. Remove the cover and set
it aside.
10. Turn the flow knob so the two set screws on the coupler attached to
the flow valve are accessible.
Page 426
set
flow
screws
valve
11. Loosen the set screws on the coupler closest to the flow valve.
12. Loosen and remove the nut/washer holding the flow valve.
13. Remove the flow valve.
14. Remove the tubing from the flow valve fittings by pushing the round
green sleeve toward the body of the fitting and pulling the tubing out.
When reassembling, push the tubing into the fittings until it bottoms
out.
15. Reassemble in the reverse order until the nut/washer is tightened on

the flow valve.
16. With the gas system removed from the System 1, and the cover
removed, support the gas module so it can be reconnected to the gas
and the cable, and turn the gas and the power on.
17. With a good valve installed, rotate the shaft of the flow valve to open
the flow valve and then rotate it clockwise until the flow is off.
18. Rotate the flow valve 1/2 to 3/4 turns further clockwise, past the fully
closed position.
19. Turn the flow knob on the front of the unit clockwise until it stops.
20. Slide the coupler back on the flow valve shaft until it is even with the
end of the shaft.
Page 427
21. At that point, tighten the set screws back on the flow valve shaft. This
adjustment allows the flow knob to completely shut off the flow from
the valve 1/2 to 3/4 turns before it hits full stop. With this adjustment,
the system should calibrate.
22. Complete the reassembly of the electronic gas system.
23. Test the unit for proper operation.
Replacing the stepper motor with encoder

Note: The stepper motor with encoder is P/N 802398.
Note: Replacing the stepper motor with encoder is a complex procedure. Read the
instructions carefully before proceeding. You may prefer to return the electronic gas
system to the Terumo Cardiovascular Systems Corporation Service Department for
stepper motor replacement.
Replacing the stepper motor behind the flow valve:
source.
input fittings.
Page 428

it aside.
10. Rotate both knobs clockwise until they stop. Mark a line through both
metal wheels and the plastic cylinder on the flow and FiO2 couplings
as shown.
Page 429
11. Turn the flow knob so the two set screws on the coupler attached to
the flow valve are accessible.
12. Loosen the set screws on the coupler closest to the flow valve. Note
the orientation of the coupler to the shaft and how far on the shaft the
coupler is attached.
13. Loosen and remove the nut/washer holding the flow valve.
14. Remove the flow valve.
15. Remove both the metal and plastic couplers.
16. Loosen the set screws on the other coupler (attached to the stepper
motor). Note the orientation of the coupler to the shaft and how far on
the shaft the coupler is attached.
17. Carefully pry the coupler from the shaft.
18. Remove the snap ring holding the plastic gear in place.
19. Remove the plastic gear. Note the orientation of the coupler to the
shaft and how far on the shaft the coupler is attached.
20. Remove the wave washer, noting the outer edges of the washer go
toward the frame.
Page 430
21. Loosen the set screw on the flow knob and remove the knob.
22. Take the cap off the FiO2 knob and loosen the nut. Remove the FiO2
knob.
23. Remove the four screws securing the front panel of the frame.
24. Pull some extra wire to the LED so the panel can be moved out of the
way.
25. Disconnect the cable at the stepper motor.
26. Remove the four screws securing the stepper motor, and remove the
stepper motor.
27. Reassemble in reverse order including the following.
• Install the new stepper motor and install/tighten the four screws.
• Connect the cable at the stepper motor.
• Reinstall the front panel and reinstall/tighten the four screws
securing the front panel.
• Reinstall the FiO2 knob.
• Reinstall the flow knob.
• Make sure the outside edges of the wave washer are installed so
the bowed center holds the plastic gear out.
• Reinstall the plastic gear with the large surface toward the case.
Then reinstall the snap ring.
• Rotate both knobs clockwise until they stop. Reinstall the metal
wheels and coupling according to the previous orientation marks.
• Reinstall the coupler with the short pin on the shaft toward the
stepper motor, with the flat surfaces of the coupler and shaft
matching. Make sure the smaller round part of the coupler fits into
one of the round cutouts on the plastic gear and the pin goes into
one of the slots.
• Push the coupler until the shaft is even with the outside surface of
the coupler.
• Tighten the set screws.
• Reinstall the other plastic coupler between the two metal wheels
according to the previous orientation marks.
Page 431
set
flow screws
valve
• Reinsert the flow valve.

• Reinstall the washer and nut.
28. Tighten the one coupler on the flow valve shaft according to the
following steps.
29. With the gas system removed from the System 1, and the cover
removed, reconnect the gas and the cable, and turn the gas and the
power on.
31. Rotate the shaft of the flow valve 1/2 to 3/4 turns further clockwise,
past the fully closed position.
32. Turn the flow knob on the front of the unit clockwise until it stops.
end of the shaft.
34. At that point, tighten the set screws back on the flow valve shaft. This
adjustment allows the flow knob to completely shut off the flow from
the valve 1/2 to 3/4 turns before it hits full stop. With this adjustment,
the system should calibrate.
35. Complete the reassembly of the electronic gas system.
Page 432
Replacing the stepper motor behind the FiO2 knob:
source.
input fittings.

it aside.
Page 433
10. Remove the two knobs. Loosen the Allen set screw in the metal knob.
Pry the top of the cap off the gray knob to expose a nut; loosen the nut
to remove the knob.
11. Remove the panel under the knobs by removing four Allen screws.
12. Pull some extra wire to the LED so that the panel will move out of the
way of the screw access holes between the stepper motors.
13. Remove the two large Allen screws that go through the back of the
sheet metal gas module case into the blender body.
large Allen screws
14. Work through the access holes to remove two small Allen screws that
screw into the blender body.
access holes
15. Carefully push the frame back together.
Page 434
16. Lay the gas system on its side. Mark the orientation of the couplers
before proceeding.
17. Note how far the stepper motor shaft is pushed through the coupler for
reassembly.
18. Move/slide the blender with its metal and plastic couplers away from
the stepper motor coupler.
19. Remove the two set screws from the coupler on the stepper motor.
20. Disconnect the cable at the stepper motor.
21. Remove the four screws securing the stepper motor to the frame.
22. Remove the stepper motor.
23. Install the new stepper motor.
24. Rotate the knobs clockwise until they stop. Reassemble in reverse
order making sure the pins on the stepper motor and blender couplers
align with the slots on the plastic coupler and are oriented as
previously marked.
25. After complete reassembly, perform an operational check.
Page 435
Replacing the flowmeter
Note: The flowmeter should be replaced or recalibrated every 24 months.
Note: The flowmeter is P/N 811104.
source.
input fittings.

Page 436
aside.
10. Remove the two screws securing the white isolation block to the case.
fittings
and black
hoses
white
isolation
block electrical
connector
11. Remove the screws securing the white isolation block to the
flowmeter. Remove the isolation block and set it aside.
If the electronic gas system does not have an isolation block installed,
install one during reassembly per NFC 811507.
12. Remove the black tubes from either side of the flowmeter by pushing
the round green sleeve into the body of the fitting and pulling the tube
out. When reassembling, push the tube all the way into the fitting until
it stops.
13. Cut the tie wrap from the electrical connector and remove the
connector.
14. Attach the isolation block to the new flowmeter.
15. Connect the electrical connector to the flowmeter and secure with tie
wrap.
16. Attach the two black tubes by pushing them all the way into the
fittings.
17. Attach the flowmeter/isolation block to the case and tighten the
screws.
18. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
Page 437
19. Position the filter/water trap as needed and slide the electronic gas
system partially into the Base, making sure the water trap clears the
housing. Re-attach the power/communication cable.
20. Slide the electronic gas system all the way into the Base. Install and
tighten the retainer screw.
22. Connect the source gas supply hoses, calibrate the gas system, and
perform an operational check.
Replacing the O2 sensor

Note: See page 703 for the Electronic Gas System, P/N 801188, when performing the
following repairs.
Note: The O2 sensor is P/N 801074.
source.
input fittings.
Page 438

aside.
10. Remove the screw that secures the O2 sensor retainer bracket (Item
23).
retainer bracket
11. Disconnect the electrical cable from the O2 sensor and slide the O2
sensor (Item 22) carefully out of the machined housing (Item 21).
Page 439
12. To reinstall the O2 sensor, connect the electrical cable into the sensor
firmly. Make certain it is completely connected. Be careful not to twist
or tighten the O2 sensor cartridge.
13. Lubricate the sensor O-ring and firmly press it into place in the
machined housing.
14. Install the bracket and tighten the screw to secure the O2 sensor
retainer bracket (Item 23).
15. Install the cover, making sure the wires are channeled through the
cutout in the housing, and tighten the four screws to secure the cover.
16. Reinstall the electronic gas system on the Base.
17. Reset the O2 percent hours to zero, connect source gases and
perform a calibration. To reset the O2 percent hours, go to the Service
screen, select the gas module, press the More Info button, and then
press the Reset button.
Page 440
Replacing the air inlet filter component
Note: The air inlet filter component is P/N 132257.

Note: The retaining spring is available as a separate part, P/N 811567.
1. Remove the retaining springs on the metal guard and remove the
guard.
2. Press the relief valve on the bottom of the polycarbonate bowl to drain
any water. Any water accumulation should be noted.
3. Unscrew the polycarbonate bowl.
4. Unscrew the filter retainer.
5. Remove the old filter component from the filter retainer.
6. Clean and dry all surfaces if needed.
7. Install the new filter component on the filter retainer.
8. Reinstall the filter retainer and polycarbonate bowl.
9. Reinstall the metal guard and retaining springs.
Page 441
Replacing the module board set
Note: The module board set is P/N 804097. The O2 sensor is P/N 801074.
source.
input fittings.

8. Set the electronic gas system on the bench with the aluminum cover
(Item 50) facing up. See page 703.
9. Remove the four screws that secure the cover. Remove the cover and
set aside.
Page 442
10. Remove all the electrical cables from the module board set noting
their orientation.
11. Remove the four screws that secure the module board set to the
machined frame mount (Item 1).
12. Remove the two screws that secure the L-bracket to the frame.
L-bracket
13. Replace the module board set.
14. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the module, making sure the wires
are channeled through the cutout in the housing when re-attaching the
cover.
Note: When replacing the module, also replace the O2 sensor. See
page 438. When the O2 sensor is replaced, reset the O2 percent
hours to zero. To reset the O2 percent hours, go to the Service screen,
select the gas module, press the More Info button, and then press the
Reset button.
16. Attach the source gas hoses, calibrate the gas system, and perform
an operational check.
Page 443
Replacing the pressure transducer(s)
Note: The pressure transducer is P/N 801079.
source.
input fittings.

8. Set the electronic gas system on the bench with the aluminum cover
facing up. See 703.
Page 444
9. Remove the four screws that secure the cover. Remove the cover and
set aside.
Note: To replace the AIR pressure transducer, you need to remove the
OXY pressure transducer to gain access. You do not need to remove
the AIR pressure transducer if you only need to replace the OXY
pressure transducer.
AIR pressure
transducer (label
on blender housing)
P2 and P3
(twisted
OXY pressure colored
transducer (label wire)
on blender housing) connectors
10. Disconnect the OXY transducer cable from the gas blender board at
P3.
11. Disconnect the AIR transducer cable from the gas blender board at
P2.
12. Push down on the green collar at the tube connector nearest the OXY
pressure transducer and pull out the tube. Mark the tube for
reinstallation. When reassembling, push the tube into the fitting until it
bottoms out.
13. Push down on the green collar at the tube connector nearest the AIR
pressure transducer and pull out the tube. Mark the tube for
reinstallation. When reassembling, push the tube into the fitting until it
bottoms out.
14. Unscrew the OXY pressure transducer by loosening the large nut that
is part of the transducer and remove the transducer.
Page 445
15. Unscrew the AIR pressure transducer by loosening the large nut that
is part of the transducer and remove the transducer.
16. Replace the transducer(s). Use the appropriate thread sealing and
leak test during reassembly.
17. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly, making sure the

wires are channeled through the cutout in the housing when re-
attaching the cover.
19. Attach the source gas hoses, calibrate the gas system, and perform an
operational check.
Page 446
Troubleshooting–Electronic Gas System

Use the Diagnostics for Troubleshooting section to systematically find a problem with the
electronic gas system.
Use the Troubleshooting Table (page 457) if you are working with a specific symptom.
Diagnostics for Troubleshooting

Note: Check that all NFCs have been completed. After repairs and NFCs are
completed, verify that all software upgrades have been installed. NFCs and
software upgrades are very important for the proper function of the gas system.
Note: The following log information is based on gas system software version 1.20.
1. Review the log for the gas system whenever there is a problem with
the gas system. See page 124 for more information.
2. If the log indicates a problem component, use the appropriate section

of the following table to verify the problem.
3. If the log doesn't pinpoint the problem, follow the sections (beginning
on page 452) after the Error Code Table in order to isolate the
problem.
Error Code Table to Interpret Gas Log

Event ID Event Channel Data Timestamp
# = sequential number of the entry; LOWEST number is NEWEST

Event ID = the numerical code given the type of entry
Event = a brief description of the entry
Channel = 0 (single-channel device)
Data = information specific to the entry; sensor values, pass/fail flags, etc.
Timestamp = the date and time the entry was logged
n 10006 NACC message sent on QBUS 0 x <date/time>

x = message ID number or type
Indicates a CAN bus message was not acknowledged. May indicate a communications problem.
n 10012 Software unload request 0 (n/a) <date/time>

The module’s application software has been unloaded.
Page 447
n 10013 Software upgrade complete 0 x <date/time>
x = new software revision; characters in ASCII
(example: 49,46,50,48 = 1. 2 0 )
The module’s application software has been upgraded.
n 10015 Starting application 0 (n/a) <date/time>

Perfusion application has been started.
n 10016 Entering offline mode 0 (n/a) <date/time>

EPGS is not in use by CCM.
n 10017 Entering online mode 0 (n/a) <date/time>

EPGS is in use by CCM.
n 10018 Entering broken mode 0 (n/a) <date/time>

During CAL, if gas pressure varies, it will cause the generic board to send a broken message and
the gas system reboots. Need to wait 15 minutes before starting calibration.
n 10026 Miscellaneous internal error 0 x <date/time>

x = error type
Various errors due to microprocessor, communications, or other functions. Most typically indicates
a fault in the module.
n 19000 O2 pressure low 0 x,y <date/time>

x = flag; 1=error, 0=no error
y = pressure value in 0.1 psi
Software v1.20: Incoming oxygen supply pressure is below 30 psi or is 18 psi below incoming
blending gas pressure.
Previous versions: Incoming oxygen pressure is below 40 psi.
n 19001 O2 pressure high 0 x,y <date/time>

Incoming oxygen supply pressure is above 70 psi (60 psi for software versions prior to 1.20).
n 19002 Blending gas pressure low 0 x,y <date/time>

Software v1.20: Incoming blending gas supply pressure is below 30 psi or is 18 psi below
incoming oxygen pressure.
Previous versions: Incoming blending gas pressure is below 40 psi.
Page 448
n 19003 Blending gas pressure high 0 x,y <date/time>
Incoming blending gas supply pressure is above 70 psi (60 psi prior to v1.20).
n 19004 Miscellaneous gas error 0 x,y <date/time>

x = first value; type of entry (see table)
y = second value, if applicable
Software version 1.20 and up only. This entry is used to log a variety of events. Some events are
errors, while others are only information. Refer to the table below for each entry type.
Condition First value Second value

Cal error O2 press low, Blend press low 1 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press low, Blend press high 2 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press low, Blend press ok 3 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press high Blend press low 4 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press high, Blend press high 5 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press high, Blend press ok 6 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press ok, Blend press low 7 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press ok, Blend press high 8 0 (n/a)
Cal error O2 press ok, Blend press ok 9 0 (n/a)
Cal started 10 0 (n/a)
3
Cal successful 11 O2 sensor signal in mV
Cal cancelled 12 0 (n/a)
Knob turned during cal 13 0 (n/a)
Cal error – gas not specified 14 0 (n/a)
Cal error – warm up not complete 15 Seconds left in warm up
Cal error – O2 sensor expired 16 O2 sensor %-hours/1000
Cal error – blender mechanical range 17 Measured range in counts
Cal error – flow move time out 18 0 (n/a)
Cal error – blender move time out 19 0 (n/a)
Cal error – flow high before tare 20 Actual flow in 0.01 LPM
Cal error – flow high after tare 21 Actual flow in 0.01 LPM
Cal error – flow out of range 22 Actual flow in 0.01 LPM
Cal error – O2 signal out of range 23 O2 sensor signal in mV (see
Note: Does NOT appear in log. Only below for range)
appears on perfusion screen at time of error
Cal error – error saving cal results to 24 0 (n/a)
eeprom
3
If the value is approaching 2750 MV, the sensor needs to be replaced.
Page 449
Condition First value Second value
Cal error – ADC converter error 25 0 (n/a)
Vmot over current 30 Measured current /0.016
Flow set point change from knob 40 Flow set point in 0.01 LPM
FiO2 set point change from knob 41 FiO2 set point in 0.1%
Flow set point change from CCM 42 Flow set point in 0.01 LPM
FiO2 set point change from CCM 43 FiO2 set point in 0.1 %
n 19005 O2 control fault 0 x <date/time>

x = flag; 1=fault
Software version 1.20: should not appear due to improved blender control.
Previous versions: blender did not adjust properly. Typically indicates “blender bounce-back”
(endpoint adjustment problem), which was solved by v1.20.
n 19006 Flow control fault 0 x <date/time>

x = flag; 1=fault
Flow sensor’s reported value varied from setpoint by more than 0.5 LPM, for longer than 25
seconds. Indicates a faulty flowmeter, valve, or valve coupling; flow valve turns but cannot reach
setpoint.
n 19007 Flow mechanical fault 0 x <date/time>

x = flag; 1=fault
Flow adjustment has failed after 20 consecutive attempts. Stepper motor cannot turn flow valve;
check for binding.
n 19008 Blender mechanical fault 0 x <date/time>

x = flag; 1=fault
Auto-adjustment of blender has failed after 20 consecutive attempts. Stepper motor cannot turn
blender shaft; check for binding.
n 19009 Set FiO2 alarm 0 x <date/time>

x = new value, in 0.1% May read 0 if alarm is disabled.
FiO2 alarm setpoint has been changed by user. NOT AN EPGS FAULT.
n 19010 Enable FiO2 alarm 0 x <date/time>

x = flag; 1=true (alarm enabled), 0=false (alarm disabled)
FiO2 alarm has been enabled or disabled by user. NOT AN EPGS FAULT.
Page 450
n 19011 FiO2 alarm 0 x <date/time>
x = flag; 1=true (alarm), 0=false (no alarm)
FiO2 alarm has been activated by the reported O2 sensor value. NOT AN EPGS FAULT.
n 19012 O2 sensor out of range at cal 0 x,y <date/time>

Note: If sensor is not plugged in all the way, will give this error.
x = sensor value (see below)
y = flag; 0=out of range, 1=in range
Indicates the CONDITION of the oxygen sensor at calibration; version dependant.
v1.20: occurs ONLY if O2 sensor is faulty. Value is in mV, as seen at test point E10 on PCB.
v0.09: occurs ALWAYS after calibration. Flag: 0=faulty, 1=good. Value is given in ADC counts.
v0.08: occurs ONLY if sensor is faulty. Value is ADC counts.
Data range: Sensor E10 V. ADC cts
Lo limit: 4.5 uA 2.758 310
Hi limit: 12.5 uA 0.550 861
Note: E10 voltage is inverted due to an offset subtraction in the circuit.
n 19013 12V supply volt. out of range 0 x <date/time>

x = voltage, expressed in ADC counts
The 12V regulator on the application board has dropped below 11.5V. Fault clears at 11.75V.
ADC count = ( (Voltage / 6) / 4.1 ) * 1023 (so 12V = 499; 11.5V = 478)
n 19014 Flow sensor out of range 0 x <date/time>

x = flow value in 0.01 LPM
Depends on software revision:
v1.20: Not used. This error is logged as 19004/22 now.
v0.09: During calibration, the flowmeter read >0.5 LPM when 0 LPM was requested, or read <4 or
>6 LPM when 5 LPM was requested.
n 19015 12V supply curr. out of range 0 x <date/time>

x = current value, in ADC counts
The current draw on the 12V circuit has exceeded 150 mA for more than 2 seconds. The generic
board will disable Vmot to the EPGS when this happens.
The value is based on 9.93 mV/mA, into a 10-bit ADC; so, at 150 mA, the voltage is 1.49V; this
gives an ADC count of approximately 372.
Page 451
n 19016 Blender initialization fault 0 x <date/time>
x = Encoder counts
The stepper motor that controls the blender did not turn the proper amount when initialized. The
motor should turn 270 degrees between its stops; this equals 353 counts of the encoder in the
stepper motor. The tolerance for this fault is ±30 counts.
V1.20: attempts initialization 3 times.
Previous versions: tries once.
n 19017 O2 sensor expired 0 (n/a) <date/time>

The oxygen sensor’s timer indicates more than 300,000 %-hours. This value is the percent O2
times the elapsed time. For example: 1000 %-hours = 100% O2 for 10 hours or 50% O2 for 20
hours.
n 19018 O2 sensor and blender disagree 0 x,y <date/time>

x = setpoint value in 0.1% (Blender)
y = sensor value in 0.1% (O2 Sensor)
The measured FiO2 does not match the blender position, within tolerance. The blender position is
directly taken from the setpoint. Commonly indicates a faulty O2 sensor, and appears with other
O2 sensor errors; or, the blender bleed port is plugged, causing the blender to mix gases
incorrectly.
n 19019 Set O2 sensor hours 0 x <date/time>

x = new value (nominally 0)
The O2 sensor’s %-hour value has been reset by the CCM. NOT AN EPGS FAULT.
n 19020 O2 sensor hours unknown 0 (n/a) <date/time>

The O2 sensor’s %-hour value is not properly stored in EPGS memory.
Calibration Problems
1. If the log information indicates a bad O2 sensor, replace it and retry
the calibration. See page 438. When the calibrating box disappears,
open the EPGS log.
2. If the log information doesn't pinpoint the failed component, follow the
EPGS Flow Troubleshooting procedure beginning on page 455.
O2 Sensor Test
1. Do a calibration and review the log.
Page 452
2. Look for 19004. If the first value is 11, then look at the second value
(sensor signal in mV). If it is near 2758 mV, replace the O2 sensor.
See page 438.
3. Look for 19012. The sensor is out of range. Replace the O2 sensor.
See page 438. (If the phono connector is not pushed in all the way,
you can see this error.)
Inaccurate Flow Reading

1. If the log information doesn't pinpoint the failed component, check if
the isolation block is installed. If not, install it per NFC 811507. See
page 2.
2. If there is still a problem with the readings, the ground trace in the
flowmeter could be blown. (The flow will always read 10 L/min if the
trace is blown.) Replace the flowmeter. See page 436.
3. If the problem persists, follow the EPGS Flow Troubleshooting

procedure beginning on page 455.
Flow Valve
1. If the log information indicates a problem with the flow valve, check
the flow valve, coupling, and motor for smooth operation.
2. If the mechanicals are not binding, follow the EPGS Flow

Troubleshooting procedure beginning on page 455.
Inaccurate FiO2 Reading

1. If the log information doesn't pinpoint the failed component, follow the
Blender Test procedure below.
Blender Test
Note: Blender Bounce
1. During calibration, the blender flows 100% O2. If the software doesn't
sense that the flow valve is fully open, it will try the adjustment eight
times and then give a SERVICE GAS SYSTEM error. Version 1.20
should correct this. If not, proceed to the next step.
2. Verify the FiO2 knob works freely. If not, repair/replace the blender
(see page 421), coupling, or Fi02 stepper motor (see page 433) as
needed for smooth movement.
Page 453
3. Set the FiO2 to 100% O2. The FiO2 reading on a Perfusion screen
should be 98.5% to 100%.
4. If it is less than 98.5%, the bleed off port could be partially plugged or
the blender needs adjustment. If there are no restrictions in the output
tubing, replace the blender following the procedure beginning on page
421.
5. With a good O2 sensor installed, set the FiO2 at 0.6 (reading 60%)
and the flow at 5 L/min. Reduce the flow to 0.5 L/min. The FiO2
reading should be 0.59 to 0.61 (59% to 61%). If not, replace the
blender. See page 421.
See page 421 for more information.

Pressure Transducers
Note: See page 466 for an example of pressure messages.
1. If the log indicates pressure problems, make sure the hospital
pressures are in the range of 30 psi to 70 psi and that the Air and O2
pressures are < 18 psi apart. If pressures are > 18 psi apart, there will
be a low air supply pressure (error code 19002), or a low O2 supply
pressure (error code 19000).
2. If the pressures are within range, there may be a problem with the
transducers causing a low supply pressure alarm. (See page 466 for
examples.)
3. If there is a 19000 error or a 19002 error, divide the second value after
the error by 10. This is the supply pressure. If it was low air supply,
then this is the pressure of the air. If it was a low O2 supply, then this
is the pressure of O2.
4. If the above value is what you measured the incoming pressure to be

on the corresponding supply, then this transducer is reporting correct,
and the other transducer is reporting incorrect. If the above value of
transducer pressure is not the pressure you measured, replace that
transducer. See page 444.
Page 454
EPGS Flow Troubleshooting
1. If the gas system log indicates error 19004 and the first value is 22,
Flow Out of Range, the problem could be that the flowmeter offset is
too great and the flow is > 1 L/min when set at 0.00 L/min. Or, the
problem could be a bad flow valve or a flow valve that is out of
adjustment. If the flow is set at 0.00 L/min and there is flow > 1 L/min
from the gas outlet, then the valve is not closing completely. This flow
is enough to keep the flow meter from compensating for it and the gas
system won't calibrate.
2. Remove the gas system from the System 1, and remove the cover.
3. Position the EPGS module so you can reconnect the gas and the
cable, and turn the gas and the power on.
4. Turn the flow knob clockwise until it stops.
5. Connect an external flowmeter and see if there is flow. If there is flow,

go to step 6. If there is no flow, go to step 11.
6. Loosen the set screws on the coupling to the flow valve. Slide the
coupling away from the flow valve to expose the flow valve shaft.
7. Rotate the shaft of the flow valve clockwise until the flow is off. If the
flow will not shut off by rotating the shaft, then the flow valve needs to
be replaced. See page 425 for more information.
9. Rotate the flow knob on the front of the unit counterclockwise 1/2 to
3/4 turns from the fully closed position.
end of the shaft. At that point, tighten the set screws back on the flow
valve shaft. This adjustment allows the flow knob to completely shut
off the flow from the valve 1/2 to 3/4 turns before it hits full stop. With
this adjustment, the system should calibrate.
11. Test the unit. If the reported flow is correct, the unit is repaired. If the
reported flow is still not correct, proceed with the next step.
12. Set the flow to 4 L/min as displayed on your external flowmeter.
Page 455
13. Read the voltage coming from the flowmeter at the white connector on
the gas system large PC board, measuring across the purple and
green wires (1 and 3).
purple and green wires
14. The voltage reading should be 0.5 VDC for each liter of flow, so with
4 L/min of flow, you should read 2 VDC.
15. If the voltage reading is wrong, proceed with the next step. If the
voltage reading is correct, then the flowmeter is accurate. You need to
replace the gas module board set since it is sending an inaccurate
flow calculation to the CCM. See page 442.
16. When the voltage reading is wrong, replace the flowmeter. See page
436. The faulty flowmeter voltage is causing the gas system PC board
to calculate and send inaccurate flow calculations to the CCM.
Page 456
Troubleshooting Table–Electronic Gas System

Note: Before performing any troubleshooting, make sure all NFCs have been completed
especially software upgrades and the isolation block installation.
Note: If the gas system icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading
Department.
Gas System Problem Check Action

Keyword
Alarm missed Missed Low FiO2 Replace the gas module board
alarm settings,
alarm. set (See page 442) and return
the old module to an authorized
Terumo Service Center.
module. Replace the gas module board

set (See page 442) and return
Calibrate button Calibrate button on Wait 20 minutes for warm-up to

gas module has
grayed out CCM grayed out and complete.
completed warm-up
can't be pressed.
period,
gas supply pressure and Verify gas hoses are connected

flow (30 psi to 70 psi; Air and gas is turned on. To check if
and O2 within 5 psi of the pressure is within range, set
each other), the flow above 0.2 L/min; you
will get a pressure alarm if the
pressure is out of range. Adjust
gas supply pressure and flow to
required value.
O2 sensor expiration in Replace O2 sensor and reset

Aux message tab or O2 hours. See page 438.
service log; there will
also be a SERVICE
GAS SYSTEM alert
message displayed.
Calibrate button Calibrate button not Wait at least 2 seconds after a

if knob or slider was
not functioning grayed out, but slider adjustment or knob
changed less than
pressing does adjustment before pressing the
2 seconds before
nothing. Calibrate button.
Calibrate button
pressed.
Page 457
Keyword
Calibrate O2 Calibrate O2 If electronic gas system has not
if the FiO2 set point and
Analyzer Analyzer status been calibrated since power-on,
actual FiO2
message is calibrate the electronic gas
measurement are more
displayed. system after 20 minute warm-up
than 10% different (If
has completed.
FiO2 at 0.60, then
reading should be 59 to After calibrating the electronic
61), gas system, set FiO2 to 0.60
and flow to 5 L/min. After FiO2
reading is stable, reduce flow to
0.5 L/min. FiO2 should be 0.59
to 0.61. If the reading changes
outside this range, replace the
blender (See page 421.) and
return the old module to an
authorized Terumo Service
Center.
blending gas selected Blending gas should be set to
on the setup/gas screen the same as the actual gas.
on the CCM,
that tubing from the Remove any kinks or restrictions

electronic gas system to and calibrate again. Gas output
the oxygenator is not should be connected to
kinked and that the oxygenator when calibrated.
oxygenator gas output is
not blocked.
Page 458
Keyword
Calibration Calibration fails after Correct if necessary.
if the selected input
failed the normal calibration
gases match the actual
time of about 90
gases used,
seconds. See Aux
tab message, Cannot
Calibrate O2 for a SERVICE GAS Verify oxygen and blending gas
Analyzer or System SYSTEM alert and are correctly connected to the
tab/Gas subtab status message, Gas system.
message, Not system: Knob adjust
Calibrated. only, a minute or two
after calibration,
if O2 sensor is out of Enter Service screen and check

range, History for the electronic gas
system. Look for message, O2
sensor out of range at
calibration, followed by two
values. If the second value is 0,
it indicates that the sensor signal
was too low to calibrate.
Replace the O2 sensor and
reset the O2 percent hours. See
page 438.
if flow is out of range; Is there a pressure alarm

flow should be 4.5 L/min because pressures are out of
to 5.5 L/min during range? If the pressures are
calibration, fluctuating, it could cause
calibration to fail. The gas
system automatically adjusts the
gas flow during calibration as
long as the gas pressures are
within range.
Make sure that the gas is
if the pressures are out
hooked up and turned on, and
of range.
that the pressure is within range.
Set the flow about 0.2 L/min to
check for pressure alarms.
Press Calibrate button again. If
the problem persists, replace the
gas module board set (See page
442.) and return the old module
to an authorized Terumo Service
Center.
Page 459
Keyword
Calibration Calibration starts, but Update software, if necessary.
software version,
failed fails after a few
seconds. Aux tab
message says, the gas log for error Refer to the Error Code Table
Cannot Calibrate O2 19004 and note the first under 19004 (see page 449) and
Analyzer or System value. follow the procedure for that
tab/Gas subtab error. (See procedures
message, Not beginning on page 452.
Calibrated.
for mechanical problem Verify that blender knob turns

with blender adjustment, freely. Press Calibrate button
again. If gas system will not
calibrate, replace the gas
module board set (See page
442) and return the old module
Center.
free movement of flow Verify the flow knob turns freely.

knob, If the flow knob is difficult to turn,
correct the mechanical problem.
If the actual flow is not zero,

Turn the flow knob fully
(i.e., flowmeter ball is not at the
clockwise and check the
bottom) when the valve is fully
reported flow on the
clockwise, but is < 0.1 L/min, try
CCM and the actual flow
the calibration again. If it fails,
with an external
follow the EPGS Flow
flowmeter.
Troubleshooting procedure on
page 455.
Cannot calibrate Cannot calibrate O2 Refer to the Error Code Table

Aux tab message and/or
O2 analyzer analyzer. under 19004 (see page 449) and
the gas log.
follow the procedure for that
error. (See procedures
beginning on page 452.
FiO2 FiO2 readings are Perform the blender test. See

the blender output.
inaccurate. page 453.
FiO2 knob hard Blender mechanical If knob is difficult to turn or

if FiO2 knob is difficult to
to turn fault. binds, correct the mechanical
turn.
problem. If the blender is the
problem, replace the blender
(See page 421) and return the
old blender to an authorized
Page 460
Keyword
FiO2 or FiCO2 FiO2 or FiCO2 Disconnect/reconnect EPGS
sensor/module
display blank display blanks after module to Base. Make sure O2
connection,
normal startup or on sensor connector is pushed all
case. the way into the sensor.
Replace O2 sensor and reset

sensor and %O2 hours,
the O2 percent hours if limit
reached or exceeded. See page
438.
Replace the gas module board

module.
set (See page 442.) and return
Flow Outlet flow rate is Disconnect output from EPGS to

less than 2.5 L/min. oxygenator. If problem persists,
replace blender. See page 421.
Return old blender to an
Center.
Flow knob hard Flow mechanical If knob is difficult to turn or

if flow knob is difficult to
to turn fault. binds, correct the mechanical
turn.
problem. If the flow valve is the
problem, replace the flow valve
(see page 425) and return old
flow valve to an authorized
Icon missing Gas system not Replace the gas module board
connection to Base.
shown on Perfusion set (See page 442.) and return
screen. the old module to an authorized
Page 461
Keyword
Knob Adjust Gas System: Knob If the FiO2 knob doesn't turn
if this message occurs
Only adjust only without smoothly or doesn't cover the
immediately after
SERVICE GAS full range of travel or can be
power-on and before
SYSTEM alert turned beyond the endpoints on
any user adjustments
message. the front panel graphic (270
have been made, the
degrees), replace the blender
blender may be at fault.
(See page 421.) and return the
Turn the FiO2 knob over
old blender to an authorized
the full range and check
that it covers the full
range as indicated by
the tic marks and that
there is a mechanical
stop at each end of
travel.
LED Red LED remains red Replace the gas module board
connection to Base.
after power-on self- set (See page 442.) and return
test. the old module to an authorized
Page 462
Keyword
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Unplug the gas system cable
the module/system Base
after power-on self- from the NIC board and plug it
connection,
test and Perfusion into another NIC connection. If
screen indicates the gas system LED turns green
missing module. in a Perfusion screen, the
normal NIC connector for the
gas system is bad and the NIC
board needs to be replaced.
If another Base is available, try
the gas system in that Base. If it
works, the NIC board in the
original Base is bad and needs
to be replaced.
cable and connectors If the cable is faulty, replace. If

are okay, the connector on the gas module
board set or the board set is
faulty, replace the board set and
return the faulty set to an
Center.
module boot up Disconnect/reconnect the gas

sequence. The LED will system module. Replace the gas
cycle green, yellow, red, module set if it failed to boot
and then remain yellow properly.
until a Perfusion screen
boots, at which time it
turns green.
O2 display slow O2 analyzer reading Calibrate the electronic gas

on CCM responds system.
very slowly to O2 sensor.
changes in FiO2 Enter Service screen and check
setting. History for EPGS. Look for
message, 19004, followed by
numbers. If the first number is
11, it indicates the calibration
was successful. The second
number is the O2 sensor signal
level. It should be between 550
mV and 2758 mV. If it is closer
to the high limit and there are
problems with O2 response,
replace the O2 sensor and reset
the O2 percent hours.
Page 463
Keyword
O2 Sensor Failure to calibrate Adjust gas supply pressure(s)
gas supply pressure and
Calibration O2 sensor. and/or flow into required range
flow (Was either supply
failed and calibrate again.
interrupted during
calibrate cycle?),
Replace O2 sensor and reset

O2 sensor hours, the O2 percent hours if limit
reached or exceeded. See page
438.
O2 sensor connector Enter Service screen and check

and input voltage to History for EPGS. Look for
application board, message, 19004, followed by
numbers. If the first number is
11, it indicates the calibration
was successful. The second
number is the O2 sensor signal
level. It should be between 550
mV and 2758 mV. If it is closer
to the high limit and there are
problems with O2 response,
replace the O2 sensor and reset
the O2 percent hours.
flow sensor connector Follow the EPGS Flow

and input voltage to Troubleshooting procedure on
application board, page 455 beginning with step
11.
if flow or FiO2 knobs are Correct the mechanical problem

difficult to turn. and/or replace flow valve,
motors, or blender as needed.
Return old equipment to an
Center.
Out of Range 12 V source out of Replace the gas module board

flowmeter/cable
range. If voltage or set (See page 442.) and return
assembly,
current is out of the old module to an authorized
range, 19013 or Terumo Service Center.
19015 error will be
present.
pressure sensor/cable
assembly.
Page 464
Keyword
Pressure Alarm, Pressure Alarm, High Connect and turn on gas if
that gas hoses are
High or Low or Low. necessary.
connected and gas is
turned on,
software version and For software v1.20, verify the

pressure differences, input gas pressure is between
30 psi and 70 psi with maximum
difference between the two
gases of 18 psi; if the alarm is
active, the pressure must be 2
psi within range to clear the
alarm.
For earlier than v1.20 software,
verify the input gas pressure is
between 40 psi and 60 psi; if the
alarm is active, the pressure
must be 5 psi within range to
clear the alarm.
Upgrade to newest software
version.
Pressure Alarm Pressure Alarm Low. Verify gas pressure with an

that gas pressures are
Low external gauge or connect hoses
not more than 18 psi
to another electronic gas system
apart. to see if it also generates the
alarm. If external gauges
indicate that the pressure is
within range, there is a problem
with one of the pressure
transducers. See page 454 to
find the bad transducer. Replace
the problem pressure transducer
(See page 444.) and return the
old pressure transducer to an
Center.
Page 465
Keyword
Pressure In Perfusion area: In Service area:
Messages (Aux / Messages) Go to Gas System / History / Event Log
Table of Log Examples
Event Event Data What Data Means:

ID #,#
LOW OXYGEN 19000 O2 pressure 1,150 1=True 150 ÷ 10

SUPPLY low 2=False = 15 psi
PRESSURE
HIGH OXYGEN 19001 O2 pressure 1,737 1=True 737 ÷ 10
SUPPLY high 2=False = 73.7 psi
PRESSURE
LOW AIR SUPPLY 19002 Blending gas 1,264 1=True 264 ÷ 10

PRESSURE pressure low 2=False = 26.4 psi
HIGH AIR SUPPLY 19003 Blending gas 1,766 1=True 766 ÷ 10

PRESSURE pressure high 2=False = 76.6 psi
SERVICE GAS SERVICE GAS Replace O2 sensor and reset

check %O2 hours.
SYSTEM SYSTEM alert O2 percent hours if limit reached
displayed on CCM. or exceeded. See page 438.
Gas system LED
flashes yellow and
alert tone sounds.
Status message,
Service O2 Sensor.
Page 466
Keyword
SERVICE GAS SERVICE GAS Review module log for events
module log,
SYSTEM SYSTEM alert 19013, or 19015, internal
displayed on CCM. voltage or current fault. If events
Gas system LED is are found, replace the gas
green and no alert module board set (See page
tone. Status 442.) and return the old module
message, Gas to an authorized Terumo Service
system: Knob adjust Center.
only.
that both flow and Rotate both knobs back and

blender knobs turn forth to verify they turn freely.
freely, Calibrate electronic gas system
to clear fault. If the fault occurs
several times, replace the gas
module board set (See page
442.) and return the old module
Center.
that the displayed flow
If the displayed flow does not
changes as the flow
change as the flow valve is
knob is manually turned.
manually turned and there is not
For software version
a gas pressure alarm, replace
0.09 or earlier, check
the gas module board set (See
that the displayed flow is
page 442.) and return the old
less than 0.20 L/min
module to an authorized Terumo
when the flow valve is
Service Center. If the displayed
turned fully clockwise. If
flow changes as the flow knob is
the software version is
turned, but the reported flow is
1.20 or later, check that
incorrect, follow the EPGS Flow
the displayed flow is
Troubleshooting procedure on
less than 1.0 L/min
page 455, beginning with step
when the flow valve is
11.
manually turned fully
clockwise. Calibrate the electronic gas
system to clear the faults and
calibrate the flowmeter.
(You should upgrade software to
minimize problems.)
Page 467
Keyword
SERVICE GAS SERVICE GAS If the reported flow is <1.0 L/min
the reported flow with
SYSTEM SYSTEM alert. After when the flow valve is shut off,
the flow valve fully
you set gas flow to then calibrate the gas system.
clockwise.
zero, the electronic
gas system continues It should calibrate. If not, or if the
to try adjustment flow is >1.0 L/min when the flow
every few seconds. valve is shut off, the system will
The flow is always not calibrate. Use an external
above zero, and after flowmeter to measure actual
a few minutes you flow. Check if the problem is the
receive the SERVICE board or the flowmeter by
GAS SYSTEM alert. measuring across pins 1 and 3
(purple and green wires). It
should read 0.5 V for each liter
of flow. Example: at 4 L/min, the
reading should be 2.0 V. If the
reading is off, replace the
flowmeter. If the reading is good,
replace the gas module board
set (see page 442), and return
purple and green wires
Page 468
Data Transfer System, Interface Modules RS-232 and RS-485

P/N 802113 Interface Module RS-232 (includes cable P/N 804982)
P/N 803518 Interface Module RS-485 (includes cable P/N 810166)
Overview
The Interface Module RS-232 and Interface Module RS-485 for the Terumo®
Advanced Perfusion System 1 interface with Terumo® data management software.
Performance
Voltage
5 VDC (± 5%)
Power consumption
1.5 W @ Vmot
2W@5V
Operation
Storage
Safety Aspects
The data transfer module provides a minimum of 1500 V of electrical
isolation between the System 1 and the connecting device.
Page 469
Bandwidth
Each module is designed to use less than 1% of the total system Bus
bandwidth.
Fault Tolerance
Startup
Fail Safe
Module Retention
mechanical rail.
Modular Design
Drip Proof
The data transfer module is drip proof per IEC 60529.
Corrosion
The data transfer module is corrosion resistant.
System Function
Module
The data transfer module serves as the interface between external devices
Module Cable
An external computer system with Terumo® data management software

connects to the data transfer module via a serial cable with appropriate
connectors and wiring configurations to enable proper data transfer.
Alerts/Alarms
The data transfer module does not generate Alert or Alarm conditions.
Local Interface
A multicolor LED on the data transfer module provides status indications to
the user.
Page 470
External
The data transfer module housing is comprised of a left and right housing made of
molded plastic, sealed together with screws. The inside of the housing has an EMC
noise. An appropriate icon label and the multicolor LED are located on the side
opposite the Base connector. The data transfer module has a single serial
connection point that supports both EIA-232 and EIA-485 signals.
Internal
The housing encloses a generic, microprocessor board coupled to a data transfer
The module plugs into any of the eighteen Base connectors with a 15-pin male
D-sub connector. The DB-9 connector accepts the serial cable connector from the
connected device. This cable can be routed to optimize the cable length and any
excess cable can be arranged and secured in the cable management tray. Module
covers and a cable cover provide protection for the modules and cables from fluid
spills.
Width 4.5 in (114,3 mm)
Weight 4.6 oz (130,4 g)
Page 471
Power Supply
The data transfer module receives Vmot (24 VDC) and 5 VDC power from the
system.
12 VDC is generated by the data transfer module board for communications.
Circuit Protection
The data transfer module software measures the Vmot current during operation.
Interface
The data transfer module has one tricolor LED for displaying status information.
Controls
The data transfer module has no controls.
System Displays
System data can be exported to Terumo® data management software

from a serial interface module. The module and device must be assigned
and online.
Local Display
Hardware Interface
The data transfer module receives 5 VDC and Vmot (24 VDC) from the
system Base. The data transfer module board outputs a 12 V supply for
the communications electronics.
Page 472
Software Interface
The data transfer module supports EIA-232 signals and EIA-485 signals.
Aside from Terumo® data management software, the data transfer module
does not interface with any other products or devices.
Status Conditions
• Data Missing
Theory of Operation
System to Module
The data transfer module contains two circuit boards: a generic board,
common to all modules, and the data transfer application board. The data
transfer module receives +5 VDC and 24 VDC (Vmot) power from the
system Base via a 15-pin D-sub connector rated for a minimum of 1000
insertions.
Module to System
A general purpose digital I/O port provides status information from the data
transfer application board to the generic board.
Module to Device
The data transfer application board generates 12 V (± 10%) to power the

communications electronics. A DB-9 connector accepts a serial cable. The
opposite end connector is determined by the device type.
Software Functions
The data transfer module software monitors the +12 V supply from the
data transfer application board to check for overrange or underrange
Page 473
Vmot Monitoring
The data transfer module software measures the Vmot current during
(NIC).
Data Protocol
The data collected and exported by the data transfer module application
includes physiological data and device events required by customers to
monitor and record the progress and events of a heart surgery case. The
Terumo® data management software runs on a laptop computer used in
the operating room during a case. The System 1 is connected to this
laptop computer via either the Interface Module RS-232 or Interface
Module RS-485. The module software continually sends data via a one-
way serial port using a data window rate compatible with the requirements
of the Terumo® data management software. Customers not using this
software are able to interface and use the data transfer module output by
referring to the Communication Protocol in the Operators Manual.
The data transfer module supports a minimum asynchronous
communication baud rate of 19200. The data transmission direction and
initiation, while using either EIA-232 or EIA-485 hardware interface, is
export only and automatic, without a query or export initiation command
from the receiving computer system.
Data transfer takes place only when the CCM is displaying a Perfusion
screen. Data will be transferred only from devices and/or modules on a
Perfusion screen that are online. The data transfer module software
exports one set of perfusion data every 30 seconds. All data include a
System 1 time stamp and can be identified by its system assigned label. A
set of all the perfusion data is sent with each reported perfusion event.
Module Self-test
Calibration
The data transfer module does not require calibration for proper operation. No Field
Service calibration or configuration is required.
Page 474

Cable Assembly RS-232/RS-485 - P/N 804982, see page 585.

More Info Screen
To review stored information on the data transfer module, log in to Service. From
the Service and Diagnostics screen, select the module from the list, and press More
Info. The More Info screen displays information about Self Test Status, V5 Voltage,
V5 Current, Vmot Voltage, Vmot Current, and Temperature.
Software Upgrades
upgrades.
Diagnostic Theory
1. The data transfer module reports its overall health and status using a
three-color-capable LED on the generic board. The LED color
sequence reveals the health and status of the module.
data transfer module online. The CCM displays dashes for missing
data. In addition, the System tab on the Perfusion screen shows more
detailed information about the status of the module.

Page 475
pump and/or the status of the CCM itself. Individual pumps and
modules run self-diagnostic routines and record errors in an internal
log. The Service screen may be used to view and download the
contents of these logs. The internal log may capture and log reset
event(s) and/or out of range error(s).
Repair Procedures
There are no field repairs for the data transfer module.
Troubleshooting–Data Transfer System
Troubleshooting Table–Data Transfer System

Note: If a module icon displays ? intermittently while a configuration case is loading and you have verified
the jumper is installed (see page 148), download the system, power manager, and LAN I/F logs. If a
device cannot be assigned and linked, also download the device log. Submit the logs to Terumo
Cardiovascular Systems Service Department.
Data Transfer Problem Check Action

Keyword
LED Red Module LED remains Try connecting the module into the
module by plugging
red after self-test. NIC board on the other side of the
it into another NIC
Base. If the module still fails,
connector.
replace the module.
LED Yellow LED remains yellow Check system monitoring area on

system
after power-on self- the Perfusion screen and/or the
configuration,
test and Perfusion Service screen. Replace module if it
screen indicates is not recognized by the system.
missing module.
module LED Replace module if LED power-on
sequence. self-test sequence is wrong.
Page 476
Data Transfer Problem Check Action

Keyword
No Data No data on CCM. Use computer to transfer data
module type is
between the device and System 1.
correct for either
RS-232 or RS-485,
cable and connector Replace damaged cable and/or

to connected correct cable.
device; RS-232
uses 804982 and
RS-485 uses
810166,
data output interval Wait out the interval for data to

selection on CDI™
appear.
device.
Page 477
Page 478
Accessories
Accessories
Accessories Kit
P/N 803730 Accessories Kit
Qty. P/N Accessories Kit Description

1 132265 BULB HALOGEN 24V 20W
1 132361 BALL DRIVER 3/16 INCH
6 132530 HANDLE THD 1/4-20X.78 REF
1 133612 SCRDRIVR MCMASTER-CARR 5682A33
1 134068 COLLAR SPLIT 1-5/16 BORE
10 147125 CINCHSTRAP SCOTCHMATE 9.5LG
1 147361 ASSEMBLY GAS FLOWMETER
2 150957 THUMB SCREW 1/4-20 X 2.0 BLACK
4 203369 SCREW, CAP, 1/4-20 X .75, SOCKET HEAD, SS
1 235571 3/8 NUT DRIVER HOLLOW SHAFT
1 801196 BROWN, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 801197 YELLOW, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 801198 LT BEIGE, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 801199 BLUE, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 801200 RED, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 801201 PURPLE, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 801202 GREEN, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 801293 MOLDED LID HINGE, 6 INCH PUMP
1 801294 MOLDED LID HINGE, 4 INCH PUMP
1 801854 LT BLUE, PUMP OCCLUSION KNOB CAP
1 802094 MEDIA, AIR FILTER, INTAKE
1 802280 DIE-CUT FILTER MEDIA, AIR INTAKE, PUMP
1 802356 LABEL ACCESS KIT
1 802650 SCREWDRIVER, 1/8" SLOTTED, 6" BLADE
Page 479
Accessories
1 803743 1/8 BALL DRIVER, STANDARD HANDLE
8 804459 STANDOFF, 4-40 X .25 LG, M-F, HEX, STAINLESS STEEL
1 804686 3/8 BALL DRIVER, L STYLE KEY
4 805281 SCREW, SET, 1/4-20 X 3/16, SS
1 805647 TAG WIRE ROLL FORM #5 3M SDR-5 WHITE W/BLACK LETTERS
1 805649 TAG WIRE ROLL FORM #7
6 806441 RETAINER 1/2 INCH OPENINGS
2 806459 RETAINER 1 INCH OPENINGS
1 807103 TOOL BOX PLASTIC 2 TRAYS
1 807350 PLASTIC BOX A203
1 807897 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-0
1 807899 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-A
1 807900 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-C
1 807901 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-E
1 807902 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-G
1 807903 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-H
1 807904 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-I
1 807905 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-L
1 807906 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-M
1 807907 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-N
1 807908 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-O
Page 480
Accessories
1 807909 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-P
1 807910 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-R
1 807911 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-T
1 807912 WIRE MARKER TAPE 3M SDR-V
1 808152 1/4 BALL DRIVER, L STYLE HEX KEY
1 812445 3/32 BALL "L HEX KEY
Poles, Cross Bar, and Brackets

There are two 1.30 in (3,3 cm) diameter, stainless steel, vertical telescoping poles
attached to the Base platform for mounting devices to the system.
The inner section of the telescoping pole extends to a maximum of 18 in (45,7 cm)
by adjusting the handle screw on the collar of the pole.
Special fittings connect a horizontal cross bar to the two vertical poles.
There are two additional locations on the Base for auxiliary vertical poles, one on
either side of the Base.
There are dedicated brackets for many of the components used in the System 1.
• Roller Pump
• Centrifugal Pump
• Flowmeter Module
• Occluder Head
• CCM
Page 481
Accessories
Casters
The Base is mounted on four casters. The Base has a pair of casters and a brake on
each side that can be locked individually to prevent movement of the Base. The
brakes can also be individually positioned to allow the Base to roll while maintaining
the position of both or either pair fixed. Each pair of casters has a three-position
locking lever to control the movement of the casters.
Locking lever in bottom position Casters are fully locked and will not move.
Locking lever in middle position Casters are fully unlocked and move in all
directions.
Locking lever in top position Casters will roll, but not swivel. The
casters align parallel to the Base and
allow side-to-side movement only.
Applying upward or downward pressure on the brake changes the position of the
lever.
Page 482
Accessories
Roller Pump Hand Crank
P/N 801016 Hand Crank Assembly
In the event that the roller pump is disabled, the user can manually rotate the pump
using a hand-crank.
The hand crank operates the pump mechanism in one direction only. The default
direction is user selectable.
The hand crank can be configured to operate the pump in either direction, but the
default direction of the hand crank must match the default direction of the pump.
Roller Pump Hand Crank Bracket

P/N 802089 Hand Crank Bracket Assembly
The front portion of the lamp bracket and the front portion hand crank bracket can
be coupled into one system to minimize the number of brackets attached to the
poles.
Page 483
Accessories
Sarns™ Manual Drive
P/N 164268 Manual Drive
A manual drive unit is available should there be a power outage or equipment

problem.
Lamp
P/N 801238 Lamp Assembly Long
P/N 801558 Lamp Assembly Short
The lamp is an optional item. It uses a 20 watt bulb, a bracket to mount to any of the
system poles, has a flexible shaft for positioning, and connects to the Base for
power.
The front portion of the lamp bracket and the front portion hand crank bracket can
be coupled into one system to minimize the number of brackets attached to the
poles.
Links to Lamp Illustrations

Lamp Assembly Short - P/N 801558, see page 719.
Parts Lamp Assembly Short - P/N 801558, see page 721.
Lamp Assembly Long - P/N 801238, see page 723.
Parts Lamp Assembly Long - P/N 801238, see page 725.
Page 484
Terms and Abbreviations
A
AAMI Association for the Advancement of
Medical Instrumentation
A ampere
Assignment Mode The operational mode, during power
on, where pumps and modules are in
the process of being assigned to and
represented on the Perfusion screen.
Modules and pumps not selected for
use for a particular case remain
offline.
B
Base The system Base is a moveable
platform designed for the flexible
mounting of components on poles
and on a central rail. The Base
houses the network infrastructure that
provides power and communications
to all system modules. Each module
connects to the system network via
receptacles on the Base. There are
eighteen receptacles for modules, six
dedicated pump receptacles, two
receptacles for the central control
monitor, and two dedicated
receptacles for a lamp. The Base also
provides one isolated AC outlet to
supply power to ancillary equipment.
Base receptacle A 15-pin D type connector on the
Base into which modules or pumps
can be plugged.
BE base excess
Broken Mode A fail-safe error trapping condition
when a pump or a module has
discovered an internal fault. The
device will not operate until reset by a
power cycle, repaired, or replaced.
C
CAN Controller Area Network, used by the
CCM, pumps, and modules to send
commands and information
throughout the system using a
message protocol.
Page 485
Central Control Monitor (CCM) The central control monitor combines
an embedded computer, a touch
screen, and a graphical user interface
to provide centralized display of
system information and on-screen
control of system components.
cm centimeter; a unit of length equal to
1/100 of a meter.
coast response A trigger response state where the
centrifugal pump maintains 1500
RPM until it receives user input to
change the speed. The pump speed
must be 1550 RPM or more in order
to enable the Coast Response.
Configuration Screen The user interface screen on the CCM
used to create and save a perfusion
screen.
Configuration button The Configuration button on the
main screen provides access to the
configuration functional area.
D
o
C degrees Centigrade
o
F degrees Fahrenheit
E
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable
Read-Only Memory
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
F
FiCO2 fraction of inspired carbon dioxide
FiO2 fraction of inspired oxygen
G
g gram; a metric unit of mass equal to
1/1000 of a kilogram
g/dL grams per deciliter
GUI graphical user interface, such as the
central control monitor
Guts A reference to the Roller Arm
Assembly in the roller pump
Page 486
HB/Hgb hemoglobin; The iron-containing
protein complex in the red blood cells
which can combine with oxygen and
carbon dioxide.
HCO3 bicarbonate (both arterial and venous)
Hct hematocrit; The volume percentage of
red blood cells in the blood.
hematocrit The percentage by volume of packed
red blood cells in a given sample of
blood.
hemolysis The destruction of red blood cells, and
the release of hemoglobin.
Hz Hertz; a unit of frequency equal to 1
cycle per second.
I
I.D. inner diameter
IEC International Electrotechnical
Commission
in inch
I/O input/output
J
K
kg kilogram; a unit of mass equal to 1000
grams.
kHz kilohertz; a unit of frequency equal to
1,000 hertz.
Kspd speed constant
Kt torque constant
k+ potassium concentration
L
lbs pounds
LED Light Emitting Diode
LED modes Refer to specific module for
information on LED modes.
L/min liters per minute
Page 487
LUI local user interface, such as the local
control on roller and centrifugal
pumps.
M
mA milliamp: a unit of current equal to
1/1000 of an ampere.
mL milliliter; a unit of volume equal to
1/1000 of a liter.
mm millimeter; a unit of length equal to
1/1000 of a meter.
mmHg millimeters of Mercury to measure the
pressure
ms (msec) millisecond; a unit of time equal to
1/1000 of a second.
module The hardware/software interface
device between the system and the
product device.
mV millivolt; a unit of potential difference
equal to 1/1000 of a volt
N
NIC Node Interface Controller
NIC Board Node interface controller board used
by the system to control the supply of
power and CAN to the pumps,
modules, and CCM.
O
O2 oxygen
O.D. outer diameter
Offline Mode The standby mode where pumps and
modules are connected to the system
but are not represented on the
Perfusion screen. These devices
cannot be operated from the CCM.
ohm A unit of electrical resistance equal to
that of a conductor in which a current
of 1 ampere is produced by a
potential of 1 V across its terminals
Page 488
Online Mode The operational mode where pumps
and modules are connected to the
system and represented on the
Perfusion screen. These devices can
be operated from the CCM.
P
PaCO2 partial pressure of arterial carbon
dioxide
PaO2 partial pressure of arterial oxygen
PC Card A PCMCIA data storage and transfer
card.
Perfusion button The Perfusion button on the main
screen provides access to the
Perfusion functional area of the CCM.
Perfusion Screen The user interface screen on the CCM
from which the perfusion case is run.
All pumps and modules connected to
the system and needed for the case
are represented on this screen.
PO2 partial pressure of oxygen
psi a unit of pressure; pounds per square
inch
psig pounds per square inch gauge
PVC polyvinyl chloride
PvCO2 partial pressure of venous carbon
dioxide
PvO2 partial pressure of venous oxygen
PWM pulse width modulated
Q
Qbus physical communication network
(hardware)
R
R resistance
RG Return Goods
Roller Arm Assembly Referred to as the roller pump guts.
RPM revolutions per minute
Page 489
SaO2 arterial oxygen saturation
SAT oxygen saturation
Service button The Service button on the main
screen provides access to the Service
functional area of the CCM. This area
is restricted to authorized service
personnel.
Service Data Card PC card; provides input/output and
storage of data; used exclusively in
the slot (serial port) labeled Service
Service Screen The user interface screen on the
CCM used to perform system
diagnostics and maintenance
procedures.
Servo Control Using performance data from one
device (such as flow rate) to make
operating adjustments (such as pump
speed) on a second device.
Flow Servo: using flowmeter data as
the feedback source.
Pressure Servo: using pressure data
as the feedback source.
SO2 arterial and venous oxygen saturation
SvO2 venous oxygen saturation
System Base See Base.
System Bus combination of the CAN and a power
distribution network
System Configuration Card PC card; provides input/output and
storage of data and software to the
System 1; used exclusively in the slot
(serial port) labeled Configuration
System Network The network design allows the
different system modules to connect
to receptacles on the Base. It allows
multiple types of modules to be
connected to the system.
System Power The power system located with the
Base transforms AC power into the
DC levels required by the system
modules. Integrated batteries provide
backup power in the event of AC
power loss during use.
Page 490
U
V
VAC volts alternating current
VDC volts direct current
Vmot Nominal +24 VDC power supplied to
the system.
VO2 oxygen consumption
volt a unit of potential equal to the
potential difference between 2 points
on a conductor carrying a current of 1
ampere when the power dissipated
between the 2 points is 1 watt;
equivalent to the potential difference
across a resistance of 1 ohm when 1
ampere of current flows through it
W
W watts; a unit of power equal to 1 joule
per second.
XYZ
Page 491
Page 492
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations – Chassis/Base Unit, 100/120 V and 220/240 V
Chassis/Base Unit - P/N 811409
Page 493
Page 494
Parts - Chassis/Base Unit - P/N 811409 (R/D)

Item No. Qty. P/N Chassis/Base Unit Description
1 1 811408 BASE CASTING
2 4 801559 CASTER, SWIVEL WITH DIRECTIONAL AND TOTAL LOCK, 5.0 IN

DIA
3 4 801390 MACHINED ADAPTER, CASTOR BLOCK
4 2 801401 WELDMENT, CASTOR PETAL
5 4 801402 MACHINED RETAINER, CASTOR PETAL
6 24 805107 WASHER, SPLIT, 1/4 STAINLESS
7 16 803866 SCREW, CAP , 1/4-20 x 1.75 LG SOCKET HEAD STAINLESS STEEL
8 8 802092 SCREW, CAP, 1/4-20 X 1.0, SOCKET HEAD SS
9 8 801561 SCREW, CAP, METRIC 6 X 35, SOCKET HEAD SS
Page 495
Page 496
Power Manager (P/N 802095) Block Diagram, 1 of 2
Page 497
Page 498
Power Manager (P/N 802095) Block Diagram, 2 of 2
Page 499
Page 500
Power Manager - P/N 802095
Page 501
Page 502
Parts - Power Manager - P/N 802095 (R/P)

Item No. Qty. P/N Power Manager Description
1 1 802096 BRACKET, POWER MANAGER SLIDE MOUNT
5 1 803900 BRACKET, LED-SPEAKER MOUNT, POWER MODULE
6 1 801429 CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPEAKER and LED
7 1 803768 SPEAKER MOUNTING BACK PLATE, POWER MODULE
10 2 26-1003-4052-5 NUT, KEPS, 4-40
11 3 803742 SCREW, 4-40 X .25, BUTTON HEAD, HEX DRIVE, SS
12 2 805440 WASHER .190ID X .445OD X.06 SS
15 13 802107 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X 1/4 LG, HEX HD, STEEL, ZINC PLT
90 1 803346 LABEL NAMEPLATE POWER MANAGER SOFTWARE

MODULE
100 1 813502 MODULE SOFTWARE, POWER MANAGER VER 1.20
Page 503
Page 504
NIC Board - P/N 801742
Page 505
Page 506
Parts - NIC Board - P/N 801742 (R/P)

Item No. Qty. P/N NIC Board Description
1 1 810313 PANEL, NIC PC - MODULE MOUNT LEFT/RIGHT
2 1 811467 EMC GASKET, PUMP/CCM, NIC
3 1 801518 PC BOARD ASBY, NIC
5 4 802396 MACHINED, CABLE ORGANIZER, SMALL
6 1 803652 SIDE COVER SLIDE RAIL, CHASSIS MOUNT
11 10 804459 STANDOFF, 4-40 X .25 LG, M-F, HEX, STAINLESS STEEL
12 3 811466 EMC GASKET, 3 MODULE, NIC
20 0.01 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
22 2 803966 SCREW, 4-40 X 1/4 LG, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET HEX DRIVE, SS
23 8 809052 PUSH IN FASTENER, .195 PANEL THICKNESS
25 12 805064 6-32 X 1/4 SKT HD CAP SCREW SS
Page 507
Page 508
NIC Printed Circuit Board - P/N 801518 - 1 of 2
Page 509
Page 510
NIC Printed Circuit Board - P/N 801518 - 2 of 2
Page 511
Page 512
System 1 Wiring Diagram - 1 of 4 - Power Bucket
Page 513
Page 514
System 1 Wiring Diagram - 2 of 4 - Power Manager
Page 515
Page 516
System 1 Wiring Diagram - 3 of 4 - NIC Board and Modules
Page 517
Page 518
System 1 Wiring Diagram - 4 of 4 - Centrifugal Pump, Roller Pump, and CCM
Page 519
Page 520
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 1 of 7 - Exterior
Page 521
Page 522
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 2 of 7 - Power Bucket
Page 523
Page 524
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 3 of 7 - Cage, Batteries, Power Supplies
Page 525
Page 526
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 4 of 7 - Power Supply Wiring
Page 527
Page 528
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 5 of 7 - End View of Base
Page 529
Page 530
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 6 of 7 - Front Panel and Pump Tray
Page 531
Page 532
Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 - 7 of 7 - Base Top View
Page 533
Page 534
Parts - Base Platform 220/240 VAC - P/N 801764 (R/AO)
Item No. Qty. P/N Base Platform 220/240 VAC Description
1 1 811409 BASE CASTING ASSEMBLY
3 1 134359 POWER CORD MOLDED 250V/16AMPS FELLER 199-83
5 1 801228 COVER, POWER COMPONENT, 220-240 VAC
6 1 807626 STRAIN RELIEF 3X1,55MM CORD TUCKER 398756
10 1 806609 TERMINAL BLOCK 3 POSITION UL
11 1 807149 CABLE CLAMP NYLON 3/8 ID LOOP CLAMP HEYCO 3326
12 1 802512 POWER COMPONENT TRAY
13 2 801605 CIRCUIT BREAKER RESETTABLE 7 AMP ETA
14 1 803713 FERRITE CORE CYLINDRICAL 26MM X 29MM X 13MM
15 1 803903 LINE FILTER, MULTI STAGE, 20A
16 1 801607 CIRCUIT BREAKER RESETTABLE .7 AMP ETA
17 3 133858 CIRCUIT BREAKER SEAL ETA
18 1 807151 ACC POWER OUTLET IEC 320
19 0.01 805135 THERMALCOTE COMPOUND #251
20 1 801610 HEATSINK
21 1 801609 RELAY SOLID STATE AC INPUT 90-280V
22 1 153154 CURRENT LIMITER INRUSH 16A
23 1 803898 WIRING KIT, CHASSIS
24 1 801430 CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY, ON SWITCH
25 1 135183 CABLE MOUNT ADHESIVE SMALL
27 1 807851 GROMMET.75 DIA
28 1 801604 CIRCUIT BREAKER AC/DC ROCKER
30 1 801227 WELDMENT CHASSIS BUCKET
31 1 802079 PLATE, FAN MOUNT, EXHAUST, CHASSIS
32 2 801246 FAN GUARD 3.6 SQ, NMB 3.62 (92) 3600 SERIES
33 2 801428 CABLE ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS FAN, 24 VDC
34 1 803917 BOLT, CARRIAGE, 1/2-13 X 4.0, SQUARE NECK, SS
35 1 131908 PLUG POTENTIAL COMPENSATNG
Page 535
36 1 201128 M6 SERRATED LOCK WASHER
37 1 201101 M6 HEX NUT BRASSNICKEL PLT
39 1 801398 TRANSFORMER 200/240 VAC TOROIDAL
40 1 801230 MOLDED SWITCH BEZEL, POWER BUCKET
41 2 805260 TERM .250 RECPT INSUL 22/18
42 1 806756 TERM RING#8 16-14AWG DBL CRIMP
44 4 804703 TERM RING #6 16-14AWG DBL CRIMP
45 2 805258 TERM .25 RECPT INSUL 16/14
49 4 802219 RIVET, BLIND, 1/8 DIA, .126-.187 GRIP, OPEN END, DOME
HEAD
50 1 801226 WELDMENT CHASSIS TOWER
51 4 801731 MACHINED SLIDE MOUNTING RAIL
52 2 801742 ASSEMBLY, NIC PC - MODULE MOUNT LEFT/RIGHT

SIDE
53 2 803888 MOUNT BRACKET, REAR, CHASSIS WELDMENT
54 2 803889 MOUNT BRACKET, FRONT, CHASSIS WELDMENT
55 1 801732 BRACKET, INTERNAL CABLE MANAGEMENT, CHASSIS
56 1 801426 CABLE ASSEMBLY, CAN, NIC, RIGHT
57 1 801463 CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER, NIC, RIGHT
58 1 801427 CABLE ASSEMBLY, CAN, NIC, LEFT
59 1 801464 CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER, NIC, LEFT
60 1 801735 BRACKET, SLIDING, POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING
61 2 813119 POWER SUPPLY, 120-240 VAC IN, 24 VDC OUT
65 1 801466 CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER, PS1
66 1 812261 CABLE ASBY 3 WIRE PS1 FAULT
70 1 802095 ASSEMBLY, POWER MANAGER MODULE
75 1 801734 BRACKET, BATTERY
Page 536
76 1 801739 BATTERY SLIDE TRAY
77 1 801358 BATTERY TRAY BRACE
78 2 145955 BATTERY 12V 28A/H LEAD ACID
79 1 801467 CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY, 24 VDC
80 1 801359 BATTERY TOP BRACE
85 1 802487 COVER PLATE, NO GAS, CHASSIS
89 0.01 801803 GREASE MOBILTEMP SHC 32
90 6 801749 MACHINED, UPPER MODULE GUIDE
91 6 801750 MACHINED, LOWER MODULE GUIDE
92 4 801751 END PLATE, MODULE GUIDE
93 2 801752 WELDED, MODULE RETAINER RAIL (BAIL)
94 2 803648 WASHER, .83 OD X .59 ID X .10 THK, ACETAL
95 4 803871 BAIL TENSION BEARING SHAFT, NIC
96 2 803877 SPRING, TORSION, S/S, .375 DIA. X 1.25 LEFT WIND
97 2 803878 SPRING, TORSION, S/S, .375 DIA. X 1.25 RIGHT WIND
98 4 803724 SPRING COVER MODULE BAIL, CHASSIS
99 4 801788 RETAINING RING, E-RING, STAINLESS STEEL, .188 DIA

SHAFT
100 1 801743 PLATE, TOWER PLATFORM, CHASSIS
101 1 802519 MACHINED, PUMP REST, CHASSIS
102 2 801403 COLLAR, REAR VERTICLE POLE
103 2 804085 TELESCOPING POLE ASSEMBLY
104 1 16426 CROSSBAR 4 UNIT BASE
105 1 803771 MACHINED LEFT END CAP, PUMP REST, CHASSIS
106 1 803770 MACHINED RIGHT END CAP, PUMP REST, CHASSIS
107 4 804096 RAIL, END CAP, CHASSIS
108 2 802524 MACHINED, PUMP REST FILLER, SMALL, CHASSIS
109 2 802523 MACHINED, PUMP REST FILLER, LARGE, CHASSIS
110 2 801406 ADAPTER, POLE BOTTOM
111 2 801407 WELDED SHORT POLE 1.3 DIA
Page 537
112 2 132370 HOLE PLUG 1.0 DIA BLK NYLON
120 11 133305 TYTON #T18R TIE-WRAP
141 6 26-1003-4052-5 NUT, KEPS, 4-40
142 2 801780 SCREW, 4-40 X .375, FLAT HEAD, HEX SKT, SS
149 12 804178 SCREW, 6-32 X 2.0, BUTTON HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
150 20 805091 6-32 KEPS NUT STL ZINC PLATE
151 18 805080 WASHER, SPLIT, #6 S/STEEL
152 5 805078 WASHER, LOCK, #6, EXTERNAL TOOTH
153 17 18-9813-0675-8 WASHER, FLAT,#6 , STAINLESS STEEL
154 2 802064 SCREW, 6-32 X 3/8 LG, FLAT HEAD, HEX SOCKET, SS
155 42 801946 SCREW, 6-32 X 3/8 LG, BUTTON HEAD, SS
157 2 803907 SCREW, 6-32 X 1.75, FLAT HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
158 12 804480 SCREW, 6-32 X .875 BUTTON HD, HEX DRIVE, BLACK
OXIDE FINISH
159 2 803491 SCREW, 6-32 X 1/2, BUTTON HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
160 10 805088 NUT, KEPS, 8-32 STL ZINC PLATE
162 2 807091 SCREW, 8-32 X 3/8, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE,
SS
163 8 801574 SCREW, 8-32 X 1/2 LG, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET, SS
164 2 803906 SCREW, 8-32 X 1, FLAT HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
165 2 805440 WASHER .190ID X .445OD X.06 SS
167 2 805030 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X 1-1/2 SOCKET HEAD, STAINLESS

STEEL
169 4 805069 SCREW, 8-32 X 1/4, SET, SOCKET, SS
171 37 805862 WASHER, SPLIT, #10, SS
177 26 803485 SCREW,10-32 X .375,BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET,SS
179 2 802121 SCREW, SHOULDER, 10-32, .25 DIA X 5/16 LG

SHOULDER, HEX DRIVE, STAINLESS STL
180 16 803486 SCREW, 10-32 X 1/2, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET,

STAINLESS STEEL
Page 538
184 4 805071 SCREW, SET, 1/4-20 X 1/4, BLK, NYLON PATCH
186 6 805439 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4 ZINC PLATE
187 6 805045 SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, 1/4-20 X 1, SS
189 2 807563 SPRING WASHER.75 OD X.31 ID
190 6 803489 SCREW CAP 5/16-18 X 1.00 HEX SOCKET STAINLESS

STEEL
191 8 805076 5/16 SPLIT WASH CAD PLT
192 4 803488 WASHER, 5/16, STAINLESS STEEL
194 2 811817 SCREW, 5/16-18 X 2.25, SHCS, SS
195 1 805012 WASHER, LOCK, SPLIT, 1/2 ZINC
196 1 803482 WASHER, FLAT 1/2 IN. (.500) ,SS
197 1 805008 NUT, HEX, 1/2-13, ZINC PLATE
200 1 801760 THERMAL FORMED, FRONT INSTRUMENT TRAY
201 1 804508 CABLE MANAGEMENT TRAY ASSEMBLY
202 1 804799 CABLE STORAGE COVER ASSEMBLY
203 1 802093 WELDMENT, AIR FILTER COVER
204 1 809261 MOLDED BACK PANEL, II, CHASSIS
205 1 804405 MOLDED RIGHT SIDE PANEL WITH MAGNET
206 1 804404 MOLDED LEFT SIDE PANEL WITH MAGNET
208 1 802094 MEDIA, AIR FILTER, INTAKE
215 2 802520 RECEIVER, ACCESS PANEL FASTENER
220 1 811450 FRONT ACCESS PANEL
221 1 802146 MOLDED LED BEZEL, CHASSIS
222 1 801504 MOLDED BEZEL, EPGS KNOBS
223 1 811063 COVER PLATE, FRONT, EPGS
224 2 811101 M-F 4-40 HEX STANDOFF, 1.125 LG., SS
225 0.5 806464 FOAM TAPE 1/8THK X 3/8W X ROLL
230 1 801441 ASSEMBLY QCU DISPLAY MOUNTING ARM
231 1 802089 ASSEMBLY, HANDCRANK BRACKET
Page 539
232 1 195215 ULTRASONIC LEVEL II 195215 YEL
233 1 195274 ULTRASONIC LEVEL II 195274 RED
234 1 195240 LEVEL SENSOR II PADS 60 PK
235 1 803730 ACCESSORIES KIT
236 1 802350 ASBY, OPERATORS MANUAL APS1
237 1 813495 INSERT SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE SYSTEM 1
238 1 804101 CUSTOM LICENSE CERTIFICATE FOR QNX
239 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50 ML
Page 540
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 1 of 7 - Exterior
Page 541
Page 542
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 2 of 7 - Power Bucket
Page 543
Page 544
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 3 of 7 - Cage, Batteries, Power Supplies
Page 545
Page 546
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 4 of 7 - Power Supply Wiring
Page 547
Page 548
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 5 of 7 - End View of Base
Page 549
Page 550
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 6 of 7 - Front Panel and Pump Tray
Page 551
Page 552
Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 - 7 of 7 - Base Top View
Page 553
Page 554
Parts - Base Platform 110/120 VAC - P/N 801763 (R/AL)

1 1 811409 BASE CASTING ASSEMBLY
3 1 134818 POWER CORD MOLDED 20 AMPS
5 1 801612 COVER, POWER COMPONENT, 100-120 VAC
6 1 132652 STRAIN RELIEF .250-.375 DIA HUBBELL SHC-1022-CR
7 1 131852 STRAIN RELIEF LOCKNUT 1/2" NPT
8 1 219635 STRN REL MTL CLAD SEARLING
10 1 806609 TERMINAL BLOCK 3 POSITION UL
11 1 807149 CABLE CLAMP NYLON 3/8 ID LOOP CLAMP HEYCO 3326
12 1 802512 POWER COMPONENT TRAY
13 2 801606 CIRCUIT BREAKER RESETTABLE 15 AMP ETA
14 1 803713 FERRITE CORE CYLINDRICAL 26MM X 29MM X 13MM
15 1 803903 LINE FILTER, MULTI STAGE, 20A
16 1 801608 CIRCUIT BREAKER RESETTABLE 1.5 AMP ETA
17 3 133858 CIRCUIT BREAKER SEAL ETA
18 1 807151 ACC POWER OUTLET IEC 320
20 1 801610 HEATSINK
21 1 801609 RELAY SOLID STATE AC INPUT 90-280V
22 1 804837 PC ASBY SUPRESSOR BOARD
23 1 803898 WIRING KIT, CHASSIS
24 1 801430 CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY, ON SWITCH
27 1 807851 GROMMET.75 DIA
28 1 801604 CIRCUIT BREAKER AC/DC ROCKER
30 1 801227 WELDMENT CHASSIS BUCKET
31 1 802079 PLATE, FAN MOUNT, EXHAUST, CHASSIS
32 2 801246 FAN GUARD 3.6 SQ, NMB 3.62 (92) 3600 SERIES
Page 555
33 2 801428 CABLE ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS FAN, 24 VDC
34 1 803917 BOLT, CARRIAGE, 1/2-13 X 4.0, SQUARE NECK, SS
35 1 131908 PLUG POTENTIAL COMPENSATNG
36 1 201128 M6 SERRATED LOCK WASHER
37 1 201101 M6 HEX NUT BRASSNICKEL PLT
39 1 801231 TRANSFORMER 100/115 VAC TOROIDAL
40 1 801230 MOLDED SWITCH BEZEL, POWER BUCKET
41 2 805260 TERM .250 RECPT INSUL 22/18
44 4 804703 TERM RING #6 16-14AWG DBL CRIMP
45 1 805258 TERM .25 RECPT INSUL 16/14
49 4 802219 RIVET, BLIND, 1/8 DIA, .126-.187 GRIP, OPEN END, DOME
HEAD
50 1 801226 WELDMENT CHASSIS TOWER
51 4 801731 MACHINED SLIDE MOUNTING RAIL
52 2 801742 ASSEMBLY, NIC PC - MODULE MOUNT LEFT/RIGHT SIDE
53 2 803888 MOUNT BRACKET, REAR, CHASSIS WELDMENT
54 2 803889 MOUNT BRACKET, FRONT, CHASSIS WELDMENT
55 1 801732 BRACKET, INTERNAL CABLE MANAGEMENT, CHASSIS
56 1 801426 CABLE ASSEMBLY, CAN, NIC, RIGHT
57 1 801463 CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER, NIC, RIGHT
58 1 801427 CABLE ASSEMBLY, CAN, NIC, LEFT
59 1 801464 CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER, NIC, LEFT
60 1 801735 BRACKET, SLIDING, POWER SUPPLY MOUNTING
61 2 813119 POWER SUPPLY, 120-240 VAC IN, 24 VDC OUT
Page 556
68 1 812262 CABLE ASBY 3 WIRE PS2 FAULT APS1
70 1 802095 ASSEMBLY, POWER MANAGER MODULE
75 1 801734 BRACKET, BATTERY
76 1 801739 BATTERY SLIDE TRAY
77 1 801358 BATTERY TRAY BRACE
78 2 145955 BATTERY 12V 28A/H LEAD ACID
79 1 801467 CABLE ASSEMBLY, BATTERY, 24 VDC
80 1 801359 BATTERY TOP BRACE
85 1 802487 COVER PLATE, NO GAS, CHASSIS
90 6 801749 MACHINED, UPPER MODULE GUIDE
91 6 801750 MACHINED, LOWER MODULE GUIDE
92 4 801751 END PLATE, MODULE GUIDE
93 2 801752 WELDED, MODULE RETAINER RAIL (BAIL)
94 4 803648 WASHER, .83 OD X .59 ID X .10 THK, ACETAL
95 4 803871 BAIL TENSION BEARING SHAFT, NIC
96 2 803877 SPRING, TORSION, S/S, .375 DIA. X 1.25 LEFT WIND
97 2 803878 SPRING, TORSION, S/S, .375 DIA. X 1.25 RIGHT WIND
98 4 803724 SPRING COVER MODULE BAIL, CHASSIS

SHAFT
100 1 801743 PLATE, TOWER PLATFORM, CHASSIS
101 1 802519 MACHINED, PUMP REST, CHASSIS
102 2 801403 COLLAR, REAR VERTICLE POLE
103 2 804085 TELESCOPING POLE ASSEMBLY
104 1 16426 CROSSBAR 4 UNIT BASE
105 1 803771 MACHINED LEFT END CAP, PUMP REST, CHASSIS
106 1 803770 MACHINED RIGHT END CAP, PUMP REST, CHASSIS
107 4 804096 RAIL, END CAP, CHASSIS
Page 557
108 2 802524 MACHINED, PUMP REST FILLER, SMALL, CHASSIS
109 2 802523 MACHINED, PUMP REST FILLER, LARGE, CHASSIS
110 2 801406 ADAPTER, POLE BOTTOM
111 2 801407 WELDED SHORT POLE 1.3 DIA
112 2 132370 HOLE PLUG 1.0 DIA BLK NYLON
141 6 26-1003-4052-5 NUT, KEPS, 4-40
149 12 804178 SCREW, 6-32 X 2.0, BUTTON HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
153 15 18-9813-0675-8 WASHER, FLAT,#6 , STAINLESS STEEL
158 12 804480 SCREW, 6-32 X .875 BUTTON HD, HEX DRIVE, BLACK OXIDE
FINISH
162 2 807091 SCREW, 8-32 X 3/8, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
163 8 801574 SCREW, 8-32 X 1/2 LG, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET, SS
164 2 803906 SCREW, 8-32 X 1, FLAT HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
165 2 805440 WASHER .190ID X .445OD X.06 SS
167 2 805030 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X 1-1/2 SOCKET HEAD, STAINLESS STEEL
171 37 805862 WASHER, SPLIT, #10, SS
177 26 803485 SCREW,10-32 X .375,BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET,SS
Page 558
179 2 802121 SCREW, SHOULDER, 10-32, .25 DIA X 5/16 LG SHOULDER,
HEX DRIVE, STAINLESS STL
180 16 803486 SCREW, 10-32 X 1/2, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET,

STAINLESS STEEL
186 6 805439 WASHER, FLAT, 1/4 ZINC PLATE
189 2 807563 SPRING WASHER.75 OD X.31 ID
190 6 803489 SCREW CAP 5/16-18 X 1.00 HEX SOCKET STAINLESS STEEL
191 8 805076 5/16 SPLIT WASH CAD PLT
192 4 803488 WASHER, 5/16, STAINLESS STEEL
194 2 811817 SCREW, 5/16-18 X 2.25, SHCS, SS
195 1 805012 WASHER, LOCK, SPLIT, 1/2 ZINC
196 1 803482 WASHER, FLAT 1/2 IN. (.500) ,SS
197 1 805008 NUT, HEX, 1/2-13, ZINC PLATE
200 1 801760 THERMAL FORMED, FRONT INSTRUMENT TRAY
201 1 804508 CABLE MANAGEMENT TRAY ASSEMBLY
202 1 804799 CABLE STORAGE COVER ASSEMBLY
203 1 802093 WELDMENT, AIR FILTER COVER
204 1 809261 MOLDED BACK PANEL, II, CHASSIS
205 1 804405 MOLDED RIGHT SIDE PANEL WITH MAGNET
206 1 804404 MOLDED LEFT SIDE PANEL WITH MAGNET
208 1 802094 MEDIA, AIR FILTER, INTAKE
215 2 802520 RECEIVER, ACCESS PANEL FASTENER
220 1 811450 FRONT ACCESS PANEL
221 1 802146 MOLDED LED BEZEL, CHASSIS
222 1 801504 MOLDED BEZEL, EPGS KNOBS
223 1 811063 COVER PLATE, FRONT, EPGS
Page 559
224 2 811101 M-F 4-40 HEX STANDOFF, 1.125 LG., SS
225 0.5 806464 FOAM TAPE 1/8THK X 3/8W X ROLL
230 1 801441 ASSEMBLY QCU DISPLAY MOUNTING ARM
231 1 802089 ASSEMBLY, HANDCRANK BRACKET
232 1 195215 ULTRASONIC LEVEL II 195215 YEL
233 1 195274 ULTRASONIC LEVEL II 195274 RED
234 1 195240 LEVEL SENSOR II PADS 60 PK
235 1 803730 ACCESSORIES KIT
236 1 802350 ASBY, OPERATORS MANUAL
237 1 813495 INSERT SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE SYSTEM 1
238 1 804101 CUSTOM LICENSE CERTIFICALE FOR QNX
239 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
Page 560
Cable Assembly Power NIC Left - P/N 801464
Page 561
Page 562
Cable Assembly Power NIC Right - P/N 801463
Page 563
Page 564
Cable Assembly CAN NIC Left - P/N 801427
Page 565
Page 566
Cable Assembly CAN NIC Right - P/N 801426
Page 567
Page 568
Cable Assembly Battery 24 VDC - P/N 801467
Page 569
Page 570
Cable Assembly Battery On-Switch - P/N 801430
Page 571
Page 572
Cable Assembly Power PS1 - P/N 801466
Page 573
Page 574
Cable Assembly Power PS2 - P/N 801468
Page 575
Page 576
Cable Assembly PS2 Fault 12 in - P/N 801404
Page 577
Page 578
Cable Assembly PS2 Fault 18 in - P/N 801473
Page 579
Page 580
Cable Fan Assembly 24 VDC - P/N 801428
Page 581
Page 582
Cable Assembly CDI™ 100/CDI™ 500 – P/N 804981
Page 583
Page 584
Cable Assembly RS-232/RS-485 – P/N 804982
Page 585
Page 586
Chassis Wiring Kit - P/N 803898
Page 587
Page 588
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations – Central Control Monitor
Central Control Monitor - P/N 802100
Page 589
Page 590
Parts - Central Control Monitor - P/N 802100 (R/AA)

Item No. Qty. P/N Central Control Monitor Description
1 1 802080 FLAT PANEL TOUCH SCREEN, COMPUTER, COLOR
3 1 803740 PROGRAMMED PC CARD SERVICE DATA
4 1 803739 PROGRAMMED PC CARD SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5 1 804958 PC BOARD, PROGRAMMED LAN I/F
6 2 802425 SCREW, #4-40 X 1/4 SHC, STAINLESS
7 2 804459 STANDOFF, 4-40 X .25 LG, M-F, HEX, STAINLESS STEEL
8 2 805086 WASHER, SPLIT, #4 , SS
9 0.01 78-8125-5679-9 HOT MELT GLUE
10 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
20 4 802446 NUT, ACORN, 8-32, OPEN END, SS
21 4 802227 WASHER, LOCK, #8, INTL, STL, PLAIN, TYPE A
22 5 804176 SCREW, 6-32 X 0.25, BUTTON HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE,

SS
30 1 802347 NAMEPLATE CENTRAL CONTROL DISPLAY
Page 591
Page 592
Display Mounting Arm Assembly - P/N 801441
Page 593
Page 594
Parts - Display Mounting Arm Assembly - P/N 801441 (R/N)

Item No. Qty. P/N Display Mounting Arm Assembly Description
1 1 801443 COUNTERBALANCED LINK
2 1 801453 POLE MOUNT LINK PAINTED
3 1 801044 MACHINED, CLAMP PAD, QCU BRACKET
4 4 203369 SCREW, CAP, 1/4-20 X .75, SOCKET HEAD, SS
5 1 802229 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X 1/2 LG, SOCKET HEAD, STAINLESS
6 1 801120 SLOTTED BUSHING 1.125 ID X 1.375 OD X .688 LG,

BRONZE
7 1 801020 BUSHING 1.375 OD X 1.125 ID X .688 LG, BRONZE
8 1 801446 REAR PIVOT SHAFT QCU MOUNT ARM
10 4 801579 WASHER, FLAT, 1.75 O.D. X 1.135 I.D. X .125 THK, PLASTIC
11 2 801023 WASHER, FLAT, 1.88 OD X 1.135 ID X .050 THK, DELRIN
12 1 801442 TILT LINK PIN, QCU MOUNTING ARM
13 1 801451 DISPLAY PIVOT, QCU MOUNTING ARM
14 1 801033 BUSHING .997 DIA X 1.5 LONG - BRONZE
15 1 803498 PAINTED TILT LINK, DISPLAY MOUNTING ARM
16 1 801450 VESA 100 PLATE, QCU MOUNTING ARM
17 4 805056 SCREW, FLAT HEAD, 10-32 X 1/2, SS
19 1 801449 FRONT PIVOT SHAFT
20 1 807769 DISC SPRING BELLEVILLE SS 1.0 OD X .505 ID X .073 THK
21 1 801447 CLUTCH WASHER RETAINER
22 2 806648 CLAMP KNOB CVS HOLDER
23 1 801117 THREADED ROD, 1/2 - 13 X 2.0 LG, STAINLESS STEEL
24 1 801121 SCREW, CAP, 1/2-13 X 3.0 LG. SOCKET HEAD, SS
25 2 801578 SCREW, SET, 3/8-16 X 3/8 SOCKET HEAD, CUP POINT, SS
26 0.01 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
27 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
28 0.01 807754 LOCQUIC 7471 PRIMER T LOCTITE #22477
Page 595
Item No. Qty. P/N Display Mounting Arm Assembly Description
35 1 802346 LABEL NAMEPLATE MOUNTING ARM
Page 596
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations – Roller Pump System, 4 in (10 cm) and 6 in (15 cm)
Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 - 1 of 7 - Pump Exterior
Page 597
Page 598
Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 - 2 of 7 - Pump Cut-away
Page 599
Page 600
Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 - 3 of 7 - Pump Interior, Frame
Page 601
Page 602
Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 - 4 of 7 - Pump Motor, Guts, and Pulley
Page 603
Page 604
Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 - 5 of 7 - Pump Top Case Assembly
Page 605
Page 606
Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 - 6 of 7 - Pump Bottom Case Assembly
Page 607
Page 608
Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 - 7 of 7 - Exploded View with Cover
Page 609
Page 610
Parts - Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) - P/N 801041 (R/AW)
Item No. Qty. P/N Large Roller Pump (6 in) (15 cm) Description
1 1 802212 MACHINED, PUMP RACE, 6 INCH
2 0.05 133567 DISTRIBUTOR CAM LUBRICANT
3 1 810090 BALL BEARING, 2 ROW ANGULAR CONTACT, 1.2 ID X 2.8 OD
4 1 803767 BEARING SEAL ASSEMBLY, ROLLER PUMP
5 1 804766 SEAL, RACE TO HOUSING, 6 INCH PUMP
6 0.05 135036 SILASTIC SEAL CLEAR UL
7 3 802283 MACHINED RACE PLUG, PUMP
8 1 811461 MOLDED RACE RIBBON CABLE RETAINER, PUMP
9 1 803510 HOUSING - UPPER, 6 INCH PUMP WITH EMI COATING
10 1 802143 ROTATION COLLAR, PUMP
11 1 809438 FRAME, 6 INCH PUMP
12 1 802145 RACE RETAIN/ROTATION RING, PUMP
13 1 802150 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .180 OD X 1.75 LG, SS
14 1 802147 RACE ROTATION LEVER, 6 INCH PUMP
15 1 802149 GUIDE BLOCK, RACE ROTATION LEVER
16 1 802207 ENCODER RING, ROLLER PUMP
17 1 802151 MACHINED PULLEY, 3.0 DIA, PUMP
18 1 801798 ASSEMBLY 6 INCH PUMP GUTS
19 1 809051 MOTOR/ENCODER ASBY - PUMP
20 1 809916 RIVET, .125" DIA X .625 LG
21 1 801616 PULLEY, SMALL MACHINED
22 1 802203 DRIVE BELT, POLYFLEX
23 1 802204 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .703 OD X .75 LG, SS
24 1 801225 ASSEMBLY, SMALL DISPLAY WITH KNOB
25 1 803758 DISPLAY TO PUMP BOARD CABLE
27 1 803741 ASSEMBLY, 6 INCH PUMP MODULE
28 4 802276 FLAT CABLE SHIELD JACKET
Page 611
29 1 802426 MOUNTING PLATE, OPTO SWITCH, PUMP
31 1 802280 DIE-CUT FILTER MEDIA, AIR INTAKE, PUMP
32 1 802221 FILTER COVER, ROLLER PUMPS
33 1 809908 LOWER HOUSING WITH EMI COATING, 6 INCH PUMP
35 1 809057 REAR CROSS BRACE, ROLLER PUMP
36 1 802548 MOLDED TAB, PUMP MOUNTING
37 2 802424 RUBBER BUMPER, 1/2 INCH OD X 1/4 INCH, WITH METAL

WASHER
38 1 804416 GROUNDING PLATE, ROLLER PUMP
39 1 802428 BACKPLATE, PUMP RELEASE
40 1 802422 MACHINED PUMP RELEASE LATCH
41 1 802427 SPRING, PUMP RELEASE LATCH
42 1 802431 ROD, PUMP RELEASE HINGE
43 4 802432 E-RING, FLAT, 7/32 SHAFT DIA, SS
46 1 811072 MAGNETIC DETENT ASSEMBLY
47 1 801293 MOLDED LID HINGE, 6 INCH PUMP
48 1 803719 LID ASSEMBLY, 6 INCH ROLLER PUMP
49 2 140521 DRAG INSERT BUNA-N DLY HD
50 0.01 802549 P-80 RUBBER LUBRICANT
52 1 802841 ROLLER PUMP RACE GROUNDING SPRING
53 1 809440 METRIC INTERNAL TOOTH WASHER, M18
54 1 809055 FRONT CROSS BRACE, ROLLER PUMP
56 1 803737 CABLE HARNESS KIT, ROLLER PUMP
58 1 809576 STEEL FLAT WASHER, 19 MM ID, 34 MM OD, 2.7 MM

MINIMUM THICKNESS
70 2 808380 MOTOR MOUNT STUD BLOCK
71 4 808381 MOTOR MOUNT STUD
72 1 808379 MOTOR BRACKET
73 1 808378 MOTOR PLATE
Page 612
99 1 801587 CABLE ASSEMBLY, ROLLER/CENT/FLOW
100 1.3 809583 GROMMET STRIP, 3/32 INCH
118 0.05 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
133 3 802106 6-32 X 3/8 LG SCREW, CAP, HEX DR, SS
136 4 803840 SCREW, 10-32 X .25, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET, SST
138 4 811061 SCREW 1/4-20 X 1/2" SOCKET HEAD STAINLESS STEEL
140 4 807733 WASHER NYLON .75 X .413 X .010
141 4 803497 WASHER, 3/8" ID X .75"OD X .062" THICK, NYLON
142 8 805435 WASHER .378X.720X.105
143 4 807058 SPRING WASHER .75ODX .39ID
145 4 807809 037 SNAP RING EXTERNAL
151 8 802285 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X .375, SKT, HEX SKT, ALLOY STEEL,
ZINC PLATED
152 9 805086 WASHER, SPLIT, #4 , SS
154 8 200774 WASHER, LOCK, #4, INTERNAL TOOTH, SS
155 8 802224 SCREW, 4-40 X .625 LG, CAP, SOCKET DRIVE, SS
156 8 201056 WASHER, FLAT, #4 ZINC PLATE
158 4 802553 SCREW, 4-40 x .375, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE,
SS
159 3 805437 6 FLAT WASH CAD PLT
161 3 805077 WASHER, FLAT, 3/8 , ANSI TYPE A PLAIN, WIDE, CAD PLT
Page 613
162 1 805011 3/8 SPLIT WASHER ZINC PLATE
163 2 807356 3/8-16 EL STOP NUT 90566D
164 4 803517 SCREW, 6-32 x 3/4 LG, CAP, HEX DR., SS
165 3 26-1003-4052-5 NUT, KEPS, 4-40
167 4 809575 FLAT WASHER .143 ID X .267 OD X .030 THICK
170 6 809593 FLAT WASHER, .180 ID X .281 OD X .030 THICK

STEEL
173 2 805440 WASHER .190ID X .445OD X.06 SS
200 1 810325 TUBE CLAMP ASSEMBLY 6 INCH PUMP
218 0.01 134771 GREASE, ALL PURPOSE, APG #2, IMPACT

INTERNATIONAL
223 0.01 78-8072-6000-1 LOCTITE 271 50ML
224 0.01 78-8125-5679-9 HOT MELT GLUE
293 0 807754 LOCQUIC 7471 PRIMER T LOCTITE #22477
294 0 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
Page 614
Large Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801798 - 1 of 2
Page 615
Page 616
Large Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801798 - 2 of 2
Page 617
Page 618
Parts - Large Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801798 (R/AA)

Item No. Qty. P/N Large Roller Pump Guts Description
INTERNATIONAL
2 8 801774 PIN, GUIDE ROLLER, 6 IN GUTS
3 8 801772 GUIDE ROLLER 6 INCH GUTS
4 1 801802 LOCQUIC PRIMER T, LIQUID FORM, 1.75 OZ
6 2 801163 MACHINED ROLLER SLIDE, 6 INCH PUMP
7 2 801770 DOWEL PIN .125 DIA. X .250 LG. STAINLESS STL.
8 2 801615 DOWEL PIN, 3/16" DIA. X 1.25 LG, 416 STAINLESS STEEL
9 4 801767 BEARING, RADIAL BALL, SEALED, .1969 ID X .6299 OD X

.1969 LG, METRIC
10 2 801769 ROLLER 6 IN GUTS
11 2 801169 ECCENTRIC ROLLER SHAFT
12 4 801768 WASHER, WAVE SPRING, .502 OD X .209 ID X .010 THK

SHAFT
14 2 801791 4-40 X 3/16 IN. LG SET SCREW, STAINLESS STL, WITH .031
LONG NYLON TIP
15 1 810148 MAIN SHAFT, PUMP GUTS
16 0.01 807645 METAL CLEANER ZYME-FLOW 672
17 1 803904 GUIDE COLLAR CAM BLOCK ASSEMBLY, PUMP GUTS
18 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
20 1 801790 BALL CAGE, .500 ID x .687 OD X .468 LG, BRASS
21 1 801165 MACHINED HUB BC 6 INCH PUMP
22 1 801787 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .702 OD X 2.136 FREE LG,

CLOSED ENDS, SS
23 1 801145 WASHER, FLAT, .740 OD X .590 ID X .030 THICK, ALUM
24 2 801783 BEARING, RADIAL BALL, 1.18 OD x .669 ID X .275 LG.,

METRIC
Page 619
Item No. Qty. P/N Large Roller Pump Guts Description
25 1 801166 SCREW ADJUSTMENT, PUMP GUTS
26 2 801782 RETAINING RING, INTERNAL, 1.283 OD X .05 THK, USE IN

1.188 I.D.
27 1 801283 ADJUSTMENT KNOB, PUMP GUTS
28 1 801132 BEARING, RADIAL BALL, .750 ID X 1.000 OD X .156 LONG
29 4 801786 SPRING, EXTENSION, .12 OD X 1.75 FREE LG, .08 DIA END
HOOKS, SS
30 4 801789 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .120 DIA X .44 FREE LG, CLOSED

ENDS, SS
31 4 809909 GIB, ROLLER SLIDE
32 1 801771 COVER 6 IN PUMP GUTS
33 1 801777 PIN, SPRING, .125 DIA. X .625 LG. SLOTTED, 420 S STL
34 2 801776 PIN, SPRING, .125 DIA. X 1.00, SS
35 1 801370 OCCLUSION INDICATOR RING WITH LABEL
36 1 801779 RING-ADJUSTMENT KNOB
37 2 801781 RETAINING RING, EXTERNAL, BOWED, .621 ID X .035 THK
38 1 801784 RETAINING RING, EXTERNAL, .629 ID X .035 THK, USE ON

.669 DIA SHAFT
60 8 801775 SCREW, 6-32 X .250 LG., FILLISTER, SLOTTED, SS
80 4 801773 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X .375, FL, HEX, SS
90 0.01 26-1008-4876-6 GREASE, SECHRIST P/N 75002 KRYTOX
100 0.01 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
Page 620
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 - 1 of 7 - Pump Exterior
Page 621
Page 622
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 - 2 of 7 - Pump Cut-away
Page 623
Page 624
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 - 3 of 7 - Pump Interior, Frame
Page 625
Page 626
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 - 4 of 7 - Pump Motor, Guts, and Pulley
Page 627
Page 628
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 - 5 of 7 - Pump Top Case Assembly
Page 629
Page 630
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 - 6 of 7 - Pump Bottom Case Assembly
Page 631
Page 632
Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 - 7 of 7 - Exploded View with Cover
Page 633
Page 634
Parts - Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) - P/N 801040 (R/AU)
Item No. Qty. P/N Small Roller Pump (4 in) (10 cm) Description
1 1 802213 MACHINED, PUMP RACE, 4 INCH
3 1 810090 BALL BEARING, 2 ROW ANGULAR CONTACT, 1.2 ID X 2.8 OD
4 1 803767 BEARING SEAL ASSEMBLY, ROLLER PUMP
5 1 804767 SEAL, RACE TO HOUSING, 4 INCH PUMP
7 3 802283 MACHINED RACE PLUG, PUMP
9 1 803508 UPPER HOUSING WITH EMI COATING, 4 INCH PUMP
10 1 802143 ROTATION COLLAR, PUMP
11 1 809437 FRAME, 4 INCH PUMP
12 1 802145 RACE RETAIN/ROTATION RING, PUMP
13 1 802150 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .180 OD X 1.75 LG, SS
14 1 802148 RACE ROTATION LEVER, 4 INCH PUMP
15 1 802149 GUIDE BLOCK, RACE ROTATION LEVER
16 1 802207 ENCODER RING, ROLLER PUMP
17 1 802151 MACHINED PULLEY, 3.0 DIA, PUMP
18 1 801805 ASSEMBLY 4 INCH GUTS, PUMP
19 1 809051 MOTOR/ENCODER ASBY - PUMP
20 1 809916 RIVET, .125" DIA X .625 LG
21 1 801616 PULLEY, SMALL MACHINED
22 1 802203 DRIVE BELT, POLYFLEX
23 1 802204 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .703 OD X .75 LG, SS
25 1 803758 DISPLAY TO PUMP BOARD CABLE
27 1 802209 ASSEMBLY, 4 INCH PUMP MODULE
29 1 802426 MOUNTING PLATE, OPTO SWITCH, PUMP
Page 635
31 1 802280 DIE-CUT FILTER MEDIA, AIR INTAKE, PUMP
32 1 802221 FILTER COVER, ROLLER PUMPS
33 1 809906 LOWER HOUSING WITH EMI COATING, 4 INCH PUMP
35 1 809057 REAR CROSS BRACE, ROLLER PUMP
36 1 802548 MOLDED TAB, PUMP MOUNTING
37 2 802424 RUBBER BUMPER, 1/2 INCH OD X 1/4 INCH, WITH METAL

WASHER
38 1 804416 GROUNDING PLATE, ROLLER PUMP
39 1 802428 BACKPLATE, PUMP RELEASE
40 1 802422 MACHINED PUMP RELEASE LATCH
41 1 802427 SPRING, PUMP RELEASE LATCH
42 1 802431 ROD, PUMP RELEASE HINGE
43 4 802432 E-RING, FLAT, 7/32 SHAFT DIA, SS
46 1 811072 MAGNETIC DETENT ASSEMBLY
47 1 801294 MOLDED LID HINGE, 4 INCH PUMP
48 1 803720 LID ASSEMBLY, 4 INCH ROLLER PUMP
50 0.01 802549 P-80 RUBBER LUBRICANT
52 1 802841 ROLLER PUMP RACE GROUNDING SPRING
53 1 809440 METRIC INTERNAL TOOTH WASHER, M18
54 1 809055 FRONT CROSS BRACE, ROLLER PUMP
55 1 802341 LABEL NAMEPLATE ROLLER PUMP
56 1 803737 CABLE HARNESS KIT, ROLLER PUMP
58 1 809576 STEEL FLAT WASHER, 19 MM ID, 34 MM OD, 2.7 MM

MINIMUM THICKNESS
70 2 808380 MOTOR MOUNT STUD BLOCK
71 4 808381 MOTOR MOUNT STUD
72 1 808379 MOTOR BRACKET
73 1 808378 MOTOR PLATE
Page 636
100 1.3 809583 GROMMET STRIP, 3/32 INCH
118 0.05 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
133 3 802106 6-32 X 3/8 LG SCREW, CAP, HEX DR, SS
136 4 803840 SCREW, 10-32 X .25, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET, SST
138 4 811061 SCREW 1/4-20 X 1/2" SOCKET HEAD STAINLESS STEEL
140 4 807733 WASHER NYLON .75 X .413 X .010
141 4 803497 WASHER, 3/8" ID X .75"OD X .062" THICK, NYLON
142 8 805435 WASHER .378X.720X.105
143 4 807058 SPRING WASHER .75ODX .39ID
145 4 807809 037 SNAP RING EXTERNAL
151 8 802285 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X .375, SKT, HEX SKT, ALLOY STEEL,
ZINC PLATED
152 9 805086 WASHER, SPLIT, #4 , SS
154 8 200774 WASHER, LOCK, #4, INTERNAL TOOTH, SS
155 8 802224 SCREW, 4-40 X .625 LG, CAP, SOCKET DRIVE, SS
SS
159 3 805437 6 FLAT WASH CAD PLT
161 3 805077 WASHER, FLAT, 3/8 , ANSI TYPE A PLAIN, WIDE, CAD PLT
162 1 805011 3/8 SPLIT WASHER ZINC PLATE
Page 637
163 2 807356 3/8-16 EL STOP NUT 90566D
164 4 803517 SCREW, 6-32 x 3/4 LG, CAP, HEX DR., SS
165 3 26-1003-4052-5 NUT, KEPS, 4-40
167 4 809575 FLAT WASHER .143 ID X .267 OD X .030 THICK
168 2 803774 SCREW, 8-32 X 2-1/2, CAP, SOCKET HD, STAINLESS STEEL
170 4 809593 FLAT WASHER, .180 ID X .281 OD X .030 THICK

STEEL
173 2 805440 WASHER .190ID X .445OD X.06 SS
200 1 810739 TUBE CLAMP ASSEMBLY 4 INCH PUMP

INTERNATIONAL
219 0.05 802592 LOCTITE 454 ADHESIVE
223 0.01 78-8072-6000-1 LOCTITE 271 50ML
224 0.01 78-8125-5679-9 HOT MELT GLUE CDI 500
240 1 809341 LABEL WARNING ROLLER PUMP DIRECTION
241 1 809910 LABEL, ASSEMBLED WITH PRIDE
293 0 807754 LOCQUIC 7471 PRIMER T LOCTITE #22477
294 0 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
Page 638
Schematic Large and Small Roller Pump Display - P/N 801225
Page 639
Page 640
Small Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801805 - 1 of 2
Page 641
Page 642
Small Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801805 - 2 of 2
Page 643
Page 644
Parts - Small Roller Pump Guts - P/N 801805 (R/W)

Item No. Qty. P/N Small Roller Pump Guts Description
INTERNATIONAL
2 8 801806 PIN, GUIDE ROLLER, 4 IN GUTS
3 8 801807 GUIDE ROLLER, 4 INCH
4 0.01 801802 LOCQUIC PRIMER T, LIQUID FORM, 1.75 OZ
6 2 801171 MACHINED ROLLER SLIDE, 4 INCH PUMP
7 2 801770 DOWEL PIN .125 DIA. X .250 LG. STAINLESS STL.
8 2 801615 DOWEL PIN, 3/16" DIA. X 1.25 LG, 416 STAINLESS STEEL
9 4 801767 BEARING, RADIAL BALL, SEALED, .1969 ID X .6299 OD X

.1969 LG, METRIC
10 2 801808 ROLLER, 4 IN GUTS
11 2 801169 ECCENTRIC ROLLER SHAFT
12 4 801768 WASHER, WAVE SPRING, .502 OD X .209 ID X .010 THK

SHAFT
14 2 801791 4-40 X 3/16 IN. LG SET SCREW, STAINLESS STL, WITH .031
LONG NYLON TIP
15 1 810148 MAIN SHAFT, PUMP GUTS
16 1 807645 METAL CLEANER ZYME-FLOW 672
17 1 803904 GUIDE COLLAR CAM BLOCK ASSEMBLY, PUMP GUTS
18 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
20 1 801790 BALL CAGE, .500 ID x .687 OD X .468 LG, BRASS
21 1 801168 MACHINED HUB, BC, 4 INCH PUMP GUTS
22 1 801787 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .702 OD X 2.136 FREE LG,

CLOSED ENDS, SS
23 1 801145 WASHER, FLAT, .740 OD X .590 ID X .030 THICK, ALUM
24 2 801783 BEARING, RADIAL BALL, 1.18 OD x .669 ID X .275 LG.,

METRIC
Page 645
Item No. Qty. P/N Small Roller Pump Guts Description
25 1 801166 SCREW ADJUSTMENT, PUMP GUTS
26 2 801782 RETAINING RING, INTERNAL, 1.283 OD X .05 THK, USE IN

1.188 I.D.
27 1 801283 ADJUSTMENT KNOB, PUMP GUTS
28 1 801132 BEARING, RADIAL BALL, .750 ID X 1.000 OD X .156 LONG
29 4 802200 SPRING, EXTENSION, .12 OD X 1.12 FREE LG, .08 DIA END
HOOKS
30 4 801789 SPRING, COMPRESSION, .120 DIA X .44 FREE LG, CLOSED

ENDS, SS
31 4 809909 GIB, ROLLER SLIDE
32 1 801948 COVER 4 INCH PUMP GUTS
33 1 801777 PIN, SPRING, .125 DIA. X .625 LG. SLOTTED, 420 S STL
34 2 801776 PIN, SPRING, .125 DIA. X 1.00, SS
35 1 801370 OCCLUSION INDICATOR RING WITH LABEL
36 1 801779 RING-ADJUSTMENT KNOB
37 2 801781 RETAINING RING, EXTERNAL, BOWED, .621 ID X .035 THK
38 1 801784 RETAINING RING, EXTERNAL, .629 ID X .035 THK, USE ON

.669 DIA SHAFT
60 8 801775 SCREW, 6-32 X .250 LG., FILLISTER, SLOTTED, SS
80 4 801773 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X .375, FL, HEX, SS
100 0.01 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
Page 646
Large and Small Roller Pump Display - P/N 801225
Page 647
Page 648
Parts - Large/Small Roller Pump Display - P/N 801225 (R/L)

Item No. Qty. P/N Large/Small Roller Pump Display Description
1 1 801221 MEMBRANE DISPLAY PANEL
2 1 801520 PC BOARD ASBY GRAPHICS DRIVER PUMP DISPLAY
3 1 803711 EMC SHIELD, PUMP GRAPHICS
4 1 801224 DISPLAY, SMALL GRAPHICS, PLANAR EL, 160 X 80 X 50 MM
7 4 802090 STANDOFF, 4-40 X 3/8 LG, F-F, SS
8 4 803910 STANDOFF, F-F 4-40 X .5625 LG, .165 ROUND, ALUM.
10 1 802085 ENCODER, OPTICAL, .25 DIA SHAFT, MINI, HP
11 0.01 134771 GREASE, ALL PURPOSE, APG #2, IMPACT INTERNATIONAL
12 1 805198 APM SEAL N-9030-1/4 SHAFT
15 1 802282 KNOB, .250 DIA SHAFT, GRAY
22 1 807286 LABEL .65 X .20 POLYE WHITE
Page 649
Page 650
Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly - P/N 809051
Page 651
Page 652
Parts - Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly - P/N 809051 (R/A)

Item No. Qty. P/N Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly Description
1 1 802199 MOTOR, KOLLMORGEN BMHS-2107-A
2 1 803761 ENCODER, OPTICAL, HIGH RESOLUTION
3 1 803880 CONNECTOR HOUSING, 5 PIN
4 5 803881 CRIMP TERMINAL, AMP, 22 TO 26 GA WIRE
5 3 804972 CRIMP PIN RECEPTACLE, 18-24 AWG
6 1 804973 CONNECTOR HOUSING WITH LOCK, 3 POSITION, .156

SPACING, SINGLE ROW
7 0.5 805150 TUBING HEAT SHRINK 1/4 BLACK

SS
9 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
Page 653
Page 654
Cable Assembly Kit - P/N 803737 - 1 of 5 - Digital Encoder
Page 655
Page 656
Cable Assembly Kit - P/N 803737 - 2 of 5 - Optical Switch
Page 657
Page 658
Cable Assembly Kit - P/N 803737 - 3 of 5 - Fan Assembly
Page 659
Page 660
Cable Assembly Kit - P/N 803737 - 4 of 5 - Pump Cable
Page 661
Page 662
Cable Assembly Kit - P/N 803737 - 5 of 5 - Cover Interlock Switch
Page 663
Page 664
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations – Centrifugal Pump System
Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit - P/N 801046 - 1 of 2
Page 665
Page 666
Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit - P/N 801046 - 2 of 2
Page 667
Page 668
Parts - Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit - P/N 801046
(R/AC)
Item No. Qty. P/N Centrifugal Control Unit Description
2 1 803732 UPPER HOUSING, EMI COATED, CPCM
3 1 803729 ASSEMBLY, CENTRIFUGAL PUMP MODULE
4 1 801053 BASE BRACKET, CENTRIFUGAL PUMP CTRL MODULE
5 1 801939 CABLE ASSEMBLY, INTERNAL, CENT MOTOR, CPCM
6 1 801585 CABLE ASSEMBLY, INTERNAL, ROLLER/CENT/FLOW
8 4 802424 RUBBER BUMPER, 1/2 INCH OD X 1/4 INCH, WITH

METAL WASHER
10 1 802570 MOUNTING BLOCK, CPCM
12 1 803839 DISPLAY TO PUMP BOARD CABLE, CENTRIFUGAL
15 1 804372 POLE MOUNT BRACKET, CENTRIFUGAL CONTROL

MODULE
23 1 804175 SCREW, 4-40 X 0.5, BUTTON HD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE,

SS
30 2 804177 SCREW, 6-32 X 0.625, BUTTON HD, HEX SOCKET

DRIVE, SS
40 4 802553 SCREW, 4-40 x .375, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET

DRIVE, SS
41 4 805086 WASHER, SPLIT, #4 , SS
42 4 807091 SCREW, 8-32 X 3/8, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET

DRIVE, SS
43 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
45 1 802582 SCREW, SET,1/2-13 X 3/8 , SOCKET HEAD, SS
Page 669
Page 670
Terumo® Centrifugal Control Display - P/N 801225
Page 671
Page 672
Parts - Terumo® Centrifugal Pump Display - P/N 801225 (R/L)
Item No. Qty. P/N Centrifugal Pump Display Description
1 1 801221 MEMBRANE DISPLAY PANEL
2 1 801520 PC BOARD ASBY GRAPHICS DRIVER PUMP DISPLAY
3 1 803711 EMC SHIELD, PUMP GRAPHICS
4 1 801224 DISPLAY, SMALL GRAPHICS, PLANAR EL, 160 X 80 X 50 MM
7 4 802090 STANDOFF, 4-40 X 3/8 LG, F-F, SS
8 4 803910 STANDOFF, F-F 4-40 X .5625 LG, .165 ROUND, ALUM.
10 1 802085 ENCODER, OPTICAL, .25 DIA SHAFT, MINI, HP
11 0.01 134771 GREASE, ALL PURPOSE, APG #2, IMPACT INTERNATIONAL
12 1 805198 APM SEAL N-9030-1/4 SHAFT
15 1 802282 KNOB, .250 DIA SHAFT, GRAY
22 1 807286 LABEL .65 X .20 POLYE WHITE
Page 673
Page 674
Sarns™ Drive Motor - P/N 164267 - 1 of 2
Page 675
Page 676
Sarns™ Drive Motor - P/N 164267 - 2 of 2
Page 677
Page 678
Parts - Sarns™ Drive Motor - P/N 164267 (R/E)
Item No. Qty. P/N Centrifugal Drive Motor Description
1 1 147854 REAR HOUSING DRIVE MOTOR
2 1 806160 FRONT HOUSING DRIVE MOTOR
3 1 146780 COVER DRIVE MOTOR HOUSING
4 1 140880 WINDOW PUMP MOTOR
5 1 806775 ROTOR SHAFT DRIVE MOTOR II
6 1 806774 HUB DRIVE MOTOR MAGNET II
7 1 806611 MOTOR INLAND RBE-01801-D16
9 10 147846 MAGNET PUMP MOTOR
10 1 147862 SWIVEL SHAFT DRIVE MOTOR
11 1 146801 SWIVEL WASHER DRIVE MOTOR
12 1 807222 FLEX CONNECTOR HEYCO 3237
13 2 807891 BALL BEARING 8MM ID X 22MM OD
14 0 807412 SPACER .315X.500X.010THK SS
14 0 807413 SPACER .315X.500X.006THK SS
14 0 807414 SPACER .315X.500X.002THK SS
14 0 807415 SPACER .315X.500X.004THK SS
14 0 807411 SPACER .315X.500X.030THK SS
14 0 807417 SPACER .315X.500X.012THK SS
14 0 807418 SPACER .315X.500X.016THK SS
14 0 807416 SPACER .315X.500X.008THK SS
15 2 132492 WAVE WASHER .320ID X .437OD
16 1 142682 5100-31 TRUARC SNAP RING
17 1 132572 O-RING 3.50IDX3.62ODX.06TK
18 2 132564 O-RING 2.38IDX2.50ODX.06TK
19 5 805093 6-32X1-1/4 SKT HD CAP SCREW SS
21 5 807895 4-40 X 1/2 ,SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW, STAINLESS

STEEL
Page 679
Item No. Qty. P/N Centrifugal Drive Motor Description
22 1 805860 4-40 X 1/4 PAN HD SS
23 2 805031 6-32 X 5/16 SET SCREW STAINLSS
24 1 143360 4-40 X 1/2 TRUSS HD SS
25 1 146763 RETAINER PMPMTR WINDOW
26 1 140871 LATCH PUMP MTR.WINDOW
27 1 132337 SPRING COMP.250DX.50LX.035W
29 1 805194 FELT PAD 3/8DIA X 3/32THK
30 1 143028 KNOB 3 LOBE BLK 1/4-20 THD
33 1 805397 DOWEL PIN .0625D X .750L SS
34 1 141903 SCREW, SET, 1/4-20 X 1 SOC KET HEAD, SS
35 1 806565 CABLE ASBY DRIVE MOTOR
40 2 807808 N5000 87 SNAP RING
41 1 150682 HOUSING PUMP MAGNET ASBY
42 1 805574 WASH .141IDX.625DX.060TK NYLON
43 1 805564 6-32X1-1/2 SKT HD CAP SCREW SS
44 1 805569 6-32X.63 BUT HD TORX ZINC PLT
45 1 148110 CORD SPOOL DRIVE MTR
46 1 148136 CLIP CORD SPOOL MOTOR
47 0.001 133284 SILASTIC SEALER CLEAR 684
48 0.001 135191 LOCTITE 222 10 ML
49 0.001 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
50 0.001 78-8072-6000-1 LOCTITE 271 50ML
51 0.001 805399 LOCTITE SUPERBOND 495
52 1 805866 FOAM TAPE 1/32 THK X 1 WD 4032
53 0.001 78-8072-2225-8 BLACKMAX (1) OZ BOTTLE
54 1 806826 WASHER .625 X .505 X.090 NYLON
100 1 806811 NAMEPLATE DRIVE MTR
Page 680
Sarns™ Manual Drive - P/N 164268 - 1 of 2
Page 681
Page 682
Sarns™ Manual Drive - P/N 164268 - 2 of 2
Page 683
Page 684
Parts - Sarns™ Manual Drive - P/N 164268 (R/E)

Item No. Qty. P/N Centrifugal Manual Drive Description
1 1 806146 PLATE CRANK SUPPORT
2 1 806147 PLATE CRANK BEARING
3 1 806144 HOUSING CRANK GEAR
4 1 806145 HUB CRANK MAGNET
5 1 806143 SHAFT CRANK HUB
6 1 806142 ARM CRANK SUPPORT
7 1 806152 FRNT HSG CRANKASBY MACHND
8 1 806141 CORE CRANK COIL
9 1 805959 PLATE LED MOUNTING
10 1 806150 SHAFT CRANK HANDLE MACHND
11 1 806153 HANDLE CRANK ASBY MACHIND
12 1 806137 COLLAR CRANK-SHAFT
13 1 806154 CLAMP MACHINED
14 1 806148 SHIELD CRANK SHAFT
15 1 806151 SHIELD CRANK GEAR
16 3 806149 STANDOFF CRANK SHIELD
17 3 806140 NUT CRANK-SHIELD
18 1 805277 GEAR 4.80X1.0 MATEX 75-5PAD
19 1 805278 GEAR 4.80X1.0 MATEX 75-5PLD
20 1 805276 GEAR SPACER MATEX 75-903
21 1 806888 PLUG .562DIA HEYCO2653 BLK
22 2 807104 FLNGE BRNG SDP7B-4MF121812
23 1 805962 CORE CRANK COIL WOUND
24 2 142682 5100-31 TRUARC SNAP RING
25 1 140880 WINDOW PUMP MOTOR
26 16 147846 MAGNET PUMP MOTOR
27 1 146763 RETAINER PMPMTR WINDOW
Page 685
28 1 140871 LATCH PUMP MTR.WINDOW
29 1 132337 SPRING COMP.250DX.50LX.035W
30 1 805397 DOWEL PIN .0625D X .750L SS
31 3 807098 WAVE WASHER .44IDX.617OD
32 2 142631 BALL BEAR.8MMIDX16MMOD5MM
33 0 807412 SPACER .315X.500X.010THK SS
33 0 807414 SPACER .315X.500X.002THK SS
33 0 807411 SPACER .315X.500X.030THK SS
33 0 807415 SPACER .315X.500X.004THK SS
33 0 807417 SPACER .315X.500X.012THK SS
33 0 807418 SPACER .315X.500X.016THK SS
33 0 807416 SPACER .315X.500X.008THK SS
33 0 807413 SPACER .315X.500X.006THK SS
34 2 805451 KNOB 3 LOBE BLACK 3/8-16THD
35 2 806155 RODTHREADED, 3/8-16 X 2.50
36 2 805288 HELI COIL 3/8-16 STAINLESS
37 2 805879 SCREW, PAN HEAD, 2-56 X 1/4, SS
38 1 805051 4-40 X 3/8 PAN HD SS
39 4 805017 4-40 X 5/8 PAN HD SS
40 2 805031 6-32 X 5/16 SET SCREW STAINLSS
42 4 805284 NUT, SOCKET, 8-32 STEEL
43 4 806156 ROD THREADED 8-32 X 2.62

STEEL
46 1 805633 SCREW, SET, 10-24 X 5/16, BLK OX
47 1 805486 SCREW, SET, 10-24 X 3/16
48 2 805054 SCREW, CAP, 10-24 X 3/4 SOCKET HEAD, SS
Page 686
51 1 806887 1/8 X 3/4 ROLL PIN
52 1 806184 KEY SQ MACHINED .156X.50
53 0.001 806773 LOCTITE TAKPAK 712 ACCELERATOR LOCTITE 20352
54 3 807192 POT TRIM 500OHM PC MNT25T
55 5 807238 LED RED HLMP-1800 .080 RND
56 1 805960 LABEL CRANK ROTATION
57 1 806812 LABEL MAN DRIVE UNIT ID
58 0.001 78-8072-2225-8 BLACKMAX (1) OZ BOTTLE
59 1 150682 HOUSING PUMP MAGNET ASBY
60 2 807335 POT TRIM 1K PC MNT 25T
61 0.001 78-8072-6000-1 LOCTITE 271 50ML
62 0.001 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
63 0.001 135191 LOCTITE 222 10 ML
64 0.001 133284 SILASTIC SEALER CLEAR 684
Page 687
Page 688
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations – Flowmeter System
Cable Assembly - P/N 801587
Page 689
Page 690
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations – Occluder Head
Occluder Head - P/N 806455 - 1 of 2
Page 691
Page 692
Occluder Head - P/N 806455 - 2 of 2
Page 693
Page 694
Parts - Occluder Head - P/N 806455 (R/G)

Item No. Qty. P/N Occluder Head Description
1 1 144178 HOUSING LOWER MACH OCCLUDER
2 1 805970 HOUSING UPPER OCCLUDER MACH
3 1 147141 END COVER LARGE PIN OCCLUDR
4 1 806176 PLUNGER OCCLUDER
5 1 133014 MOTOR STEP LINEAR 5V 1 AMP
6 1 134560 POT LIN 3.4K 2% 1 INCH
7 1 133217 PIN CLEVIS SELF-LOCK 3/16
8 2 154000 .125 DIA PIN DLX CT CLAMP
9 1 141410 CLASP MACHINED DELUXE HD
10 1 146042 FLIPPER MOLDED DELUXE HEAD
11 1 153998 TORSION SPRING TUBE CLAMP 1670
12 1 806180 MTG PLATE OCCLUDER MOTOR
13 1 806055 BRACKET ARM OCCLUDER
14 1 805050 SCREW, PAN HEAD, 8-32 X 3/8, SS
15 1 140927 PC ASBY OCCLUDER DRIVE
17 4 805557 NUT, 10-32, #79-NTM-02 ESNA
18 8 805438 WASHER, FLAT, #10 ZINC PLT
19 4 807079 GROMMET .18IDX.44D .31HOLE
20 4 805092 SCREW, PAN HEAD, 10-32 X 7/8, SLOTTED, SS
21 4 805676 SCREW, FLAT HEAD, 8-32 X 1-1/4 , SLOTTED DRIVE,

MACHINE,STAINLESS
22 1 805195 BEARING LIN .500IDX.875OD
23 0.05 132679 CAULKING EMI 4OZ TUBE
24 1 805036 SCREW, CAP, 8-32 X 1.25 SOCKET HD, SS
25 4 807117 SPACER 3/8D X #10 X 1/8THK
26 1 805618 6-32 X 3/8 SET SCREW BLK OX
Page 695
27 1 150324 BRACKET OCCLUDER ASSEMBLY
29 4 805859 SCREW, FLAT HEAD, 8-32 X 3/8, SS
34 1 806794 LABEL GENERIC W/WARNING
36 2 805555 SCREW, PAN HEAD, 2-56 X 1/2 , BLK OX
37 1 805104 10-32 KEPS NUT ZINC PLATE
38 2 26-1003-4052-5 NUT, KEPS, 4-40
39 1 805440 WASHER .190ID X .445OD X.06 SS
40 4 805119 NUT, HEX, 2-56, STEEL, ZINC PLATE
42 4 805039 SCREW, PAN HEAD, 8-32 X 1/4, STAINLESS ST
43 6 805085 WASHER, SPLIT, #2, SS
44 2 807187 RES POW 10 OHM 10W 1% WW
45 4 805177 SPACER .09 ID X.125 OD X .31
50 1 148005 CABLE ASBY D/MTA 12C OCCLUD
54 2 806917 CONN MTA HSG 100 3P 22GA L
56 1 807154 CONN HSG MTA 100 6P 22GA L
57 0.42 805363 #22 WIRE 300V RED
58 0.5 805365 #22 WIRE 300V YELLOW
59 0.42 805367 #22 WIRE 300V BLUE
60 0.42 805364 #22 WIRE 300V ORANGE
61 0.25 805361 #22 WIRE 300V BLACK
62 0.25 805368 #22 WIRE 300V VIOLET
64 1 807226 CLAMP CABLE SHIELD GROUND
65 1 805440 WASHER .190ID X .445OD X.06 SS
66 4 807861 TO-220 INSULAT MTG KIT
Page 696
67 0.001 806735 CHAIN AND OPEN GEAR LUBE
70 0.001 805400 LOCTITE SUPER BOND 430
72 0.002 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
200 0 147707 END COVER ASBY OCCLUDER
Page 697
Page 698
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations – Electronic Gas System
Schematic Electronic Gas System PC Board - P/N 801050 - 1 of 2
Page 699
Page 700
Schematic Electronic Gas System PC Board - P/N 801050 - 2 of 2
VMOT AN4
IO11
PRESSOXYIN
PRESSAIRIN
OXY-IN
Approx. 4V (0%) - 1V (100%)
IO10 FLOW-IN
Page 701
Page 702
Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188 - 1 of 5 - Exterior View
Page 703
Page 704
Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188 - 2 of 5 - Exploded View
Page 705
Page 706
Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188 - 3 of 5 - Blender, Inside Frame, and Board
Page 707
Page 708
Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188 - 4 of 5 - Exploded View of Inside Frame, and Board
Page 709
Page 710
Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188 - 5 of 5 - Cable Routing to Board
Page 711
Page 712
Parts - Electronic Gas System - P/N 801188 (R/AJ)

Item No. Qty. P/N Electronic Gas System Description
1 1 802070 MACHINED FRAME MOUNT EPGS
2 2 802398 ASSEMBLY STEPPER MOTOR WITH ENCODER, EPGS
3 1 801062 SHAFT, GENEVA GEAR, EPGS
4 1 801063 MACHINED, GENEVA GEAR, 7 TURN, EPGS
5 1 801788 RETAINING RING, E-RING, STAINLESS STEEL, .188 DIA SHAFT
6 1 801060 MACHINED, COUPLER HUB, GENEVA INTERFACE, 3/16 BORE,

EPGS
7 2 801061 MACHINED, COUPLER HUB, STANDARD 3/16 INCH BORE,

EPGS
8 6 807672 DOWEL PIN .125 DIA X .75 LG, SS
9 1 801065 MACHINED, SLIDE COUPLER, 1.45 LG, EPGS
10 1 801064 MACHINED, SLIDE COUPLER, SHORT, EPGS
11 1 803897 DOWEL PIN, .093 DIA X .375 LG, SS
12 1 802098 SECHRIST BLENDER WITH SLIDE KNOB, EPGS
13 1 132871 VALVE GAS PNL MT CHRM PLT
14 0 803504 BRASS PLUMBING FITTING, MALE ELBOW SWIVEL 90

DEGREES
15 0 803503 BRASS PLUMBING FITTING, MALE CONNECTOR
16 2 801079 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER, 1/8 MNPT
17 0 801081 FITTING, TEE, STREET, 1/8 NPT, M/F/F, BRASS
18 0 803505 BRASS PLUMBING FITTING, BULKHEAD UNION
19 0 805317 BULKHEAD 1/8F-FNPT CHRPLT
20 0 803754 BRASS PLUMBING FITTING, MALE ELBOW 90 DEGREES
21 0 801073 MACHINED HOUSING, O2 SENSOR, EPGS
22 1 801074 OXYGEN SENSOR CARTRIDGE
23 1 801075 BRACKET, O2 SENSOR RETAINER, EPGS
24 1 809267 BRACKET, FLOW SENSOR CABLE, EPGS
25 1 801086 HOUSING ELECTRONIC PATIENT GAS, EPGS
Page 713
29 1 809223 EPGS FLOW KIT
30 1 811104 FLOWMETER, ELECTRONIC, 0-10 SLPM, MASS FLOW
31 0 807333 ADPTR 1/8MNPT-3/8OD TUBESS
32 0 806853 MALE 1/8MNPT-3/8OD TUBE SS
33 1 132935 FILTER AIR INLET .1MICRON
34 0 805320 CONN AIR DISS MALE 1/8MNPT
35 0 805391 ADAPTOR 1/8NPT-1/4 HOSE
36 0 801084 NIPPLE O2 DISS 1/8MNPT 1-1/2" LONG
37 5 803892 TUBING POLYURETHANE .250"OD X .160"ID
38 1 805318 NUT O2 DISS FEM
40 1 804097 ASSEMBLY, EPGS MODULE
42 1 801492 CABLE ASSEMBLY, O2 SENSOR, EPGS
43 2 801491 CABLE ASSEMBLY, PRESSURE TRANSDUCER, EPGS
44 1 801490 CABLE ASSEMBLY, FLOW METER, EPGS
46 1 801581 FRONT COVER, LABEL PLATE, EPGS
47 1 802550 LED TRI-COLOR 1/4" PANEL MOUNT
50 1 801087 COVER ELECTRONIC PATIENT GAS, EPGS
51 1 803721 KNOB, COLLET, .187 ROUND SHAFT, GRAY WITH BLACK LINE
52 1 803722 CAP, COLLET KNOB, GRAY
53 1 811124 ISOLATION BLOCK, EPGS
63 2 801575 SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, 1/4-20 X 1/2 LG, HEX SOCKET, SS
66 8 802553 SCREW, 4-40 x .375, BUTTON HEAD, HEX SOCKET DRIVE, SS
67 2 805086 WASHER, SPLIT, #4 , SS
Page 714
70 1 801733 EMI SHIELDING, DIE-CUT, EPGS
73 0 802097 FITTING, ELBOW, POSITIONABLE MALE STRAIGHT THREAD

7/16-20 X 1/4 OD TUBE, SS
75 1 807096 SPRING WASHER .448OD X .198ID
76 0.3 809266 TEFLON SEALANT TAPE, 1/4 WIDE
77 0 804104 EXTENSION, 11/16 LG, 1/8 NPT FEMALE X 1/8 NPT MALE
78 1 803902 WASHER, FLAT 9/16, 1.47 OD X .63 ID X .11 THK, STEEL, ZINC
PLATE
79 1 806917 CONN MTA HSG 100 3P 22GA L
85 0.01 26-1008-1633-4 LOCTITE 242 50ML
100 1 802345 LABEL NAMEPLATE GAS BLENDER
101 1 802551 CABLE ASSEMBLY, EPGS TO NIC
Page 715
Page 716
Cable Assembly Electronic Gas System to NIC - P/N 802551
Page 717
Page 718
Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations–Accessories
Lamp Assembly Short - P/N 801558
Page 719
Page 720
Parts - Lamp Assembly Short - P/N 801558 (R/P)

Item No. Qty. P/N Lamp Assembly Short Description
1 1 802441 MACHINED, LAMP HOUSING,
2 1 150607 LAMP 15 INCH FLEXIBLE ARM
4 1 801569 CABLE ASSEMBLY, LAMP
5 1 132476 ROCKER SWITCH SPST PNL MTG
6 1 802443 COVER, LAMP HOUSING
7 1 801551 CABLE CLAMP, STEEL, .187 DIA MAX
8 2 805259 TERM FASTAB 22-18GA RCP.25
9 1 801552 WIRE JOINT, 16 - 24GA, PANDUIT # JN224-318-X
16 0.01 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
18 1 801237 MACHINED, CLAMP PAD, LAMP BRACKET, APS
23 1 802354 LABEL UNIT LAMP SHORT NECK
Page 721
Page 722
Lamp Assembly Long - P/N 801238
Page 723
Page 724
Parts - Lamp Assembly Long - P/N 801238 (R/P)
Item No. Qty. P/N Lamp Assembly Long Description
1 1 802441 MACHINED, LAMP HOUSING
2 1 149948 LAMP 33IN FLEXIBLE ARM HALOGEN
4 1 801569 CABLE ASSEMBLY, LAMP
5 1 132476 ROCKER SWITCH SPST PNL MTG
6 1 802443 COVER, LAMP HOUSING
7 1 801551 CABLE CLAMP, STEEL, .187 DIA MAX
8 2 805259 TERM FASTAB 22-18GA RCP.25
9 1 801552 WIRE JOINT, 16 - 24GA, PANDUIT # JN224-318-X
16 0.01 807083 LOCTITE RC 609 50ML 60931
18 1 801237 MACHINED, CLAMP PAD, LAMP BRACKET
23 1 802353 LABEL UNIT LAMP LONG NECK
Page 725
Page 726
Index
Index
24-hour log, download, 121 Theory of Operation, 382
About the Field Service Handbook, 7 CDI™ 100 Repair Procedures, 385
Accessories Kit, 479 CDI™ 500
Air Bubble Detect Module Calibration Procedures, 394
Alarm Messages, 300 circuit protection, 390
Alert Messages, 300 connection to system, 390
Calibration Procedures, 302 controls and displays, 390
controls and displays, 298 data capture, 394
Diagnostic Theory, 303 Diagnostic Theory, 395
Electrical Description, 297 Electrical Description, 390
electronic functions, 300 electrical interconnections, 391
fault tolerance, 294 fault tolerance, 388
Functional Description, 295 Functional Description, 388
hardware interface, 299 Interface, 390
Interface, 297 Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 395
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 302 More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 395
operating parameters, 293 operating parameters, 387
Overview, 293 Overview, 387
Physical Description, 296 Physical Description, 389
power consumption, 297 power supply, 390
safety, 301 safety aspects, 388
software, 300 Status Messages, 392
Theory of Operation, 300 Theory of Operation, 392
Air Bubble Detect Module Repair Procedures, 303 CDI™ 500 Repair Procedures, 396
Battery Central Control Monitor
backup, 31 Alarm Messages, 103
charger, 55 Alert Messages, 105
gas gauge, 56 Calibrating the CCM screen, 114
status indicator, 32 controls and displays, 92
Casters, 482 Diagnostic Theory, 128
CDI™ 100 Error Messages, 109
Calibration Procedures, 384 Functional Description, 90
circuit protection, 380 Interface, 91
connection to system, 380 Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 126
controls and displays, 380 More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 126
Diagnostic Theory, 385 operating parameters, 90
Electrical Description, 380 Overview, 89
electrical interconnections, 381 Perfusion screen tabs, 97
fault tolerance, 378 Physical Description, 91
Functional Description, 379 Service Data and System Configuration
Interface, 380 Cards/Serial Ports, 117
Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 384 Status Messages, 111
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 384 Theory of Operation, 114
operating parameters, 377 Central Control Monitor Repair Procedures
Overview, 377 Adjusting the CCM Power Supply Potentiometer,
Physical Description, 379 130
power supply, 380 Replacing the back lights, 137
safety aspects, 378 Replacing the CCM, 132
Status Messages, 382 Replacing the cooling air filter, 134
Page 727
Index
Replacing the cooling fan assembly, 134 Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 61
Replacing the power cord assembly, 141 Module, Pump, or Gas Mixer Connector, 53
Centrifugal Pump System More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 62
Alarm Messages, 267 New Battery button, 59
Alert Messages, 267 NIC Connectors, 52
Calibration Procedures, 277 Nominal Power Consumption, 25
continuous mode, 273 ON/OFF switch, 56
controls and displays, 260 Operating Parameters, 25
Diagnostic Theory, 278 Overview, 23
Electrical Description, 259 P10--Power Supply Power Connector, 45
Error Messages, 269 P11--Generic Module Connector, 46
fault tolerance, 257 P12--Test Connector, 47
Functional Description, 258 P13--Central Control and Display Power Daughter
hardware interface, 265 Board Output Connector, 48
Interface, 260 P14--U9 Programming Connector, 49
Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 277 P15--Central Control and Display Power Daughter
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 277 Board Connector, 50
operating modes, 254, 273 P16--Power Supply Cable Connector, 44
operating parameters, 253 P17--Power Supply Power Connector, 45
Overview, 253 P18--Battery Connector, 51
Physical Description, 258 P19--U23 Programming Connector, 51
pulse mode, 273 P20--Fan Connector, 52
safety aspects, 255 P21--Fan Connector, 52
servo mode, 274 P2--NIC Signal Cable Connector, 40
Status Messages, 272 P3--NIC Signal Cable Connector, 40
Theory of Operation, 273 P4--Alarm and LED Indicator Connector, 41
Centrifugal Pump System Repair Procedures P5--NIC Signal Cable Connector, 40
Replacing the centrifugal control unit module, 282 P6--Switch/Breaker Pole Connector, 41
Replacing the centrifugal pump display assembly P7--Battery Charging Indicator or Supplementary
or the individual boards, 279 Fan Connector, 42
Replacing the drive motor, 279 P8--Generic Module Flexible Cable Connector, 43
Chassis/Base Unit P9--Power Supply Cable Connector, 44
Alarm Messages, 34 Power Manager Power Connector, 53
application specific connections, 38 Power Manager QBUS and Fault Connector, 53
Battery Management, 59 power switching, 58
CCM Connector, 54 Status Messages, 34
circuit breakers, 30, 57 Theory of Operation, 35
connections to modules, 38 Chassis/Base Unit Repair Procedures
current sharing, 56 Installing new batteries, 64
Diagnostic Theory, 63 Repairing the electronic gas system, 64
Electrical Description, 30 Replacing the Base cooling system air filter, 64
electrical interconnections, 33 Replacing the Base fans, 68
Functional Description, 26 Replacing the NIC board, 75
fuses, 57 Replacing the power bucket assembly, 66
generic board, 36 Replacing the power manager module, 72
generic to application specific interconnection, 37 Replacing the power supplies, 78
ground equalization stud, 30 Circuit breakers, switches, and fuses, 57
Interface, 31 Components, 5
Internal CAN Access Connector, 53 Contact Information, 8
J1--NIC Power Cable Connector, 39 Current sharing, 56
J2--NIC Power Cable Connector, 39 Data Transfer System
J3--NIC Power Cable Connector, 39 Calibration Procedures, 474
Lamp Connector, 54 circuit protection, 472
Page 728
Index
connection to system, 471 Replacing the flowmeter, 436
controls and displays, 472 Replacing the module board set, 442
Diagnostic Theory, 475 Replacing the O2 sensor, 438
Electrical Description, 472 Replacing the pressure transducer(s), 444
electrical interconnections, 472 Replacing the stepper motor behind the FiO2 knob,
fault tolerance, 470 433
Functional Description, 470 Replacing the stepper motor behind the flow valve,
Interface, 472 428
Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 475 Replacing the stepper motor with encoder, 428
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 475 Email logs, 124
operating parameters, 469 Event counter/event log , download, 124
Overview, 469 Flowmeter System
Physical Description, 471 Alarm Messages, 330
power supply, 472 Calibration Procedures, 331
safety aspects, 469 controls and displays, 327
Theory of Operation, 473 Diagnostic Theory, 332
Data Transfer System Repair Procedures, 476 Electrical Description, 327
Download 24-hour log, 121 electrical interconnections, 329
Download event counter/event log, 124 Error Messages, 330
Download Saved System Log, 122 fault tolerance, 325
Download Syscfg file, 123 Functional Description, 325
Electronic Gas System Interface, 327
Alarm Messages, 407 Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 331
Alert Messages, 408 More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 332
Calibration Procedures, 415 operating parameters, 323
connection description, 404 Overview, 323
controls and displays, 405 Physical Description, 326
data ranges, 413 safety aspects, 324
diagnostic task, 412 Status Messages, 330
Diagnostic Theory, 416 Theory of Operation, 331
Electrical Description, 404 Flowmeter System Repair Procedures, 332
electrical interconnections, 406 Fully loaded system, 24
Error Messages, 408 Fuses, 31
fault tolerance, 401 Gas Gauge, 56
Functional Description, 402 Glossary, 485
gas connections, 402 Ground equalization stud, 30
Interface, 405 Illustration
Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 415 Base Platform 110/120 VAC, 541
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 416 Base Platform 220/240 VAC, 521
operating parameters, 399 Cable Assembly Battery 24 VDC, 569
Overview, 399 Cable Assembly Battery On Switch, 571
Physical Description, 403 Cable Assembly CAN NIC Left, 565
safety, 415 Cable Assembly CAN NIC Right, 567
Status Messages, 409 Cable Assembly CDI™ 100/CDI™ 500, 583
Theory of Operation, 410 Cable Assembly Electronic Gas System to NIC,
Electronic Gas System Repair Procedures 717
Removing and replacing the electronic gas system, Cable Assembly Power NIC Left, 561
417 Cable Assembly Power NIC Right, 563
Removing the electronic gas system permanently, Cable Assembly Power PS1, 573
418 Cable Assembly Power PS2, 575
Replacing the air inlet filter component, 441 Cable Assembly PS2 Fault 12 in, 577
Replacing the blender, 421 Cable Assembly PS2 Fault 18 in, 579
Replacing the flow valve, 425 Cable Assembly RS-232/RS-485, 585
Page 729
Index
Cable Fan Assembly 24 VDC, 581 connector description, 363
Central Control Monitor, 589 controls and displays, 364
Chassis Wiring Kit, 587 Diagnostic Theory, 372
Chassis/Base Unit, 493 Electrical Description, 364
Display Mounting Arm Assembly, 593 electrical interconnections, 366
Electronic Gas System, 703 electronic functions, 367
Flowmeter Cable Assembly, 689 electronic/hardware interface, 368
Lamp Assembly Long, 723 Error Messages, 367
Lamp Assembly Short, 719 fault tolerance, 361
Large Roller Pump, 597 Functional Description, 362
Large Roller Pump Guts, 615 Interface, 364
NIC Board, 505 Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 371
NIC Printed Circuit Board, 509 More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 371
Occluder Head, 691 occluder positions, 369
Power Manager, 501 operating parameters, 359
Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly, 651 operation of calibrated occluder, 369
Roller Pump Cable Assembly Kit, 655 operation of uncalibrated occluder, 370
Roller Pump Display, 647 Overview, 359
Sarns™ Drive Motor, 675 Physical Description, 363
Sarns™ Manual Drive, 681 safety aspects, 360
Small Roller Pump, 621 Status Messages, 367
Small Roller Pump Guts, 641 system power, 364
Terumo® Centrifugal Control Display, 671 Theory of Operation, 367
Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit, 665 Occluder System Repair Procedures, 372
Lamp, 484 Parts
Level Detect Module Base Platform 110/120 VAC, 555
Alarm Messages, 314 Base Platform 220/240 VAC, 535
Alert Messages, 314 Central Control Monitor, 591
Calibration Procedures, 318 Chassis/Base Unit, 495
connector description, 311 Display Mounting Arm Assembly, 595
controls and dislays, 311 Electronic Gas System, 713
Diagnostic Theory, 319 Lamp Assembly Long, 725
Electrical Description, 311 Lamp Assembly Short, 721
Error Messages, 315 Large Roller Pump, 611
fault tolerance, 308 Large Roller Pump Guts, 619
Functional Description, 309 NIC Board, 507
Interface, 311 Occluder Head, 695
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 318 Power Manager, 503
operating parameters, 307 Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly, 653
Overview, 307 Roller Pump Display, 649
Physical Description, 310 Sarns™ Drive Motor, 679
safety aspects, 308 Sarns™ Manual Drive, 685
Status Messages, 315 Small Roller Pump, 635
Theory of Operation, 315 Small Roller Pump Guts, 645
voltage regulation, 316 Terumo® Centrifugal Control Unit, 669
Level Detect Module Repair Procedures, 319 Terumo® Centrifugal Pump Display, 673
Managing Passwords, 18 Poles, Cross Bar, and Brackets, 481
Case Passwords, 20 Power switching, 58
Login Passwords, 18 Pressure Sensor System
Occluder System Alarm Messages, 343
Alert Messages, 366 Alert Messages, 343
Calibration Procedures, 371 Calibration Procedures, 345
Page 730
Index
controls and displays, 341 Replacing the casting/bearing assembly, 241
Diagnostic Theory, 346 Replacing the molded tab/pump mounting, 196
Electrical Description, 340 Replacing the occlusion adjustment knob bearing,
Error Messages, 344 226
fault tolerance, 337 Replacing the optical sensor, 242
Functional Description, 338 Replacing the pulley and/or encoder on the guts of
Interface, 341 the large and small roller pumps, 204
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 345 Replacing the pump air filter, 195
operating parameters, 335 Replacing the pump drive belt, 213
Overview, 335 Replacing the pump drive motor/encoder, 217
Physical Description, 340 Replacing the pump fans, 197
power supply, 340 Replacing the pump module, 210
Status Messages, 344 Replacing the roller pump display assembly or the
Theory of Operation, 344 individual boards on both pumps, 199
Pressure Sensor System Repair Procedures, 346 Replacing the roller slide assembly, 233
Recommended Spare Parts Inventory, 12 Replacing the screw adjustment bearings, 229
Roller Pump Hand Crank, 483 Sarns™ Manual Drive, 484
Roller Pump Hand Crank Bracket, 483 Saved System Log Download, 122
Roller Pump System Schematics
Alarm Messages, 176 Electronic Gas System PC Board, 699
Alert Messages, 176 Power Manager Block Diagram, 497
Calibration Procedures, 190 Roller Pump Display, 639
Checking casting runout, 192 System 1 Wiring Diagram, 513
continuous mode, 160 Service data card, 121
controls and displays, 170 Specialized Tools, 10
Diagnostic Theory, 195 Supplementary Tools, 11
Electrical Description, 169 SysCfg File Download, 123
Error Messages, 179 System 1
fault tolerance, 161 Overview, 1
Functional Description, 163 Revision History, 2
Interface, 169 Service Policy, 9
Links to Schematics, Parts, and Illustrations, 194 System configuration card, 118
LPM dislay, 159 System Messages
master/follower, 187 Air Bubble Detect Module, 300
master/follower mode, 160 CDI™ 100, 382
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 194 CDI™ 500, 392
operating modes, 160, 165 Central Control Unit, 103
operating parameters, 158 Centrifugal Pump, 266
Overview, 158 Chassis/Base Unit, 34
Physical Description, 167 Electronic Gas System, 407
pulsatile mode, 160 Flowmeter System, 330
pulse mode, 186 Level Detect Module, 314
pump flow calculation, large pump, 185 Occluder System, 366
pump flow calculation, small pump, 186 Pressure Sensor System, 343
Roller-to-roller adjustment, 190 Roller Pump, 175
safety aspects, 161 Temperature System, 353
servo, 187 Table of Calibrate/Install/Replace/Repair Procedures,
Status Messages, 182 xi
system function, 166 Table of Contents, i
Theory of Operation, 183 Temperature System
volume tracking, 187 Alarm Messages, 353
Roller Pump System Repair Procedures Calibration Procedures, 355
Removing and installing the roller pump guts, 223 connector description, 352
Page 731
Index
controls and displays, 352 Troubleshooting Table, 83
Diagnostic Theory, 356 Troubleshooting--Data Transfer System
Electrical Description, 352 Troubleshooting Table, 476
Error Messages, 354 Troubleshooting--Electronic Gas System
Functional Description, 351 Blender Test, 453
Interface, 352 Calibration Problems, 452
More Info Screen and Software Upgrades, 355 Diagnostics for Troubleshooting, 447
operating parameters, 349 EPGS Flow Troubleshooting, 455
Overview, 349 Error Code Table to Interpret Gas Log, 447
Physical Description, 351 Flow Valve, 453
power supply, 352 Inaccurate FiO2 Reading, 453
safety aspects, 350 Inaccurate Flow Reading, 453
Theory of Operation, 354 O2 Sensor Test, 452
Temperature System Repair Procedures, 356 Pressure Transducers, 454
Terms and Abbreviations, 485 Troubleshooting Table, 457
Tools Troubleshooting--Flowmeter System
Specialized Tools and Parts, 10 Troubleshooting Table, 333
Supplementary Tools and Equipment, 11 Troubleshooting--Level Detect Module
Tool Vendor Contact Information, 12 Troubleshooting Table, 320
Troubleshooting--Air Bubble Detect Module Troubleshooting--Occluder System
Troubleshooting Table, 304 Troubleshooting Table, 373
Troubleshooting--CDI™ 101/CDI™ 100 Troubleshooting--Pressure Sensor System
Troubleshooting--CDI™ 500 Troubleshooting--Roller Pump System
Troubleshooting--Central Control Monitor Troubleshooting--Temperature System
Communication Problems (Displays ? Troubleshooting Table, 357
Intermittently), 148 Tube Size
Event and Response Matrix, 144 Air bubble detect module, 293
Troubleshooting Table, 151 Occluder, 359
Video Problems, 146 Roller pump, 158
Troubleshooting--Centrifugal Pump System Roller pump, adult, 163
Troubleshooting Table, 285 Roller pump, adult cardioplegia, 163
Troubleshooting--Chassis/Base Unit Roller pump, pediatric, 163
System 1 Power Troubleshooting Guide, 81 Roller pump, suction/vent, 164
Troubleshooting Power Chart, 82
Page 732
Manufactured by
TERUMO CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEMS
CORPORATION
6200 Jackson Road, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48103-9300
734-663-4145 800-521-2818
EC Rep.
TERUMO EUROPE N.V.
Interleuvenlaan 40, 3001 Leuven, Belgium
TERUMO CORPORATION
44-1, 2-Chome, Hatagaya, Shibuya-ku,
Tokyo 151-0072, Japan
Printed in U.S.A.
© TERUMO CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEMS CORPORATION 2006 814437 R/A
January, 2006
Page 733

TERUMO CEC System 1 Field Service Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TERUMO CEC System 1 Field Service Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Perfusion System 1

Field Service Handbook

Table of Calibrate/Install/Replace/Repair Procedures

Roller Pump Procedures

Electronic Gas System Procedures

System 1 Revision History

1/30/04 5 811053 Software enhancement: revision to P/N 801763 (100/120 V)

6/24/03 3 809899 Verify direction of airflow within P/N 801763 (100/120 V)

7 Telescoping Pole with solution rack 16431701 19 Flowmeter Module 802018

About the System 1 Field Service Handbook

This handbook provides technical information about the Terumo® Advanced

Specialized Tools and Parts

Supplementary Tools and Equipment

Tool Vendor Contact Information

Recommended Spare Parts Inventory

220/240 Base Circuit Breakers

134480 ABD Latch (Sensor)

149892 ABD Sensor Cable

802110 Air Bubble Detect Module

802094 Base Air Intake (Fan) Filter

801781 Bowed External Snap Ring

806748 Cable Assembly Pressure Reusable

806747 Cable Assembly Pressure Transducer

804802 CCM Backlight Kit

804517 CCM Cooling Air Filter

808059 CCM Fan

801521 CCM LAN Board

804516 CCM to Base Cable Assembly (power cord assembly)

803729 Centrifugal Pump Module Assembly

802276 EMC Shield, Pump Graphics

803761 Encoder, Optical, High Resolution

132257 EPGS 0.1 Micron Air Filter Replacement

132935 EPGS Filter Air Inlet Assembly

801784 External Snap Ring

804511 Fuse Littelfuse 257015 Bussman ATC-15 Fact-acting, FH4-FH11

804512 Fuse Littelfuse 297010 Bussman ATM-10 Fast-acting, FH1-FH3

809909 Gib Roller Slide

801798 Large Roller Pump Guts

804509 Large Roller Pump Roller Slide Assembly

810325 Large Roller Pump Tube Clamp Assembly

802111 Level Module

195274 Level Sensor Alarm

195215 Level Sensor Alert

801742 NIC Board

147141 Occluder Cap Assembly

133217 Occluder Pivot Pin

802095 Power Manager

813119 Power Supply

802112 Pressure Module

16433301 Pressure Transducer

809051 Pump Motor/Encoder Assembly

802280 Roller Pump Air Intake (Fan) Filter, 4 in and 6 in

802203 Roller Pump Drive Belt, 4 in and 6 in

802199 Roller Pump Motor

801805 Small Roller Pump Guts

804510 Small Roller Pump Roller Slide Assembly

810739 Small Roller Pump Tube Clamp Assembly

802114 Temperature Module

System Part Numbers by Module

Managing Login Passwords

2. On the Service and Diagnostics screen, press Password Admin. The

3. On the Password Administration screen, to change either the General

Managing Case Passwords

Chassis/Base Unit 100/120 V and 220/240 V